The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutDDW-2024-009115SADDLEBACK PARTNERS, L.C. HOLE-IN-THE-ROCK #2 WELL HOUSE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS June 2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 INSIDE COVER 178.24.200 PAGE 00 01 01 - 1 SADDLEBACK PARTNERS, L.C. HOLE-IN-THE-ROCK #2 WELL HOUSE JUNE-2024 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Jacob Nielsen, M.S., P.E. Project Manager HANSEN, ALLEN, & LUCE, INC. Consultants/Engineers 859 West South Jordan Parkway – Ste 200 South Jordan, Utah 84095 (801) 566-5599 6/18/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 TABLE OF CONTENTS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE(S) 00 01 01 Inside Cover.........................................................................................00 01 01 - 1 to 1 00 01 10 Table of Contents ................................................................................00 01 10 - 1 to 4 PART 1 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00 11 13 Advertisement For Bids .......................................................................00 11 13 - 1 to 2 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders.........................................................................00 21 13 - 1 to 8 00 30 00 Bid Form..............................................................................................00 30 00 - 1 to 6 00 43 00 Bid Bond..............................................................................................00 43 00 - 1 to 4 PART 2 - CONTRACT FORMS 00 51 00 Notice of Award ...................................................................................00 51 00 - 1 to 2 00 52 00 Agreement...........................................................................................00 52 00 - 1 to 8 00 53 00 Change Order Form.............................................................................00 63 63 - 1 to 2 00 55 00 Notice to Proceed................................................................................00 55 00 - 1 to 2 00 61 00 Performance Bond...............................................................................00 61 13 - 1 to 4 00 61 50 Payment Bond.....................................................................................00 62 14 - 1 to 4 00 62 50 Certificate of Substantial Completion...................................................00 62 50 - 1 to 2 PART 3 - CONTRACT CONDITIONS 00 72 00 General Conditions............................................................................00 72 00 - 1 to 70 00 80 00 Supplementary Conditions.................................................................00 80 00 - 1 to 14 PART 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work..............................................................................01 11 00 - 1 to 2 01 14 00 Work Restrictions...............................................................................01 14 00 - 1 to 2 01 22 00 Measurement and Payment...............................................................01 22 00 - 1 to 10 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements.............................................................01 30 00 - 1 to 4 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ........................................................................01 33 00 - 1 to 4 01 42 13 Abbreviations.....................................................................................01 42 13 - 1 to 2 01 42 19 Reference Standards.........................................................................01 42 19 - 1 to 2 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing ...............................................01 45 00 - 1 to 6 01 45 23 Testing Agency Services ..................................................................01 45 23 - 1 to 4 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls..........01 50 00 - 1 to 6 01 50 30 Protection of Existing Facilities..........................................................01 50 30 - 1 to 6 01 56 00 Dust Control ......................................................................................01 56 00 - 1 to 2 01 60 00 Product Requirements.......................................................................01 60 00 - 1 to 2 01 71 13 Mobilization........................................................................................01 71 13 - 1 to 2 01 78 50 Project Closeout ................................................................................01 78 50 - 1 to 10 01 92 00 Operation and Maintenance Manuals................................................01 92 00 - 1 to 2 06/2024 TABLE OF CONTENTS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 01 10 - 2 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS - NOT USED DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories...................................................03 20 00 - 1 to 4 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement....................................................................03 20 00 - 1 to 4 03 25 00 Expansion Joints, Construction Joints, and Waterstops....................03 25 00 - 1 to 6 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete .....................................................................03 30 00 - 1 to 16 03 31 05 Controlled Low-Strength Material......................................................03 31 05 - 1 to 6 03 60 00 Grout..................................................................................................03 60 00 - 1 to 12 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry......................................................................04 22 00 - 1 to 12 DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports (Pipe Supports) .......................................05 45 00 - 1 to 8 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Specialties....................................................................05 50 00 - 1 to 6 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES - NOT USED DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 00 Moisture Protection..............................................................................07 11 00 - 1 to 4 07 21 00 Insulation .............................................................................................07 21 00 - 1 to 6 07 32 00 Metal Roofing System..........................................................................07 32 00 - 1 to 8 07 92 00 Joint Sealants......................................................................................07 92 00 - 1 to 6 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 10 00 Doors and Frames...............................................................................08 10 00 - 1 to 8 08 62 00 Skylights ..............................................................................................08 62 00 - 1 to 6 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes ........................................................................09 90 00 - 1 to 28 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties...................................................................10 44 00 - 1 to 4 DIVISIONS 11 THROUGH 21 - NOT USED DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 10 10 Plumbing Piping and Specialties .......................................................22 10 10 - 1 to 8 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 General HVAC Requirements ...........................................................23 05 00 - 1 to 13 06/2024 TABLE OF CONTENTS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 01 10 - 3 23 05 20 HVAC Identification ...........................................................................23 05 20 - 1 to 2 23 05 30 HVAC Operation and Maintenance Manuals.....................................23 05 30 - 1 to 3 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ......................................................23 05 93 - 1 to 6 23 06 03 Supporting Devices for HVAC ...........................................................23 06 03 - 1 to 6 23 06 05 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control............................23 06 05 - 1 to 4 23 06 07 Motors, Drives & Electrical Requirements.........................................23 06 07 - 1 to 3 23 09 00 HVAC Control Systems .....................................................................23 09 00 - 1 to 7 23 31 00 Ductwork............................................................................................23 31 00 - 1 to 7 32 31 05 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Ducts..................................................23 31 05 - 1 to 9 23 31 10 Ductwork Accessories .......................................................................23 31 10 - 1 to 3 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets .........................................................................23 37 00 - 1 to 3 23 61 00 Packaged HVAC Equipment..............................................................23 61 00 - 1 to 6 23 76 00 Terminal Electric Heat Transfer Units................................................23 76 00 - 1 to 2 23 82 00 Power Ventilators...............................................................................23 82 00 - 1 to 4 23 90 00 Air Filters............................................................................................23 90 00 - 1 to 3 DIVISIONS 24 THROUGH 25 - NOT USED DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 29 23 Pulse Width Modulated Variable Frequency Drive............................26 29 23 - 1 to 10 26 35 53 Surge Protection Devices..................................................................26 35 53 - 1 to 9 DIVISIONS 27 THROUGH 30 - NOT USED DIVISION 31 - EARTH WORK 31 05 19 Geosynthetics....................................................................................31 05 19 - 1 to 6 31 11 00 Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping ......................................................31 11 00 - 1 to 2 31 22 00 Site Grading.......................................................................................31 22 00 - 1 to 4 31 22 16 Fine Grading......................................................................................31 22 16 - 1 to 2 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines......................................31 23 15 - 1 to 10 31 23 17 Rock Excavation................................................................................31 23 17 - 1 to 4 31 23 19 Dewatering.........................................................................................31 23 19 - 1 to 2 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures...............................................31 23 23 - 1 to 6 31 37 00 Rip Rap..............................................................................................31 37 00 - 1 to 4 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 11 23 Road Base - Untreated Base Course..................................................32 11 23 - 1 to 4 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 05 03 Copper Pipe.......................................................................................33 05 03 - 1 to 4 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe ................................................................................33 05 05 - 1 to 12 33 05 07 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (AWWA C900)...................33 05 07 - 1 to 6 33 05 07.1Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (ASTM D 1785, Modified)33 05 07.1 - 1 to 6 33 05 26 Utility Identification.............................................................................33 05 26 - 1 to 4 33 08 30 Gravity Pipeline Testing.....................................................................33 08 30 - 1 to 8 33 11 34 Deep Well Pump and Motor (Oil Lubricated).....................................33 11 34 - 1 to 12 06/2024 TABLE OF CONTENTS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 01 10 - 4 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances ...............................................................33 12 00 - 1 to 6 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.......................................................33 13 00 - 1 to 4 33 14 13 Drainage System...............................................................................33 14 13 - 1 to 4 DIVISIONS 34 THROUGH 39 - NOT USED DIVISIONS 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 13.13 Steel Process Piping..................................................................40 05 13.13 - 1 to 4 40 05 13.19 Stainless Steel Process Piping...................................................40 05 13.19 - 1 to 4 40 15 10 Process Control Strategies................................................................40 15 10 - 1 to 12 40 24 10 Level Detector....................................................................................40 24 10 - 1 to 2 40 91 23 Miscellaneous Properties Measurement Devices..............................40 91 23 - 1 to 6 40 92 57 Electrical Motor Actuators................................................................40 92 57 - 1 to 10 DIVISIONS 41 THROUGH 45 - NOT USED DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 31 11 Gas Chlorination Equipment................................................................46 31 11 - 1 to 8 DIVISIONS 47 THROUGH 50 - NOT USED PART 5 – APPENDIX Appendix A - Easement Documentation PART 6 – DRAWINGS PART 1 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID 178.24.200 PAGE 00 11 13 - 1 SECTION 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS NOTICE Notice is hereby given that SADDLEBACK PARTNERS, L.C. (OWNER), will accept bids for the construction of the HOLE-IN-THE-ROCK #2 WELL HOUSE Project (Project) according to Contract Drawings and Specifications prepared by HANSEN, ALLEN & LUCE, INC. (ENGINEER), and described in general as: Construction of a new drinking water well pump station, consisting of a masonry block structure with standing seam metal roofing; furnishing and installing a 250 HP motor with one vertical line shaft pump, piping, valves, fittings, flow meter and appurtenances, gas chlorination facilities, HVAC, electrical, controls, connecting to existing standby emergency generator, wiring, telemetry, owner-provided RTU, conduits for future electric and controls wiring, grading, site work, exterior DI piping including a 6” drain, 8” pump to waste, 10” discharge, and 12” waterline connection to existing 16” tank outlet, and all other associated items and appurtenant work. BIDS DUE Separate sealed bids will be received by ENGINEER via email at jacobn@halengineers.com until 4:00 p.m. on Tuesday, July 09, 2024. ENGINEER will tabulate all bids and share the results with OWNER. Afterwards, a recommendation of award will be provided to OWNER. All bidders will be notified of the selected bid. This is a private bid process completed by a private company with bidders by invitation only. BIDDERS The following bidders are invited to bid on this project: a. Whitaker Construction b. Corrio Construction c. VanCon Construction d. Nelson Brothers Construction e. BHI Civil Construction f. Condie Construction g. Gerber Construction h. FX Construction BID DOCUMENTS Bid documents will be emailed to the invited bidders on Tuesday, June 18, 2024. No paper copies of the Contract Documents will be available. Bid security in the amount of 5% of the base bid will be required to accompany bids. PRE-BID CONFERENCE Prospective BIDDERS are encouraged to attend a mandatory Pre-Bid conference which will be held at the project site at 10:00 a.m. on Wednesday, June 26, 2024. The meeting location for the Pre-bid conference is on the public road in front of a private church located at 1366 Canyon Rd, Lake Point, UT 84074. After meeting, the OWNER will escort bidders to the project site through locked gates. High clearance vehicles are recommended. The object of the conference is to acquaint BIDDERs with the site conditions, specifications, and to answer any questions which 06/2024 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID 178.24.200 PAGE 00 11 13 - 2 BIDDERs may have regarding the project. The pre-bid conference will last for approximately two hours, including time to travel to-from the meeting location to the site. QUESTIONS All questions relative to the project shall be emailed to the ENGINEER project manager, Jacob Nielsen, P.E. at jacobn@halengineers.com. Questions are due by 4:00 p.m. Wednesday, July 2, 2024. OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids; or to accept or reject the whole or any part of any bid; or to waive any informality or technicality in any bid in the best interest of OWNER. Only bids giving a firm quotation properly signed will be accepted. - END OF DOCUMENT - 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 1 SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below: A.Issuing Office – The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued. ARTICLE 2 – COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office in the number and format stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid. 2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.03 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license for any other use. ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, Bidder shall submit with its Bid (a) written evidence establishing its qualifications such as previous experience and present commitments, and (b) the following additional information: A. Evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located. B. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable. C. Evidence of successful completion of three (3) CMU well house or pump station projects with a minimum capacity of 500 gpm within the last five years. 3.02 A Bidder’s failure to submit required qualification information within the times indicated may disqualify Bidder from receiving an award of the Contract. 3.03 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications. 3.04 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s representations and certifications. ARTICLE 4 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 4.01 Site and Other Areas A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor. 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 2 4.02 Existing Site Conditions A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions 1. The Supplementary Conditions identify: a.those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site. b.those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities). c.reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. d.Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. 2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings. 3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply. B. Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site are set forth in the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others. C. Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions. 4.03 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders A. There will be a scheduled site visit or pre-Bid conference as outlined in the Advertisement For Bids. B. Bidder shall conduct any other Site visit during normal working hours, after obtaining permission from OWNER to access the Site, and shall not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site. 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 3 C. Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site conditions. D. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting, the Owner will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for preparing and submitting a successful Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints on Owner’s authority regarding the Site. E. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety programs. F. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. 4.04 Owner’s Safety Program A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. As the General Conditions indicate, if an Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions. 4.05 Other Work at the Site A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any. ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 5.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to: A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Bidding Documents; B. visit the Site, conduct a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work; C. become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work; D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings; 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 4 E. consider the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs; F. agree, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, that at the time of submitting its Bid no further examinations, investigations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents; G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents; H. promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder; I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work; and J. agree that the submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 6 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE 6.01 The Pre-Bid conference will be held as outlined in the Advertisement For Bids. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to ENGINEER in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACT TIMES 8.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which the Work is to be substantially completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement. 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 5 ARTICLE 9 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 9.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 10 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS 10.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration during the bidding and Contract award process of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. In cases in which the Contract allows the Contractor to request that Engineer authorize the use of a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment, application for such acceptance may not be made to and will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Contract. 10.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-Bid approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk. ARTICLE 11 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 11.01 A Bidder shall be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of the Work if required by the Bidding Documents (most commonly in the Specifications) to do so. If a prospective Bidder objects to retaining any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the concern is not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should refrain from submitting a Bid. 11.02 Subsequent to the submittal of the Bid, Owner may not require the Successful Bidder or Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity against which Contractor has reasonable objection. 11.03 The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five days after Bid opening, submit to Owner a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work: Pump, Motor and Discharge Head, Chlorination Equipment, and Electrical System Components. If requested by Owner, such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award. 11.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 6 Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.06 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 12 – PREPARATION OF BID 12.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents. A. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein. B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.” 12.02 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown. 12.03 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member or other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown. 12.04 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address. 12.05 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown. 12.06 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures. 12.07 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form. 12.08 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 12.09 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form. ARTICLE 13 – BASIS OF BID 13.01 Unit Price A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit price section of the Bid Form. B. The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity” (which Owner or its representative has set forth in the Bid Form) for the item and the corresponding “Bid Unit Price” offered by the Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum of these “Bid Prices”; such total will be used by Owner for Bid comparison purposes. The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 7 C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 13.02 Allowances A. For cash allowances the Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for Contractor's overhead, costs, profit, and other expenses on account of cash allowances, if any, named in the Contract Documents, in accordance with Paragraph 13.02.B of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 14 – SUBMITTAL OF BID 14.01 The Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with all the attachments outlined in Article 7 of the Bid Form. 14.02 A Bid shall be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED.” A mailed Bid shall be addressed to OWNER at the address in Article 1.01 of the Bid Form. 14.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened. ARTICLE 15 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID 15.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder. 15.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. 15.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work. ARTICLE 16 – OPENING OF BIDS 16.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. ARTICLE 17 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 17.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period. 06/2024 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 21 13 - 8 ARTICLE 18 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive; provided that Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work. 18.02 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award shall be to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid. 18.03 Evaluation of Bids A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. B. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted, Bids will be compared on the basis of the total of the products of the estimated quantity of each item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items. 18.04 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents. 18.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers. ARTICLE 19 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 19.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the Agreement (executed by Successful Bidder) to Owner, it shall be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation. ARTICLE 20 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 20.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement (and any bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents) to Owner. Within ten days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions. - END OF SECTION - 6/2024 Bid Form 178.24.200 00 30 00-1 SECTION 00 30 00 BID FORM Project Identification: SADDLEBACK PARTNERS, L.C. – HOLE IN THE ROCK #2 WELL HOUSE Contract Identification and Number: ARTICLE 1 - BID RECIPIENT 1.01 This Bid Is Submitted To: SADDLEBACK PARTNERS, L.C. 1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in the Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitations those dealing with the dispositions of Bid security. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 30 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner. ARTICLE 3 - BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of which is hereby acknowledged: Addendum No. Addendum Date ____________ _____________ ____________ _____________ ____________ _____________ B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in SC-4.02, and (2) reports and drawings of Hazard Environmental Conditions, if any, at the Site that have been identified in SC-4.06 as containing reliable “technical data.” 6/2024 Bid Form 178.24.200 00 30 00-2 E. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs. F. Based on the information and observations referred to in Paragraph 3.01.E above, Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of the Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. H. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. I. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted. J. Bidder will submit written evidence of its authority to do business in the State or other jurisdiction where the Project is located not later than the date of its execution of the Agreement. K. Bidder understands that OWNER has pre-ordered the diesel generator for this project. Procurement contract is included in Appendix A. Bidder has included the cost of this pre-ordered equipment in the Bid, and has included all appropriate shipping and handling and sales tax. Bidder understands that when a Notice of Award is issued to Bidder (CONTRACTOR), the procurement contracts OWNER has entered into with the vendor will be assigned to CONTRACTOR, and CONTRACTOR from that date forward accepts full liability for the final purchase, delivery, installation, start -up, and warrantee of this equipment. Assignment of procurement contract relieves OWNER of all liability associated with the procurement contract. ARTICLE 4 - BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION 4.01 Bidder further represents that: A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on the behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation; B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; 6/2024 Bid Form 178.24.200 00 30 00-3 C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and D. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D: 1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process; 2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition; 3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and 4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract. ARTICLE 5 - BASIS OF BID 5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s): BID SCHEDULE Bid Item Description Qty Uni t Unit Bid Amount Total Bid Amount 1 Mobilization/Demobilization 1 LS $ 2 Construction Surveying 1 LS $ 3 Storm Water Control 1 LS $ 4 Materials Testing 1 LS $ 5 Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping 1 LS $ 6 RMP Utility Connection 1 LS $ 7 Retaining Wall for Transformer 1 LS $ 8 Well House Structure 1 LS $ 9 Prefabricated Stairs 1 LS $ 10 Site Grading, Backfill, and Compaction 1 LS $ 11 Furnish and Install Pump and Motor Assembly Complete 1 LS $ 12 Well House Internal Piping Complete 1 LS $ 13 Chlorination System Complete 1 LS $ 14 Electrical System Complete 1 LS $ 15 Electrical System – Soft Start Complete 1 LS $ 16 HVAC System Complete 1 LS $ 17 10-Inch Discharge Pipeline, Valves, and Fittings Complete 205 LF $ 18 12-Inch Discharge Pipeline, Valves, and Fittings Complete 52 LF $ 19 8-Inch Pump-to-Waste Pipeline and Fittings Complete 88 LF $ 20 6-Inch Floor Drain Pipeline and Fittings Complete 100 LF $ 21 Re-construct Entrance Road 2,000 SF $ 22 Construct Trails to Tank and Discharge Pipe 435 LF $ 23 Testing and Commissioning 1 LS $ BID SCHEDULE TOTAL $ 6/2024 Bid Form 178.24.200 00 30 00-4 Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with paragraph 11.03.B of the General Conditions. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the contract Documents. ARTICLE 6 - TIME OF COMPLETION 6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement. 6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damage. ARTICLE 7 - ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID 7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of the Bid: A. Document 00 45 00 - List of Subcontractors; B. Evidence of authority to do business in the state or jurisdiction of the Project; or a written covenant to obtain such license within the time frame for acceptance of Bids. ARTICLE 8 - DEFINED TERMS 8.01 The terms used in this Bid with the initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. 6/2024 Bid Form 178.24.200 00 30 00-5 ARTICLE 9 - BID SUBMITTAL 9.01 This Bid is submitted by: If Bidder is: An Individual Name (typed or printed): ____________________________________________________ By: _____________________________________________________________________ (Individual’s signature) Doing business as: _______________________________________________________________ A Partnership Partnership Name: _________________________________________________________ By: _____________________________________________________________________ (Signature of general partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): __________________________________________________________ A Corporation Corporation Name: _______________________________________________________________ State or Jurisdiction of Incorporation: ______________________________ Type (General Business, Profession, Service, Limited Liability): ___________________________ By: ___________________________________________________________________ (Signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): ___________________________________________________________ Title: ____________________________________________ Attest ____________________________________________________________ (Signature of Corporate Secretary) Date of Qualification to do business in ____________ [State or other jurisdiction where Project is located] is ___/___/______ SEAL, if required by State SEAL, if required by State CORPORATE SEAL, if required by State 6/2024 Bid Form 178.24.200 00 30 00-6 A Joint Venture Name of Joint Venture: ________________________________________________________ First Joint Venture Name: ____________________________________________________ By: ____________________________________________________________________ (Signature of joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): ____________________________________________________________ Title: ____________________________________________ Second Joint Venture Name: ____________________________________________________ By: ____________________________________________________________________ (Signature of joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): ____________________________________________________________ Title: ____________________________________________ (Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is party to the venture should be in the manner indicated above.) Bidder’s Business address: __________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ Business Phone No. (_____)______________ Business FAX No. (_____)_____________ Business E-Mail Address _______________________________________________________________________ State Contractor License No. ____________________________________. (If applicable) Employer’s Tax ID No. _______________________________________ Phone and FAX Numbers, and Address for receipt of official communications, if different from Business contact information: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ 9.02 Bid submitted on ______________________________, 20___. SEAL, if required by State SEAL, if required by State 06/2024 BID BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 43 00 - 1 SECTION 00 43 00 BID BOND Bidder Surety Name: Name: Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business): Owner Bid Name: Saddleback Partners, L.C. Project (name and location): Address (principal place of business): Hole in the Rock #2 Well House 925 W 100 N, Ste F, P.O. Box 540478 North Salt Lake, UT 84054 Bid Due Date: Bond Penal Sum: Date of Bond: Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Bid Bond, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Bidder Surety (Full formal name of Bidder) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal) By: By: (Signature) (Signature) (Attach Power of Attorney) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Notes: (1) Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. (2) Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary. 06/2024 BID BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 43 00 - 2 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond will be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder. 2. Default of Bidder occurs upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents. 3. This obligation will be null and void if: 3.1. Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or 3.2. All Bids are rejected by Owner, or 3.3. Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof). 4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due. 5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions does not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent. 6. No suit or action will be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date. 7. Any suit or action under this Bond will be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located. 8. Notices required hereunder must be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Postal Service registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and will be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned. 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby. 10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond will be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute governs and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith continues in full force and effect. 11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable. 06/2024 BID BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 43 00 - 3 - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PART 2 CONTRACT FORMS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 NOTICE OF AWARD 178.24.200 00 51 00 - 1 SECTION 00 51 00 NOTICE OF AWARD Date of Issuance: Owner: Saddleback Partners, L.C. Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: Hansen, Allen & Luce, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 178.24.200 Project: Hole in the Rock #2 Well House Contract Name: Bidder: Bidder’s Address: You are notified that Owner has accepted your Bid dated for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is $ . Contract Price is subject to adjustment based on the provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to those governing changes, Unit Price Work, and Work performed on a cost-plus-fee basis, as applicable. Three unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award, or has been transmitted or made available to Bidder electronically. ☐ Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award: 1. Deliver to Owner three counterparts of the Agreement, signed by Bidder (as Contractor). 2. Deliver with the signed Agreement(s) the Contract security (such as required performance and payment bonds) and insurance documentation, as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and in the General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6. 3. Other conditions precedent (if any): Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited. Within 10 days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions. 06/2024 NOTICE OF AWARD 178.24.200 00 51 00 - 2 Owner: Saddleback Partners, L.C. By (signature): Name (printed): Title: Copy: Engineer - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 AGREEMENT 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 1 SECTION 00 52 00 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE) This Agreement is by and between Saddleback Partners, L.C. (“Owner”) and (“Contractor”). Terms used in this Agreement have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: The construction of a well house, including but not limited to, the well house concrete structure, piping and chlorination equipment, well pump and motor equipping, electrical, HVAC, commissioning, testing, site work, excavation, concrete retaining wall installation, backfill, compaction, gravel road construction, and related items. ARTICLE 2—THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally described as follows: Hole in the Rock #2 Well House. ARTICLE 3—ENGINEER 3.01 Hansen, Allen & Luce, Inc will assume all duties and responsibilities of Engineer, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract. 3.02 The part of the Project that pertains to the Work has been designed by Hansen, Allen & Luce, Inc ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time is of the Essence A. All time limits for Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 4.02 Contract Times: Dates A. The Work will be substantially complete on or before and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before . 4.03 Liquidated Damages A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the Contract Times, as duly modified. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by 06/2024 AGREEMENT 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 2 Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $750 for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for Substantial Completion, until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $750 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion, and final completion are not additive, and will not be imposed concurrently. B. If Owner recovers liquidated damages for a delay in completion by Contractor, then such liquidated damages are Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy for such delay, and Owner is precluded from recovering any other damages, whether actual, direct, excess, or consequential, for such delay, except for special damages (if any) specified in this Agreement. ARTICLE 5—CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract: A. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit. ARTICLE 6—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions. 6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage A. Owner shall make progress payments on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 1st day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract. 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract. a. 95 percent of the value of the Work completed (with the balance being retainage). 06/2024 AGREEMENT 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 3 b. 95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage). B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 200 percent of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. 6.03 Final Payment A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. 6.04 Consent of Surety A. Owner will not make final payment, or return or release retainage at Substantial Completion or any other time, unless Contractor submits written consent of the surety to such payment, return, or release. 6.05 Interest A. All amounts not paid when due will bear interest at the rate of N/A percent per annum. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.01 Contents A. The Contract Documents consist of all of the following: 1. This Agreement. 2. Bonds: a. Performance bond (together with power of attorney). b. Payment bond (together with power of attorney). 3. General Conditions. 4. Supplementary Conditions. 5. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the project manual (copy of list attached). 6. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) with each sheet bearing the following general title: Hole-In-The-Rock #2 Well House 8. Addenda (numbers to inclusive). 9. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. Contractor’s Bid. b. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. 10. Appendices to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. Appendix A – Preordered Generator Purchase Order. b. Appendix B – Geophysical Logs and Well Construction Details. 06/2024 AGREEMENT 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 4 11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and are not attached hereto: a. Notice to Proceed. b. Work Change Directives. c. Change Orders. d. Field Orders. e. Warranty Bond, if any. B. The Contract Documents listed in Paragraph 7.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 7. D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the Contract. ARTICLE 8—REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS, AND STIPULATIONS 8.01 Contractor’s Representations A. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following representations: 1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, including Addenda. 2. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3. Contractor is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 4. Contractor has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports and drawings. 5. Contractor has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings. 6. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (c) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. 06/2024 AGREEMENT 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 5 7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract. 8. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and of discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor. 10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 11. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. 12. CONTRACTOR understands that OWNER has pre-ordered certain equipment for this project. Procurement Contracts are included in Appendix A. CONTRACTOR has included the cost of this pre-ordered equipment in the Bid, and has included all appropriate shipping and handling and sales tax. CONTRACTOR understands that when a Notice of Award is issued to CONTRACTOR, the procurement contracts OWNER has entered into with the vendor will be assigned to CONTRACTOR (form Section 00 43 30 Purchase Order Assignment shall be executed), and CONTRACTOR from that date forward accepts full liability for the final purchase, delivery, installation, start-up, and warrantee of this equipment. Assignment of Procurement Contracts relieves OWNER of all liability associated with the Procurement Contract. 8.02 Contractor’s Certifications A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 8.02: 1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract execution; 2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition; 3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and 4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract. 06/2024 AGREEMENT 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 6 8.03 Standard General Conditions A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract (2018), published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, and if Owner is the party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor, through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the Supplementary Conditions. 06/2024 AGREEMENT 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 7 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. This Agreement will be effective on (which is the Effective Date of the Contract). Owner: Contractor: Saddleback Partners, L.C. (typed or printed name of organization) (typed or printed name of organization) By: By: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature) Date: Date: (date signed) (date signed) Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) (If [Type of Entity] is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Attest: Attest: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices: Saddleback Partners, L.C. 925 W 100 N, Ste F, P.O. Box 540478 North Salt Lake, UT 84054 Designated Representative: Designated Representative: Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Email: Email: (If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of this Agreement.) License No.: (where applicable) State: - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 CHANGE ORDER 178.24.200 PAGE 00 53 00 - 1 SECTION 00 53 00 CHANGE ORDER NO.: _______ Owner: Saddleback Partners, L. C. Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: Hansen, Allen & Luce, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 178.24.200 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Hole In the Rock #2 Well House Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Change Order: The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order: Description: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ Attachments: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ Change in Contract Price Change in Contract Times [State Contract Times as either a specific date or a number of days] Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. 1 to No. [Number of previous Change Order]: [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No.1 to No. [Number of previous Change Order]: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: [Increase] [Decrease] this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: 06/2024 CHANGE ORDER 178.24.200 PAGE 00 53 00 - 2 Recommended by Engineer (if required) Authorized by Owner By: Title: Date: Authorized by Owner Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable) By: Title: Date: - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 NOTICE TO PROCEED 178.24.200 2018 EJCDC® C 550 PAGE 00 55 00 - 1 SECTION 00 55 00 NOTICE TO PROCEED Owner: Saddleback Partners, L.C. Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: Hansen, Allen & Luce, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 178.24.200 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Hole in the Rock #2 Well House Contract Name: Effective Date of Contract: OWNER hereby notifies CONTRACTOR that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on pursuant to Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. On that date, CONTRACTOR shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work will be done at the Site prior to such date. In accordance with the Agreement: The date by which Substantial Completion must be achieved is ______________ and the date by which readiness for final payment must be achieved is _________________. Before starting any Work at the Site, CONTRACTOR must comply with the following: ________________________________________________________________________ Owner: Saddleback Partners, L.C. By (signature): Name (printed): Title: Date Issued: Copy: Engineer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 PERFORMANCE BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 00 - 1 SECTION 00 61 00 PERFORMANCE BOND Contractor Surety Name: Name: Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business): Owner Contract Name: Saddleback Partners, L.C. Description (name and location): Mailing address (principal place of business): Hole in the Rock #2 Well House 925 W 100 N, Ste F, P.O. Box 540478 North Salt Lake, UT 84054 Contract Price: Effective Date of Contract: Bond Bond Amount: Date of Bond: (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract) Modifications to this Bond form: ☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 16 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Performance Bond, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Contractor as Principal Surety (Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal) By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable. 06/2024 PERFORMANCE BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 00 - 2 1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3. 3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond will arise after: 3.1. The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice may indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 will be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement does not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; 3.2. The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and 3.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. 4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 does not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. 5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions: 5.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; 5.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors; 5.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or 5.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 06/2024 PERFORMANCE BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 00 - 3 5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or 5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial. 6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment, or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice, the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner will not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety will not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for: 7.1. the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 7.2. additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and 7.3. liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond. 9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price will not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action will accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns. 10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond must be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and must be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable. 12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted therefrom and 06/2024 PERFORMANCE BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 00 - 4 provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14. Definitions 14.1. Balance of the Contract Price—The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. 14.2. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. 14.3. Contractor Default—Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. 14.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. 14.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor. 16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: ________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 PAYMENT BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 50 - 1 SECTION 00 61 50 PAYMENT BOND Contractor Surety Name: Name: Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business): Owner Contract Name: Saddleback Partners, L.C. Description (name and location): Mailing address (principal place of business): Hole in the Rock #2 Well House 925 W 100 N, Ste F, P.O. Box 540478 North Salt Lake, UT 84054 Contract Price: Effective Date of Contract: Bond Bond Amount: Date of Bond: (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract) Modifications to this Bond form: ☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 18 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Payment Bond, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Contractor as Principal Surety (Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal) By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable. 06/2024 PAYMENT BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 50 - 2 1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms. 2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond. 3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this Bond will arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety. 4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit. 5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond will arise after the following: 5.1. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor 5.1.1. have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and 5.1.2. have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13). 5.2. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13). 6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1. 7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions: 7.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and 7.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7.3. The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 will not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the 06/2024 PAYMENT BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 50 - 3 reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant. 8. The Surety’s total obligation will not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond will be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract will be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfying obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 12. No suit or action will be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable. 13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, will be sufficient compliance as of the date received. 14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 16. Definitions 16.1. Claim—A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: 16.1.1. The name of the Claimant; 16.1.2. The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished; 06/2024 PAYMENT BOND 178.24.200 PAGE 00 61 50 - 4 16.1.3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; 16.1.4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished; 16.1.5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; 16.1.6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; 16.1.7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and 16.1.8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. 16.2. Claimant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond is to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished. 16.3. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. 16.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. 16.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor. 18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: _________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSATNTIAL COMPLETION 178.24.200 PAGE 00 62 50 - 1 SECTION 00 62 50 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Owner: Saddleback Partners, L. C. Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: Hansen, Allen & Luce, Inc. Engineer’s Project No.: 178.24.200 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Hole in the Rock #2 Well House Contract Name: This ☐ Preliminary ☐ Final Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to: ☐ All Work ☐ The following specified portions of the Work: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ Date of Substantial Completion: The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or portion thereof designated above is hereby established, subject to the provisions of the Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial Completion in the final Certificate of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the contractual correction period and applicable warranties required by the Contract. A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product of mutual agreement of Owner and Contractor; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions. The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work must be as provided in the Contract, except as amended as follows: Amendments to Owner’s Responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ Amendments to Contractor’s Responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ 06/2024 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSATNTIAL COMPLETION 178.24.200 PAGE 00 62 50 - 2 This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Executed by Engineer Date Accepted by Contractor Date Accepted by Owner Date - END OF SECTION - PART 3 CONTRACT CONDITIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - i SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology ........................................................................................................ 1 1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 6 Article 2—Preliminary Matters ..................................................................................................................... 7 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance......................................... 7 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 7 2.03 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 8 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules .............................................................................................................. 8 2.06 Electronic Transmittals ................................................................................................................. 8 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 9 3.01 Intent ............................................................................................................................................. 9 3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 9 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 10 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 10 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 11 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 11 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 11 4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 11 4.03 Reference Points ......................................................................................................................... 11 4.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 12 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 12 Article 5—Site; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions .................... 13 5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 13 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 14 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 15 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 16 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 17 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - ii 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 19 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................. 21 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 21 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ................................................................................................... 22 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 24 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance .............................................................................. 25 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation ..................................................................................................... 25 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds .......................................................... 27 Article 7—Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 27 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction .................................................................... 27 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 27 7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 27 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 28 7.05 “Or Equals” .................................................................................................................................. 28 7.06 Substitutes .................................................................................................................................. 29 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .................................................................................. 31 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 32 7.09 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 33 7.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 33 7.11 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 33 7.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 33 7.13 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................. 34 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 35 7.15 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 35 7.16 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 35 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 38 7.18 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 39 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 39 Article 8—Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 40 8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 40 8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 41 8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 41 Article 9—Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................ 42 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - iii 9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 42 9.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 42 9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 42 9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 42 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings ................................................................. 43 9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 43 9.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................ 43 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 43 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 43 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 43 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ........................................................................................... 43 9.12 Safety Programs .......................................................................................................................... 43 Article 10—Engineer’s Status During Construction .................................................................................... 44 10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 44 10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 44 10.03 Resident Project Representative............................................................................................. 44 10.04 Engineer’s Authority ............................................................................................................... 44 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work ....................................................................................... 45 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 45 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ...................................................... 45 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................ 45 Article 11—Changes to the Contract .......................................................................................................... 46 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract .......................................................................... 46 11.02 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................ 46 11.03 Work Change Directives .......................................................................................................... 46 11.04 Field Orders ............................................................................................................................. 47 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 47 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 47 11.07 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 47 11.08 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 49 11.09 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 49 11.10 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................. 50 Article 12—Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 50 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - iv 12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 50 Article 13—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 51 13.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 51 13.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 55 13.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 55 Article 14—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 56 14.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 56 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................... 56 14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 57 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 58 14.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 58 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 58 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 59 Article 15—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 59 15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 59 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 62 15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 62 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ........................................................................................................ 63 15.05 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 64 15.06 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 64 15.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 65 15.08 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 66 Article 16—Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 67 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 67 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 67 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience................................................................................. 68 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................... 68 Article 17—Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................... 69 17.01 Methods and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 69 Article 18—Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 69 18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................... 69 18.02 Computation of Times............................................................................................................. 69 18.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 69 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - v 18.04 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 70 18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 70 18.06 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 70 18.07 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 70 18.08 Assignment of Contract........................................................................................................... 70 18.09 Successors and Assigns ........................................................................................................... 70 18.10 Headings .................................................................................................................................. 70 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 1 SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents. 3. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Contractor, in a form acceptable to Engineer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda. 7. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments. 8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract. 9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 10. Claim a. A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 2 Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. b. A demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal, or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address. c. A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, made pursuant to Paragraph 12.01.A.4, concerning disputes arising after Engineer has issued a recommendation of final payment. d. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), lead-based paint (as defined by the HUD/EPA standard), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to Laws and Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. 13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract. 14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work. 16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. 17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition. 18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. 19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective. 20. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format. 21. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions, including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 3 by this Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of Electronic Documents. 22. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 23. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 24. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. a. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated into the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. b. The presence of Constituents of Concern that are to be removed or remediated as part of the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. c. The presence of Constituents of Concern as part of the routine, anticipated, and obvious working conditions at the Site, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 26. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date, or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 28. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid. 29. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work. 30. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract. 31. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 32. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 4 33. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative (RPR) includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. 34. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 35. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals. 36. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 37. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 38. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and such other lands or areas furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 39. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 40. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. 41. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Contractor, which the Contract Documents require Contractor to submit to Engineer, or that is indicated as a Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Submittals may include Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data; Owner-delegated designs; sustainable design information; information on special procedures; testing plans; results of tests and evaluations, source quality-control testing and inspections, and field or Site quality-control testing and inspections; warranties and certifications; Suppliers’ instructions and reports; records of delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and maintenance data; Project photographic documentation; record documents; and other such documents required by the Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Change Proposals, Change Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation or clarification are not Submittals. 42. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion of such Work. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 5 43. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to which the Owner makes an award of contract. 44. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. 46. Technical Data a. Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (1) existing subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site, or existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site including existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) or (2) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. b. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then Technical Data is defined, with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06, as the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, assessments of the condition of subsurface facilities, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical, environmental, or other Site or facilities conditions report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. c. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data, and instead Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings. 47. Underground Facilities—All active or not-in-service underground lines, pipelines, conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities or systems that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other communications, cable television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light, heat, gases, oil, crude oil products, liquid petroleum products, water, steam, waste, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. An abandoned facility or system is not an Underground Facility. 48. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 49. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents. 50. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 6 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: 1. does not conform to the Contract Documents; 2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or 3. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or Paragraph 15.04). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 7 F. Contract Price or Contract Times: References to a change in “Contract Price or Contract Times” or “Contract Times or Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies to (1) Contract Price, (2) Contract Times, or (3) both Contract Price and Contract Times, as warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed. G. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner the performance bond and payment bond (if the Contract requires Contractor to furnish such bonds). B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6, except to the extent the Supplementary Conditions expressly establish other dates for delivery of specific insurance policies. C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 8 during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work, and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. No progress payment will be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work. 4. If a schedule is not acceptable, Contractor will have an additional 10 days to revise and resubmit the schedule. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means. B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols. C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long- term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 9 ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract Document is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version will govern. D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral. E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein. F. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, which agree that the Contract Documents will be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. G. Nothing in the Contract Documents creates: 1. any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work, for the benefit of such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; or 2. any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner or Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 10 inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation— RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 11 B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim. C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly notify Owner and Contractor in writing that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or 2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 60th day after the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to such date. 4.03 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 12 established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times must be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work will be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Abnormal weather conditions; 3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities (other than those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing other work at or adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and 4. Acts of war or terrorism. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 13 D. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price is limited as follows: 1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on the delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical path to completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay by Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Times to which Contractor is otherwise entitled. 3. Adjustments of Contract Times or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of Article 11. E. Each Contractor request or Change Proposal seeking an increase in Contract Times or Contract Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following: 1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment; 2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect the progress of the Work; 3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect the progress of the Work; 4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and 5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.07. Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Owner or Engineer may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule indicating all the activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion of the Work. F. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. G. Paragraph 8.03 addresses delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. ARTICLE 5—SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 14 B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or similar facilities located at such adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. 2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.13, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or in a court of competent jurisdiction; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 15 and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data; 2. Those drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings, pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data. C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. D. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; 3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival documents concerning the Site; or 4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 16 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine whether it is necessary for Owner to obtain additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part. D. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the condition in question has been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 17 Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. Such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A; b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and, c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs rights and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities. Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the presence or location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: 1. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 2. complying with applicable state and local utility damage prevention Laws and Regulations; 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 18 3. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing such Underground Facilities during the course of construction; 4. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and 5. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing regarding such Underground Facility. C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will: 1. promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. identify and communicate with the owner of the Underground Facility; prepare recommendations to Owner (and if necessary issue any preliminary instructions to Contractor) regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; 3. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part. E. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the Underground Facility may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the Underground Facility in question and conditions affected by its presence have been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. F. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 19 or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E; and c. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question. 4. The information and data shown or indicated on the Drawings with respect to existing Underground Facilities at the Site is based on information and data (a) furnished by the owners of such Underground Facilities, or by others, (b) obtained from available records, or (c) gathered in an investigation conducted in accordance with the current edition of ASCE 38, Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data, by the American Society of Civil Engineers. If such information or data is incorrect or incomplete, Contractor’s remedies are limited to those set forth in this Paragraph 5.05.F. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; 2. drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 20 of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern. E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs. F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, as a result of such Work stoppage, such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, or any costs or expenses incurred in response to the Hazardous Environmental Condition, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. Entitlement to any such adjustment is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D, 4.05.E, 11.07, and 11.08. H. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 21 conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court, arbitration, or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I obligates Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J obligates Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary Conditions, or other provisions of the Contract. B. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other provisions of the Contract. C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified by Owner prior to execution of the Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 22 Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond. D. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds in the required amounts. E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer in writing and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must comply with the bond and surety requirements above. F. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. G. Upon request to Owner from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. H. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better. C. Alternative forms of insurance coverage, including but not limited to self-insurance and “Occupational Accident and Excess Employer’s Indemnity Policies,” are not sufficient to meet the insurance requirements of this Contract, unless expressly allowed in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, full disclosure of all relevant exclusions, and evidence of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 23 Subcontractors or Suppliers. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those applicable to this Contract. E. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, and full disclosure of all relevant exclusions. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Owner may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those relevant to this Contract. F. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, will not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance. G. In addition to the liability insurance required to be provided by Contractor, the Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain Owner’s own liability insurance. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties. H. Contractor shall require: 1. Subcontractors to purchase and maintain worker’s compensation, commercial general liability, and other insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project, and to name as additional insureds Owner and Engineer (and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on Contractor’s liability policies) on each Subcontractor’s commercial general liability insurance policy; and 2. Suppliers to purchase and maintain insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project. I. If either party does not purchase or maintain the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. J. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Contractor’s entitlement to enter or remain at the Site will end immediately, and Owner may impose an appropriate set-off against payment for any associated costs (including but not limited to the cost of purchasing necessary insurance coverage), and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. K. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect (but is in no way obligated) to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 24 L. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. Contractor is responsible for determining whether such coverage and limits are adequate to protect its interests, and for obtaining and maintaining any additional insurance that Contractor deems necessary. M. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability, or that of its Subcontractors or Suppliers, under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract or otherwise. N. All the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained under this Contract will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, or renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured and Engineer. 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance A. Required Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker’s Compensation, Commercial General Liability, and other insurance pursuant to the specific requirements of the Supplementary Conditions. B. General Provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 as supplemented must: 1. include at least the specific coverages required; 2. be written for not less than the limits provided, or those required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. remain in effect at least until the Work is complete (as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D), and longer if expressly required elsewhere in this Contract, and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract; 4. apply with respect to the performance of the Work, whether such performance is by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable; and 5. include all necessary endorsements to support the stated requirements. C. Additional Insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, employer’s liability, umbrella or excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle liability policies, if required by this Contract, must: 1. include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified as additional insureds in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, and consultants of all such additional insureds; 3. afford primary coverage to these additional insureds for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations); 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 25 4. not seek contribution from insurance maintained by the additional insured; and 5. as to commercial general liability insurance, apply to additional insureds with respect to liability caused in whole or in part by Contractor’s acts or omissions, or the acts and omissions of those working on Contractor’s behalf, in the performance of Contractor’s operations. 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Property Insurance for Facilities of Owner Where Work Will Occur: Owner is responsible for obtaining and maintaining property insurance covering each existing structure, building, or facility in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or be adjoined. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, providing coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance, and will be maintained until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. C. Property Insurance for Substantially Complete Facilities: Promptly after Substantial Completion, and before actual occupancy or use of the substantially completed Work, Owner will obtain property insurance for such substantially completed Work, and maintain such property insurance at least until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, and provide coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance. The builder’s risk insurance may terminate upon written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of such property insurance. D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide advance notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer, and obtain an endorsement consenting to the continuation of coverage prior to commencing such partial occupancy or use. E. Insurance of Other Property; Additional Insurance: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for insuring it. If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.04, it may do so at Contractor’s expense. 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation A. The builder’s risk insurance policy purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 6.04 (or an installation floater policy if authorized by the Supplementary Conditions), will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 26 Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. 1. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as builder’s risk or installation floater insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. 2. None of the above waivers extends to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Any property insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage, or consequential loss to Owner’s existing structures, buildings, or facilities in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or adjoin; to adjacent structures, buildings, or facilities of Owner; or to part or all of the completed or substantially completed Work, during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06, will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them, and that the insured is allowed to waive the insurer’s rights of subrogation in a written contract executed prior to the loss, damage, or consequential loss. 1. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies. C. The waivers in this Paragraph 6.05 include the waiver of rights due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril, risk, or cause of loss. D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that each Subcontract contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from fire or other peril, risk, or cause of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance, installation floater, and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 27 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of property insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim. B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 shall maintain such proceeds in a segregated account, and distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations. C. If no other special agreement is reached, Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged Work, using allocated insurance proceeds. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering or other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety, then Contractor shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, at Contractor’s expense. Such services are not Owner-delegated professional design services under this Contract, and neither Owner nor Engineer has any responsibility with respect to (1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such services, (2) the qualifications or licensing of the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such services, or (4) any errors, omissions, or defects in such services. 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who will not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 7.03 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall maintain good discipline and order at the Site. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 28 B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of any other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site will be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld. 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work must be new and of good quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications will expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 7.05 “Or Equals” A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material, or items from other proposed Suppliers, under the circumstances described below. 1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer will deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or material will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that the proposed item: 1) is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 29 2) will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3) has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4) is not objectionable to Owner. b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense. C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or- equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal,” which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request will result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer consider the item a proposed substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.06. 7.06 Substitutes A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an item of equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests must be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. 1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material from anyone other than Contractor. 2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.06.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 30 3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design; 2) be similar in substance to the item specified; and 3) be suited to the same use as the item specified. b. will state: 1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times; 2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and 3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c. will identify: 1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and 2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 31 E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense. F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.06.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal. 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The Contractor’s retention of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the Work will not relieve Contractor’s obligation to Owner to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so. C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor or Supplier to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection. D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 5 days. E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors or Suppliers for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor or Supplier so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor or Supplier. F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement. G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 32 H. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal. I. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors and Suppliers. J. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings do not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or in delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. K. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. L. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work performed for Contractor by the Subcontractor or Supplier. M. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed in this Contract. 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights will be disclosed in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 33 7.09 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses, and certificates of occupancy. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 7.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 7.11 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It is not Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Owner or Contractor may give written notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such written notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim. 7.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 34 7.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs. C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.13.C.2 or 7.13.C.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. F. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of Underground Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to Contractor); and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, in writing, when Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. Any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work are identified or included in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications. H. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 35 I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all the Work is completed, Engineer has issued a written notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.C that the Work is acceptable, and Contractor has left the Site (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets (formerly known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.15 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused by an emergency, or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an emergency. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of an emergency or Contractor’s response, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 7.16 Submittals A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements 1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall: a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determine and verify: 1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to the Submittal; 2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 3) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the Submittal. 2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that Submittal, and that Contractor approves the Submittal. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 36 3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice must be set forth in a written communication separate fro m the Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a specific notation made on the Shop Drawing itself. B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall label and submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. 1. Shop Drawings a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 2. Samples a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications. b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 37 document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate Contract modification. 5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.16.A and B. 6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order. 7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance, or approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will result in such item becoming a Contract Document. 8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.C.4. D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals. 2. Contractor shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a third or subsequent resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges. 3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-Delegated Designs 1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-delegated designs: a. Contractor shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract Documents. b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either Accepted or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the time established in the Schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted. c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under the requirements of the Contract Documents as to general form and content of the Submittal. d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Contractor shall confer with Engineer regarding the reason for the non-acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable document. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 38 2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule of Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.03. 2.04, and 2.05. F. Owner-delegated Designs: Submittals pursuant to Owner-delegated designs are governed by the provisions of Paragraph 7.19. 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer is entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Owner’s rights under this warranty and guarantee are in addition to, and are not limited by, Owner’s rights under the correction period provisions of Paragraph 15.08. The time in which Owner may enforce its warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17 is limited only by applicable Laws and Regulations restricting actions to enforce such rights; provided, however, that after the end of the correction period under Paragraph 15.08: 1. Owner shall give Contractor written notice of any defective Work within 60 days of the discovery that such Work is defective; and 2. Such notice will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the notice. C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release of Owner’s warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17: 1. Observations by Engineer; 2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. Any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal; 6. The issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 7. The end of the correction period established in Paragraph 15.08; 8. Any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 9. Any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 39 E. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract will govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract. 7.18 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from losses, damages, costs, and judgments (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising from third-party claims or actions relating to or resulting from the performance or furnishing of the Work, provided that any such claim, action, loss, cost, judgment or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A will not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of the Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Such delegation will specify the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals that Contractor must furnish to Engineer with respect to the Owner-delegated design. B. Contractor shall cause such Owner-delegated professional design services to be provided pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such design professional must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations. C. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to Engineer, then such Shop Drawing or other Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when submitted by Contractor to Engineer. D. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 40 professionals retained or employed by Contractor under an Owner-delegated design, subject to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.19, Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other Submittals furnished by Contractor pursuant to an Owner-delegated design will be only for the following limited purposes: 1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.19; 2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and 3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. F. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer. G. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any third-party utility work that Owner has arranged to take place at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor. C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 41 Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. F. The provisions of this article are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with Owner, or that is performed without having been arranged by Owner. If such work occurs, then any related delay, disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of Paragraph 4.05.C.3. 8.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; 2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and 3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. If, in the course of performing other work for Owner at or adjacent to the Site, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner that Owner has arranged to perform work, causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment will take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, and any remedies available to Contractor under Laws or Regulations concerning utility action or inaction. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price will be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times or Contract Price is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 42 B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 1. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this Paragraph 8.03.B. 2. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor. C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference. ARTICLE 9—OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 9.02 Replacement of Engineer A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Engineer. 9.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 43 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03. C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6. 9.07 Change Orders A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B. 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work). 9.12 Safety Programs A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed. B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 44 ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe, as an experienced and qualified design professional, the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Resident Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions and in Paragraph 10.07. B. If Owner designates an individual or entity who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee to represent Owner at the Site, then the responsibilities and authority of such individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 10.04 Engineer’s Authority A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. B. Engineer’s authority as to Submittals is set forth in Paragraph 7.16. C. Engineer’s authority as to design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications and other Submittals from Contractor in response to Owner’s delegation (if any) to Contractor of professional design services, is set forth in Paragraph 7.19. D. Engineer’s authority as to changes in the Work is set forth in Article 11. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 45 E. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15. 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith. 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, will create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Contractor under Paragraph 15.06.A, will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.07 also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any. 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 46 ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract A. The Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order. B. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. C. All changes to the Contract that involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. Owner and Contractor may amend other terms and conditions of the Contract without the recommendation of the Engineer. 11.02 Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off; 3. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.05, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under: Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Work Change Directive; Paragraph 11.09, concerning Change Proposals; Article 12, Claims; Paragraph 13.02.D, final adjustments resulting from allowances; Paragraph 13.03.D, final adjustments relating to determination of quantities for Unit Price Work; and similar provisions. B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed. 11.03 Work Change Directives A. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.07 regarding change of Contract Price. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 47 B. If Owner has issued a Work Change Directive and: 1. Contractor believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Contractor shall submit any Change Proposal seeking such an adjustment no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 2. Owner believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Owner shall submit any Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. 11.04 Field Orders A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. B. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein. 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Changes involving the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. B. Such changes in the Work may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work must be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. Nothing in this Paragraph 11.05 obligates Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.C.2. 11.07 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 48 1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); 2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2); or 3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.07.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be determined as follows: 1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee will be 15 percent; b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 5 percent; c. Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a and 11.07.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted Work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner will be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work; d. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C; e. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the actual net decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount equal to 5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and f. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change or Change Proposal, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee will be computed by determining the sum of the costs in each of the cost categories in Paragraph 13.01.B (specifically, payroll costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.1; incorporated materials and equipment costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.2; Subcontract costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.3; special consultants costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.4; and other costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.5) and applying to each such cost category sum the appropriate fee from Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a through 11.07.C.2.e, inclusive. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 49 11.08 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract Times, are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.05. 11.09 Change Proposals A. Purpose and Content: Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; contest an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; challenge a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal will specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Each Change Proposal will address only one issue, or a set of closely related issues. B. Change Proposal Procedures 1. Submittal: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer within 30 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. 2. Supporting Data: The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. a. Change Proposals based on or related to delay, interruption, or interference must comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. b. Change proposals related to a change of Contract Price must include full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated into the Work and labor and equipment used for the subject Work. The supporting data must be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. 3. Engineer’s Initial Review: Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. If in its discretion Engineer concludes that additional supporting data is needed before conducting a full review and making a decision regarding the Change Proposal, then Engineer may request that Contractor submit such additional supporting data by a date specified by Engineer, prior to Engineer beginning its full review of the Change Proposal. 4. Engineer’s Full Review and Action on the Change Proposal: Upon receipt of Contractor’s supporting data (including any additional data requested by Engineer), Engineer will conduct a full review of each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after such receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either approve the Change Proposal in whole, deny it in whole, or approve it in part and deny it in part. Such actions must be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 50 Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. 5. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision is final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12. C. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties in writing that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice will be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12. D. Post-Completion: Contractor shall not submit any Change Proposals after Engineer issues a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. 11.10 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor are subject to the Claims process set forth in this article: 1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals; 2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; 3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Subject to the waiver provisions of Paragraph 15.07, any dispute arising after Engineer has issued a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 51 and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim will be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer. D. Mediation 1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate will stay the Claim submittal and response process. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator. 3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action will be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes. F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim will be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes. G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order or other written document to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price. ARTICLE 13—COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 52 2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work will be in amounts no higher than those commonly incurred in the locality of the Project, will not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and will include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor in advance of the subject Work. Such employees include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs include, but are not limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, will be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts will accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, which will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee will be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Other costs consisting of the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, which are 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 53 consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. 1) In establishing included costs for materials such as scaffolding, plating, or sheeting, consideration will be given to the actual or the estimated life of the material for use on other projects; or rental rates may be established on the basis of purchase or salvage value of such items, whichever is less. Contractor will not be eligible for compensation for such items in an amount that exceeds the purchase cost of such item. c. Construction Equipment Rental 1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner as to price (including any surcharge or special rates applicable to overtime use of the construction equipment or machinery), and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs will be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts must cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor or a Contractor-related entity will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the equipment rental rate book specified in the Supplementary Conditions. An hourly rate will be computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will include all operating costs. 3) With respect to Work that is the result of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price (“changed Work”), included costs will be based on the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly attributable to the changed Work. The cost of any such equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, must cease to accrue when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of builder’s risk or other property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.04), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 54 g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. The cost of purchasing, renting, or furnishing small tools and hand tools. 3. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 4. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 6. Expenses incurred in preparing and advancing Claims. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B. D. Contractor’s Fee 1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then: a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the Effective Date of the Contract will be determined as set forth in the Agreement. b. for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee will be determined as follows: 1) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a percentage of the Cost of the Work, the fee will automatically adjust as the Cost of the Work changes. 2) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a fixed fee, the fee for any additions or deletions will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. 2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any other basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered by a Change 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 55 Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will establish and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices. Subject to prior written notice, Owner will be afforded reasonable access, during normal business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of three years after the final payment by Owner. Pertinent Subcontractors will afford such access to Owner, and preserve such documents, to the same extent required of Contractor. 13.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that: 1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment for any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Owner’s Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that an Owner’s contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted. 13.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 56 thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, and the final adjustment of Contract Price will be set forth in a Change Order, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the quantity of the item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such procedures and programs as applicable. 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work will be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 57 D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required: 1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner; 2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and 5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals. F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering will be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03 Defective Work A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work. C. Notice of Defects: Prompt written notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 58 losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work will be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner. 14.05 Uncovering Work A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense. C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. 1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 59 or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by Engineer, then Owner may, after 7 days’ written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 2. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a) a bill of sale, invoice, copies of subcontract or purchase order payments, or other documentation 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 60 establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and equipment; (b) at Owner’s request, documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 3. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received by Contractor have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 4. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. C. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 61 4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work; b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto; c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid by Owner; or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2. 6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. D. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. E. Reductions in Payment by Owner 1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a. Claims have been made against Owner based on Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages resulting from Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement; 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 62 b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause; j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work; k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; or l. Other items entitle Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended. 2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed will be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld will be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.D.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner. 15.03 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 63 submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have 7 days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work. E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above. F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list. 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 64 significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. At any time, Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through 15.03.E for that part of the Work. 2. At any time, Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.04 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance. 15.05 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 15.06 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment. 2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment. d. a list of all duly pending Change Proposals and Claims; and 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 65 e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. Engineer’s Review of Final Application and Recommendation of Payment: If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the final Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation will account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Notice of Acceptability: In support of its recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment, Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. D. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment and issuance of notice of the acceptability of the Work. E. Final Payment Becomes Due: Upon receipt from Engineer of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, Owner shall set off against the amount recommended by Engineer for final payment any further sum to which Owner is entitled, including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions of this Contract with respect to progress payments. Owner shall pay the resulting balance due to Contractor within 30 days of Owner’s receipt of the final Application for Payment from Engineer. 15.07 Waiver of Claims A. By making final payment, Owner waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other damages for late completion by Contractor, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim, appeal under the provisions of Article 17, set-off, or express reservation of rights by Owner. Owner reserves all other claims or rights after final payment. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 66 B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted as a Claim, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17. 15.08 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the Supplementary Conditions or the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents), Owner gives Contractor written notice that any Work has been found to be defective, or that Contractor’s repair of any damages to the Site or adjacent areas has been found to be defective, then after receipt of such notice of defect Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas; 2. correct such defective Work; 3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures. B. Owner shall give any such notice of defect within 60 days of the discovery that such Work or repairs is defective. If such notice is given within such 60 days but after the end of the correction period, the notice will be deemed a notice of defective Work under Paragraph 7.17.B. C. If, after receipt of a notice of defect within 60 days and within the correction period, Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Contractor’s failure to pay such costs, losses, and damages within 10 days of invoice from Owner will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the failure to pay. D. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. E. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. F. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 67 ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments must be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule); 2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents; 3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or 4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) 10 days’ written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the Contract, Owner may proceed to: 1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) written notice that the Contract is terminated; and 2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond. C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure. E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 68 reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond will govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D. 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience A. Upon 7 days’ written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and 3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. B. Contractor shall not be paid for any loss of anticipated profits or revenue, post-termination overhead costs, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon 7 days’ written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, 7 days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 69 ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this article: 1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full, pursuant to Article 12; and 2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work, or obligations under the Contract Documents, that arise after final payment has been made. B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this article, Owner or Contractor may: 1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or 3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice to Owner, Engineer, or Contractor, it will be deemed to have been validly given only if delivered: 1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of business; 2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or 3. by e-mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e-mail’s subject line. 18.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 18.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if 6/2024 GENERAL CONDITIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 00 72 00 - 70 repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 18.04 Limitation of Damages A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 18.05 No Waiver A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract. 18.06 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract or of the services of Contractor. 18.07 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 18.08 Assignment of Contract A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other party without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract. 18.09 Successors and Assigns A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 18.10 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 1 SECTION 00 80 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2018). The General Conditions remain in full force and effect except as amended. The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added—for example, “Paragraph SC-4.05.” ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance SC-2.01 Delete Paragraphs 2.01.B. and C. in their entirety and insert the following in their place: B. Evidence of CONTRACTOR’s Insurance: When CONTRACTOR delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER copies of the policies (including all endorsements, and identification of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles) of insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR in this Contract. CONTRACTOR may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. C. Evidence of OWNER’s Insurance: After receipt from CONTRACTOR of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, OWNER shall promptly deliver to CONTRACTOR copies of the policies of insurance to be provided by OWNER in this Contract (if any). OWNER may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. 2.02 Copies of Documents SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place: A. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR four printed copies of conformed Contract Documents incorporating and integrating all Addenda and any amendments negotiated prior to the Effective Date of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies of the conformed Contract Documents will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 2 2.06 Electronic Transmittals SC-2.06 Supplement Paragraph 2.06 of the General Conditions by adding the following paragraph: D. Requests by CONTRACTOR for Electronic Documents in Other Formats 1. Release of any Electronic Document versions of the Project documents in formats other than those identified in the Electronic Documents Protocol (if any) or elsewhere in the Contract will be at the sole discretion of the OWNER. 2. To extent determined by OWNER, in its sole discretion, to be prudent and necessary, release of Electronic Documents versions of Project documents and other Project information requested by CONTRACTOR (“Request”) in formats other than those identified in the Electronic Documents Protocol (if any) or elsewhere in the Contract will be subject to the provisions of the OWNER’s response to the Request, and to the following conditions to which CONTRACTOR agrees: a. The content included in the Electronic Documents created by ENGINEER and covered by the Request was prepared by ENGINEER as an internal working document for ENGINEER’s purposes solely, and is being provided to CONTRACTOR on an “AS IS” basis without any warranties of any kind, including, but not limited to any implied warranties of fitness for any purpose. As such, CONTRACTOR is advised and acknowledges that the content may not be suitable for CONTRACTOR’s application, or may require substantial modification and independent verification by CONTRACTOR. The content may include limited resolution of models, not-to-scale schematic representations and symbols, use of notes to convey design concepts in lieu of accurate graphics, approximations, graphical simplifications, undocumented intermediate revisions, and other devices that may affect subsequent reuse. b. Electronic Documents containing text, graphics, metadata, or other types of data that are provided by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR under the request are only for convenience of CONTRACTOR. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such data will be at the CONTRACTOR’s sole risk and the CONTRACTOR waives any claims against ENGINEER or OWNER arising from use of data in Electronic Documents covered by the Request. c. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and their subconsultants from all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees and defense costs arising out of or resulting from CONTRACTOR’s use, adaptation, or distribution of any Electronic Documents provided under the Request. d. CONTRACTOR agrees not to sell, copy, transfer, forward, give away or otherwise distribute this information (in source or modified file format) to any third party without the direct written authorization of ENGINEER, unless such distribution is specifically identified in the Request and is limited to CONTRACTOR’s subcontractors. CONTRACTOR warrants that subsequent use by CONTRACTOR’s subcontractors complies with all terms of the Contract Documents and OWNER’s response to Request. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 3 ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies SC-3.03 Supplement Paragraph 3.03 of the General Conditions by adding the following paragraph: C. In the event of an inconsistency between provisions in any of the contract documents, the order of precedence shall be established by the most stringent of the criteria and conditions. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed SC-4.01.A Delete paragraph 4.01.A of the General Conditions and insert the following in its place: A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Any Work undertaken by CONTRACTOR prior to the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed will be entirely at his own risk SC-4.03.A Delete paragraph 4.03.A of the General Conditions and insert the following in its place: A. OWNER shall provide engineering survey control (which in ENGINEER’s judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work) with which the CONTRACTOR shall establish reference points for construction. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. ARTICLE 5—SITE, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.D: E. The following table lists the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the Technical Data in the report upon which CONTRACTOR may rely: Report Title Date of Report Technical Data Geotechnical Investigation for Proposed 1 Million Gallon Water Reservoir and Well House December 4, 1998 Subsurface conditions Geotechnical Investigation for Proposed Well House – HITR Backup Well June 28, 2022 Subsurface conditions 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 4 F. The following table lists the drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the Technical Data upon which CONTRACTOR may rely: Drawings Title Date of Drawings Technical Data Hole-In-The-Rock Well House & 1.0 Million Gallon Reservoir August 30, 1999 As-built drawings of nearby structures G. CONTRACTOR may examine copies of reports and drawings identified in SC-5.03.E and SC-5.03.F that were not included with the Bidding Documents at the office of ENGINEER during regular business hours, or may request copies from ENGINEER. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions SC-5.06 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.06.A.3: 4. The following table lists the reports known to OWNER relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and the Technical Data (if any) upon which CONTRACTOR may rely: Report Title Date of Report Technical Data No such data is known to OWNER 5. The following table lists the drawings known to OWNER relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and Technical Data (if any) contained in such Drawings upon which CONTRACTOR may rely: Drawings Title Date of Drawings Technical Data No such data is known to OWNER ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.03 CONTRACTOR’s Insurance SC-6.03 Supplement Paragraph 6.03 with the following provisions after Paragraph 6.03.C: D. Other Additional Insureds: As a supplement to the provisions of Paragraph 6.03.C of the General Conditions, the commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or excess must include as additional insureds (in addition to OWNER and ENGINEER) the following: None 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 5 E. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability: CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance (from available sources, notwithstanding the jurisdictional requirement of Paragraph 6.02.B of the General Conditions). Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not less than: Workers’ Compensation State Statutory Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s) Statutory Foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (employer’s responsibility coverage), if applicable Statutory F. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of CONTRACTOR, on an occurrence basis, against claims for: 1. damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR’s employees, 2. damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage, and 3. damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom. G. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: CONTRACTOR’s commercial liability policy must be written on a 1996 (or later) Insurance Services Organization, Inc. (ISO) commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage. a. Such insurance must be maintained for three years after final payment. b. CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, including but not limited to coverage of CONTRACTOR’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18. 3. Severability of interests and no insured-versus-insured or cross-liability exclusions. 4. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage. 5. Personal injury coverage. 6. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together). If CONTRACTOR demonstrates to OWNER that the specified ISO endorsements are not commercially available, then CONTRACTOR may satisfy this requirement by providing equivalent endorsements. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 6 7. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04 “Additional Insured—ENGINEERs, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. H. Commercial General Liability—Excluded Content: The commercial general liability insurance policy, including its coverages, endorsements, and incorporated provisions, must not include any of the following: 1. Any modification of the standard definition of “insured contract” (except to delete the railroad protective liability exclusion if CONTRACTOR is required to indemnify a railroad or others with respect to Work within 50 feet of railroad property). 2. Any exclusion for water intrusion or water damage. 3. Any provisions resulting in the erosion of insurance limits by defense costs other than those already incorporated in ISO form CG 00 01. 4. Any exclusion of coverage relating to earth subsidence or movement. 5. Any exclusion for the insured’s vicarious liability, strict liability, or statutory liability (other than worker’s compensation). 6. Any limitation or exclusion based on the nature of CONTRACTOR’s work. 7. Any professional liability exclusion broader in effect than the most recent edition of ISO form CG 22 79. I. Commercial General Liability—Minimum Policy Limits Commercial General Liability Policy limits of not less than: General Aggregate $2,000,000 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Bodily Injury and Property Damage—Each Occurrence $1,000,000 J. Automobile Liability: CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy must be written on an occurrence basis. Automobile Liability Policy limits of not less than: Combined Single Limit Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 K. Umbrella or Excess Liability: CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the Paragraphs above. The coverage afforded must be at least as broad as that of each and every one of the underlying policies. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 7 Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy limits of not less than: Each Occurrence $1,000,000 General Aggregate $2,000,000 ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.03 Labor; Working Hours SC-7.03 Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C: 1. Regular working hours will be 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. 2. OWNER's legal holidays applicable to this Project are President’s Day, Memorial Day, 4th of July and 24th of July. SC-7.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C: D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any overtime pay or other expense incurred by the OWNER for ENGINEER’s services (including those of the Resident Project Representative, if any), OWNER's representative, and construction observation services, occasioned by the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, any legal holiday, or as overtime on any regular work day. If CONTRACTOR is responsible but does not pay, or if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then OWNER may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. SC-7.03 Add the following new subparagraph immediately after Paragraph SC-7.03.D: 1. For purposes of administering the foregoing requirement, additional overtime costs are defined as any hours over 8 hours on any regular work day and any hours worked on Saturday, Sunday, and any legal holiday. 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers SC-7.07 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.07.M: N. The CONTRACTOR shall not award work valued at more than forty (40%) percent of the Contract Price to Subcontractor(s), without prior written approval of the OWNER. 7.13 Safety and Protection SC-7.13 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.13.J: K. Protection of Person and Property: CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for safety measures in connection with the Project. CONTRACTOR shall take appropriate measures to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (1) all persons on the site or who may be affected by the Project; (2) all labor, materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Project; (3) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and underground facilities. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. If CONTRACTOR must enter a confined space, it shall have all personnel and monitoring equipment on site to necessary to 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 8 comply with all OSHA and OWNER's safety guidelines. A Confined Space Entry Permit shall be properly completed before entering a confined space. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to erect and maintain all necessary traffic barricades and to provide all necessary traffic control. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property, including Blue Stakes notification to underground utility owners and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation or replacement of their property. Any damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, supplier, individual or entity performing the Project, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.02 Coordination SC-8.02 Add the following new Paragraph 8.02.C immediately after Paragraph 8.02.B: C. Should CONTRACTOR cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor at the site, or should any claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work at the site be made by any separate contractor against CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, the Construction Coordinator or any other person, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise resolve the dispute by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and the Construction Coordinator harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought by any separate contractor against OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants or the Construction Coordinator to the extent based on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Should a separate contractor cause damage to the Work or property of CONTRACTOR or should the performance of Work by any separate contractor at the site give rise to any other claim, CONTRACTOR shall not institute any action, legal or equitable, against OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants or the Construction Coordinator or permit any action against any of them to be maintained and continued in its name or for its benefit in any court or before any arbiter which seeks to impose liability on or to recover damages from OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants or the Construction Coordinator on account of any such damage or claim. If CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in performing or furnishing Work by any act or neglect of a separate contractor and OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the extent of any adjustment in Contract Times attributable thereto, CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an extension of times in accordance with Article 11. An extension of the Contract Times shall be CONTRACTOR's exclusive remedy with respect to OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and Construction Coordinator for any delay, disruption, interference or hindrance caused by any separate contractor. This paragraph does not prevent recovery from OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant or Construction Coordinator for activities that are their respective responsibilities. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 9 ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.B: C. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be OWNER’s representative at the Site. RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general will be with OWNER and CONTRACTOR. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors will only be through or with the full knowledge or approval of CONTRACTOR. The RPR will: 1. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with CONTRACTOR, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project-related meetings (but not including CONTRACTOR’s safety meetings), and as appropriate prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof. 2. Safety Compliance: Comply with Site safety programs, as they apply to RPR, and if required to do so by such safety programs, receive safety training specifically related to RPR’s own personal safety while at the Site. 3. Liaison a. Serve as OWNER’s liaison with CONTRACTOR. Working principally through CONTRACTOR’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. b. Assist OWNER in serving as OWNER’s liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR’s operations affect OWNER’s on-Site operations. c. Assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or information, when required for CONTRACTOR’s proper execution of the Work. 4. Review of Work; Defective Work a. Conduct on-Site observations of the Work to assist OWNER in determining, to the extent set forth in Paragraph 10.02, if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Observe whether any Work in place appears to be defective. c. Observe whether any Work in place should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 5. Inspections and Tests a. Observe CONTRACTOR-arranged inspections required by Laws and Regulations, including but not limited to those performed by public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. b. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. 6. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with CONTRACTOR. 7. Completion a. Participate in OWNER’s visits regarding Substantial Completion. b. Assist in the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected. c. Participate in OWNER’s visit to the Site in the company of OWNER and CONTRACTOR regarding completion of the Work, and prepare a final punch list of items to be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 10 d. Observe whether items on the final punch list have been completed or corrected. D. The RPR will not: 1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items). 2. Exceed limitations of ENGINEER’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction. 5 Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of OWNER or CONTRACTOR. 6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off- site by others except as specifically authorized by OWNER. ARTICLE 13—7. AUTHORIZE OWNER TO OCCUPY THE PROJECT IN WHOLE OR IN PART.COST OF WORK; ALLOWANCES, UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work SC-13.01 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c.(2) by adding the following sentence: The equipment rental rate book that governs the included costs for the rental of machinery and equipment owned by CONTRACTOR (or a related entity) under the Cost of the Work provisions of this Contract is the most current edition of Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment. SC-13.01 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.C.2 by adding the following definition of small tools and hand tools: a. For purposes of this paragraph, “small tools and hand tools” means any tool or equipment whose current price if it were purchased new at retail would be less than $500. 13.03 Unit Price Work SC-13.03 Delete Paragraph 13.03.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place: E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the extended price of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 25 percent or more of the Contract Price (based on estimated quantities at the time of Contract formation) and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work actually furnished or performed by CONTRACTOR differs by more than 25 percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 11 b. CONTRACTOR’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in CONTRACTOR’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, SET OFFS; COMPLETIONS; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments SC-15.01 Delete Paragraph 15.01.D.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 1. Twenty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any OWNER set-offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. 15.03 Substantial Completion SC-15.03 Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B: 1. If some or all of the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by ENGINEER, the cost of such re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. If CONTRACTOR does not pay, or the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then OWNER may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under this Article 15. ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTIONS OF DISPUTES 17.02 Arbitration SC-17.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01. 17.02 Arbitration A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be settled by arbitration administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules (subject to the conditions and limitations of this Paragraph SC-17.02). Any controversy or claim in the amount of $100,000 or less will be settled in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s supplemental rules for Fixed Time and Cost Construction Arbitration. This agreement to arbitrate will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitration administrator, and a copy will be sent to ENGINEER for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required in Article 17, or if no specified time is applicable within a reasonable time after the matter in question has arisen, and in no event will any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 12 C. The arbitrator(s) must be licensed engineers, contractors, attorneys, or construction managers. Hearings will take place pursuant to the standard procedures of the Construction Arbitration Rules that contemplate in-person hearings. The arbitrators will have no authority to award punitive or other damages not measured by the prevailing party's actual damages, except as may be required by statute or the Contract. Any award in an arbitration initiated under this clause will be limited to monetary damages and include no injunction or direction to any party other than the direction to pay a monetary amount. D. The Arbitrators will have the authority to allocate the costs of the arbitration process among the parties, but will only have the authority to allocate attorneys' fees if a specific Law or Regulation or this Contract permits them to do so. E. The award of the arbitrators must be accompanied by a reasoned written opinion and a concise breakdown of the award. The written opinion will cite the Contract provisions deemed applicable and relied on in making the award. F. The parties agree that failure or refusal of a party to pay its required share of the deposits for arbitrator compensation or administrative charges will constitute a waiver by that party to present evidence or cross-examine witness. In such event, the other party shall be required to present evidence and legal argument as the arbitrator(s) may require for the making of an award. Such waiver will not allow for a default judgment against the non-paying party in the absence of evidence presented as provided for above. G. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract will include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including ENGINEER, and ENGINEER’s consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: 1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity will allow complete relief to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; 2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration, and which will arise in such proceedings; 3. such other individual or entity is subject to arbitration under a contract with either OWNER or CONTRACTOR, or consents to being joined in the arbitration; and 4. the consolidation or joinder is in compliance with the arbitration administrator’s procedural rules. H. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award. I. Except as may be required by Laws or Regulations, neither party nor an arbitrator may disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration hereunder without the prior written consent of both parties, with the exception of any disclosure required by Laws and Regulations or the Contract. To the extent any disclosure is allowed pursuant to the exception, the disclosure must be strictly and narrowly limited to maintain confidentiality to the extent possible. 06/2024 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 178.24.200 00 80 00 - 13 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees SC-17.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.02. 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees A. For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article, the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final resolution proceedings, in an equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the court, arbitrator, arbitration panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution, taking into account the parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with the final result. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PART 4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 SUMMARY OF WORK 178.24.200 PAGE 01 11 00 - 1 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL GENERAL The Work to be performed under this Project shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary or required to complete the work in all respects as shown on the Contract Drawings and as herein specified. All work, materials, and services not expressly shown or called for in the Contract Documents which may be necessary to complete the construction of the Work in good faith shall be performed, furnished, and installed by CONTRACTOR as though originally so specified or shown, at no increase in cost to OWNER. WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The work comprises of the construction of a new drinking water well pump station, consisting of a masonry block structure with standing seam metal roofing; furnishing and installing a 250 HP motor with one vertical line shaft pump, piping, valves, fittings, flow meter and appurtenances, gas chlorination facilities, HVAC, electrical, controls, connecting to existing standby emergency generator, wiring, telemetry, owner-provided RTU, conduits for future electric and controls wiring, grading, site work, exterior DI piping including a 6” drain, 8” pump to waste, 10” discharge, and 12” waterline connection to existing 16” tank outlet, and all other associated items and appurtenant work. The work is located in Tooele County near Lake Point at the location identified on the Contract Drawings included herein. CONTRACT METHOD The Work hereunder will be constructed under a single unit price contract. CONTRACTOR USE OF PROJECT SITE CONTRACTOR's use of the Project Site shall be limited to its construction operations, including on-site storage of materials, on-site fabrication facilities. As an agent of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR will have the OWNER’s right to access the site across Bureau of Reclamation lands on established roads. If required for CONTRACTOR’s access, CONTRACTOR may improve the access roads. PROJECT SECURITY CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions to protect the Project and CONTRACTOR's facilities from fire, theft, and vandalism, and the public from unnecessary exposure to injury. CHANGES IN THE WORK It is mutually understood that it is inherent in the nature of public works construction that some changes in the plans and specifications may be necessary during the course of construction to adjust them to unforeseen field conditions, and that it is of the essence of 06/2024 SUMMARY OF WORK 178.24.200 PAGE 01 11 00 - 2 the Contract to recognize a normal and expected margin of change. ENGINEER shall have the right to make such changes, from time to time, in the plans, in the character if the Work, and in the scope of the Project as may be necessary or desirable to ensure the completion of the Work in the most satisfactory manner without invalidating the Contract. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 WORK RESTRICTIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 01 14 00 - 1 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 GENERAL OWNER and/or utility owners may be working within the Project area while this contract is in progress. If so, CONTRACTOR shall schedule his work in conjunction with these other entities to minimize mutual interference. All compaction and other testing requirements specified shall be provided and paid for by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER of the schedule for materials testing as required in Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing and Section 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services a minimum of 24 hours in advance in order to provide ENGINEER time to be present during desired testing. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining copies of testing reports or data and ensuring that the Work is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of Private rights-of-way 72 hours prior to work being performed across owner’s right-of-way. If required to work in City Streets or Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT) right-of- way, CONTRACTOR shall notify right-of-way owner 72 hours prior to work being performed therein. Work within the City Streets or UDOT right -of-way shall be in accordance with required permits and any license agreement with OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and comply with all required permits. CONTRACTOR must work with all adjacent property owners to ensure no harm or damage is caused to homes or property during construction of the project. Vibration detection monitoring equipment will be installed by CONTRACTOR during excavation and backfilling operations only. If construction activities result in excessive vibration that could result in damage to nearby existing facilities such as storage tanks, valve vaults, or detention pond, CONTRACTOR shall modify construction methods such that detected vibration remains below acceptable levels to prevent damage to existing facilities. CONTRACTOR shall perform all work within OWNER property and existing BLM easements. CONTRACTOR responsible for ensuring they are within existing easements and easement requirements. (See Appendix A for Easement Documentation) MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Work Restrictions shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as part of the various items to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 WORK RESTRICTIONS 178.24.200 PAGE 01 14 00 - 2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 1 SECTION 01 22 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL All work completed under this contract shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications and will be measured by ENGINEER/OWNER. The quantities appearing on the Bid Schedule are approximate only and are prepared for the comparison of bids. Payment to CONTRACTOR on bid items with unit prices other than "Lump Sum" will be made for actual quantities of work performed and accepted, or material furnished in accordance with the Contract. The scheduled quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished may be increased or decreased in accordance with the General Conditions. The term "Lump Sum" when used as an item of payment will mean complete payment for the work described in the contract. When a complete structure, portion of work, or unit is specified "Lump Sum" as the unit of measurement, the unit will include fittings, accessories, and all work necessary to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified. When the accepted quantities of work vary from the quantities in the Bid Schedule, CONTRACTOR shall accept as payment in full, so far as contract items are concerned, payment at the original contract unit prices for the work done. OWNER reserves the right to add to or delete from quantities listed in the bid schedule in order to match the total bid with the budgeted money available. BASE BID SCHEDULE BID ITEM NO. 1 – “MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION” GENERAL This bid item is provided to cover CONTRACTOR's cost for general and miscellaneous responsibilities and operations not normally attributed to any other single bid item within this schedule. This shall include, but is not limited to, work described or enumerated in Section 01 71 13 - Mobilization. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Mobilization shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for the completion of the work as required in Section 01 71 13 - Mobilization. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment will be made at the contract lump sum bid price. Payments will be made in accordance with the following schedule: a. When 10% of the original contract amount is earned, 25% of the amount bid for mobilization will be paid. b. When 25% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 50% of the amount bid for mobilization will be paid. c. When 50% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 75% of the amount bid for mobilization will be paid. d. When 75% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 100% of the amount bid for mobilization will be paid. 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 2 BID ITEM NO. 2 – “CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING” GENERAL “Construction Surveying” is provided to cover the CONTRACTOR's cost for general and miscellaneous responsibilities and operations associated with Construction Surveying. Construction Surveying shall be performed by a registered professional land surveyor in the State of Utah. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Construction Surveying” shall be measured based on the percentage of work completed for the project according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Construction Surveying” will be made at the contract lump sum bid price as shown and accepted by OWNER and ENGINEER in the Bid Schedule. Payments will be made in accordance with the following schedule: a. When 5% of the original contract amount is earned, 75% of the amount bid for construction surveying will be paid. b. When 50% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 100% of the amount bid for construction surveying will be paid. BID ITEM NO. 3 – “STORM WATER CONTROL” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Preparation and Implementation of SWPPP (Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan) is not required. “Storm Water Control” shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for the prevention of discharge of mud from the Owner’s site as completed by CONTRACTOR. 1. BASIS OF PAYMENT “Storm Water Control” shall be paid for at the lump sum bid price as a percentage of work completed. Payment shall be considered full compensation for prevention of the discharge of mud from the Owner’s site. The implementation shall include installing and maintaining silt fences, rock or sand filled bags, straw bales or wattles for inlet protection, construction entrance, and other best management practices (BMP), and monitoring, as required by the judgment of the CONTRACTOR. Payment shall be made as follows: a. When 10% of the original contract amount is earned, 25% of the amount bid for implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan will be paid. b. When 25% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 50% of the amount bid for implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan will be paid. c. When 50% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 75% of the amount bid for implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan will be paid. d. When 75% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 100% of the amount bid for implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan will be paid. 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 3 BID ITEM NO. 4 – “MATERIALS TESTING” GENERAL “Materials Testing” is provided to cover the CONTRACTOR’S cost for general and miscellaneous responsibilities and operations associated with Materials Testing. This item shall include, but is not limited to, work described or enumerated in Section 01 45 23 - Testing Agency Services. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Materials Testing” shall be measured based on the percentage of work completed for the project according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule. Basis of Payment Payment for “Materials Testing” will be made at the contract lump sum bid price as shown and accepted by OWNER and ENGINEER in the Bid Schedule. Payments will be made in accordance with the following schedule: a. When 10% of the original contract amount is earned, 25% of the amount bid for material testing will be paid. b. When 25% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 50% of the amount bid for material testing will be paid. c. When 50% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 75% of the amount bid for material testing will be paid. d. When 75% of the original contract amount is earned, an additional 25% for a total of 100% of the amount bid for material testing will be paid. BID ITEM NO. 5 – “CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING” GENERAL This bid item is intended to cover the CONTRACTOR’s cost for general and miscellaneous responsibilities and operations associated with Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping. This shall include, but is not limited to work described or enumerated in 31 11 00 – Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping” shall not be measured, but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for the cost of the Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping necessary for the preparation of the construction site for the well house as shown on the Contract Drawings. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping” shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price for the completion of all Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping required to prepare the site for the construction of the well house as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 6 – “RMP UTILTY CONNECTION AND TRANSFORMER SETUP” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “RMP Utility Connection” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for all work required to connect the site to Rocky Mountain Power service and set up the required transformer as shown on the Contract Drawings. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “RMP Utility Connection” including the Ground Sleeve Vault and Transformer Setup shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price for all work required to connect the site to Rocky Mountain Power Service and as specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 4 and equipment necessary to connect the site to Rocky Mountain Power service and set up the required transformer as required in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. BID ITEM NO. 7 – “RETAINING WALLS FOR TRANSFORMER” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Retaining Walls for Transfomer” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for furnishing and installing the retaining walls according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls” shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price for completion of the structure as shown on the contract drawings and specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for constructing the retaining walls us pre-fabricated blocks, excavation, dewatering, on-site disposal of excess excavated material, importing and compaction of structural fill and drain rock, perforated drain pipe, furnishing and installing all reinforcement, forms, and backfill for foundations, walls, miscellaneous items to complete the concrete retaining walls as recommended by manufacture of the pre-fabricated blocks and other related items not paid elsewhere for a complete retaining wall. BID ITEM NO. 8 – “WELL HOUSE STRUCTURE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Well House Structure” shall not be measured, but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for furnishing and constructing the concrete structure for the well house as required in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Well House Structure” shall be made at the contract unit lump sum bid price for completion of the structure as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for constructing the reinforced concrete structure, excavation, dewatering, on-site disposal of excess excavated material, importing and compaction of structural fill and drain rock, perforated drain pipe, furnishing and installing all steel reinforcement, forms, waterstop, and concrete for foundations, walls, and slabs, pump access hatch, man doors, coating; concrete equipment pads, pump room and chlorine room concrete pump pedestals; trench drain grating; backfill and compaction; and miscellaneous items to complete the structure of the well house as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein and other related items not paid elsewhere for a complete reinforced concrete structure. BID ITEM NO. 9 - “PRE-FABRICATED METAL STAIRS” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Pre-Fabricated Metal Stairs” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Pre-Fabricated Metal Stairs” shall be considered full compensation for all work completed under this bid item and shall be paid for at the contract lump sum price. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment required for supply and installation of pre-fabricated metal 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 5 concrete stairs, excavation, dewatering, construction of concrete landing pads at the top and bottom of the stairs, on-site disposal of excess excavated material, importing and compaction of structural fill, furnishing and installing of the stairs, backfill and compaction; and miscellaneous items to complete the pre-fabricated metal stairs as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein and other related items not paid elsewhere. BID ITEM NO. 10 – “SITE GRADING, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Site Grading, Backfill, and Compaction” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis and shall include furnishing, installing, grading, and compacting the site, excluding the preparation of the surface for the gravel access road (paid under Bid Item 22). BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Site Grading Backfill, and Compaction” shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price and shall be considered full compensation for all work completed under this bid item. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, material, and equipment necessary for furnishing, placing, and compacting approved site fill material, general grading cleanup for all slopes, and all other incidentals not specifically paid for in other bid items but which are shown or otherwise required to complete the installation as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings and Specifications. BID ITEM NO. 11 – “FURNISH AND INSTALL PUMP AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Furnish and Install Pump and Motor Assembly Complete” shall not be measured, but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for furnishing and installing the complete pump assembly according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Furnish and Install Pump and Motor Assembly Complete” shall be made at the contract lump sum price for complete installation of an acceptable pump assembly. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for furnishing, installing, and testing the pump assembly as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Payment shall include, furnishing and installing the modifications to the existing surface conductor and casing pipes, air vent; sleeves and washers; pump bowls, shafting, pump column, level sensor and sounding tubes, oil reservoir, discharge head, coatings and linings, motor, testing, and all other related items not paid elsewhere (Electrical gear and connections paid under Bid Item 16). BID ITEM NO. 12 – “WELL HOUSE INTERNAL PIPING COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Well House Internal Piping Complete” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis according to the amount defined in the bid schedule. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Well House Internal Piping Complete” shall be paid for at the contract bid price and shall be considered complete compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials necessary, for piping, valves, flowmeter, buried couplings, floor drains, from the well head to the buried couplings outside of the well 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 6 house, including backfilling, compaction, removal and on-site disposal of excess excavated material, flushing, disinfection and testing; and all other operation and materials required to complete the work as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 13 – “CHLORINATION SYSTEM COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Chlorination System Complete” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for furnishing and installing the gas chlorination system according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Chlorination System Complete” shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price for completion of all pipes, valves, fittings, and equipment necessary to construct a safe and fully functional gas chlorination system as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment for furnishing and installing the water circulation pump; piping and tubing; necessary valves, fittings, and pressure gauges; chlorine gas ejector box; scales and safety rack; rotameter and other dosing equipment; injection quill and saddle; system testing and training, and all other appurtenances and other related items not paid elsewhere for a complete and operable gas chlorination system. BID ITEM NO. 14 – “ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Electrical System Complete” shall not be measured but shall be made at the contract lump sum bid for furnishing and installing all electrical equipment not paid for elsewhere according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Electrical System Complete” shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price for completion of all electrical work as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment for furnishing and installing all electrical at the well pump house, panelboards, VFD, transformers, lighting, service outlets, pressure switches, pressure transducers, intrusion switches, flood switch, buried conduits, electrical service connection, wiring for equipment controls and signals, grounding, antenna, pump motor terminators (motor is furnished and installed under Bid Item 10), lighting protection system, connections to water quality monitoring equipment, chlorine dosing equipment, HVAC, installing conductors into PLC panel; and all other items as shown on the Contract Drawings required for a complete and operable electrical system excluding all work done under Bid Item 6 and work by others. The PLC panel will be supplied and installed by SKM who will land (terminate) the conductors. BID ITEM NO. 15 – “ELECTRICAL SYSTEM – SOFT START COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Electrical System – Soft Start Complete” shall not be measured but shall be made at the contract lump sum bid for furnishing and installing all electrical equipment not paid for elsewhere according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 7 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Electrical System – Soft Start Complete” shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price for supply, installation, and commissioning of a soft start motor starter and all other items as shown on the Contract Drawings required for a complete and operable electrical system excluding all work done under Bid Item 6 and work by others. BID ITEM NO. 16 – “HVAC SYSTEM COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Furnish and Install HVAC Systems Complete” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for furnishing and installing the HVAC system according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Furnish and Install HVAC Systems Complete” shall be made at the contract lump sum bid price for HVAC work as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to all labor, materials, and equipment for furnishing and installing all HVAC equipment, including but not limited to, wire and conduit per Division 26, instrumentation, split system heat pumps with exterior mounted condensing units, electric unit heaters, ductwork, exhaust fans, supports; filters, louvers; and all other related items as shown on the Contract Drawings not paid elsewhere. BID ITEM NO. 17 – “10-INCH DISCHARGE PIPELINE AND FITTINGS COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “10-Inch Discharge Pipeline and Fittings Complete” shall be measured by the Lineal Foot starting after the flexible coupling (Sta. 7+23.6) to the connection point at the existing 12” tank fill pipeline (roughly Sta. 8+71.2) and shall include furnishing and installing all discharge pipelines, valves and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings. Payment shall be made according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Discharge Piping” shall be made at the contract unit bid price and shall be considered complete compensation for furnishing and installing all discharge piping and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, materials necessary for furnishing and installing all discharge pipes, connections and valves; excavation and dewatering; installing piping and fittings; imported sand pipe zone material, bedding, backfilling with select or native material, compaction, removal and on-site disposal of excess excavated material, flushing, disinfection and testing; protection of buried utilities, potholing as needed, looping and rerouting any of the existing utilities; restoration of all surface improvements; and all other operations and materials required to complete the work as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 18 – “12-INCH DISCHARGE PIPELINE AND FITTINGS COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “12-Inch Discharge Pipeline and Fittings Complete” shall be measured by the Lineal Foot starting at the existing 12-inch tank fill pipeline (Sta. 10+00) to the connection point at the existing 16” tank discharge pipe (roughly Sta. 10+51.5) and shall include furnishing and installing all discharge pipelines, valves and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings. Payment shall be made 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 8 according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “12-Inch Discharge Piping” shall be made at the contract unit bid price and shall be considered complete compensation for furnishing and installing all discharge piping and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, materials necessary for furnishing and installing all discharge pipes, connections and valves; excavation and dewatering; installing piping and fittings; imported sand pipe zone material, bedding, backfilling with select or native material, compaction, removal and on-site disposal of excess excavated material, flushing, disinfection and testing; protection of buried utilities, potholing as needed, looping and rerouting any of the existing utilities; restoration of all surface improvements; and all other operations and materials required to complete the work as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 19 – “8-INCH PUMP-TO-WASTE PIPELINE AND FITTINGS COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “8-Inch Pump to Waste Pipeline and Fittings Complete” shall be measured by the Lineal Foot starting at the existing pump to waste discharge pipeline (roughly Sta 3+00) to the flexible coupling (roughly Sta 3+88.0) and shall include furnishing and installing all pump-to-waste pipeline, fittings, and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings. Payment shall be made according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “8-Inch Pump to Waste Pipeline and Fittings Complete” shall be made at the contract unit bid price and shall be considered complete compensation for furnishing and installing all pump-to-waste piping and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, materials necessary for furnishing and installing all pump-to-waste pipes, connections and valves; excavation and dewatering; installing piping and fittings, imported sand pipe zone material, bedding, backfilling with select or native material, compaction, removal and on-site disposal of excess excavated material, testing; protection of buried utilities, potholing as needed, looping and rerouting any of the existing utilities; restoration of all surface improvements; and all other operations and materials required to complete the work as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 20 – “6-INCH FLOOR DRAIN PIPELINE AND FITTINGS COMPLETE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “6-Inch Floor Drain Pipeline and Fittings Complete” shall be measured by the Lineal Foot starting at a connection to the existing 6-inch floor drain pipeline (roughly Sta 1+00) to the flexible coupling (roughly Sta 1+83.5) and also a second pipeline from the connection to the new drain pipeline to the flexible coupling (roughly 16.4 feet in length) and shall include furnishing and installing all floor drain pipeline, fittings and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings. Payment shall be made according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 9 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “6-Inch Floor Drain Pipeline and Fittings Complete” shall be made at the contract unit bid price and shall be considered complete compensation for furnishing and installing all floor drain piping and connections as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, materials necessary for excavation, dewatering; installing piping and fittings; imported floor drain gravel (or sand, bedding, backfilling with select or native material, compaction, removal and on- site disposal of excess excavated material, testing; protection of buried utilities, potholing as needed; looping and rerouting any of the existing utilities; restoration of all surface improvements; and all other operations and materials required to complete the work as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 21 – “RE-CONSTRUCT ENTRANCE ROAD” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Re-Construct Entrance Road” shall be measured by the Square Foot for re-construction of the existing entrance road as shown on the Contract Drawings. Payment shall be made according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Re-Construct Entrance Road” shall be made at the contract unit bid price and shall be considered complete compensation for furnishing and constructing a 4-inch thick road base road as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, materials necessary for excavation, imported road base, compaction, removal and on-site disposal of excess excavated material, testing; restoration of all surface improvements; and all other operations and materials required to complete the work as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 22 – “CONSTRUCT TRAILS TO TANK AND DISCHARGE PIPE” METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Construct Trails to Tank and Discharge Pipe” shall be measured by the Lineal Foot for a three feet wide trail to be constructed starting at the parking area ending at the top of the existing tank and starting at the driveway access to the existing well ending at the discharge pipe, as shown on the Contract Drawings. Payment shall be made according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule and as completed by CONTRACTOR. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Construct Trails to Tank and Discharge Pipe” shall be made at the contract unit bid price and shall be considered complete compensation for furnishing and installing all required imported road base and for installing OWNER provided well cuttings on the project site. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, materials necessary for excavation, backfilling with road base compaction, backfilling with well cuttings, removal and on- site disposal of excess excavated material, testing; restoration of all surface improvements; and all other operations and materials required to complete the work as herein described and as shown on the Contract Drawings. BID ITEM NO. 23 – “TESTING AND COMMISSIONING” 06/2024 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 01 22 00 - 10 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT “Testing and Commissioning” shall not be measured but shall be paid for on a lump sum basis according to the amount defined in the Bid Schedule. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for “Testing and Commissioning” shall be made at the contract lump sum price for all work required for testing the completed well house and the components therein. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, and materials required for all work performed. Testing shall include, but not be limited to, verifying all components are working in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications, verifying all subsystems are in working condition, verifying that the pump motor is wired in the correct direction, and verifying all circuits and panels are wired correctly. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 178.24.200 01 30 00- 1 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordinate scheduling, Submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. After OWNER occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of OWNER's activities. UDOT, OWNER, and/or utility owners may be working within the project area while this contract is in progress. If so, CONTRACTOR shall schedule his work in conjunction with these other organizations to minimize mutual interference. All existing Oquirrh Mountain Water Company waterlines and service connections shall remain active during the construction of this project. All connections to the existing waterlines, except those being hot-tapped, shall only be done upon successful completion of mainline installation and testing. Water service to this area can be interrupted for a maximum of 4 hours. CONTRACTOR shall provide a minimum notice of 24 hours to each home or business affected. A copy of CONTRACTOR’S notification letter shall be reviewed and approved by OWNER prior to distribution. If required to work in City Streets or Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT) right-of- way, CONTRACTOR shall notify UDOT 72 hours prior to work being performed therein. Work within the City Streets or UDOT right-of-way shall be in accordance with their required permit and their license agreement with OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and comply with all required permits. Coordination with Adjacent Property Owner Once each week, CONTRACTOR shall hand deliver or mail a written "Construction Status Update Notice" to all residents, businesses, schools and property owners adjacent to and affected by the Work. Notice shall be on CONTRACTOR's company letterhead paper and be secured to doorknob should occupants not be home. Obtain ENGINEER's review of notice prior to distribution. As a minimum the notice shall contain the following: name and phone number of CONTRACTOR's representative for the project work anticipated for the next 7 days including work locations and work by subcontractors and utility companies rough estimate of construction schedule through end of project anticipated driveway approach closures 06/2024 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 178.24.200 01 30 00- 2 anticipated water, sewer or power outages anticipated vehicular traffic impacts, rerouting or lane closures anticipated pedestrian impacts and sidewalk closures changes to public transportation bus routes any other construction or work items which will impact or restrict the normal use of streets and amenities Failure to comply with this contract provision is considered grounds for project suspension per Article 16.01 of the General Conditions (EJCDC 00 70 00). FIELD ENGINEERING OWNER shall provide the following construction staking at no cost to CONTRACTOR. Benchmark network throughout the construction zone Pipeline alignment stakes at approximately 100-foot intervals and all bends and designated changes in grade. Stake locations for air vents and other fittings Construction staking and surveying shall be performed by a registered Land Surveyor in the State of Utah. CONTRACTOR shall provide all other survey construction staking as necessary to complete the required work according to the contract documents. ENGINEER shall not be responsible for stakes, etc. removed through negligence of CONTRACTOR and in that event shall be compensated by CONTRACTOR for re- staking efforts. CONTRACTOR shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify ENGINEER of discrepancies discovered. Control datum for survey is that shown on Contract Drawings. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. Promptly report to ENGINEER loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to coordinate with all property owners to determine the location of existing sewer and water service laterals. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to coordinate with all property owners during installation or relocation of existing service laterals. All service laterals shall be verified and indicated on the Record Drawings supplied by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING Prior to the commencement of work at the site, a preconstruction conference will be held at a mutually agreed time and place which shall be attended by CONTRACTOR’s 06/2024 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 178.24.200 01 30 00- 3 Project Manager, its superintendent, and its subcontractors as appropriate. Other attendees will be: ENGINEER and the Resident Project Representative (RPR) Representatives of OWNER Governmental representatives as appropriate Others as requested by CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or ENGINEER. Unless previously submitted to ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bring to the conference one copy of each of the following: Progress schedule Procurement schedule of major equipment and materials and items requiring long lead time Shop Drawings/Sample/Substitute or "Or Equal" submittal schedule. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda may include the following: CONTRACTOR's tentative schedules Transmittal, review, and distribution of CONTRACTOR's submittals Processing applications for payment Maintaining record documents Critical work sequencing Field decisions and Change Orders Use of project site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and OWNER's needs Major equipment deliveries and priorities CONTRACTOR's assignments for safety and first aid ENGINEER will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping the minutes and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. CONTRACTOR should plan on the conference taking no less than 4 hours PROGRESS MEETINGS CONTRACTOR shall schedule and hold regular on-site progress meetings at least weekly and at other times as required by ENGINEER or as required by progress of the work. CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and all subcontractors active on the site shall be represented at each meeting. CONTRACTOR may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its suppliers, manufacturers’, and other subcontractors. ENGINEER shall preside at the meetings and provide for keeping and distribution of the minutes. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the work, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems which may develop. At each construction progress meeting a progress report shall be presented by CONTRACTOR containing an updated Progress Schedule. Where the delayed completion date of a project phase is noted, CONTRACTOR shall describe the 06/2024 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 178.24.200 01 30 00- 4 anticipated delays or problems and outline the action plan being taken to resolve the issues. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 6/2024 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 178.24.200 01 33 00 - 1 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Wherever Submittals are required by the Contract Documents, transmit 5 copies of each Submittal to ENGINEER with a Submittal transmittal form which is acceptable to ENGINEER. Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised Submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic suffix, i.e., Submittal 1, Submittal 1.A, etc. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor and/or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and Specification section number, appropriate to Submittal. CONTRACTOR shall review Submittals prior to submission to ENGINEER. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed and dated, certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Identify any deviations from the Contract Documents on the Submittal transmittal form. Schedule Submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to ENGINEER at their business address. Coordinate submission of related items. Submittals shall be submitted sufficiently in advance to allow ENGINEER not less than ten regular working days for examining the drawings. These drawings shall be accurate, distinct, and complete and shall contain all required information, including satisfactory identification of items and unit assemblies in relation to the contract drawings and/or specifications. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may adversely affect successful performance of completed Work. If a Submittal is returned to CONTRACTOR marked “APPROVED”, or similar notification, formal revision and resubmission will not be required. If a Submittal is returned marked “APPROVED – MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”, or similar notification, CONTRACTOR shall make the corrections on the Submittal, however, formal revision and resubmission will not be required. Resubmittals If a Submittal is returned marked “AMEND AND RESUBMIT”, or similar notification, CONTRACTOR shall revise the Submittal and resubmit the required number of copies. Identify changes made since the previous submission. Rejected Submittals If a Submittal is returned marked “REJECTED – RESUBMIT”, or similar notification, it shall mean either that the proposed material or product does not satisfy the 6/2024 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 178.24.200 01 33 00 - 2 specification, the Submittal is so incomplete that is cannot be reviewed, or is a substitution request not submitted in accordance with Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements. CONTRACTOR shall prepare a new Submittal or submit a substitution request according to Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements and shall submit the required number of copies. Distribute copies of reviewed Submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. Unless noted otherwise, corrections indicated on Submittals shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as changes to the contract requirements. Fabrication or purchase of an item may only commence after ENGINEER has reviewed the pertinent Submittals and returned copies to CONTRACTOR marked either “APPROVED” or “APPROVED – MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”. ENGINEER's review of CONTRACTOR Submittals shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the entire responsibility for the corrections of details and dimensions. CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility and risk for any misfits due to any errors in CONTRACTOR Submittals. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for dimensions and quantities, coordinating with all trades, the design of adequate connections and details, and satisfactory and safe performance of the work. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. After review comments on the initial schedule are received from ENGINEER and OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall resubmit required revised data within ten days. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules. Submit computer generated horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6/2024 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 178.24.200 01 33 00 - 3 PRODUCT DATA Product Data: Submit to ENGINEER for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 78 50 - Project Closeout. SHOP DRAWINGS Shop Drawings: Submit to ENGINEER for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Fabrication of an item may be commenced only after ENGINEER has reviewed the pertinent submittals and returned copies to CONTRACTOR marked either "APPROVED", or "APPROVED - MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED". Corrections indicated on submittals shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as the basis of claims for extra work. When required by individual specification sections, provide shop drawings signed and sealed by professional engineer responsible for designing components shown on shop drawings. Include signed and sealed calculations to support design. Submit drawings and calculations in form suitable for submission to and approval by authorities having jurisdiction. Make revisions and provide additional information when required by authorities having jurisdiction. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 78 50 - Project Closeout. SAMPLES Whenever indicated in the Specifications or requested by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall submit at least 1 sample of each item or material to ENGINEER for acceptance at no additional cost to OWNER. Samples, as required herein, shall be submitted for acceptance prior to ordering such material for delivery to the jobsite, and shall be submitted in an orderly sequence so that dependent materials or equipment can be assembled and reviewed without causing delay in the Work. 6/2024 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 178.24.200 01 33 00 - 4 Unless otherwise specified, all colors and textures of specified items will be selected by ENGINEER from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products, or equipment lines. CERTIFICATES When specified in individual Specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER, in quantities specified for Product Data. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to ENGINEER. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS When specified in individual Specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to ENGINEER for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS When required in individual sections, have Manufacturer or Supplier provide qualified representative to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable and to make written report of observations and recommendations to ENGINEER. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 ABBREVIATIONS 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 1 SECTION 01 42 13 ABBREVIATIONS PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Wherever in these Specifications references are made to the standards, specifications, or other published data of the various national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. As a guide to the user of these Specifications, the following acronyms or abbreviations which may appear in these Specifications shall have the meanings indicated herein. ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS AAR Association of American Railroads AASHTO American Association of the State Highway and Transportation Officials ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (formerly AFBMA) ACI American Concrete Institute AGC American General Contractors AI The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American Nation Standards Institute, Inc. APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASOC American Society of Quality Control ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau BBC Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators International CEMA Conveyors Equipment Manufacturer's Association CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association DWQ Department of Water Quality DWR Drinking Water Regulations ECTC Erosion Control Technology Council EIA Electronic Industries Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency ETC Electrical Test Laboratories FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency 06/2024 ABBREVIATIONS 178.24.200 01 42 13 - 2 FHWA Federal Highway Administration FM Factory Mutual System HI Hydraulic Institute IBC International Building Code ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICC International Code Council ICC-ES International Code Council Evaluation Service IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society IFC International Fire Code IMC International Mechanical Code IME Institute of Makers of Explosives IPC International Plumbing Code ISA Instrument Society of America ISO International Organization of Standardization ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers LPI Lightning Protection Institute LRQA Lloyd’s Register Quality Assurance MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NBS National Bureau of Standards NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NISO National Information Standards Organization NSF NSF International (formerly National Sanitation Foundation) OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association RWMA Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SSPC Society for Protective Coating (formerly Steel Structure Painting Council) SSPWC Standard Specification for Public Works Construction UDOT Utah Department of Transportation UBC Uniform Building Code UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UPRR Union Pacific Railroad WCRSI Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute WRI Wire Reinforcements Institute, Inc. WWPA Western Wood Products Association PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 REFERENCE STANDARDS 178.24.200 01 42 19 - 1 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL QUALITY ASSURANCE TITLES OF SECTIONS AND PARAGRAPHS. Captions accompanying Specifications sections and paragraphs are for convenience of reference only, and do not form a part of the Specification. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS. Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the work is advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the drawings shall be waived because of any provision of, or omission from, said standards or requirements. SPECIALISTS, ASSIGNMENTS. In certain instances, specifications test requires (or implies) that specific work is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be engaged for the performance of that work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements and shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the work; also they are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of contract requirements remains with CONTRACTOR. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all Work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of all applicable codes and the applicable requirements of the following documents to the extent that the provisions of such documents are not in conflict with the requirements of these Specifications nor the applicable codes. Reference herein to "Building Code" or “Uniform Building Code” shall mean the International Building Code of the International Code Council. The latest edition of the code as approved and used by the local agency as of the date of award, as adopted by the agency having jurisdiction, shall apply to the Work herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings and the other Contract Document, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the attention of ENGINEER for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any materials or labor. CONTRACTOR shall bid the most stringent requirements. APPLICABLE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. CONTRACTOR shall construct the Work specified herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents 06/2024 REFERENCE STANDARDS 178.24.200 01 42 19 - 2 and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and Specifications listed herein; except, that wherever references to "Standard Specifications" are made, the provisions therein for measurement and payment shall not apply. References in the Contract Documents to "Standard Specifications" shall mean the Contract Documents including all current supplements, addenda, and revisions thereof. References herein to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including changes and amendments thereto. UTAH DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY. Wells, tanks, pumping stations and culinary water pipelines shall conform to the requirements of Utah Administrative Code Rule R 309. Water and sewer pipeline installation shall conform to the requirements of Utah Administrative Code Rule R 317-3-2.9 “Protection of Water Supplies” for horizontal and vertical separation. UTAH DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (UDOT) REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR's work on UDOT property or right-of-way shall conform to UDOT’s latest edition of Standard Specifications For Road and Bridge Construction. U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE) REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR's work shall conform to COE Specifications in accordance with Section 404 of the Clean Water Act for excavation in wetlands. Reference herein to APWA shall mean the latest edition of the “Manual of Standard Specifications” and “Manual of Standard Plans” as prepared by the American Public Works Association and the Associated General Contractors of America. All provisions of the Manual of Standard Specifications, Latest Edition and Manual of Standard Plans, Latest Edition both published by the Utah Chapter of the American Public Works Association are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. The publications may be purchased separately from the Utah Technology Transfer Center, Utah State University, 4111 Old Main Hill, Logan, UT 84322-4111. Any conflicts, between the technical specifications, drawings, and other provisions or documents contained in the Contract Form or Contract Documents versus provisions contained in the Manual of Standard Specifications, Latest Edition and Manual of Standard Plans, Latest Edition published by the Utah Chapter of the American Public Works Association, shall be resolved in favor of the technical specifications, drawing, and provisions contained in the Contract form or Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING 178.24.200 01 45 00- 1 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This Section outlines responsibilities for controlling quality of materials, products and workmanship. MATERIALS All materials incorporated in the project shall be new and shall fully comply with the Specifications. Unless otherwise clearly provided in the Specifications, all workmanship, equipment, materials, and articles incorporated in the Work covered by the Contract are to be of the best available grade of their respective kinds. Whenever, in the specifications, any material, article, device, product, fixture, form, type of construction, or process indicated or specified by patent or proprietary name, by name of manufacturer, or by catalog number, such specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and facilitating the description of the material or process desired and shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or approved equal" and CONTRACTOR may in such case, upon receiving ENGINEER's approval, purchase and use any item, type, or process which shall be substantially equal in every respect to that indicated or specified. Materials and equipment may be used in the Work based upon receipt of a Supplier’s certificate of compliance. Certificate must be in possession of CONTRACTOR and reviewed by ENGINEER prior to use. Quality Assurance Testing by OWNER and/or ENGINEER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility to furnish materials and work in full compliance with Contract Documents. MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification before proceeding. When required in individual sections, submit manufacturer’s instructions in the quantity required for product data, delivery, handling, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, balancing, and finishing, as appropriate. WORKMANSHIP Maintain performance control and supervision over Subcontractors, Suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce work in accordance with Contract Documents. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. Provide suitable qualified personnel to produce specified quality. 06/2024 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING 178.24.200 01 45 00-2 Ensure finishes match approved samples. TOLERANCES Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES Testing agency and testing for quality control and material testing shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR as part of the project. Results of testing shall be reported to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER on site. Reports of the testing shall be transmitted directly to ENGINEER. Materials to be supplied under this contract will be tested and/or inspected either at their place of origin or at the site of the work by the testing agency. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER written notification well in advance of actual readiness of materials to be tested and/or inspected at point of origin so ENGINEER may witness testing by the testing agency. Satisfactory tests and inspections at the point of origin shall not be construed as a final acceptance of the material nor shall it preclude retesting or reinspection at the site of the work. CONTRACTOR shall furnish such samples of materials as are requested by the ENGINEER, without charge. No material shall be used until reports from the testing agency have been reviewed and accepted by ENGINEER. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS Examine areas and conditions under which materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE Refer to Section 00 73 00 "Supplementary Conditions" sub-section SC 10.03 "Resident Project Representative". QUALITY CONTROL TESTING ENGINEER’s failure to detect any defective Work or materials does not prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor does it obligate ENGINEER for acceptance. CONTRACTOR shall provide 24-hours minimum notice to ENGINEER for all testing required by these specifications so ENGINEER may coordinate or be present during testing. 06/2024 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING 178.24.200 01 45 00-3 TESTING ACCEPTANCE AND FREQUENCY Minimum Quality Control Testing Frequency: As defined in Table 01 45 00-1, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to ensure that all testing is performed at the frequencies shown. CONTRACTOR shall uncover any work at no cost to OWNER to allow the testing agency to perform required testing at the frequency shown. Acceptance of Defective Work: As defined in Article 14.04 of the General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. PREPARATION Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. 06/2024 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING 178.24.200 01 45 00-4 TABLE 01 45 00-1: QUALITY CONTROL TESTING FREQUENCY SYSTEM or MATERIAL TESTS MINIMUM REQUIRED FREQUENCY SUBGRADE AND BACKFILL MATERIALS Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines Field Density 1 test per 200 linear feet per 1.5 feet of backfill thickness placed. Laboratory 1 test for each material type which includes proctor, classification, and gradation. Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures Field Density 1 test per 200 linear feet per 1.5 feet of backfill thickness placed. Laboratory 1 test for each material type which includes proctor, classification, and gradation. Section 32 11 23 Road Base - Untreated Base Course Field Density Base course subgrade: 1 test per 2,000 square feet of area. Base course: 1 test per 2,000 square feet of area. Laboratory Base course: 1 test for each material type which includes proctor, classification, and gradation. ASPHALT Section 32 12 16 Hot-Mix Asphalt Concrete Paving Mix Design Marshall Test Method: 1 test initially per each type of material and each change in target, and for each day of production thereafter. Specific Gravity: 1 per each Marshall Test Extraction: 1 test per each Marshall Test Field Density Bituminous surfaces: 1 test per 2,000 square feet placed or part thereof. Asphalt Thickness and Core Density Bituminous surfaces: 1 test sample every 300 linear feet of completed roadway. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE Section 3 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Slump 1 test every day of placement (if less than 100 cubic yards in a day), 1 test for every 100 cubic yards, or 1 test for each 3,000 square feet of surface area for slabs and more frequently if batching appears inconsistent. Entrained air 1 test with slump test. Ambient and concrete temperatures 1 test with slump test. Water cement ratio. to be verified and provided with batch tickets. 06/2024 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING 178.24.200 01 45 00-5 - END OF SECTION - SYSTEM or MATERIAL TESTS MINIMUM REQUIRED FREQUENCY Section 3 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Compressive strength 1 set of 5 cylinders. 1 test every day of placement (if less than 100 cubic yards in a day), 1 test for every 100 cubic yards, or 1 test for each 3,000 square feet of surface area for slabs, and more frequently if batching appears inconsistent. NOTES: 1 Additional tests shall be conducted when variations occur due to the contractor's operations, weather conditions, site conditions, etc. 2 Classification, moisture content, Atterberg limits and specific gravity tests shall be conducted for each compaction test if applicable. 3 Tests can substitute for same tests required under "Aggregates" (from bins or source), although gradations will be required when blending aggregates. 4 Aggregate moisture tests are to be conducted in conjunction with concrete strength tests for water/cement calculations. 06/2024 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING 178.24.200 01 45 00-6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 01 45 23 - 1 SECTION 01 45 23 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing Construction Quality Control Testing of all soils, concrete, etc. as required by the various sections of these Specifications. This section includes the following: Use of independent testing agency Control testing report submittal requirements Responsibilities of testing agency RELATED WORK Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 22 00 Measurement and Payment REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D 3740 Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. ASTM D 4561 Standard Practice for Quality Control Systems for Organizations Producing and Applying Bituminous Paving Materials ASTM E 329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. DEFINITIONS Independent Testing Agency: A testing agency NOT owned by CONTRACTOR, and an agency that does not have any preferential affiliation or association with CONTRACTOR, or any of CONTRACTOR’s Subcontractors and Suppliers other than entering into a contract with CONTRACTOR to perform the duties defined in these Specifications. Professional Engineer: An engineer who complies with Utah licensing law and is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 06/2024 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 01 45 23 - 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE CONTRACTOR shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency which complies with ASTM D 3740, ASTM D 4561, and ASTM E 329 to test materials for contract compliance. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures If CONTRACTOR is employing and paying for an independent testing agency, prior to start of Work, submit testing agency’s name, address, telephone number and the following: Concrete Technician: Approved by ENGINEER or ACI certified. Person charged with engineering managerial responsibility Professional engineer on staff to review services Level of certification of technicians TESTING AGENCY SUBMITTALS Field Test Report: Submit report no later than the end of the current day. Laboratory Test Report: Submit original report within 48 hours after test results are determined. Final Summary Report: Submit prior to final payment On all reports include: Project title, number and date of the report Date, time and location of test Name and address of material Supplier Identification of product being tested and type of test performed Identify whether test is initial test or retest Results of testing and interpretation of results Name of technician who performed the testing RESPONSIBILITIES OF TESTING AGENCY Calibrate testing equipment at least annually with devices with an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or acceptable values of natural physical constraints. Provide sufficient personnel at site and cooperate with CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and OWNER’s Representative in performance of testing service. Secure samples using procedures specified in the applicable testing code. Perform testing of products in accordance with applicable sections of the Contract Documents. Immediately report any compliance or noncompliance of materials and mixes to CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER’s Representative. 06/2024 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 01 45 23 - 3 When an out-of-tolerance condition exists, perform additional inspections and testing until the specified tolerance is attained, and identify retesting on test reports. LIMITS ON TESTING AGENCY AUTHORITY Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. Agency may not suspend Work. Agency has no authority to accept Work for OWNER. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Testing agency services shall be measured or paid as provided in Section 01 22 00- Measurement and Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 01 45 23 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES 06/2024 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 178.24.200 01 50 00 – 1 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This section covers temporary utilities, including electricity, lighting, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities; temporary controls, including barriers, protection of work, and water control; and construction facilities, including parking, progress cleaning, and temporary buildings. TEMPORARY UTILITIES Temporary Electricity: CONTRACTOR shall provide, maintain, and pay for all power required by CONTRACTOR, including electrical service to CONTRACTORS field office. Temporary Lighting: CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary lighting required for execution of his work and for employee and public safety. As a minimum, lighting levels during working hours shall meet the requirements of OSHA Subsection 1926.56 illumination. Temporary Heating and Cooling Provide heating and cooling devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Temporary Ventilation Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Telephone Service: CONTRACTOR shall provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to the field office at time of project mobilization. Temporary Water Service CONTRACTOR shall provide for all his workers on the project, adequate and reasonably convenient uncontaminated drinking water supply. All facilities shall comply with the regulations of the local and State Departments of Health. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to arrange for water, both potable and non- potable water. When water is taken from a city water system or any other potable water supply source for construction purposes, suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent cross connections and contamination of water supply. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain sanitary facilities for his employees and his subcontractors' employees that will comply with the regulations of the local and State Departments of Health. TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES 06/2024 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 178.24.200 01 50 00 – 2 TEMPORARY CONTROLS Barriers: Provide barriers as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. Project Security CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions to protect the project and CONTRACTOR's facilities from fire, theft, and vandalism, and the public from unnecessary exposure to injury. Entry Control: Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site. Allow entrance only to authorized persons. Dust Control: Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. Give all unpaved streets, roads, detours, or haul roads used in the construction area an approved dust-preventive treatment or periodically water to prevent dust. Applicable environmental regulations for dust prevention shall be strictly enforced. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents, pests and insects from damaging the Work. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. All chemicals used during construction or furnished for project operation whether defoliant, soil sterilant, herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, shall show approval of the U.S. Department of Agriculture. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict accordance with the printed instruction of the manufacturer. Protection of Work: CONTRACTOR shall protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specifications sections. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary and removable protection for installed products, and shall control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. Open Burning: No open burning of waste materials will be allowed. Explosives and Blasting: The use of explosives on the work will not be permitted. Noise Abatement: In inhabited areas, particularly residential, operations shall be performed in a manner to minimize unnecessary noise generation. STORM AND GROUND WATER CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at all times during construction, ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and properly dispose of all water entering the excavation or other parts of the work, whether the water be from surface or underground water sources. TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES 06/2024 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 178.24.200 01 50 00 – 3 In excavation, fill, and grading operations, care shall be taken to disturb the pre- existing drainage pattern as little as possible. Particular care shall be taken not to direct drainage water into private property or into streets or drainage ways inadequate for the increased flow. CONTRACTOR shall maintain effective means to minimize the quantity of sediments leaving the work area either by storm water or CONTRACTOR's own dewatering operations. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining required permits and complying with all City, State, and Federal storm water management regulations and requirements, including preparing and implementing a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for Construction Activities. If required, CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the Notice of Intent and the SWPPP to the OWNER for review and approval. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES VEHICULAR ACCESS Construct temporary access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area, of width and load bearing capacity to accommodate unimpeded traffic for construction purposes. Extend and relocate vehicular access as Work progress requires, provide detours as necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. Location of temporary access roads and detours shall be approved by ENGINEER. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of obstructions. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. When possible, use existing on-site roads for construction traffic. Parking: CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary parking areas to accommodate use of construction personnel. Parking shall be located in an area approved by ENGINEER. Progress Cleaning CONTRACTOR shall maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain the site in a clean and orderly condition. Upon completion of work, repair all damage caused by equipment and leave the project site free of rubbish or excess materials of any kind. Thoroughly clean all spilled dirt, gravel, or other foreign materials caused by the construction operations from all streets and roads at the conclusion of each day's operation. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to promptly clean up and remove any oil and/or fuel spills caused by CONTRACTOR or his Sub-contractors during the course of the project. Contaminated soil shall be properly disposed of by CONTRACTOR in accordance with all applicable laws. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damages to OWNER resulting from CONTRACTOR's negligence in promptly cleaning up said spills. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS Prior to Final Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials; clean and repair damage TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES 06/2024 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 178.24.200 01 50 00 – 4 caused by installation or use of temporary work; and restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. CULTURAL RESOURCES CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16 U.S.C. 470) and 36 CFR 800 which provides for the preservation of potential historical architectural, archeological, or cultural resources (hereinafter called "cultural resources"). CONTRACTOR shall conform to the applicable requirements of the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 as it relates to the preservation of cultural resources. If a suspected or unsuspected historical, archaeological, or paleontological item, feature, or site or other cultural resource is encountered during subsurface excavations at the site of construction, the following procedures shall be instituted: Construction operations shall be immediately stopped in the vicinity of the discovery and ENGINEER and OWNER shall be notified of the nature and exact location of the finding. CONTRACTOR shall not damage the discovered objects and shall provide written confirmation of the discovery to ENGINEER within two (2) calendar days. OWNER and ENGINEER will then immediately notify the State Historical Preservation Office (SHPO) and the Utah Geological Survey (UGS). SHPO and UGS will investigate the finding and determine if the resource requires protection and the disposition of the said resource. If SHPO and UGS determine that the potential find is a bona fide cultural resource, CONTRACTOR shall suspend work at the location of the find under the provisions for changes contained in Articles 11, 12, and 13 of the General Conditions, Section 00 70 00 – General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS Erosion control blankets shall meet the requirements of the Erosion Control Technology Council (ECTC) and the FHWA Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges on Federal Highway Projects, FP-03 Section 713.17 as a Type 3.B Extended Term Double Net Erosion Control Blanket. The erosion control blanket shall be fabricated from UV-stabilized polypropylene and a straw/coconut blend. The blanket shall be Model SC150 by Tensar North American Green, Excel CS-3 by Western Excelsior, or approved equal. The functional longevity shall be 24 months minimum. SILT FENCE Use woven fabric meeting the following properties. TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES 06/2024 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 178.24.200 01 50 00 – 5 Table 1 - Silt Fence Geotextile Property ASTM MARV’s Standard High Performance Grab Tensile Strength, lbs. D 4632 90(a) 120(a) Grab Elongation, % D 4632 < 40 < 40 Flux, gal/min/ft2 D 4491 15 90 Apparent Opening Size, (AOS-US sieve) D 4751 > 20 > 30 Ultraviolet Degradation, % D 4355 70 90 NOTES (a) Percent of tensile strength retained determined after weathering per ASTM D 4355 for 500-hours High performance fence to have tape yarns in one principle direction only. Add stabilizers or inhibitors to make the filaments resistant to sunlight or heat deterioration. Finish edges to prevent outer yarn from pulling away from the fabric. Sheets of fabric may be sewn or bonded together. Provide minimum width recommended by manufacturer. No deviation from any requirement in Table 2 due to the presence of seams. Manufactured with pockets for posts, hems with cord, or with posts pre-attached using staples or button head nails. POSTS Minimum length: 4-feet. Steel: Round, U shaped, T shaped, or C shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3- pounds per foot, and have projections for fastening wire. Wood as follows: Soft wood posts at least 3-inches in diameter, or nominal 2 x 4-inches and straight to provide a fence without noticeable misalignment. Hard wood post providing a minimum cross-sectional area of 2.25 square-inches. Fasteners for Wooden Posts: Wire staples No. 17 gage minimum with a crown at least 3/4-inches wide and legs at least 1/2-inch long. Nails 14 gage minimum, 1-inch long with 3/4-inch button. TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES 06/2024 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 178.24.200 01 50 00 – 6 PART 3 EXECUTION SILT FENCE Beginning work means acceptance of existing conditions. Maintain the silt fence until revegetation is complete (defined as when cover reaches a density of at least 70% of pre-disturbance levels. Clear area of any debris and obstructions that may damage geotextile. Place post in all low points. Install posts a maximum of 8-feet apart with at least 18-inches in the ground. If not possible to achieve depth, secure posts to prevent overturning. Attach filter fabric by wire, cord, pockets, staples, nails, or other effective means. When using a wire support fence, provide at least 6 horizontal wires with a minimum of 12 gage wire. Space vertical wires 6-inches maximum. Secure geotextile to the up slope side of the post. Extend wire into the trench a minimum of 2-inches and extend a maximum or 36-inches above the ground surface. Install fabric so 6 to 8-inches of fabric remain at the bottom to be buried. Splice together only at support posts with at least a minimum overlap of 18-inches. Extend buried portion 6-inches deep and the rest upstream of the fabric fence. Sediment Removal: Remove sediment before deposit reaches 1/2 of the height of the silt fence or raise the height of silt fence. After removal of sediment, dress landscape. Schedule of Locations: Typical locations include the toe of fill slopes, the downhill side of fill slopes, the downhill side of large cut areas, and at natural drainage areas. Limit geotextile materials to handle an area equivalent to 1,000 square feet per 10-feet of fence. Use caution should site slope be steeper than 1:1 (horizontal:vertical), and water flow rates exceed 1 cubic foot per second per 10-feet of fence face. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 178.24.200 01 50 30 - 1 SECTION 01 50 30 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Any existing facilities, disturbed which are located in or adjacent to the line of work such as curbs, gutters, drive approaches, sidewalks, driveways, fences, underground pipes, conduits, or utilities, shall be cleaned up and restored in kind by CONTRACTOR and in accordance with the Specifications contained herein governing the various types of services involved. CONTRACTOR shall not perform work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeline; any telephone, fiber optic, television cable, or electric transmission line; any fence; or any structure, until authorization has been obtained from owner of the improvement. Provide owner of the improvement due notice of the beginning of the work, and remove, shore, support, or otherwise protect such improvement or replace the same. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 78 50 Project Closeout RESTORATION OF FENCES Where it is necessary to remove any fence to facilitate CONTRACTOR's operation, CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior agreement with owner of the fence for removal of the fence and shall be responsible for any damage due to negligence of CONTRACTOR. As soon as practical, the fence shall be restored substantially to the same or improved condition as it was prior to the commencement of the work. Where livestock is present CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary fencing to keep livestock away from the construction area. UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities; and all roadway and state highway rights-of-way, CONTRACTOR shall notify the regional notification center (Blue Stakes of Utah) at 1-800-662-4111 or 811 or submit an on-line request at www.bluestakes.org at least 2 days, but no more than 7 days, prior to such excavation. INTERFERING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES CONTRACTOR shall exercise all possible caution to prevent damage to existing structures and utilities, whether above ground or underground. Prior to submittal of Shop Drawings, and prior to commencing any excavations for new pipelines or structures, conduct investigations, including exploratory excavations and borings, to 06/2024 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 178.24.200 01 50 30 - 2 determine the location and type of underground utilities and services connections that could result in damage to such utilities. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to locate and expose all existing underground and overhead structures and utilities in such a manner as to prevent damage to same. CONTRACTOR shall notify all utility offices concerned at least 48 hours in advance of construction operations in which a utility agency's facilities may be involved. This shall include, but not be limited to, irrigation water, culinary water, telephone, television cables, fiber optic communication, gas, and electric. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any and all changes to, reconnections to public utility facilities encountered or interrupted during prosecution of the work, and all costs relating hereto shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. CONTRACTOR shall contract with and pay Public Utility Agencies for work required in connection with all utility interferences and handle all necessary notifications, scheduling, coordination, and details. The cost of public utility interferences shall be included in CONTRACTOR's lump sum or unit price bid covering the major contract facility to which interference or changes are attributable. All exploratory excavations shall be performed as soon as practicable after Notice to Proceed and, in any event, a sufficient time in advance of the construction to avoid possible delays to CONTRACTOR’s progress. Prepare a report identifying each utility by its size, elevation, station and material of construction. Immediately notify ENGINEER and the utility in writing as to any utility discovered in a different position than as marked in the field or shown on the Drawings, or any utility which is not marked in the field or not shown on the Drawings. The number of exploratory excavations required shall be that number which is sufficient to determine the alignment and grade of the utility. Conform to local agency requirements for backfill and pavement repair subsequent to performing exploratory excavations. Any damages to private property, either inside or outside the limits of the easements provided by OWNER, shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Any roads, structures, or utilities damaged by the work shall be repaired or replaced in a condition equal to or better than the condition prior to the damage. Such repair or replacement shall be accomplished at CONTRACTOR's expense without additional compensation from OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace small miscellaneous structures such as fences and culverts which are damaged by the construction activity at his own expense without additional compensation from OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall replace these structures in a condition as good as or better than their original condition. At points where CONTRACTOR's operations are adjacent to or across properties of railway, telegraph, telephone, irrigation canal, power, gas, water, or adjacent to other property (damage to which might result in considerable expense, loss, and inconvenience), no work shall be started until all arrangements necessary for the protection thereof have been made. The locations of the major existing culinary water lines, gas pipes, underground electric, cable television, and telephone lines that are shown on the plans were taken from city maps, and maps supplied by the utility owner. No excavations were made to verify the locations shown for underground utilities, unless specifically stated on the Drawings. It should be expected that some location discrepancies will occur. Neither OWNER nor its 06/2024 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 178.24.200 01 50 30 - 3 officers or agents shall be responsible for damages to CONTRACTOR as a result of the locations of the utilities being other than those shown on the plans or for the existence of utilities not shown on the plans. CONTRACTOR shall be solely and directly responsible to owners and operators of such properties for any damage, injury, expense, loss or inconvenience, delay, suits, actions, or claims of any character brought because of an injury or damage which may result from the carrying out of the work to be done under the contract. All utilities including all water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities encountered along the line of the work shall remain continuously in service during all operations under the Contract, unless other arrangements satisfactory to ENGINEER are made with owner of said utility. In the event of interruption to either domestic or irrigation water, or to other utility services as a result of accidental breakage, or as a result of being exposed or unsupported, CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify the proper authority. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the authority in restoration of service as soon as possible, and shall not allow interruption of any water or utility service outside working hours unless prior approval is received. In case it shall be necessary to move the property of any public utility or franchise holder, such utility company or franchise holder will, upon request of CONTRACTOR, be notified by OWNER to move such property within a specified reasonable time. When utility lines that are to be moved are encountered within the area of operations, CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER a sufficient time in advance for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of service. Where the proper completion of the WORK requires the temporary or permanent removal and/or relocation of an existing Utility or other improvement which is indicated, CONTRACTOR shall remove and, without unnecessary delay, temporarily replace or relocate such Utility or improvement in a manner satisfactory to ENGINEER and OWNER of the facility. In all cases of such temporary removal or relocation, restoration to the former location shall be accomplished by CONTRACTOR in a manner that will restore or replace the Utility or improvement as nearly as possible to its former locations and to as good or better condition than found prior to removal. RIGHTS-OF-WAY CONTRACTOR shall be required to confine construction operations within the dedicated rights-of-way for public thorough fares, or within areas for which construction easements have been obtained, unless they have made special arrangements with the affected property owners in advance. CONTRACTOR shall be required to protect stored materials, cultivated trees and crops, and other items adjacent to the proposed construction site. CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval by ENGINEER the type and size of equipment used, and the methods for work performed on the rights-of-way across private properties, to avoid or minimize injury to trees, shrubs, gardens, lawns, fences, driveways, retaining walls, or other improvements within the rights-of-way. 06/2024 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 178.24.200 01 50 30 - 4 The construction easement widths and access to private properties are as shown on the Drawings and as described in the easement documents; however CONTRACTOR is to minimize impacts to surface improvements within the right-of-way. CONTRACTOR shall obtain a signed release from the property owner, approving restoration of work in the construction easements across or bordering private properties. See Project Closeout Section 01 78 50, 1.4.D. Property owners affected by the construction shall be notified by CONTRACTOR at least 48 hours in advance of the time the construction begins. During all construction operations, CONTRACTOR shall construct and maintain such facilities as may be required to provide access by all property owners to their property. No person shall be cut off from access to his property for a period exceeding 8 hours unless CONTRACTOR has made special arrangements with the affected persons. CONTRACTOR shall, daily or more frequently if necessary, grade all disturbed areas to be smooth for motor vehicle traffic. PROTECTION OF SURVEY, STREET OR ROADWAY MARKERS CONTRACTOR shall not destroy, remove, or otherwise disturb any existing survey markers or other existing street or roadway markers without proper authorization. No pavement breaking or excavation shall be started until all survey or other permanent marker points that will be disturbed by the construction operations have been properly referenced. Survey markers or points disturbed by CONTRACTOR shall be accurately restored after street or roadway resurfacing has been completed. TREES OR SHRUBS WITHIN PROJECT LIMITS Except where trees or shrubs are indicated to be removed, CONTRACTOR shall exercise all necessary precautions so as not to damage or destroy any trees or shrubs, including those lying within street rights-of-way and project limits, and shall not trim or remove any trees unless such trees have been approved for trimming or removal by the jurisdictional agency or OWNER. Existing trees and shrubs which are damaged during construction shall be trimmed or replaced by CONTRACTOR or a certified tree company under permit from the jurisdictional agency and/or OWNER. Tree trimming and replacement shall be accomplished in accordance with the following paragraphs. Symmetry of the tree shall be preserved; no stubs or splits or torn branches left; clean cuts shall be made close to the trunk or large branch. Spikes shall not be used for climbing live trees. Cuts over 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be coated with a tree paint product that is waterproof, adhesive, and elastic, and free from kerosenes, coal tar, creosote, or other material injurious to the life of the tree. CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the jurisdictional agency and/or OWNER if any tree or shrub is damaged by CONTRACTOR's operations. If, in the opinion of said agency or OWNER, the damage is such that replacement is necessary, CONTRACTOR shall replace the tree or shrub at its own expense. The tree or shrub shall be of a like size and variety as the one damaged, or, if of a smaller size, CONTRACTOR shall pay to OWNER of said tree a compensatory payment acceptable to the tree or shrub owner, subject to the approval of the jurisdictional agency or OWNER. The size of the tree or shrub shall be not less than 1-inch diameter nor less than 6 feet in height. 06/2024 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 178.24.200 01 50 30 - 5 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT Pavement work shall meet the specifications for installation as noted in APWA Section 33 12 16. All paved areas damaged during construction shall be replaced with similar materials of equal thickness to match the existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific resurfacing requirements have been called for in the Contract or in the requirements of the agency issuing the permit. The pavement restoration requirement to match existing sections shall apply to all components of existing sections, including sub-base, base, and pavement. Pavements which are subject to partial removal shall be neatly sawcut in straight lines. Wherever required by the local agency having jurisdiction, CONTRACTOR shall place temporary surfacing promptly after backfilling and shall maintain such surfacing for the period of time fixed by said authorities before proceeding with the final restoration of improvements. CONCRETE WORK Concrete work shall meet the specifications for installation as noted in APWA Section 32 16 13 Driveway, Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter. All flat work in streets tying into existing flatwork shall be doweled into the existing concrete. Dowels to be spaced at 12" O.C. and be No. 5 rebar x 14" for slabs up to 8 inches in thickness and No. 8 rebar x 18" for slabs over 8 inches. LAWNS Lawns that are damaged or destroyed during performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced with turf sod according to APWA Section 32 92 00 - Turf and Grass. FENCES Fences that are damaged or destroyed during performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced back to the original condition or better to the satisfaction of the land owner and OWNER. LANDSCAPING All landscaping on private property that is damaged or destroyed during performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced back to the original condition or better to the satisfaction of the land owner and OWNER. OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS All other surface improvements not explicitly mentioned herein that are damaged or destroyed during performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced back to original condition or better. 06/2024 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 178.24.200 01 50 30 - 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 DUST CONTROL 178.24.200 PAGE 01 56 00-1 SECTION 00 56 00 DUST CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK Furnish all labor, materials and equipment as required to provide dust control for the project. All materials and services shall comply with the requirements of the State of Utah, Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Air Quality and the City’s Municipal Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Water. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to arrange and pay for water for dust control. Calcium chloride shall be added to the water used to provide dust control, if required by the City. PART 3 EXECUTION DUST CONTROL CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of the State of Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Air Quality Regulations (including R301-205 Emission Standards: Fugitive Emissions and Fugitive Dust, and R307-309 Fugitive Emissions and Fugitive Dust, of the Utah Air Conservation Rules (UACR). CONTRACTOR shall submit a Fugitive Dust Control Plan to the Utah Division of Air Quality, which meets the requirements of R307-309-4. CONTRACTOR shall obtain a permit from the Division of Air Quality. CONTRACTOR shall execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. Give all unpaved streets, roads, detours, or haul roads used in the construction area an approved dust-preventive treatment or periodically water to prevent dust. Applicable environmental regulations for dust prevention shall be strictly enforced. WATER PLACEMENT FOR DUST CONTROL CONTRACTOR is responsible for placement of sufficient water to control dust on the project. Dust control is defined by the permit requirements of the State of Utah, Division of Environmental Quality, Division of Air Quality. Permit shall be obtained by CONTRACTOR. 06/2024 DUST CONTROL 178.24.200 PAGE 01 56 00-2 WATER AND CALCIUM CHLORIDE MIXTURE FOR DUST CONTROL CONTRACTOR may also use a water and calcium chloride solution to abate the dust for the project. The mixture of calcium chloride per 10,000-gallon truck shall be 10 pounds. The calcium chloride shall be added to the water truck container as the water is being put into the water truck in order to provide sufficient mixing. In the absence of providing the water and calcium chloride mixture, CONTRACTOR shall meet the requirements of Subsection 3.2 of this document, or shall use other approved methods by OWNER that will allow CONTRACTOR to meet permit requirements. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 178.24.200 01 60 00 - 1 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL PRODUCTS Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by Contract Documents. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being replaced. PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. PRODUCT OPTIONS Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of one of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. 06/2024 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 178.24.200 01 60 00 - 2 Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ENGINEER will consider requests for Substitutions only after Notice of Award. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of CONTRACTOR. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. A request constitutes a representation that CONTRACTOR: Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds quality level of specified product. Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified product. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to OWNER. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. Will reimburse OWNER for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities having jurisdiction. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents. Substitution Submittal Procedure: Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration to ENGINEER. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified test results attesting to proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to provide additional data about the proposed substitution. ENGINEER will be the sole judge as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitution and ENGINEER’s decision shall be final. ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of decision to accept or reject request. Acceptance by ENGINEER of a substitution proposed by CONTRACTOR shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents and for the adequacy of the substitution. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 MOBILIZATION 178.24.200 01 71 13 - 1 SECTION 01 71 13 MOBILIZATION PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This Section is provided to cover CONTRACTOR's cost of general and miscellaneous responsibilities and operations not normally attributed to, or included in, any other single bid item. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, work described or enumerated in this section under the following subsections. MOVING TO AND FROM THE JOB SITE This shall include CONTRACTOR's preliminary arrangement for starting and stopping construction operations, work schedules, and transportation of equipment and personnel to and from the project. CLEAN-UP The cost of all clean-up work as specified and not covered under other items shall be included in the Bid. Values shall be included in the Bid Schedule, lump-sum price, for "Mobilization". TEMPORARY UTILITIES The cost of water, power, etc. required by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work specified in the Contract shall be included in the Bid. Values shall be included in the Bid Schedule, lump-sum price, for "Mobilization". PERFORMANCE BOND, PAYMENT BOND, AND INSURANCE The cost of the Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and any required insurance and/or other miscellaneous cost associated with this Project shall be included with the Bid. Values shall be included in the Bid Schedule, lump-sum price, for "Mobilization”. PERMITS CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary permits for completion of the Work. Values shall be included in the Bid Schedule, lump-sum price, for "Mobilization”. PRE-CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDS CONTRACTOR is required to produce a preconstruction video recording of areas where Work is to be performed. The video record shall be of professional quality and the coverage shall be such, as to allow accurate determination of location, size, and conditions, etc. of existing features and improvements within the rights-of-way. CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER with a copy of the rights-of-way video in DVD format before construction begins. 06/2024 MOBILIZATION 178.24.200 01 71 13 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 1 SECTION 01 78 50 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL FINAL CLEANUP CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed Work, all rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment, and temporary structures and facilities used during construction. Final acceptance of the Work by OWNER will be withheld until CONTRACTOR has satisfactorily complied with the foregoing requirements for final cleanup of the Project Site. TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR CONTRACTOR shall touch up or repair all finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, etc., that have been damaged prior to final acceptance. Surface on which such touch-up or repair cannot be successfully accomplished shall be completely refinished or in the case of hardware and similar small items, the item shall be replaced. CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE CONTRACTOR shall establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods and on- site instructional periods (as required under the Contract). Such dates shall be established not less than one week prior to beginning any of the foregoing items, to allow OWNER, ENGINEER, and their authorized representatives sufficient time to schedule attendance at such activities. MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE CONTRACTOR shall comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements contained in Article 7 of the General Conditions, Section 00 70 00. Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish elevations, shall be considered as part of such required repair work, and any repair or resurfacing which becomes necessary by reason of such required repair work shall be completed by CONTRACTOR at no cost to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written order from OWNER. If CONTRACTOR fails to make such repairs or replacement promptly, OWNER reserves the right to do the work and CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be liable to OWNER for the cost thereof. CONTRACTOR shall obtain a signed release from the property owner approving restoration of work in the construction easements across or bordering private property. BOND CONTRACTOR shall provide a bond to guarantee performance of the provisions contained in Paragraph "Maintenance and Guarantee" above, and Article 6 of the General Conditions, Section 00 70 00. 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 2 FINAL ACCEPTANCE Final acceptance and final payment shall not be made until all provisions of the General Conditions Section 00 70 00 Article 15 have been satisfied. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: Drawings. Specifications. Addenda. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by OWNER. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: Manufacturer's name and product model and number. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work Field changes of dimension and detail Details not on original Contract drawings Submit documents to ENGINEER with claim for final Application for Payment. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT As a condition precedent to final acceptance of the project, CONTRACTOR shall complete the following forms and submit the original and two copies of each form to the Project Representative. Contractor’s Certificate of Substantial Completion Contractor’s Certificate of Final Completion Contractor’s Final Waiver of Lien Consent of Surety for Final Payment Affidavit of Payment Affidavit of Release of Liens by the Contractor 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 4 CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OWNER TO: Saddleback Partners, L.C. 925 W 100 N, Ste F, P.O. Box 540478 North Salt Lake, UT 84054 PROJECT: ATTENTION: FROM: Firm or Corporation This is to certify that I, am an authorized official of working in the capacity of and have been properly authorized by said form or corporation to sign the following statements pertaining to the subject contract. I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify, that the work of the Contract described above has been substantially performed, and materials used and installed to date in accordance with, and in conformity to, the Contract drawings and specifications. A list of all incomplete work is attached. The Contractor hereby releases the Owner and its agents from all claims and liability to the Contractor for anything done or finished for or relating to the Work, as specified in the Project Manual, except demands against the Owner for the remainder of progress payments retained to date, and unresolved written claims prior to this date. The Contract Work is now substantially complete, ready for its intended use, and ready for your inspection. You are requested to issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. Signature: Date: 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 5 CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION OWNER TO: Saddleback Partners, L.C. 925 W 100 N, Ste F, P.O. Box 540478 North Salt Lake, UT 84054 PROJECT: ATTENTION: FROM: Firm or Corporation This is to certify that I, am an authorized official of working in the capacity of and have been properly authorized by said form or corporation to sign the following statements pertaining to the subject contract. I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify, that the work of the Contract described above has been substantially performed, and materials used and installed to date in accordance with, and in conformity to, the Contract drawings and specifications. The Contractor hereby releases the Owner and its agents from all claims and liability to the Contractor for anything done or finished for or relating to the Work. The Contract Work is now complete in all parts and requirements, ready for its intended use, excepting the attached list of minor deficiencies and the reason for each being incomplete to date, for which exemption from final payment requirements is requested (if no exemptions requested, write “none”) . The Work is now ready for your final inspection. The following items are required from the Contractor prior to application for final payment and are submitted herewith, if any: I understand that neither the issuance, by the Owner, or a Certificate of Final Completion, nor the acceptance thereof by the Owner, shall operate as a bar claim against the Contractor under the terms of the guarantee provisions of the Contract Documents. Signature: Date: 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 6 CONTRACTORS FINAL WAIVER OF LIEN TO ALL WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: WHEREAS, the undersigned has furnished labor and materials for (A) in the City of , County of , State of Utah, of which City of is the Owner. NOW THEREFOR, this day of , 20 , for and in consideration of the sum of (B) dollars paid simultaneously herewith, the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged by the undersigned, the undersigned does hereby waive and release any lien* right to, or claim of lien with respect to and on said above described premises, and the improvements thereon, and on the monies or other consideration due or to become due from the Owner, on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures, apparatus or machinery heretofore or which may hereafter be furnished by the undersigned to or for the above described premises by virtue of said contract. (C) (SEAL) (Name of sole ownership, corporation or partnership) (C) (SEAL) (Signature of Authorized Representative) Title: INSTRUCTION FOR FINAL WAIVER: A. Project name. B. Final Contract amount received (total amount of Contract as adjusted). C. If the waiver is for a corporation, corporate name should be used, corporate seal affixed, and title of officer signing waiver should be set forth; if waiver is for a partnership, the partnership name should be used, partner should sign and designate himself/herself as partner. * The word Lien as used herein shall include Stop Orders, Stop Notices, or Freeze Orders on monies or other consideration of the Owner which are due or are to become due on the Contract referenced above. 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 7 CONSENT OF SURETY FOR FINAL PAYMENT Project Name: Location: Type of Contract: Amount of Contract: In accordance with the provisions of the above named contract between the Owner and the Contractor, the following named surety: on the Payment Bond of the following named Contractor: hereby approves of final payment to the Contractor, and further agrees that said final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company named herein of any of its obligations to the following named Owner (as set forth in said Surety Company’s bond): Saddleback Partners, L.C. 925 W 100 N, Ste F, P.O. Box 540478 North Salt Lake, UT 84054 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand and seal this day of , 20 . (Name of Surety Company) (Signature of Authorized Representative) Title: 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 8 AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT TO ALL WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: WHEREAS, the undersigned has been employed by Saddleback Partners, L. C. to furnish labor and materials under a contract dated for the project named in the City of County of , State of Utah. NOW THEREFORE, this day of , 20 , the undersigned, as the Contractor for the above named Contract pursuant to the conditions of the Contract, hereby certifies that, except as listed below, he has paid in full or has otherwise satisfied all obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for damages arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above for which the Owner or its property might in any way be held responsible. EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write “none”. If required by the Owner, the Contractor furnish bond satisfactory to the Owner for each exception). {AFFIX CORPORATE} {SEAL HERE} Contractor (Name of sole ownership, Corporation or partnership) (Signature of Authorized Representative) Title: 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 9 AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS BY THE CONTRACTOR TO ALL WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: WHEREAS, the undersigned has been employed by Saddleback Partners, L. C. to furnish labor and materials under a contract dated for the project named in the City of County of , State of Utah. NOW THEREFOR, this day of , 20 , the undersigned, as the Contractor for the above named Contract pursuant to the conditions of the Contract, hereby certifies that to the best of his/her knowledge, information and belief, except as listed below, the Releases or Waivers of Lien* attached hereto include the Contractor, all subcontractors, all suppliers of material and equipment, and all performers of work, labor or services, who have or may have liens against any property of the Owner and on the monies or other consideration due to becomes due from the Owner arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above. EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write “none”. If required by the Owner, the Contractor furnish bond satisfactory to the Owner for each exception). ATTACHMENTS: 1. Contractor’s Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional upon receipt of final payment. 2. Separate Release or Waiver of Liens from subcontractors and material suppliers. {AFFIX CORPORATE} {SEAL HERE} Contractor (Name of sole ownership, Corporation or partnership) (Signature of Authorized Representative) Title: * The word Lien as used herein shall include Stop Orders, Stop Notices, or Freeze Orders on monies or other consideration of the Owner which are due or are to become due on the Contract referenced above. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 178.24.200 01 78 50 - 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 178.24.200 PAGE 01 92 00 - 1 SECTION 01 92 00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY Section includes: Preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. SUBMITTALS Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals before field quality control testing and before training of each piece of equipment or system. Submit one electronic copy manuals for each piece of equipment or system. Make manuals available at project site for use by construction personnel and ENGINEER. Make additions and revisions to the manuals in accordance with ENGINEER's review comments. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Preparation: Provide electronic copy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in PDF Format. PDF file shall have bookmarks for each piece of equipment. Provide all dimensions in English units. Contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Cover page: Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name, OWNER's name, appropriate date. Table of Contents: General description of information provided within each tab section. Equipment Summary Form: Completed form in the format shown in Appendix A. The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable. Lubrication information: Required lubricants and lubrication schedules. Control diagrams: Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams for control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and connections between existing systems and new additions, and adjustments such as calibrations and set points for relays, and control or alarm contact settings. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control system. Complete set of control schematics. Programming: Copies of all CONTRACTOR furnished programming. 06/2024 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 178.24.200 PAGE 01 92 00 - 2 Start-up procedures: Recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting. 8. Operating procedures: Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment under specified modes of operation. Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown instructions. Preventative maintenance procedures: Recommended steps and schedules for maintaining equipment. Overhaul instructions: Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair and reassembly of the equipment; safety precautions; and recommended tolerances, critical bolt torques, and special tools that are required. Parts list: Complete parts list for all equipment being provided. Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished including generic title and identification number of each component part of equipment. Include bearing manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass frequencies for every bearing. Spare parts list: Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and special storage precautions. Drawings: Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment. Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings. Source (factory) quality control test results: Provide copies of factory test reports as specified in Sections 15958 or the equipment section. Field quality control test results: After field-testing is completed, insert field test reports as specified in Sections 15958 or the equipment section. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 178.24.200 PAGE 03 10 00 - 1 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section covers the work necessary to furnish, install, and complete, the concrete formwork. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Concrete formwork shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as part of the various items to which it relates. 1.4 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) -ACI 347R- Guide to Formwork for Concrete 2. American Hardboard Association (AHA) -AHA A135.4- Basic Hardboard 3. Department of Commerce (DOC) -DOC PS 1- Structural Plywood 4. ACI 350R-01 – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary 5. NSF International (NSF) 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects 1.5 DESIGN A. Formwork shall be designed in accordance with methodology of ACI 347R for anticipated loads, lateral pressures, and stresses. Forms shall be capable of producing a surface which meets the requirements of the finish specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast- in-Place Concrete. Forms shall be capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from placement and vibration of concrete. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. The following shall be submitted: 1. If requested by ENGINEER, drawings showing details of forming, shoring and bracing for footings, walls, and floors shall be submitted to ENGINEER at least 3 weeks prior to their use. Drawings showing details of formwork shall include joints, supports, studding and shoring, and sequence of form and shoring removal. 06/2024 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 178.24.200 PAGE 03 10 00 - 2 2. If requested by ENGINEER, design analysis and calculations shall be submitted for form design and methodology used in the design. The analysis and calculations shall verify the selection of form ties, horizontal and vertical stiff-backs or braces for wall panels, forming and form openings, or any other part of forming, shoring or bracing which may be considered critical by ENGINEER. 3. Manufacturer's data including literature describing form materials, accessories, and form releasing agents. 4. Manufacturer's recommendation on method and rate of application of form releasing agent. C. ENGINEER's review will not relieve CONTRACTOR from any responsibility as to the adequacy of the forming, shoring and bracing design. Any formwork installed by CONTRACTOR shall be solely at CONTRACTOR's risk. ENGINEER's review will not lessen or diminish CONTRACTOR's liability. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Form surfaces shall be in "new and undamaged" condition and may be plywood, hard plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof particle board, and steel of sufficient strength and surface smoothness to produce the specified finish. CONTRACTOR shall verify that his types of form surfaces and panel sizes satisfy all requirements of these specifications. B. The wall form design shall be such that wall sections can be poured full height without creating horizontal cold joints and without causing snapping of form ties which shall be of sufficient strength and number to prevent spreading of the forms during the placement of concrete and which shall permit ready removal of the forms without spalling or damaging the concrete. 2.2 FORM TIES A. Form ties on exposed surfaces shall be located in a uniform pattern. Snap ties shall not be broken until the concrete has reached the design concrete strength. The use of tie wires as form ties will not be permitted. Snap ties, designed so that the ends must be broken off before the forms can be removed, shall not be used. Form ties shall be Plastic Cone Snap Tie by Dayton-Superior, Wrench Head Snap Tie by MASCO Mason Supply, or approved equal. B. Taper ties with plastic or rubber plugs of an approved and proven design may also be used. The plugs must be driven into the hole with a steel rod, placed in a cylindrical recess made therefore in the plug. At no time shall plugs be driven on the flat area outside the cylindrical recess. Taper ties shall be Taper Tie by Dayton-Superior, Taper-Tie by MASCO Mason Supply, or approved equal. 2.3 FORM RELEASING AGENTS A. Form releasing agents shall be commercial formulations that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces. Agents shall not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces depending upon bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. 06/2024 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 178.24.200 PAGE 03 10 00 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Forms shall be mortar tight, properly aligned and adequately supported to produce concrete surfaces meeting the surface requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast- in-Place Concrete. Forms shall be used, whenever necessary, to confine the concrete, to shape the concrete to the required lines and grades, and to obtain a thoroughly compacted dense concrete through proper vibrating. The forms shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to hold the concrete and to withstand the necessary pressure, tamping and vibration, without deflection from the prescribed lines. Where forms for continuous surfaces are placed in successive units, care shall be taken to fit the forms over the completed surface so as to obtain accurate alignment of the surface and to prevent leakage of mortar. B. The surfaces of all forms in contact with the concrete shall be clean, rigid, tight and smooth. All dirt, chips, sawdust, mud, water and other foreign matter shall be removed from within the forms or within the excavated areas, before any concrete is deposited therein. C. Forms shall not be reused if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear or defects which would impair the quality of the surface. Surfaces of forms to be reused shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar from previous concreting and of all other dirt and foreign matter before reuse. Form ties that are to be completely withdrawn shall be coated with a nonstaining bond breaker. D. Bulkheads to form vertical wall joints shall be strong enough to withstand concrete pressures during pouring and vibrating, and shall be properly placed between the forms to avoid mortar seepage. Holes shall be provided in the bulkheads to permit passage of horizontal mild steel reinforcing where required by the Contract Drawings. Unless these are specifically called for on the Contract Drawings, no chamfer strips shall be placed in the corners of vertical construction joints. 3.2 COATING A. Form inside surfaces shall be coated with a form releasing agent before the form or reinforcement is placed in final position. The coating shall be used as recommended in the manufacturer's printed or written instructions. Surplus coating on form surfaces and coating on reinforcing steel and construction joints shall be removed before placing concrete. 3.3 ALIGNMENT AND TOLERANCES Forms shall be properly aligned and adequately supported to produce concrete surfaces conforming to construction tolerance given in Table 03 10 00-1, Tolerances for Formed Surfaces. 06/2024 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 178.24.200 PAGE 03 10 00 - 4 TABLE 03 10 00-1 TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES Condition Measurement Tolerance 1. Variations from the plumb: In any 10 feet of length 1/4-inch a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arises b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other conspicuous lines Maximum for entire length In any 20 feet of length Maximum for entire length 1 inch 1/4-inch 1/2-inch 2. Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings In any 10 feet of length In any bay or in any 20 feet of length 1/4-inch 3/8-inch 3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan In any 20 feet Maximum 1/2-inch 1-inch 4. Variation of distance between walls, columns, partitions 1/4-inch per 10 feet of distance, but not more than 1/2-inch in any one bay, and not more than 1-inch total variation 5. Variation in the thickness of slabs and walls Minus Plus 1/4-inch 1/2-inch 3.4 FORM REMOVAL A. Forms shall be removed in a manner that will prevent injury to the concrete and ensure the complete safety of the structure. Forms shall not be removed until approval is given by ENGINEER. Formwork for columns, walls, side of beams and other parts not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed when the concrete has attained sufficient strength to resist damage from the removal operation but not before at least 24 hours has elapsed since concrete placement. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove all wood splinters on concrete surfaces after stripping of wood forms. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 03 20 00 - 1 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section covers the reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric or rod mats for cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI) 1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete 2. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement 3. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 4. ACI 350R Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 184 Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement 2. ASTM A 615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A 767 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 4. ASTM A 775 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars 5. ASTM A 1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete D. CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI) 1. CRSI (DA4) Manual of Standard Practice (MSP-1) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: 06/2024 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 03 20 00 - 2 1. Drawings of Concrete Reinforcement System with details showing reinforcing steel schedules, sizes, spacings, grades, and splicing and bending details. Drawings shall show support details including types, sizes and spacing. 2. Reinforcing Steel with certified copies of mill reports attesting that the reinforcing steel furnished meets the requirements specified, prior to the installation of reinforcing steel. 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Reinforcement and accessories shall be stored off the ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. 1.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Concrete reinforcement shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as part of the various items to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOWELS A. Dowels shall conform to ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise in Contract Drawings. 2.2 FABRICATED BAR MATS A. Fabricated bar mats shall conform to ASTM A 185, unless noted otherwise in Contract Drawings. 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615 grades and sizes as indicated. Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 1064. When no grade is indicated use 60 ksi grade steel. Special coated bars (epoxy and zinc) may be specified for use in a highly corrosive atmosphere where concrete cover is not considered sufficient. In which case reference to ASTM A 767 and A 775 will be included. 2.4 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A 1064 and A 185. 2.5 WIRE TIES A. Wire ties shall be 16-gauge or heavier black annealed steel wire. 2.6 SUPPORTS A. Bar supports for formed surfaces shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with CRSI (DA4) MSP-1 and shall be steel or precast concrete blocks. Precast concrete blocks shall be not less than 4 inches square when supporting reinforcement on ground. Precast concrete block shall have compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding concrete. 06/2024 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 03 20 00 - 3 B. Where concrete formed surfaces will be exposed to weather or where surfaces are to be painted, steel supports within ½ inch of concrete surface shall be plastic protected or of stainless steel. Concrete supports used in concrete exposed to view shall have the same color and texture as the finish surface. For slabs on grade, supports shall be precast concrete blocks, plastic coated steel fabricated with bearing plates, or specifically designed wire-fabric supports fabricated of plastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement shall be fabricated to shapes and dimensions shown and shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318. Reinforcement shall be cold bent unless otherwise authorized. Bending may be accomplished in the field or at the mill. Bars shall not be bent after embedment in concrete, unless noted otherwise in Contract Drawings. B. Safety caps shall be placed on all exposed ends of vertical concrete reinforcement bars that pose a danger to life safety. C. Placement: 1. Reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and scale, dirt, oil, or other deleterious coating that could reduce bond with the concrete. 2. Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with ACI 318 at locations shown plus or minus one bar diameter. Reinforcement shall not be continuous through expansion joints, unless noted otherwise in Contract Drawings, and shall be as indicated through construction or contraction joints. Concrete coverage shall be as indicated or as required by ACI 318. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter to avoid interference with other reinforcement, conduits or embedded items, the resulting arrangement of bars, including additional bars required to meet structural requirements, shall be approved before concrete is placed. D. Splicing: 1. Splices of reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318 and shall be made only as required or indicated. Splicing shall be by lapping or by mechanical connection; except that lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than No. 11 unless otherwise indicated. Lapped bars shall be placed in contact and securely tied or spaced transversely apart to permit the embedment of the entire surface of each bar in concrete. Lapped bars shall not be spaced farther apart than one-fifth the required length of lap or 6-inches. Mechanical butt splices shall be in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer of the mechanical splicing device. Butt splices shall develop 125 percent of the specified minimum yield tensile strength of the spliced bars or of the smaller bar in transition splices. Bars shall be flame dried before butt splicing. Adequate jigs and clamps or other devices shall be provided to support, align, and hold the longitudinal centerline of the bars to be butt spliced in a straight line. 3.2 WELDED-WIRE FABRIC A. Welded-wire fabric shall be placed in slabs as indicated. Fabric placed in slabs on grade shall be continuous between expansion, construction, and contraction joints. Lap 06/2024 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 03 20 00 - 4 splices shall be made in such a way that the overlapped area equals the distance between the outermost crosswires plus 2 inches. Laps shall be staggered to avoid continuous laps in either direction. Fabric shall be wired or clipped together at laps at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Fabric shall be positioned by the use of supports. 3.3 DOWELS A. Dowels shall be installed in slabs on grade at locations indicated and at right angles to joint being doweled. Dowels shall be accurately aligned parallel to the finished concrete surface and rigidly supported during concrete placement. One end of dowels shall be coated with a bond breaker. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS 178.24.200 PAGE 03 25 00 - 1 SECTION 03 25 00 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND WATERSTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section covers the work necessary to furnish, install and complete expansion and construction joints, including waterstops. B. All waterstops and sealants in contact with potable water including waterstops embedded in concrete floors and walls of potable water tanks shall be NSF 61 certified. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 03 33 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI) 1. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 2. ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension 3. ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 4. ASTM D 570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics 5. ASTM D 624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers 6. ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics 7. ASTM D 746 Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact 8. ASTM D 747 Standard Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of Plastics by Means of a Cantilever Beam. 9. ASTM D 792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement 10. ASTM D 1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) 06/2024 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS 178.24.200 PAGE 03 25 00 - 2 11. ASTM D 1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 12. ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness D. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS) 1. FS-TT-S-00227E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (For Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) E. NSF International (NSF) 1. NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: 1. Submit certificates of compliance stating that the joint filler and sealant materials and waterstops conform to the requirements specified. ENGINEER, may take samples of any materials and have them tested by an independent testing laboratory to verify their compliance with these Specifications. All such costs shall be borne by OWNER. If any materials should fail to meet these Specifications, all costs for further testing of the replacement material shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. 2. Samples of factory fabricated waterstop joints representing in all respects the material and workmanship of the material that will be furnished under this contract. Samples will be submitted and approved by ENGINEER prior to use of the factory joints in the field. 3. Manufacturer's catalog data and manufacturer's recommended instructions for splicing of waterstops. 1.5 OBSTRUCTIONS A. CONTRACTOR shall pay particular attention to removing all obstructions such as concrete, nails, etc., from joints when movements of floor or wall sections can be expected under temperature and other conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waterstop manufacturer shall demonstrate five years (minimum) continuous, successful experience in production of waterstops. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Material delivered and placed in storage shall be stored off the ground and protected from moisture, dirt, and other contaminants. Sealants shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unopened containers. Sealants whose shelf life has expired shall be removed from the site. 06/2024 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS 178.24.200 PAGE 03 25 00 - 3 1.8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. There shall be no separate measurement and payment for expansion joints, construction joints, and waterstops. Full compensation for expansion joints, construction joints, and waterstops shall be considered as included in the Contract unit or lump sum prices for the various items of the Contract to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL JOINT SEALANT A. Horizontal joints not requiring waterstops or when so indicated on the Contract Drawings, shall be sealed using Sikaflex-2c NS, or approved equal, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 and FS-TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A, and shall be NSF 61 certified (Sikaflex 2c NS EZ) if in contact with potable water. Color shall match color of concrete tank. 2.2 VERTICAL JOINT SEALANT A. Vertical joints not requiring waterstops or when so indicated on the Contract Drawings, shall be sealed using Sikaflex-2c NS, or approved equal, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 and FS-TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A, and shall be NSF 61 (Sikaflex 2c NS EZ) certified if in contact with potable water. Color shall match color of concrete tank. 2.3 JOINT PRIMER A. All joints receiving a joint sealant shall be primed using Sikaflex Primers 429/202, or approved equal. 2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joints shall be composed of cellular fibers securely bonded together and uniformly saturated with asphalt. Joint shall be resilient, flexible, and non-extruding. Expansion joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1751. Manufacturer shall be Fibre Expansion Joint by W.R. Meadows, Fiberflex by JD Russel Company, or approved equal. 2.5 PVC WATERSTOPS A. Waterstops shall be of an approved type, supplied by an approved manufacturer and shall be plastic made of virgin polyvinylchloride (PVC) compound, shall be ribbed, uniform in dimensions, dense, homogeneous, free from porosity, and as detailed on the Contract Drawings. No reclaimed PVC shall be used in the compound. Waterstop in contact with potable water shall be NSF 61 certified. B. The finished waterstop material shall meet the following minimum requirements: Tensile strength 2,000 psi min.(ASTM D 638) Ultimate elongation 300% min.(ASTM D 638) Shore A hardness 75 ± 5 (ASTM D 2240) Specific gravity 1.38 max (ASTM D 792) 06/2024 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS 178.24.200 PAGE 03 25 00 - 4 C. Manufacturer, or approved equal: 1. Vinylex Waterstop & Accessories 2. Greenstreak, Inc. (Sika Corporation) 3. Durajoint Concrete Accessories D. Factory made waterstop joints shall have a tensile strength across the joint equal to at least 600 psi. Field splices and joints shall be made in accordance with the waterstop manufacturer's instructions using a thermostatically-controlled heating iron. 2.6 HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOP A. Non-bentonite rubber hydrophilic waterstop shall only be used where shown on the Contract Drawings or when approved by ENGINEER. Hydrophilic waterstop in contact with potable water including in potable water tank floor slabs and walls shall be NSF 61 certified. Size shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. The hydrophilic waterstop shall meet the following physical properties: Physical Property Test Method Result Tensile Strength (Minimum)ASTM D412 350 psi Elongation (minimum)ASTM D412 600 % Hardness ASTM D2240 52 +/-5 Shore A Tear Resistance ASTM D624 50 lb/in Specific Gravity ASTM D792 1.35 +/-5 C. Manufacturer, or approved equal: 1. Conseal CS-231 2. Sika Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WATERSTOPS A. Waterstops shall be of the type indicated and shall be installed at the locations shown to form a continuous water-tight diaphragm. The waterstop shall be correctly positioned in the forms so that the center of the waterstop is centered on the joint. Waterstop shall be held in place in the forms by use of a split form or other approved method that will positively hold the waterstop in the correct position and to the correct alignment. Vibrate concrete to obtain impervious concrete in the vicinity of all joints. In horizontal joints, ensure that the areas below the water stop are completely filled with concrete. Stiffness in flexure 600 psi min.(ASTM D 747) Cold brittleness No Failure at -35°F (ASTM D 746) Water absorption: 48 hours 0.15% max (ASTM D 570) Tear Resistance 290 lb./in. min.(ASTM D 624) 06/2024 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS 178.24.200 PAGE 03 25 00 - 5 B. Horizontal plastic waterstops shall be bent up during placing of concrete until the concrete has been brought to the level of the waterstop; additional concrete shall then be placed over the waterstop, after which the concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated. All horizontal and vertical waterstops, which are not accessible during pouring, shall be tied off in two directions every 12 inches in such a manner that bending over one way or another is prevented. A hog-ring or nail may be driven through both ends of the waterstop to facilitate placing and tying of waterstops to reinforcing steel forms or form-ties. C. Adequate provision shall be made to support and completely protect the waterstops during the progress of the work. Any waterstop punctured or damaged shall be repaired or replaced. All waterstops shall be properly spliced and joints shall be checked for strength and pinholes after splicing. Splices shall be strong enough to develop a pulling force of 75 percent of the strength of the waterstop, and shall be watertight. Splices in waterstop shall be made in conformance with the recommendations of the waterstop manufacturer. Continuity of cross sectional features shall be maintained across the splice. Splices showing evidence of separation after bending shall be remade. D. Install hydrophilic waterstop in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhesives used on hydrophilic waterstop shall be NSF 61 certified. Adhesives shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 920 and shall be Manus Bond 75-AM Lot NSF61, DAP Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive, or approved equal. 3.2 JOINTS A. Joints shall be installed at locations indicated and as authorized. Joints shall be constructed so as to produce straight joints, and shall be vertical or horizontal, except where walls intersect sloping floors. B. Construction Joints 1. Prior to placing the abutting concrete for all construction joints, the contact surface shall be cleaned by approved means to remove all laitance and expose the aggregate. The exposed portion of the reinforcing steel shall be cleaned of all concrete. The cleaning method shall be conducted so as to not damage waterstop, if waterstop is present. Where the joint is to receive a sealant, a recess 3/4-inch deep shall be formed along the joint using a dressed-and-oiled wood strip or other method approved by ENGINEER. The wood strip shall be removed after the concrete has set. C. Expansion Joints 1. Expansion joint filler shall be used where required on the Contract Drawings. The edges of the joint shall be neatly finished with an edging tool of 1/8-inch radius, except where a resilient floor surface will be applied. Where the joint is to receive a sealant, the filler strips shall be installed at the proper level below the finished floor with a slightly tapered, dressed-and-oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top thereof to form a recess 3/4-inch deep to be filled with sealant. The wood strip shall be removed after the concrete has set. In lieu of the wood strip a removable expansion filler cap designed and fabricated for this purpose may be used. 06/2024 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS 178.24.200 PAGE 03 25 00 - 6 D. Joint Sealant 1. The joint cavity shall be cleaned by sandblasting or power wire brushing and shall be blown clean of dust and sand with compressed air before the joint sealant may be applied. Joints must be frost-free, free of oils, grease, curing compound residues, and any other foreign matter that might prevent bond. A bond breaker tape shall be installed over the joint per manufacturer's instructions. After the joints have been prepared as described above, the joints shall be primed and the sealant shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section covers cast-in-place concrete mix design and placement. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide cast-in-place concrete as indicated in the Specifications and the Contract Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Material Testing 3. Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 4. Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 5. Section 03 25 00 Expansion Joints, Construction Joints, and Waterstops 6. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes 7. Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 1.3 REFERENCES A. Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI) 1. ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary 2. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete 3. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings 4. ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 5. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting 6. ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting 7. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 8. ACI 350R Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM C 31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 2. ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 3. ASTM C 39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 4. ASTM C 42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 2 Sawed Beams of Concrete 5. ASTM C 78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Third-Point Loading) 6. ASTM C 94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 7. ASTM C 109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens) 8. ASTM C 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 9. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 10. ASTM C 171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 11. ASTM C 172 Standard Specification for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 12. ASTM C 173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method 13. ASTM C 192 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory 14. ASTM C 231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 15. ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 16. ASTM C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 17. ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 18. ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete D. NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) 1. NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Average Strength (fcr): The required average strength for 30 consecutive strength tests which statistically assures not more than the permissible proportions of tests will fall below Specified Strength. B. Specified Strength (fc'): The indicated strength. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Provide catalog information for all products to be used as part of the submitted mix design. C. The results of trial mix designs along with a statement giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size and the proportions of all ingredients that will be used in the manufacture of each strength of concrete, at least 14 days prior to commencing concrete placing operations. Aggregate weights shall be based on the saturated surface dry condition. The statement shall be accompanied by test results from an independent commercial testing laboratory, attesting that the proportions selected will produce concrete of the qualities indicated. No substitutions shall be made in the materials used in the work without additional tests to show that the quality of the concrete is satisfactory. Indicate whether mixes have been designed for pumping. Include in the 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 3 report the following information: 1. Application for which the mix is to be used. 2. Water-cement ratio. 3. Proportion of materials in the mix. 4. Source and type of cement. 5. Analysis of water to be used unless potable. 6. Type and name of admixtures applied. Indicate when accelerating or retarding admixtures are to be used and the resulting change in placement times. 7. Slump, air content and temperature of samples. 8. Unit weight of fresh and dry light weight concrete. D. Certified copies of laboratory test reports, including all test data, for aggregate, admixtures, and curing compound. These tests shall be made by an approved commercial laboratory or by a laboratory maintained by the manufacturers of the materials. Test reports shall meet the following requirements: 1. Date of mix design: No older than 365 days from the date of submission. 2. Physical properties of the aggregate: Test results shall not be older than 455 days from the date of submission. A new report will be required if aggregate source is changed. E. Cementitious Materials showing Manufacturer's certification of compliance, accompanied by mill test reports attesting that the materials meet the requirements of the specification under which it is furnished, for cement and pozzolan. F. Submit catalog information on the curing compound and the proposed location to be used. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Do not change material sources, type of cement, air-entraining agent, water reducing agent, other admixtures, or aggregate without ENGINEER'S approval. B. In proportioning materials for mixing, use scales certified by the State of Utah. Do not use volume measurement except for water and liquid admixtures. C. Do not change the quantity of cement per cubic yard for approved mix design without written approval of ENGINEER. D. Use of admixtures will not relax hot or cold weather placement requirements. E. Ready-mixed concrete to be in accordance with Alternate No. 3 of ASTM C-94 and the requirements in this Section. F. Tolerances for concrete construction and materials shall be in accordance with ACI 117. 1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store bagged and bulk cement in weatherproof enclosures to exclude moisture and contaminants. B. Stockpile aggregate to avoid segregation and prevent contamination. 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 4 C. Avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage to admixtures. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing. 1.8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Cast-in-place concrete shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as part of the various items to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ADMIXTURES A. Admixtures shall be approved by ENGINEER prior to use. Any admixtures to be used shall be included in proposed concrete mix designs. B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260. C. Later Reducing and Set Retarding Agents: ASTM C494. 1. Type A: Set water reducing. 2. Type B: Set retarding. 3. Type C: Set accelerating. 4. Type D: Water reducing and set retarding. 5. Type E: Water reducing and set accelerating. 6. Type F: High range water reducing (super plasticizer).* 7. Type G: High range water reducing and set retarding.* * The relative durability factor of water reducing admixtures shall not be less than 80 and the chlorides content (as Cl-) expressed as a percent of the cement shall not exceed 0.1 percent by weight. D. Calcium Chloride: None allowed. E. Pozzolan: Pozzolan conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 618, Class F, is allowed as a Portland cement replacing agent under the following conditions: 1. The maximum percentage of Portland cement replacement is: a. 15 percent, for concrete exposed to weather. b. 20 percent, for interior concrete. 2. Pozzolan should not exceed 25% by weight of the cement plus pozzolans. 3. The minimum cement content shall be used in the design formulas before replacement is made. 4. Loss of ignition of pozzolan is less than 3 percent and the water requirement does not exceed 100 percent. 5. All other requirements of this section still apply. 6. Mix designs including trial batches are required for each aggregate source and for each concrete class. F. Cementitious Materials showing Manufacturer's certification of compliance, accompanied by mill test reports attesting that the materials meet the requirements of the specification under which it is furnished, for cement and pozzolan. 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 5 2.2 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS A. Cementitious materials shall each be of one type and from one source when used in concrete which will have surfaces exposed in the finished structure. Cementitious materials shall each be of one type and from one source when used in concrete which will have surfaces exposed in the finished structure. Cementitious materials shall conform to one of the following: 1. Cement: Use Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type II, Type IIA, or Type V, low alkali, unless noted otherwise. 2. Portland - Pozzolan Cement: ASTM C-595, Type IP-A(MS). Do not use Pozzolan cement unless approved by ENGINEER B. Only one brand of cement from one manufacturing plant may be used. 2.3 AGGREGATES A. Aggregates shall be natural aggregates, free from deleterious coatings, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33, except as modified herein. Aggregates shall not be potentially reactive as defined in Appendix XI of ASTM C 33. CONTRACTOR shall import nonreactive aggregates if local aggregates are reactive. B. Fine Aggregates 1. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sharp, natural sand and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33. Fine aggregate shall be graded as follows: FINE AGGREGATES Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 3/8 inch 100 #4 95-100 #8 80-100 #16 50-85 #30 25-60 #50 10-30 #100 2-10 2. Fine aggregates shall have no more than two percent by weight passing #200 sieve. C. Coarse Aggregate 1. Coarse aggregate shall be washed gravel or crushed stone, or a combination of these materials, consisting of hard, tough, durable particles free from adherent coatings. It shall contain no more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles. A thin, flat or elongated particle is defined as a particle having a maximum dimension in excess of five times its minimum dimension. Aggregate which has disintegrated or weathered badly under exposure conditions similar to those which will be encountered in the work under consideration shall not be used. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows (ASTM C 33): COARSE AGGREGATES 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 6 Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 1-1/2 inch 100 1 inch 95-100 ½ inch 25-60 #4 0-10 #8 0-5 2. Coarse aggregates shall have no more than 1.75 percent by weight passing #200 sieve. Proof of gradation will be provided to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR. 2.4 ACI MIX DESIGN A. The amount by which the average strength (fcr) of a concrete mix exceeds the specified compressive strength (f'c) shall be based upon no more than 1 in 100 random individual strength tests falling more than 500 psi below the specific strength. B. Proportion the materials in accordance with ACI 211.1, 211.2 or 211.3 as applicable to produce concrete having the properties or limitations of Table No. 03 30 00-A. 2.5 HAND MIXING A. Do not hand mix batches exceeding 0.5 cubic yards. B. Hand mix only on watertight platform. Mix cement and aggregate prior to adding water. C. Ensure all stones are thoroughly covered with mortar and mixture is of uniform color and consistency. 2.6 HEATING, WATER AND AGGREGATE A. Do not allow products of fuel combustion to contact the aggregate. B. Heat mixing water to maximum temperature of 150 degrees F. Heat aggregates uniformly. C. Do not mix cement with water and aggregate at a mix temperature greater than 100 degrees F. 2.7 WATER A. Water shall be potable, except that non-potable water may be used if it produces mortar cubes having 7- and 28-day strengths at least 90 percent of the strength of similar specimens made with water from a municipal supply. The strength comparison shall be made on mortars, identical except for mixing water, prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM C 109. Water for curing shall not contain any substance injurious to concrete, or which causes staining. 2.8 PROPORTIONS OF MIX A. Mixture Proportioning, Normal Weight Concrete: All concrete that must be watertight and resistant to freeze-thaw cycles and to naturally occurring or commonly used chemicals should be air entrained. All materials should be proportioned to produce a 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 7 well-graded mixture of high density and maximum workability with a minimum specified 28 day compressive strength of concrete classification. Trial batches shall contain materials proposed to be used in the project. Trial mixtures having proportions, consistencies and air content suitable for the work shall be made based on methodology described in ACI 211.1, using at least three different water-cement ratios. Trial mixes shall be proportioned to produce concrete strengths specified. In the case where ground iron blast-furnace slag is used, the weight of the slag will be substituted in the equations for the term P which is used to denote the weight of pozzolan. Trial mixtures shall be designed for maximum permitted slump and air content. The temperature of concrete in each trial batch shall be reported. For each water-cement ratio at least three test cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192. They shall be tested at 7 and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 39. From these test results a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between water-cement ratio and strength. Maximum water-cement or water-cement plus pozzolan ratios, entrained air content, slump ranges, etc., shall meet durability parameters noted in contract drawings and coordinated with requirements in ACI 318. 2.9 Average Strength: In meeting the strength requirements specified, the selected mixture proportion shall produce an average compressive strength exceeding the specified strength as per the requirements in ACI 301.CURING MATERIALS A. Normal Curing Compound 1. Curing compound shall be white pigmented and shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type 2 Class B. 2. Sodium silicate compounds cannot be used. 3. Manufacturer, or approved equal: a. 1200-White by W.R. Meadows b. White Resin Cure J10W by Dayton Superior c. Safe-Cure 2000 by ChemMasters d. Aqua Kure White by Lambert Corporation B. Dissipating Curing Compound 1. When the curing compound must be removed for finishes or grouting, compounds shall be of a dissipating type, conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type 1 or Type 2, Class B 2. Manufacturer, or approved equal: a. 1100-Clear by W.R. Meadows b. Kurez DR VOX by Euclid Chemical Company c. Clear Cure VOC J7WB by Dayton Superior d. Safe-Cure Clear DR by ChemMasters PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. CONTRACTOR shall inform ENGINEER at least 5 business days in advance of time and places at which CONTRACTOR intends to place concrete. All preparation work for concrete placements shall be substantially completed at least 2 workdays prior to the scheduled start of concrete placement to allow for ENGINEER's review and any necessary corrections. 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 8 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Surfaces to receive concrete shall be clean and free from frost, ice, mud, and water. Conduit and other similar items shall be in place and clean of any deleterious substance. B. Foundations: Earthwork shall be as specified. Flowing water shall be diverted without washing over freshly deposited concrete. Rock foundations shall be cleaned by high velocity air-water jets, sandblasting, or other approved methods. Debris and loose, semi- detached or unsound fragments shall be removed. Rock surfaces shall be moist but without free water when concrete is placed. Semi porous subgrades for foundations and footings shall be damp when concrete is placed. Pervious subgrades shall be sealed by blending impervious material with the top 6 inches of the in-place pervious material or by covering with an impervious membrane. C. Preparation of Previously Placed Concrete: Concrete surfaces to which other concrete is to be bonded shall be roughened in an approved manner that will expose sound aggregate uniformly without damaging the concrete. Laitance and loose particles shall be removed. Surfaces shall be moist but without free water when concrete is placed. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Embedded items shall be free from oil, loose scale or rust, and paint. Embedded items shall be installed at the locations indicated and required to serve the intended purpose. Voids in sleeves, slots and inserts shall be filled with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete. B. Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and secured in the forms at locations as indicated or shown on the Contract Drawings. Proper placement and locations shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 3.4 BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94, except as otherwise specified. Truck mixers, agitators, and non-agitating units shall comply with NRMCA TMMB-1. Ready-mix plant equipment and facilities shall be certified in accordance with NRMCA-QC 3. B. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quantity and quality of materials used in ready-mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by ENGINEER. C. Truck mixers and their operation must be such that the concrete throughout the mixed batch as discharged is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix, and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than 1 inch when the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or more than 2 inches when the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the work unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit, and 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 9 clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted. D. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be batched within an accuracy of 3 percent. Where two or more admixtures are used in the same batch, they shall be batched separately and must be compatible. Retarding admixture shall be added within one minute after addition of water is complete or in the first quarter of the required mixing time, whichever is first. Superplasticizing admixtures shall be added at the project site, and the concrete with the admixture shall be mixed 4 to 5 minutes before placing as recommended by manufacturer. Concrete that shows evidence of total collapse or segregation caused by the use of admixture shall be removed from the site. E. Control of Mixing Water: No water from the truck system or elsewhere shall be added after the initial introduction of mixing water for the batch. No water shall be added at the jobsite without the approval of ENGINEER. 3.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Sampling and Testing of the concrete will be as defined in Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control and Material Testing. 1. Aggregates: Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 33. 2. Sampling of Concrete: Samples of concrete for air, slump, unit weight, and strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 172. a. Air Content: Test for air content shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. A minimum of 1 test shall be conducted each time a slump test is made. b. Slump: At least 1 slump test shall be made on randomly selected batches of each mixture of concrete for every 100 cubic yards of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the job site. Also note the time batched at the plant and the starting time when unloading began at the site. Tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 143. c. Temperature: Concrete and air temperatures shall be measured and recorded with each set of cylinders and the air temperature shall also be recorded when the air temperature at the site is 40 degrees F or below and/or 90 degrees F or above. 3. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete a. Frequency of Testing: Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 100 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 3,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. If this sampling frequency results in less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least 5 randomly selected trucks or from each truck if fewer than 5 truck loads are used. Field cured specimens for determining form removal time or when a structure may be put in service shall be made in numbers directed to check the adequacy of curing and protection of concrete in the structure. The specimens shall be removed from the molds at the age of 24 hours and shall be cured and protected, insofar as practicable, in the same manner as that given to the portion of the structure the samples represent. 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 10 b. Testing Procedures: Cylinders for acceptance tests shall be molded and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31. Cylinders shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 7 days and 28 days, or at another specified test age. c. Evaluation of Results: Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength and no individual strength test result falls below the required strength by more than 500 pounds per square inch. d. Unless noted otherwise, make a minimum of five (5) concrete cylinders each time a test is required. When concrete is being placed in suspended slabs, beams and retaining walls make two (2) extra cylinders which must be cured on site. The extra cylinders will be used to determine when to remove forms and/or when to backfill. B. Investigation of Low-Strength Test Results: When any strength test of standard-cured test cylinder falls below the specified strength requirement by more than 500 pounds per square inch, or if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, steps shall be taken to assure that load-carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. Nondestructive testing in accordance with ASTM C 597, ASTM C 803 or ASTM C 805 may be permitted by ENGINEER to determine the relative strengths at various locations in the structure as an aid in evaluating concrete strength in place or for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data, shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. When strength of concrete in place is considered potentially deficient, cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42. At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by ENGINEER to least impair the strength of the structure. If the concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, the cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for seven days before testing and shall be tested dry. If the concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, the cores shall be tested after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C 42. Concrete in the area represented by the core testing will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to or at least 85 percent of the specified strength requirement and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength requirement. If the core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, or if structural analysis does not confirm the safety of the structure, load tests may be directed by ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318. Concrete work evaluated by structural analysis or by results of a load test and found deficient shall be corrected in a manner satisfactory to ENGINEER. All investigations, testing, load tests, and correction of deficiencies shall be performed, and approved by ENGINEER, at the expense of CONTRACTOR. 3.6 CONVEYING CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as possible and within the time interval specified in paragraph 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Conveying concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 304. 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 11 1. Chutes: When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer or other transporting equipment, chutes attached to this equipment may be used. Separate chutes will not be permitted except when specifically approved. a. Use metal or metal lined chutes with a maximum length of 20-feet. b. The minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the indicated consistency will readily flow in them. 2. Buckets: Bucket design shall be such that concrete of the required slump can be readily discharged. Bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed. The bucket shall provide means for positive regulations of the amount and rate of deposit of concrete in each dumping position. 3. Pumps: Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pumps when approved. Pump shall be the piston or squeeze pressure type. Pipeline shall be steel pipe or heavy duty flexible hose. Inside diameter of the pipe shall be at least three times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate. Distance to be pumped shall not exceed the limits recommended by the pump manufacturer. Concrete shall be supplied to the pump continuously. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline shall be ejected without contaminating the concrete in place. After each use, the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Flushing water shall be wasted outside the forms. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Mixed concrete which is transported in truck mixers or agitators or concrete which is truck mixed, shall be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. These limitations may be waived by ENGINEER if the concrete is of such slump after the 1-1/2 hour time or 300 revolution limit has been reached that it can be placed, without the addition of water to the batch. When the concrete temperature exceeds 85 degrees F, the time shall be reduced to 45 minutes. Concrete shall be placed within 15 minutes after it has been discharged from the truck. 1. Placing Operation: Concrete shall be handled from mixer to forms in a continuous manner until the approved unit of operation is completed. Adequate scaffolding, ramps and walkways shall be provided so that personnel and equipment are not supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be permitted when the sun, heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by CONTRACTOR prevent proper consolidation, finishing and curing. Concrete shall be deposited as close as possible to its final position in the forms, and there shall be no vertical drop greater than 4 feet except where suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where specifically authorized. Concrete should not be allowed to drop through a cage of reinforcing steel. Depositing of the concrete shall be so regulated that it will be effectively consolidated in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches thick, except that all slabs shall be placed in a single layer. Concrete to receive other construction shall be screened to the proper level to avoid excessive shimming or grouting. a. Additional requirements for depositing concrete in walls include, but are not limited to: 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 12 1) Deposit concrete in a continuous operation until section is completed. 2) Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers 2 ft maximum thickness. 3) Each layer of concrete shall be plastic when covered with following layer. 4) Rate of vertical rise not more than 4 ft per hour. 5) Pump concrete or use a tremie having varying lengths for placing concrete in columns and walls to prevent free fall of more than 4 ft. 6) Allow concrete to thoroughly settle before top is finished. Remove all laitance, debris, and surplus water from surfaces at tops of forms by screeding, scraping, or other effective means. b. Additional requirements for depositing concrete in slabs include, but are not limited to: 1) Deposit concrete in a continuous operation until section is completed. 2) Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. 3) In sloping slabs, proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top for the full width of the placement. 2. Consolidation: Immediately after placing, each layer of concrete shall be consolidated by internal vibrators, except for slabs 4 inches or less. The vibrators shall at all times be adequate in effectiveness and number to properly consolidate the concrete; a spare vibrator shall be kept at the jobsite during all concrete placing operations. The vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 8,000 vibrations per minute, and the head diameter and amplitude shall be appropriate for the concrete mixture being placed. Vibrators shall be inserted vertically at uniform spacing over the area of placement. The distance between insertions shall be approximately 1-1/2 times the radius of action of the vibrator so that the area being vibrated will overlap the adjacent just-vibrated area by a few inches. The vibrator shall penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and at least 6 inches into the preceding layer if there is such. Vibrator shall be held stationary until the concrete is consolidated and then withdrawn slowly. The use of form vibrators must be specifically approved. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete within the forms. Slabs 4 inches and less in thickness shall be consolidated by properly designed vibrating screeds or other approved technique. B. Cold Weather Requirements: Cold weather requirements shall conform to ACI 306 and this Specification. Special protection measures, approved by ENGINEER, shall be used if freezing temperatures are anticipated before the expiration of the specified curing period. Provisions should be made to keep the concrete at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F for 7 days. The ambient temperature of the air where concrete is to be placed and the temperature of surfaces to receive concrete shall be not less than 32 degrees F. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground. The temperature of the concrete when placed shall be not less than 55 degrees F nor more than 75 degrees F. Heating of the mixing water or aggregates will be required to regulate the concrete placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer shall be free from ice, snow, or frozen lumps. Salt, chemicals or other materials shall not be incorporated in the concrete to prevent freezing. Calcium chloride shall not be used. C. Hot Weather Requirements: Hot weather requirements shall conform to ACI 305 and this Specification. The temperature of the concrete placed during hot weather shall not exceed 85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 13 temperature. In no case shall the placing temperature exceed 95 degrees F. 3.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction joints shall be located as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Where concrete work is interrupted by weather, end of work shift or other similar type of delay, location and type of construction joint shall be subject to approval of ENGINEER. Unless otherwise indicated and except for slabs on grade, reinforcing steel shall extend through construction joints. Construction joints in slabs on grade shall be keyed or doweled as shown. Concrete columns, walls, or piers shall be in place at least 2 hours, or until the concrete is no longer plastic, before placing concrete for beams, girders, or slabs thereon. In walls having door or window openings, lifts shall terminate at the top and bottom of the opening. Other lifts shall terminate at such levels as to conform to structural requirements or architectural details. Where horizontal construction joints are required, a strip of 1-inch square-edge lumber, beveled and oiled to facilitate removal, shall be tacked to the inside of the forms at the construction joint. Concrete shall be placed to a point 1 inch above the underside of the strip. The strip shall be removed 1 hour after the concrete has been placed, and any irregularities in the joint line shall be leveled off with a wood float, and all laitance shall be removed. Prior to placing additional concrete, horizontal construction joints shall be prepared as specified in paragraph 3.1, PREPARATION OF SURFACES. 3.9 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Formed Surfaces 1. Repair of Surface Defects: Surface defects shall be repaired within 24 hours after the removal of forms. Honeycombed and other defective areas shall be cut back to solid concrete or to a depth of not less than 1 inch, whichever is greater. Edges shall be cut perpendicular to the surface of the concrete. The prepared areas shall be dampened and brush-coated with neat cement grout. The repair shall be made using mortar consisting of not more than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand. The mixed mortar shall be allowed to stand to stiffen (approximately 45 minutes), during which time the mortar shall be intermittently remixed without the addition of water. After the mortar has attained the stiffest consistency that will permit placing, the patching mix shall be thoroughly tamped into place by means approved by ENGINEER and finished slightly higher than the surrounding surface. For Class A and Class B finished surfaces the cement used in the patching mortar shall be a blend of job cement and white cement proportioned to produce a finished repair surface matching, after curing, the color of adjacent surfaces. Holes left after the removal of form ties shall be cleaned and filled with patching mortar. Holes left by the removal of tie rods shall be reamed and filled by dry-packing. Repaired surfaces shall be cured as required for adjacent surfaces. The temperature of concrete, mortar patching material, and ambient air shall be above 50 degrees F while making repairs and during the curing period. Concrete with defects which affect the strength of the member or with excessive honeycombs will be rejected, or the defects shall be corrected as directed by ENGINEER. 2. Class A Finish: Where a Class A finish is indicated, fins shall be removed. A mortar mix consisting of one-part Portland cement and two parts well-graded sand passing a No. 30 sieve, with water added to give the consistency of thick paint, shall be prepared. White cement shall be used to replace part of the job cement. After the 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 14 surface has been thoroughly wetted and allowed to approach surface dryness, the mortar shall be vigorously applied to the area by clean burlap pads or by cork or wood-floating, to completely fill all surface voids. Excess grout shall be scraped off with a trowel. As soon as it can be accomplished without pulling the mortar from the voids, the area shall be rubbed with burlap pads until all visible grout film is removed. The rubbing pads shall have on their surfaces the same sand-cement mix specified above but without any mixing water. The finish of any area shall be completed in the same day, and the limits of a finished area shall be made at natural breaks in the surface. The surface shall be continuously moist cured for 48 hours. The temperature of the air adjacent to the surface shall be not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours prior to, and 48 hours after, the application. In hot, dry weather the smooth finish shall be applied in shaded areas. 3. Class B Finish: Where a Class B finish is indicated, fins shall be removed. Concrete surface shall be smooth with a texture at least equal to that obtained through the use of Grade B-B plywood forms. 4. Class C Finish: Where a Class C finish is indicated, fins shall be removed. Concrete surfaces shall be relatively smooth with a texture imparted by the forms used. 5. Class D Finish: Where a Class D finish is indicated, fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height shall be chipped or rubbed off. Concrete surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the forms used. 6. See Specification Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes for required finishes. B. Unformed Surfaces: In cold weather, the air temperature in areas where concrete is being finished shall not be less than 50 degrees F in accordance with ACI 306R. In hot windy weather when the rate of evaporation of surface moisture, as determined by methodology presented in ACI 305R, may reasonably be expected to exceed 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour; coverings, windbreaks, or fog sprays shall be provided as necessary to prevent premature setting and drying of the surface. The dusting of surfaces with dry materials or the addition of water during finishing will not be permitted. Finished surfaces shall be plane, with no deviation greater than 5/16-inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Surfaces shall be pitched to drains. 1. Rough-Slab Finish: Slabs to receive fill or mortar setting beds shall be screened with straightedges immediately after consolidation to bring the surface to the required finish level with no coarse aggregate visible. 2. Float Finish: Slabs to receive a steel trowel finish and slabs where indicated shall be given a float finish. Screeding shall be followed immediately by darbying or bull floating before bleeding water is present, to bring the surface to a true, even plane. After the concrete has stiffened to permit the operation and the water sheen has disappeared, it shall be wood floated. Concrete that portrays stickiness shall be finished with a magnesium float in lieu of a wood float, and left free of ridges and other projections. Float finish is normally specified for surfaces that will receive other treatment such as built-up roofing, nonslip surfacing material. Float Finish shall not be used on wearing surfaces. 3. Trowel Finish: Slabs where indicated, shall be given a trowel finish immediately following floating. Surfaces shall be trowelled to produce smooth, dense slabs free from blemishes including trowel marks. In lieu of hand finishing, an approved power finishing machine may be used in accordance with the directions of the machine manufacturer. A final hard steel troweling shall be done by hand. Trowel finish shall be used on wearing surfaces and where a smooth finish is required. 4. Broom Finish: After floating, slabs where indicated, shall be lightly troweled, and 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 15 then broomed with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the main traffic. 5. See Specification Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes for required finishes. 3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: All concrete shall be cured by an approved method for the period of time given below: Concrete with Type III cement 3 days Concrete with Type II or IIA, or V, low alkali cement 7 days Concrete with Type IP-A(MS) cement blended with pozzolan 10 days B. Immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying extremes in temperatures, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and injury from rain and flowing water. Air and forms in contact with concrete shall be maintained at a temperature above 50 degrees F for the first 3 days and at a temperature above 32 degrees F for the remainder of the specified curing period. Exhaust fumes from combustion heating units shall be vented to the outside of the enclosure and heaters and ducts shall be placed and directed so as not to cause areas of overheating and drying of concrete surfaces or to create fire hazards. All materials and equipment needed for adequate curing and protection shall be available and at the site prior to placing concrete. No fire or excessive heat shall be permitted near or in direct contact with the concrete at any time. Curing shall be accomplished by any of the following methods, or combination thereof, as approved. C. Moist Curing: Concrete to be moist-cured shall be maintained continuously wet for the entire curing period. If water or curing materials used stains or discolors concrete surfaces which are to be permanently exposed, the concrete surfaces shall be cleaned. When wooden forms are left in place during curing, they shall be kept wet at all times. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be carried out as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Horizontal surfaces shall be cured by ponding, by covering with a 2-inch minimum thickness of continuously saturated sand, or by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene sheet, polyethylene-coated burlap or saturated burlap. Once the moist curing has started the concrete surface must not be allowed to become surface dry for the entire curing period. D. Membrane Curing: 1. Normal membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces that are to receive any subsequent treatment depending on adhesion or bonding to the concrete. Use a Dissipating curing compound for surfaces which are to be painted or are to receive bituminous roofing or waterproofing, or floors that are to receive adhesive applications of resilient flooring. 2. The curing compound selected shall be compatible with any subsequent paint, roofing, waterproofing or flooring specified. Membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces that are maintained at curing temperatures with free steam. 3. Curing compound shall be applied to formed surfaces immediately after the forms are removed and prior to any patching or other surface treatment except the cleaning of loose sand, mortar, and debris from the surface. 06/2024 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 178.24.200 PAGE 03 30 00 - 16 4. Surfaces shall be thoroughly moistened with water and the curing compound shall be applied to slab surfaces as soon as the bleeding water has disappeared, with the tops of joints being temporarily sealed to prevent entry of the compound and to prevent moisture loss during the curing period. 5. Compound shall be applied in a one-coat continuous operation by mechanical spraying equipment, at a uniform coverage in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 6. Concrete surfaces which have been subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified. 7. On surfaces permanently exposed to view, the surface shall be shaded from direct rays of the sun for the duration of the curing period. 8. Surfaces coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic, and from other sources of abrasion and contamination during the curing period. 3.11 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. Quality Control Testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control and Material Testing. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL 178.24.200 PAGE 03 31 05 - 1 SECTION 03 31 05 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR shall provide Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM), complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. CLSM shall be placed where indicated and may be used, if ENGINEER approves, for the following purposes: Normal CLSM with high slump, non-segregating consistency that readily flows and fills voids and difficult to reach places: pipe zone fill, trench zone fill, pipe abandonment, structure backfill, and structure cavity fill. Foundation CLSM is used where higher early strengths are required and future excavation is not likely to be required. RELATED WORK Related work in other sections includes but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C 94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C 138 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. ASTM C 403 Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete ASTM C 803 Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete ASTM D 4318 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils ASTM D 4832 Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders 06/2024 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL 178.24.200 PAGE 03 31 05 - 2 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Shop Drawings: CLSM mix designs which show the proportions and gradations of all materials proposed for each type of CLSM indicated. Each mix design shall be accompanied by independent laboratory test results of the indicated properties. If Contractor proposes to provide lower strength CLSM with aggregates that do not conform to ASTM C 33, Shop Drawings shall include a testing program that will be used to control the variability of the aggregates. The testing program shall be acceptable to ENGINEER. QUALITY ASSURANCE: All testing will be done by a testing laboratory at CONTRACTOR’S expense, except as otherwise indicated. If tests of the CLSM show non-compliance with the specifications, CONTRACTOR shall make changes as may be required to achieve compliance. Performing and paying for subsequent testing to show compliance shall be CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. Correlation Tests CONTRACTOR shall perform a field correlation test for each mix of CLSM used in pipe zone, trench zone, or backfill used in amounts greater than 100 cubic yards or when CLSM is required to support traffic or other live loads on the fill less than 7 days. Field correlation tests shall be performed in a test pit similar in cross section to the WORK and at least 10-feet long at a location near the WORK. The proposed location shall be acceptable to ENGINEER. Laboratory and field tests shall be performed on samples taken from the same CLSM batch mix. All tests shall be performed by a laboratory at CONTRACTOR’s expense. Testing shall be performed once each 2-hours during the first 8 hours, once each 8- hours during the first week, and once each 24-hours until the CLSM mix reaches the maximum design strength. a. Compression testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4832. b. Setting test shall be in accordance with ASTM C 403. c. Density tests shall be in accordance with ASTM C 138. PART 2 PRODUCTS CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL CLSM shall be a mixture of cement, pozzolan, coarse and fine aggregate, admixtures, and water, mixed in accordance with ASTM C 94. Composition: The following parameters shall be within the indicated limits and as necessary to produce the indicated compressive strengths. 06/2024 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL 178.24.200 PAGE 03 31 05 - 3 The actual mix proportions and flow characteristics shall be determined by the producer of the CLSM to meet requirements for compressive strength as specified for Normal CLSM or Foundation CLSM. Entrained air content shall be between 15 percent minimum and 30 percent maximum. Water reducing agent content as necessary. Properties Density shall be between 120 PCF minimum and 145 PCF maximum. Slump shall be as required by CONTRACTOR methods, but shall not promote segregation, nor shall slump exceed 10 inches. Compressive strength at 28 days: a. Normal CLSM: Between 100 psi minimum and 300 psi maximum. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all CLSM shall be Normal CLSM. b. Foundation CLSM: 500 psi to 1,000 psi. CEMENT Cement shall be Type ll in accordance with ASTM C 150. POZZOLAN Pozzolan shall be Type F or C in accordance with ASTM C 618. Pozzolan content, by weight, in Normal CLSM, shall not be greater than 90 percent. AGGREGATE Aggregate shall consist of a well graded mixture of crushed rock, soil, or sand, with a nominal maximum size of 3/8-inch. One hundred percent shall pass the 1 inch sieve; no more than 30 percent shall be retained on the 3/8-inch sieve; and no more than 12 percent shall pass the number 200 sieve. If more than 5 percent of the aggregate passes the number 200 sieve, the material passing the number 200 sieve shall have a plasticity index of less than 0.73(liquid limit-20), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. All aggregate shall be free from organic matter and shall not contain more alkali, sulfates, or salts than the native materials at the Site. ADMIXTURES Air entraining admixtures shall be in accordance with ASTM C 260. Water reducing admixtures shall be in accordance with ASTM C 494. WATER Water shall be potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, alkali, salt, and other impurities. 06/2024 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL 178.24.200 PAGE 03 31 05 - 4 PART 3 EXECUTION PREPARATION Subgrade and compacted fill to receive CLSM shall be prepared according to Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines. BATCHING, MIXING AND DELIVERY Batching, mixing, and delivery of CLSM shall conform to ASTM C 94. CLSM shall be mixed at a batch plant acceptable to the ENGINEER and shall be delivered in standard transit mix trucks. PLACEMENT CLSM shall be placed by tailgate discharge, conveyor belts, pumped, or other means acceptable to the ENGINEER. CLSM shall be directed in place by vibrator, shovel, or rod to fill all crevices and pockets. Avoid over-consolidation which causes separation of aggregate sizes. CLSM shall be continuously placed against fresh material unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. When new material is placed against existing CLSM, the placement area shall be free from all loose and foreign material. The surface of the existing material shall be soaked a minimum of one hour before placement of fresh material but no standing water shall be allowed when placement begins. CLSM placement for piping. Pipe shall be placed on soil pads and bedding placed under the pipe from one side and vibrated, as necessary, so that the CLSM flows to the opposite side. CLSM shall then be added to both sides of the pipe and vibrated until it fills the space between the pipe and the excavated trench bottom. CLSM shall be deposited in such a manner as to avoid uplift and deposited in its final position to avoid disturbing the pipe trench causing foreign material to mix with the cement slurry. Pipe zone backfill shall not be placed or compacted until the CLSM has reached initial set. Pipes placed on steep slopes may require a stiffer mix to prevent CLSM from flowing down the trench. Vibration may be required to ensure that the CLSM fills all voids. Temperature of the CLSM shall be between 50 and 90 degrees F, when placed. CLSM shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F. No CLSM shall be placed against frozen subgrade or other materials having temperature less than 32 degrees F. FINISHING The finish surface shall be smooth and to the grade indicated or directed by the ENGINEER. Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, and honeycombing. Finishing by wood float, steel trowel, or similar methods is not required. CURING CLSM shall be kept damp for a minimum of 7 days or until final backfill is placed. 06/2024 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL 178.24.200 PAGE 03 31 05 - 5 PROTECTION CLSM shall be protected from freezing for 72 hours after placement. No fill or loading shall be placed on CLSM until probe penetration resistance, as measured in accordance with ASTM C 803 exceeds 650 psi. CLSM shall be protected from running water, rain, and other damage until the Material has been accepted and final fill completed. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 1 SECTION 03 60 00 GROUT PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR shall provide grout, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless indicated otherwise, grouts shall be provided as listed in this Section whether indicated on the Contract Drawings or not. The following types of grout are covered in this Section: Cement Grout Non-Shrink Grout – Class I (cement based) Non-Shrink Grout – Class II (cement based) Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout Epoxy Anchor Grout for Adhesive Anchors Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C 136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C 307 Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C 496 Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C 531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes ASTM C 579 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 2 ASTM C 580 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes ASTM C 827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures ASTM C 881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete ASTM C 882 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear ASTM C 939 Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method) ASTM C 942 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory ASTM C 1090 Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout ASTM C 1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) ASTM C 1339 Standard Test Method for Flowability and Bearing Area of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts ASTM D 648 Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position ASTM D 695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Provide the following submittals for each type of grout used on the project: Test reports accompanied by a manufacturer’s statement that previously tested material is of similar type, quality, and manufacture as that which is proposed for use on this project shall be submitted for: a. Cement b. Aggregates c. Retardants d. Bonding compounds e. Epoxy Resin Certifications that grouts used on the project contain no chlorides or other chemicals that cause corrosion. Manufacturer’s literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing, handling, placement, curing, and appropriate uses for each type of grout used in the WORK, and location of use. ICBO/ES report shall be submitted for epoxy anchor grout for adhesive anchors. Manufacturer’s certification that non-shrink grout does not contain aluminum, zinc, or magnesium powders as a method of expansion. Submit manufacturer's written warranty as indicated herein. 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 3 Name and telephone number of grout manufacturer's representative who will give on-Site service. The representative shall have at least one year of experience with the indicated grouts. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. Grout and grout materials shall be stored in a dry shelter, protected from moisture, and for prepackaged grout, maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. QUALITY ASSURANCE The work shall be subject to inspection at all times by OWNER and ENGINEER for the purpose of determining that the work is properly executed in accordance with this specification. Failure to detect defective workmanship or material during any interim inspection shall not constitute acceptance of workmanship and materials. All testing will be done by a testing laboratory at CONTRACTOR’S expense, except as otherwise indicated. Field Tests Compression test specimens will be taken from the first placement of each type of grout, and at intervals thereafter selected by ENGINEER. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for cement grout and cement based non-shrink grout will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 1107, at intervals during construction selected by ENGINEER. A set of 3 specimens will be made for testing at 7 Days, 28 Days, and each additional time period as appropriate. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for topping grout and concrete/grout fill will be performed in accordance with Section 03 31 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, at intervals during construction selected by ENGINEER. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grouts will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B, at intervals during construction selected by ENGINEER. A set of 3 specimens will be made for testing at 7 Days and each earlier time period as appropriate. Construction tolerances shall be as indicated in Section 03 31 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete unless noted otherwise. PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Cement: Portland cement shall be ASTM C 150 Type II of Type V. Aggregate: General: Aggregate shall be non-reactive and shall be washed before use. When sources of aggregate are changed, test reports shall be provided for the material from the new source prior to commencing grout work. 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 4 Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be sand or crush stone conforming to ASTM C 33 as modified herein. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 136, gradation shall be such that 100 percent by weight passes a No. 8 sieve and not less than 45 percent by weight passes a standard No. 40 sieve. Variation from the specified gradation in individual tests will be accepted if the average of three consecutive tests is within the following variation: Standard Sieve Permissible Variation in Individual Test No. 30 or coarser 2% by weight No. 50 or finer 0.5% by weight Admixtures General: Admixtures shall be compatible with the grout and shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Admixtures shall be added to the grout mix separately. Water Reducing Retarder: Water reducing retarder shall comply with ASTM C 494, Type D and shall be Master Builders (BASF) MasterSet R 300, Sika Corporation Plastiment, or approved equal. Lubricant: Lubricant additive for cement pressure grouting shall be Sika Intraplast, or approved equal. Water: Water for washing aggregate, for mixing and for curing shall be potable, shall not contain more than 1,000 mg/L of chlorides as Cl, nor more than 1,300 mg/L of sulfates as SO4, and shall not contain impurities which may change the setting time by more than 25 percent or a reduction of more than 5 percent of the compressive strength of the grout at 14 days when compared to the results for grout made with distilled water. CEMENT GROUT Application: Surface repairs of concrete. Cement grout shall be composed of one part cement, 3 parts sand, and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match the color of adjacent concrete, white Portland cement shall be blended with regular cement as needed. The minimum compressive strength at 28 Days shall be 4000 psi. Cement grout materials shall be as indicated in Section 03 31 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete. NON-SHRINK GROUT General Non-shrink cementitious grout shall be a flowable, prepackaged, inorganic, non- metallic, cement type grout requiring only the addition of water. Cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel shall not be used. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years’ experience in the manufacture of cement based grouts. The 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 5 manufacturer shall provide technical services and provide a representative at the jobsite for product training prior to product installation. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink grout shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. Grout shall not contain chlorides or additives that may contribute to corrosion. Grout shall be formulated to be used at any consistency from fluid to plastic. Cement-based non-shrink grout shall have the following minimum properties when tested at a fluid consistency, at 28 Days: a. Minimum tensile splitting strength of 500 psi per ASTM C 496. b. Minimum flexural strength of 1,000 psi per ASTM C 580. c. Minimum bond strength (concrete to grout) of 1,900 psi per modified ASTM C 882. d. Grout shall be certified for use in freeze/thaw environments. Class I Non-Shrink Grout Application: Anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout in which the average working or operating temperature will be over 100 degrees F or in high fire risk areas; Beam and column (1 or 2 story) base plates less than 16-inches in the least dimension; Storage tanks and other non-motorized equipment and machinery under 30 horsepower; Filling blockout spaces for embedded items such as railing posts, gate guide frames, etc.; Repair of holes and defects in concrete members which are not water bearing and not in contact with soil or other fill material; and any other location not specifically listed in this Section or on the Contract Drawings. Class I non-shrink grout shall have a minimum 28 Day compressive strength of 5,000 psi when mixed at a fluid consistency. Class I non-shrink grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C, when mixed to fluid, flowable, and plastic consistencies. Grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0% expansion, and shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) in accordance with ASTM C 827. The grout when tested shall not bleed or segregate at maximum allowed water. Grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) and a maximum of 0.3% expansion in the hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1090. Furnish certification that the non-shrink property of grout is not based on gas production or gypsum expansion. Class I Non-Shrink Grout shall be Five Star Grout by Five Star Products, Sikagrout 212 by Sika Corporation, CB-G PG by Hilti, or equal. Class II Non-Shrink Grout Application: Column base plates (greater than 2 story or larger than 16-inches in the least dimension); under precast concrete elements; and repair of holes and defects in concrete members which are water bearing or in contact with soil or other fill materials. Class II non-shrink grout shall be a high precision, fluid, extended working time, grout. The minimum 28-Day compressive strength shall be 7,500 psi, when mixed at a fluid consistency. Grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0% expansion, and shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) in accordance with ASTM C 827. 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 6 Grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) and a maximum of 0.3% expansion in the hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1090. Class II non-shrink grout shall have an extended working time of 30 minutes minimum when mixed to a fluid consistency as defined in ASTM C 827 at temperature extremes of 45 to 90 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 1107. Class II non-shrink grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C when tested using the amount of water needed to achieve fluid consistency per ASTM C 939. The grout when tested shall not bleed or segregate at maximum allowed water content. Provide certification that its non-shrink property is not based on gas production or gypsum expansion. Class II non-shrink grout shall be Five Star Fluid Grout 100 by Five Star Products, Crystex by L&M Construction Chemicals, or equal. NON-SHRINK EPOXY GROUT Application: Pumps over 1,000 horsepower, unless indicated otherwise. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be a flowable, non-shrink, 100 percent solids system. The epoxy grout system shall have 3 components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, each premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any non-reactive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not permitted unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged. Epoxy grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0% expansion, and shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) in accordance with ASTM C 827, (modified for epoxy grouts by using an indicator ball with a specific gravity between 0.9 and 1.1). Epoxy grout shall have a negligible (less than 0.0006 in/in) length change after hardening, and a coefficient of thermal expansion less than 18x10-6 in/in F when tested according to ASTM C 531. The epoxy grout shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 9,000 psi in 24 hours and 13,000 psi in seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 579, method B. The mixed epoxy grout shall have a minimum working life of 90 to 120 minutes at 70 degrees F. The effective bearing area shall be a minimum of 95 percent EBA in accordance with ASTM C 1339. The chemical formulation of the epoxy grout shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. Do not reduce aggregate loading or add solvents to increase flowability. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall have the following minimum properties when tested at 7 Days: 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 7 Minimum bond strength to concrete of 3,000 psi per ASTM C 882 modified. Minimum bond strength to steel of 1,700 psi per ASTM C 882 modified. Minimum flexural strength of 2,500 psi per ASTM C 580. Minimum tensile strength of 2,000 psi per ASTM C 307. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be Five Star DP Epoxy Grout by Five Star Products, Inc., Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak by Sika Corporation, or equal. EPOXY ANCHOR GROUT Application: Anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout that is not in high temperature or high fire risk areas. Epoxy anchor grout shall conform to ASTM C 881, Type IV, Class A, B, and C, Grade 3 with the exception of gel time. Heat deflection temperature shall be a minimum of 139 °F per ASTM D 648. Manufacturer shall certify that the epoxy anchor grout will maintain 90 percent of its strength up to a temperature of 125 °F. Grout shall come in a 2 chambered cartridge with a metering system that provides the proper ratio of hardener and resin. The grout shall also come with a static mixer nozzle to thoroughly mix the hardener and resin together. Epoxy anchor grout shall be capable of being used in submersed applications once cured. Minimum compressive strength shall be 12,000 psi per ASTM D 695. Overhead anchors and anchors in fire-resistive construction shall be cast-in anchors. Embedment of adhesive anchors/rebar shall be deep enough to develop the anchor/rebar. Embedment shall not exceed 67 percent of the member depth. Epoxy anchor grout shall be Epcon C6+ by ITW Ramset/Red Head, Power-Fast Epoxy Injection Gel by Powers Fasteners, RE 500 by Hilti, or equal. TOPPING GROUT AND CONCRETE/GROUT FILL A. Where fill is thicker than 3-inches, structural concrete as indicated in Section 03 31 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, may be used when accepted by ENGINEER. B. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete/grout fill for built-up surfaces of tank, channel, and basin bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures proportioned and be mixed as indicated. Materials and procedures indicated for normal concrete in Section 03 31 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, shall apply unless indicated otherwise. C. Topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pounds of cement per cubic yard with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Topping grout in clarifiers shall contain between 750 and 800 pounds of cement per cubic yard with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.42. 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 8 D. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows: U.S. Standard Sieve Size Percent By Weight Passing 1/2 in 100 3/8 in 90-100 No. 4 20-55 No. 8 5-30 No. 16 0-10 No. 30 0 E. Final mix design shall be as determined by trial mix design as indicated in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. F. Topping grout and concrete grout/fill shall contain air-entraining agent per Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. G. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of topping grout and concrete/grout fill at 28 Days shall be 4,000 psi. CONSISTENCY A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Dry pack consistency is defined such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of that consistency; the type of grout to be used shall be as indicated herein for the particular application. B. The slump for topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishing conditions but shall not exceed 4-inches. PART 3 EXECUTION PREPARATION Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until sound, clean concrete surface is achieved. Rough concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. Align, level, and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted. GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the manufacturer of prepackaged grouts to provide on- Site technical assistance within 72 hours of request, as part of the WORK. Grout shall not be placed until base concrete or masonry has attained its design strength, unless authorized otherwise by ENGINEER. 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 9 When cementitious grouts are used on concrete surfaces, the concrete surface shall be saturated with water for 24 hours prior to placement. Upon completion of the saturation period, excess water shall be removed. Concrete substrate shall not be wet prior to placement of epoxy grouts. Surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete unless otherwise indicated. Surfaces that will be in contact with grout shall be free of dirt, loose rust, oil, wax, grease, curing compounds, laitance, loose concrete, and other deleterious materials. Shade the WORK from sunlight for at least 24 hours before and 48 hours after grouting. Contact the grout manufacturer's representative for assistance on hot and cold weather grouting techniques and precautions if applicable. GROUTING PROCEDURES General: Mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing, and other means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. Structural, equipment, tank, and piping support bases shall be grouted, unless indicated otherwise. The original concrete shall be blocked out or finished off a sufficient distance below the plate to provide for a minimum one-inch thickness of grout or other thickness if indicated. After the base plate has been set in position at the proper elevation by steel wedges or double nuts on the anchor bolts, the space between the bottom of the plate and the original pour of concrete shall be filled with non-shrink-type grout through a headbox of appropriate size. The mixture shall be of a fluid consistency and poured continuously into the space between the plate and the base concrete. Forms for grout shall be tight against retaining surfaces, and joints shall be sealed as recommended by the grout manufacturer to be liquid-tight. Forms shall be coated as recommended by the grout manufacturer for easy form release. Where this method of placement is not practical or where required by ENGINEER, alternate grouting methods shall be submitted for acceptance by ENGINEER. Concrete equipment pads for equipment bases that will be epoxy-grouted shall be sized so that, when the equipment base is fully grouted, the epoxy grout is stopped not less than 4-inches from the edge of the pad. Drilled Anchors and Reinforcing Bars General a. Drilled anchors and reinforcing bars shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Holes shall be roughened with a brush on a power drill, and cleaned. Drilled anchors shall not be installed until the concrete has reached the required 28 Day compressive strength. Anchors shall not be loaded until the grout has reached its indicated strength in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 10 b. CONTRACTOR shall identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes. Care shall be exercised in coring and drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. Notify ENGINEER if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging prestressing tendons, electrical and communications conduit, and piping. Epoxy Adhesive Anchors a. Grout shall be proportioned and mixed with automatic equipment. b. Unless otherwise indicated, embedment shall be sufficient to develop the ultimate tensile strength of the anchor or reinforcing bar per the manufacturer's ICBO/ES report, but shall not be less than 8 diameters for threaded rod or 12 diameters for reinforcing or smooth bars. c. Holes required for grouting shall be blown or vacuumed clean and are to be free of dust and standing water. Horizontal holes for grouting are to be drilled at a slight downward angle and with the inserted dowel or bolt bent to match. Cement Based Non-Shrink Grout a. In places of high temperature or fire hazard, anchor bolts shall be grouted in using cement based non-shrink grout, Class I. b. Unless otherwise indicated, embedment shall be sufficient to develop the ultimate tensile strength of the anchor or reinforcing bar per the manufacturer's ICBO/ES report, but shall not be less than 16 diameters for threaded rod or 24 diameters for reinforcing or smooth bars. c. When the bolt diameter is one-inch or less, the hole diameter should be a minimum of 2-inches. When the bolt diameter is greater than one-inch, the hole diameter should be at least twice the bolt diameter. d. Drilled holes shall be saturated with water for not less than 24 hours before installation of anchor/rod/rebar. e. The non-shrink grout should be placed in the holes in a non-sag (trowelable) consistency. The grout should be placed in the holes before the anchor and then the anchor inserted and vibrated to ensure proper coverage. Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill Mechanical, electrical, and finish WORK shall be completed prior to placement of topping or concrete/grout fill. To ensure bonding to the base slab, the base slab shall be given an exposed aggregate finish. Alternatively, where accepted by ENGINEER, the base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by a close- spaced rake while the surface is green. After curing, high pressure washing shall expose the aggregates and produce not less than a 3/16-inch amplitude roughness. Jackhammers or chipping hammers shall not be used. The minimum thickness of grout topping and concrete/grout fill shall be one-inch. Where the finished surface of concrete/grout fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degrees with the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in the concrete surface at the intersection point. The key shall be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/2 inches deep. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted to saturated surface dry (SSD) condition per the International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) -- Technical Guide for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays, prior to placing topping and fill. No topping concrete shall be placed until the slab is completely free from standing pools or ponds of water. A thin coat of neat cement grout shall be broomed into the surface 06/2024 GROUTING 178.24.200 PAGE 03 60 00 - 11 of the slab just before topping or fill placement. The neat cement grout shall not be allowed to dry before topping placement. If it does dry, it must be immediately removed using wet stiff brooms and reapplied. The topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or thorough tamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be installed shall be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the equipment in accordance with the procedures outlined by the equipment manufacturer after the grout is brought to the established grade. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots that shall be immediately eliminated. When the topping or fill has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. An approved type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation, but the last pass over the surface shall be by hand-troweling. During finishing, no water, dry cement, or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by ENGINEER, the tank shall be filled with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. CONSOLIDATION Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for each application, to assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled. CURING Cement based grouts shall be cured per 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete and per the manufacturer's recommendations. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 1 SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section covers Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) and appurtenant work. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 3. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-place Concrete 4. Section 07 21 00 Insulation 5. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 6. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICA CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI) 1. ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual 2. ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures 3. ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire 2. ASTM A 951 Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement 3. ASTM A 1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete 4. ASTM C 90 Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 5. ASTMC 140 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units 6. ASTM C 144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 7. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 8. ASTM C 207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 9. ASTM C 270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 10. ASTM C 404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout 11. ASTM C 476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 12. ASTM C 578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 2 13. ASTM C 652 Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale) 14. ASTM C 1019 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout 15. ASTM C 1314 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms 16. ASTM C 1384 Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars 17. ASTM D 226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 18. ASTM D 2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications 19. ASTM D 2287 Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds 20. ASTM E 514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry 21. ASTM E 518 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry D. NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION (NCMA) 1. NCMA-TEK 45 Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry Walls 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements and color samples. Include in the submittal dimensioned drawings for each type of block to be used on the project including, but not limited to, standard field block, lintel block, end block, caps, etc. Submit certificates showing compliance to the specifications for reinforcing steel, manufacturer’s literature for anchor ties and any other accessories used, grout and mortar mix design, samples for mortar color selection, and manufacturer’s literature for mortar and grout admixtures used along with CONTRACTOR’s proposed usage details. C. Three sample specimens of the masonry units proposed for incorporation into the project shall be submitted to ENGINEER. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing elevations of each wall indicating type, layout of units, and location of control joints. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement bars, complying with ACI SP-66. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup, spacing, lateral ties, and other components required for fabrication and placement of masonry reinforcement. E. Submit mix designs and test data for mortar and grout. F. Submit product data for premolded control joint strips and joint sealant and insulation material. G. A minimum 4-ft square free-standing mock-up sample panel shall be prepared for approval before starting masonry work. Masonry construction may not proceed until ENGINEER and OWNER approves the mock-up. The panel shall remain at the site for 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 3 reference until masonry work is completed. Upon completion and acceptance of the Project, CONTRACTOR shall demolish and dispose of the mock-up offsite at an approved facility. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. B. CONTRACTOR shall have mortar and grout tested to assure compliance with the Specifications and the governing codes by a testing laboratory approved by ENGINEER. The test reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER. 1. Tests shall be taken at the following times: a. At commencement of masonry work, at least one (1) samples each of mortar and grout shall be taken on 2 successive days. b. At any change in materials or job conditions, at least two (2) samples of each modified material, grout and mortar shall be tested. c. Make three (3) random tests each of mortar and grout. The random test samples shall be taken when requested by ENGINEER. d. The costs of tests shall be paid by CONTRACTOR as part of the work. The costs of additional tests, when required to verify compliance when requested by OWNER or ENGINEER, will be paid by OWNER. When tests do no verify compliance, the cost of additional tests shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. 2. Samples shall be stored in a moist environment until tested, unless directed otherwise by ENGINEER or the testing laboratory. Testing for mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C 270. Testing for grout shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1019. C. CONTRACTOR shall test the masonry units to assure compliance with the specifications and governing codes. Testing will be by a laboratory approved by ENGINEER. 1. Testing will be made of the following items: a. At the time of the construction of the sample panel, at least 3 masonry units shall be tested for each type of block, except separate tests are not required for block which only varies by texture. b. At any change in materials during construction, at least 3 masonry units shall be tested. c. Additional sets of at least 3 masonry units shall be tested whenever, in the judgment of ENGINEER, additional tests are necessary to determine the quality of the material. d. CONTRACTOR shall submit a letter of certification from the masonry unit supplier at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the materials to the site that the materials used in construction are representative of the materials used to construct the prisms. 2. The masonry units shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. D. Whenever required under the provisions of the Building Code, the work shall be subject to inspection by a Special Inspector selected by ENGINEER and approved by the local building code representative having jurisdiction. The costs of such inspections will be paid by OWNER. The Special Inspector will work under the supervision of ENGINEER. 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 4 E. Cold weather construction shall be per ACI 530.1, IBC Section 2104.3, and the local code requirements, whichever is more stringent. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means which will prevent mechanical damage and deterioration due to moisture, temperature changes, and corrosion. CONTRACTOR shall provide protection which will limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average relative humidity at the project site, as reported by the nearest National Weather Service station. B. Cementitious materials shall be stored off the ground and protected from moisture. C. Aggregates shall be stored in a manner which will preserve grading characteristics. D. Masonry accessories shall be stored to prevent corrosion, dirt accumulation, and other deterioration. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Protection: Do not lay masonry units when outside air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1. Grouted construction: On any day when the minimum anticipated nighttime temperature is 32 degrees F or less, in addition to complying with general procedures above, grout materials shall be heated to 90 degrees F to produce an in- place grout temperature of not less than 70 degrees F at end of workday. Protective blankets or enclosures shall remain in place for not less than 48 hours after placement of masonry units. 2. Water: Water for mortar or grout shall not be heated to more than 160 degrees F. B. Hot-Weather Protection: Cover or shade masonry units and mortar materials and use cool water for mortar whenever ambient air temperature is 90 degrees F or greater. At air temperatures of 85 degrees F or above, if relative humidity is less than 30 percent or wind is in excess of 15 miles per hour, provide protection by immediately covering newly constructed walls by providing windbreaks, or by using fog spray to reduce rate of evaporation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards for types required, and as follows: 1. Unit, Grade and Type: Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) shall conform to the requirements of the following table: 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 5 Unit ASTM Grade Type Minimum Net Area(1) Compressive Strength (psi) Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) C 90 Lightweight Hollow 2,000 Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) C 90 Medium Weight Hollow 2,000 Note: (1)Average of 3 units 2. Size: The size of masonry units shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Special shapes and sizes shall be provided as required, whether or not specifically indicated on the Contract Drawings as special. 3. Surfaces: Special surface texture or architectural faces shall be provided where indicated on the Contract Drawings. 4. Color: Where the finished surface will be visible, masonry units shall have colors as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Where colors are not specified, OWNER shall determine colors to be provided. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or IIA. 1. Type III may be substituted during cold-weather construction. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate for Mortar: Sand conforming to ASTM C 144. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Admixture for grout, if used, shall be Sika Grout Aid by Sika Corp.,or approved equal. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Masonry cleaner shall be a non-acidic cleaner, SafEtch by Prosoco, Inc., or approved equal. H. Accelerating Admixture: Non-chloride admixture for use in mortar mixes during cold weather, proportioned and mixed to comply with directions of manufacturer. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of ASTM C 1384 and the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable. a. MORSET by Grace Construction Products b. or approved equal I. Water-repellant and efflorescence control admixture. 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 6 1. All exterior masonry units shall utilize a water-repellant and efflorescence control admixture as recommended by the manufacturer to obtain ASTM E 514 test extended to 72 hours, class E rating. 2. Admixtures shall be MasterPel 240 (Rheopel Plus) by BASF, Eucon Blocktite by Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal. J. Integral water repellant admixture is required for mortar for exterior masonry units and shall be MasterPel 240MA (Rheopel Plus Mortar Admixture) by BASF, Blocktite Mortar Admixture by Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcing Bars shall be in accordance with Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcement. B. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage Materials: shall comply with ASTM A 951 and the following general requirements for materials required in joint reinforcement and anchorage devices. 1. Steel wire: ASTM A 1064. a. Zinc coating: ASTM A 641 Class 1. b. Application: Use at interior locations. C. Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, and as follows: 1. Width: Approximately 1-1/2 inches less than nominal wall width, providing not less than 1/2-inch mortar coverage on each exposure. 2. Wire sizes: a. Side rod diameter: 0.1483 inch. b. Cross rod diameter: 0.1483 inch. 3. Configuration: a. Applications of single unit width: Ladder design, cross rods at not more than 16 inches on center. b. Corners: Provide prefabricated L- and T-shaped units. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Premolded Control Joints Strips: Joints designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, of size and configuration indicated or as required for conditions, and as follows: 1. Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, 2AA-805, or 2. Polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC 654-4. B. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt). 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 7 C. Rebar Positioners: Rebar positioners shall be cold drawn steel 9 gauge wire, mill galvanized. Minimum tensile strength shall be 80,000 psi, yield point 70,000 psi minimum. Positioners shall be RB-Rebar Positioner, RB-8 for 8-inch block, RB-10 for 10-inch, or RB-12 for 12-inch block as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or approved equal. D. Joint Sealant: Provide joint sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures unless indicated and approved by ENGINEER. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout mixture. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix ingredients in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 and IBC Section 2103.7, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement and lime. 2. Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry and follow the proportion specification. 3. Mortar for use with colored masonry units shall have the integral color as approved by OWNER. D. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476 and IBC 2103.10 for grout used in construction of unit masonry elements. Use grout of consistency indicated or as required at time of placement to fill completely all spaces intended to receive grout. Compressive strength: 2500 psi @ 28 days. 1. Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MASONRY SEALERS (WATER RETARDENT) A. Sealers shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES A. Protect adjacent construction with appropriate means from mortar droppings and other effects of laying of concrete masonry units. B. Thoroughly clean foundations of laitance, grease, oil, mud, dirt, mortar droppings, and other objectionable matter. C. Review CMU material prior to installation and report any unsatisfactory units to the manufacturer. Set aside all units deemed unsatisfactory for further review by the testing agency and/or brick manufacturer’s representative. 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 8 D. Concrete Masonry Units: Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to laying, unless required for hot weather placement. E. Measurements for mortar and grout shall be accurately made. Shovel measurements are not acceptable. Mortar proportions shall be accurately controlled and maintained. F. Reinforcing: Before placing masonry reinforcing, remove loose rust, dirt, and other coatings. G. Masonry Thickness: Build masonry elements to full thickness shown. 1. Build single-wythe walls to actual thickness of masonry units, using units of size indicated. H. Chases and Recesses: Build masonry to accommodate the work of other trades, including chases and recesses as shown or required. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between jambs of openings and chases and recesses. I. Leave openings for equipment to be installed in masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to opening. J. Cutting Masonry Units: Use motor-driven saws with diamond disc blade to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. K. Add insulation to open cells if required on the Contract Drawings. See Section 07 21 00 - Insulation. Perlite or similar loose-fill materials will NOT be permitted. Do not lay units more than 4 feet vertically ahead of units filled with insulation. L. Work shall be performed in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, the latest edition of the IBC, and local governing codes for reinforced concrete hollow-unit masonry. M. CONTRACTOR shall set or embed anchors, bolts, reglets, sleeves, conduits, and other items as required. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances in vertical elements, including surfaces of walls, columns, and arises: 1. 1/4 inch to 10 feet 2. 3/8 inch to one story height, or 20 feet, whichever is less, except 1/4 inch for external corners, expansion joints, and other highly conspicuous vertical elements 3. 1/2 inch for 40 feet or more 4. Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 1/2 inch maximum, for vertical alignment of head joints. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous horizontal elements: 1. 1/4 inch in one bay or in 20 feet maximum 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 9 2. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more C. Variation from Plan Lines: Do not exceed the following horizontal construction tolerances for related portions of columns, walls, and partitions: 1. 3/8 inch in any bay of 16 feet maximum 2. 1/2 inch in 32 feet or more D. Variation in Cross Section: Do not exceed the following masonry elements: 1. Minus 1/4 inch 2. Plus 1/2 inch E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for thickness of mortar joints: 1. Bed joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch 2. Head joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch 3.3 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL A. Layout: Lay out masonry for accurate pattern bond, for uniform joint widths, and for accurate location of specific features before beginning actual construction. Avoid use of masonry units of less than 1/2 size. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners and jambs. B. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in course above and below except where other bonds are indicated at special features. 1. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond. 2. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. C. Reinforced Concrete Unit Masonry: Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities. Keep cavities clear of mortar, including bed area of first course, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated, to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars, and to provide direct grout contact with supporting surfaces. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Lay masonry in proper sequence to avoid toothing. Rack walls back in each course at end of each day. Before resuming, clean exposed surfaces and remove loose masonry units and mortar. E. Built-in Work: As work progresses, build in items indicated for installation in masonry, filling around built-in items solidly with masonry. 1. Fill spaces between metal frames and masonry elements solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install lintels of types indicated at all openings. 1. Bearing: Provide not less than 8 inches of bearing at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 10 2. Reinforcement: At masonry openings greater than one foot in width, install horizontal joint reinforcement in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8 inches apart immediately above lintel and immediately below sill. Extend reinforcement which is in addition to required continuous joint reinforcement not less than 24 inches beyond jambs of the opening, except at control joints. G. Formwork: Provide temporary formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Construct formwork to shape line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to avoid leakage of mortar and grout. 1. Brace, tie, and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in all courses. B. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. Except as otherwise indicated, maintain joint widths of 3/8 inch. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are concealed or covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. E. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners of jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.5 CONTROL JOINTS/EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide control joints or expansion joints in masonry walls where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Joints shall be full height and continuous in appearance. C. Run bond beam reinforcing bars continuously through control joints. Stop horizontal reinforcing at expansion joints. D. Insert control joint filler in joints as wall is constructed. E. Insert 50% (or higher) compressible neoprene expansion joint material in expansion joints. 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 11 3.6 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A. Preparation: Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on Contract Drawings or final shop drawings. Do not use bars with cross section reduced due to excessive rusting and other causes. B. Placement: Position reinforcement bars accurately at spacings indicated. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal bars may be placed as the work progresses. Provide not less than the greater of either the bar diameter or 1 inch clear between bars. For columns, piers, and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as indicated, but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2 inches, whichever is greater. C. Splicing: Provide lapped splices at locations shown; do not splice at other points or by other methods, unless approved by ENGINEER. Provide not less than the minimum lap indicated, or as required by governing code. 3.7 GROUTING A. Grouting Technique: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2 inches and minimum clear area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying concrete masonry units, extending above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters or 10 feet, whichever is less. 2. Grout shall be placed in all open areas of the masonry block as specified herein. 3. Lay masonry units to maximum pour height, not to exceed 4 feet. 4. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Vibrate grout during placement. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring operation for more than 1 hour. Terminate pour 1-1/2 inches below top of highest course in pour, except at tops of walls. 5. Stop grout in vertical cells 1/2 inch below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beams. 3.8 REPAIR AND POINTING A. Repair: Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of mortar joints, enlarge any holes or voids except weep holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent work, to provide a neat and uniform appearance. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean masonry as follows after mortar is thoroughly set and cured: 06/2024 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 178.24.200 PAGE 04 22 00 - 12 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand, using wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel, leaving half of panel uncleaned for comparison. 3. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with directions of masonry manufacturer and as recommended by NCMA in Tek Bulletin No. 45. B. Protection: CONTRACTOR shall protect all masonry until such time as the Work is completed and accepted by ENGINEER. 3.10 FINISH A. Block shall be finished as per Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishes. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS 178.24.200 PAGE 05 45 00 - 1 SECTION 05 45 00 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS (PIPE SUPPORTS) PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This Section covers materials and installation of mechanical metal supports, pipe supports, hangers, guides, anchors and appurtenances as specified and indicated. CONTRACTOR shall provide mechanical metal supports in accordance with this Section whether shown on the Contract Drawings or not. RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes Section 33 05 03 Copper Pipe Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe Section 33 05 07.1 PVC Pressure Pipe (ASMT 1785) Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances Section 40 05 13.13 Steel Process Piping REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTING INDUSTRY (MSS) MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials Design and Manufacture MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation Practices MSS SP-127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, Application AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) ASME B 31.1 Power Piping AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A 47 Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A 48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A 153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and 06/2024 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS 178.24.200 PAGE 05 45 00 - 2 Steel Hardware ASTM A 575 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades ASTM A 576 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings of mechanical supports, pipe supports, hangers and guides. Provide scaled shop drawings showing locations of the supports and detailed drawings for each support. Identify each type of hanger or support by the manufacturer’s part number of figure on the drawing. Provide installation drawings and manufacturer’s catalog information on each type of hanger and support. Provide structural calculations for special supports and anchors, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Utah. PART 2 MATERIALS GENERAL All pipe hanger and supports shall be manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-58, MSS- SP-569, MSS-SP-89 except as modified herein. Where applicable, design and manufacture must also conform to ANSI/ASME B31.1. Supports for plumbing or fire piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing or fire code and the requirements of the local jurisdiction. Hangers, supports, anchors and restraints must be designed in accordance with MSS- SP-127 to withstand all static and dynamic loading conditions which act upon the piping system and associated equipment. Piping supports and equipment must be considered as a total system and appropriate balance calculations made to determine load forces at critical stress points. Loading conditions to be considered may include, but are not limited to: The total load of pipe, fittings, valves, insulation and any expected contents of the pipe. Thermal expansion and contraction Stress from cycling of equipment or process. Vibration transmitted to or from equipment or terminal connection. Wind, snow or ice loading on outdoor piping Loading due to seismic forces Static and dynamic forces at points of attachments must be considered to help ensure structural integrity of buildings or equipment. Hanger and supports must be selected so as to minimize the effect of piping system loading on the structure. In general, piping shall be supported from structural members, such as walls, beams, columns and slabs, using approved structural attachments. In situations where 06/2024 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS 178.24.200 PAGE 05 45 00 - 3 approved attachments cannot be used, alternative attachments or substructure assemblies must receive approval by ENGINEER prior to installation. Prior approval by ENGINEER must be given before any cutting or drilling of building structural steel. Damage to the structure through welding, cutting or drilling will not be permitted if it reduces the structures strength below the established safety factor for the structure. Any additional structural steel required to properly support piping or equipment shall be furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER. SUPPORT MATERIALS Pipe supports, hangers, guides, etc. shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Steel shall be in accordance with ASTM A 36, ASTM A 575, or ASTM A 576. Hot-dip galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153. Bases, rollers, and anchors shall be steel as described above or may be cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48. Pipe clamps shall be steel as described above or may be malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. Submerged supports, as well as piping in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the high water level, shall have supports, including hardware and anchors constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Piping in chemical or corrosive areas shall have supports, including hardware and anchors constructed of Type 316 stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Supports fabricated from other materials specified on the Drawings shall have a protective coating in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings. FLOOR MOUNTED SUPPORTS Floor mounted pipe supports shall be the adjustable saddle support with stanchion, base and U-bolt or adjustable flange support type with stanchion and base. Pipe supports with stanchion and base plate shall be sized for the pipe or mechanical appurtenance it supports. All pipe supports shall have a 1-inch-high grouted pad to be used as a leveling base. Pipe supports shall be secured to the floor. An EPDM Rubber insulation pad shall be provided between the pipe and the U-Bolt. SPRING-TYPE HANGERS Spring-type hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion/contraction such as engine exhaust piping. Design the spring-type hangers per the manufacturer’s recommendations. CONCENTRATED LOADS Concentrated loads, such as meters, valves, and equipment, on PVC piping systems shall have supports on each side of the concentrated load. CONCRETE ANCHORS Anchors shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous Metals. 06/2024 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS 178.24.200 PAGE 05 45 00 - 4 MANUFACTURERS Mechanical Metal Support (pipe support) manufacturers shall be Anvil International Inc., B-Line by Eaton (Cooper Industries), Utility Coatings & Fabrication, Piping Technology & Products, Inc. (PT&P), or approved equal. To be considered an approved equal, materials must be of similar diameter, thickness, and strength to the product specified. PART 3 EXECUTION GENERAL Mechanical metal supports, pipe supports, hangers, guides, etc. shall be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions and ASME B31.1 – Power Piping. Pipe supports shall be positioned in order to produce an orderly, neat piping system. Hanger rods shall be vertical without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting as close to ceilings or roods as possible and without interference with other work. Hangers shall be installed in a manner to prevent obstructing ladders, manhole covers, and access hatches. Set embedded inserts accurately in position and support them rigidly before concrete is placed and prevent displacement during and after placement of concrete. Provide separate hangers or supports at valves, meters, elbows, tees, and other equipment. Provide separate hangers on each both sides of each non-rigid joint or flexible coupling. Install piping without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any connecting valves, pumps, or other pipe to which the pipe is connected. Hangers and supports for rigid plastic pipe shall be provided with a support shield to spread the load bearing surface. Use of wire hangers, perforated strap, hanging from unreinforced metal deck and cellular roof deck are not permitted. Repair or replace metal items damaged during installation. Follow the manufacturer’s procedures for repairing damaged surfaces. Galvanizing Field Repairs Surface preparation shall consist of removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush-off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7) over an area extending at least 4 inches into the undamaged area. The coating shall be applied to at least 3 mils dry film thickness and shall be Zinc- Clad XI by Sherwin-Williams, Galvax by Alvin Products, Galvite by ZRC Worldwide, or approved equal. 06/2024 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS 178.24.200 PAGE 05 45 00 - 5 SUPPORT LOCATION AND SPACING Supports for horizontal piping shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending and stresses in the piping. Spacing shall not exceed the maximum indicated spans. Maximum spans indicated in the tables below are for ambient temperatures or the temperatures listed for the materials and pipe wall thicknesses shown. Adjust the span spacing for different temperatures and/or pipe wall thicknesses per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Install pipe supports on horizontal and vertical runs at the spacing shown or detailed on the Drawings. If no spacing or rod sizes are given on the Drawings or in the specifications for a particular piping system, use the following tables or the recommendations of the support or pipe manufacturer. Support Spacing for Steel Pipe (Section 40 05 13.13 – Steel Process Piping) Schedule 40 and Schedule 80: Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Span Water Service (feet) Maximum Span Vapor Service (feet) Minimum Hanger Rod Size (inches) 3/8 and smaller 4 5 3/8 1/2 through 1 6 8 3/8 1-1/4 through 2 8 10 3/8 2-1/2 through 3 10 14 1/2 3-1/2 through 4 10 15 5/8 6 12 20 3/4 8 12 24 3/4 Note: These spacings do not apply where span calculations are made or where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional supports. Support Spacing for Copper Pipe (Section 33 05 03 – Copper Pipe) per MSS-SP-69, Table 3: Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Span Water Service (feet) Maximum Span Vapor Service (feet) Minimum Rod Size (inches) 1/2 5 6 3/8 3/4 5 7 3/8 1 6 8 3/8 1-1/4 7 9 3/8 1-1/2 8 10 3/8 2 8 11 3/8 2-1/2 9 12 1/2 3 10 14 1/2 3-1/2 11 15 1/2 4 12 16 5/8 Note: These spacings do not apply where span calculations are made or where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional supports. 06/2024 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS 178.24.200 PAGE 05 45 00 - 6 Support Spacing for PVC Pipe (Section 33 05 07.1 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe) Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. The table below is meant as a general guideline and it is recommended that the pipe manufacturer be consulted for specific spacing recommendations relating to their pipe, load conditions, operating temperatures, and service conditions. Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Span Schedule 40 (feet) Maximum Span Schedule 80 (feet) 60°F 80°F 100°F 120°F 60°F 80°F 100°F 120°F 1/2 4.5 4.5 4 2.5 5 4.5 4.5 3 3/4 5 4.5 4 2.5 5.5 5 4.5 3 1 5.5 5 4.5 3 6 5.5 5 3.5 1-1/4 5.5 5.5 5 3 6 6 5.5 3.5 1-1/2 6 5.5 5 3.5 6.5 6 5.5 3.5 2 6 5.5 5 3.5 7 6.5 6 4 2-1/2 7 6.5 6 4 7.5 7.5 6.5 4.5 3 7 7 6 4 8 7.5 7 4.5 4 7.5 7 6.5 4.5 9 8.5 7.5 5 6 8.5 8 7.5 5 10 9.5 9 6 8 9 8.5 8 5 11 10.5 9.5 6.5 10 10 9 8.5 5.5 12 11 10 7 12 11.5 10.5 9.5 6.5 13 12 10.5 7.5 Note: These spacings do not apply where span calculations are made or where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional supports. Data taken from Anvil International, Inc. Catalog PH-2006, page PH-213 and is based on continuous span and for un-insulated line carrying fluids of specific gravity up to 1.00. Supports for Ductile Iron Pipe (Section 33 05 05 – Ductile Iron Pipe) should be installed in locations shown on the Drawings with a minimum of one support per 20- foot length of pipe. If longer spans are required, the supports should be designed in accordance with DIPRA – Design of Ductile Iron Pipe on Supports and the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports should be cradle type with a saddle angle of 120 degrees. The table below shows the recommended maximum spans per US Pipe – Long Span and Bridge Crossing Pipe guidelines. Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Span Water Service (feet) 6 28 8 30 10 30 12 35 14 35 16 40 18 42 20 to 64 45 Note: These spacings do not apply where 06/2024 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS 178.24.200 PAGE 05 45 00 - 7 span calculations are made or where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional supports. Support Spacing for ABS Pipe (Section 33 05 01 – ABS Pipe) Schedule 40. The table below is meant as a general guideline and it is recommended that the pipe manufacturer be consulted for specific spacing recommendations relating to their pipe, load conditions, operating temperatures, and service conditions. Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Span Schedule 40 (feet) 60°F 80°F 100°F 120°F 140°F 1-1/2 6 6 5.5 3.5 3 2 6 6 5.5 3.5 3 3 7 7 7 4 3.5 4 7.5 7.5 7 4.5 4 6 8.5 8.5 8 5 4.5 Note: Plumbing code may require a maximum horizontal spacing of 4 feet for all pipe sizes. Verify requirement with the local governing agency. Support spacing for other pipe materials shall be based on recommendations from the pipe manufacturer. Provide sway bracing for hangers where shown on the Drawings. If no bracing is shown, provide bracing at 10 foot maximum center-to-center intervals. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 05 50 00 - 1 SECTION 05 50 00 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION RELATED SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCES Manual of Steel Construction ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASMT A 153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A 276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A 307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A 615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM F 593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ASTM F 594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts RELATED WORK 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 05 50 00 - 2 Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes SUBMITTALS QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 MATERIALS CARBON STEEL STAINLESS STEEL 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 05 50 00 - 3 HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED BOLTS Buried locations Submerged locations Locations subject to occasional flooding Inside hydraulic structures Chemical handling areas Inside buried manholes, vaults, and structures that do not have a gravity drain or sump pump Inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas. ADHESIVE ANCHORS 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 05 50 00 - 4 WEDGE ANCHORS STEEL PIPE VAULT VENTS GRATING 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 05 50 00 - 5 STEEL PIPE HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAILS PART 3 EXECUTION GENERAL 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 05 50 00 - 6 Surface preparation shall consist of removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush-off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7) over an area extending at least 4 inches into the undamaged area. The coating shall be applied to at least 3 mils dry film thickness and shall be Zinc- Clad XI by Sherwin-Williams, Galvax by Alvin Products, Galvite by ZRC Worldwide, or approved equal. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 MOISTURE PROTECTION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 11 00 - 1 SECTION 07 11 00 MOISTURE PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section provides specifications for all waterproofing and damp proofing of the buried or below grade concrete surfaces, including moistureproof underlays for concrete slabs. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance and Design Requirements. Prior to application of waterproofing, CONTRACTOR shall cause a representative of the manufacturer of the materials to inspect and certify that the surfaces to be waterproofed are in a condition suitable for application of the waterproofing. Following application of the waterproofing, CONTRACTOR shall cause a representative of the manufacturer of the materials to inspect and certify that the materials were applied in complete accordance with the manufacturer's current recommendations. B. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 450 Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Pitch Use in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing 2. ASTM D 882 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 3. ASTM D 1668 Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing. 4. ASTM E 1643 Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slab 5. ASTM F 1249 Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor C. PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE COUNCIL (PSTC) 1. PSTC 101 International Standard for Peel Adhesion of Pressure-Sensitive Tape 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer product data, cut sheets, and recommended installation instructions. 06/2024 MOISTURE PROTECTION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 11 00 - 2 C. Prior to acceptance of the work, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to ENGINEER two copies of the specified certifications for material application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATERPROOF COATING A. Waterproof coating shall be coal tar epoxy resin. Acceptable products are Bitumastic 300M by Carboline, Targuard Low VOC Coal Tar Epoxy by Sherwin Williamns, PorterTuf 2000 HB Coal Tar Epoxy by Porter Coating, Series 46H-413 HB Tneme- Tar by Tnemec, Amercoat 78HB by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, or approved equal. 2.2 MOISTUREPROOF COATING A. Moistureproof coating shall be coal tar solution. Acceptable products are Bitumastic 50 by Carboline, Corothane I Coal Tar by Sherwin Williams, Series 46-465 HB Tnemecol by Tnemec, HE107 by Henry, or approved equal. 2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Water-roof Pitch: Waterproof pitch shall be coal tar pitch. B. Membrane Fabric: Membrane fabric shall be coal tar pitch coated open mesh fabric per paragraph 1.2 B. C. Reglets: Reglets for anchoring membrane shall be fabricated of 16-ounce copper. D. Protective Board: Protective board shall be 2-inch Celotex insulation board treated to prevent decay. 2.4 MOISTUREPROOF UNDERLAY A. Plastic Membrane. Plastic membrane for moistureproof underlay shall be an ASTM E 1745 Class A membrane manufactured from virgin polyolefin resins having a minimum film thickness of 10 mils. Plastic membrane shall meet the following specifications: 1. Water Vapor Permeance:0.05 perms maximum (perm unit = grains/(ft2*hr*in-Hg)) in accordance with ASTM F 1249. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lbf/in (minimum) per ASTM D 882. B. Acceptable membranes are Stego Wrap Class A by Stego Industries, Perminator by W. R. Meadows, Vapor Barrier Blue VB10 by Americover, or approved equal. C. Pressure Sensitive Tape. Pressure sensitive tape shall be minimum 3-inch wide, 6 mil pressure sensitive polyethylene tape with acrylic, pressure-sensitive adhesive. Manufacturers shall be Stego Tape by Stego Industries, Perminator Tape by W.R. Meadows, VTW Vapor Tape by Americover, or approved equal. 06/2024 MOISTURE PROTECTION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 11 00 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WATERPROOF COATING A. Location. Waterproof coating shall be applied to the water side of walls and bottoms of channels or tanks which are common with areas to be occupied by equipment, piping or personnel. Waterproof coating shall not be applied to those surfaces to receive liquid waterproofing. B. Surface Preparation. New concrete to be waterproofed shall have aged at least 60 days and shall have a moisture content of less than 14%. Concrete surface shall be brush treated with a 10% muriatic acid solution and thoroughly flushed with water after 10 minutes. C. Walls of existing channels and tanks shall be steam cleaned prior to application of waterproofing material. D. Application. Prime coat shall be thinned and applied at the rate of approximately 200-300 square feet per gallon depending on surface condition. Finish coats shall be applied at the rate of 100 square feet per gallon. Final coat shall be black. Total dry film thickness shall be minimum 20 mils. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer. E. Application Procedures. Following the manufacturer’s application instructions and these application procedures for waterproofing products as listed in paragraph 2.1 are as follows: 1. Prime coat shall consist of one coat of coal tar epoxy resin coating, black. Finish coats shall consist of two coats of coal tar epoxy resin coating, alternating red and black colors. 3.2 MOISTUREPROOF COATING A. Location. Moistureproof coating shall be applied to below grade, earth side of outside concrete walls which are common with areas to be occupied by equipment, piping, or personnel. Moistureproof coating is not required for walls to be provided with waterproof membrane or for walls which are poured directly against an excavated surface. B. Surface Preparation. Preparation of concrete and masonry walls shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Application. Prime and finish coats shall be applied at the rate of 70 square feet per gallon. The number of finish coats shall be sufficient to produce a dry film thickness of at least 13 mils. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer. 3.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Location. Waterproof membrane shall be applied to exterior surfaces as designated on the drawings. B. Surface Preparation. Concrete surfaces to receive waterproof membrane shall be clean, dry and shall have at least a Class II form finish. 06/2024 MOISTURE PROTECTION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 11 00 - 4 3.4 MOISTUREPROOF UNDERLAY A. Install moistureproof underlay in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. B. Location. Unless otherwise noted, moistureproof underlay shall be provided under all concrete floors or floating slabs-on-grade deposited on gravel base or sand. Moistureproof underlay shall be provided under all concrete floors or floating slabs-on-grade with pressure relief valves and gravel base. C. Surface Preparation. Backfilled surfaces to receive moistureproof underlay shall be leveled off and smoothed over to minimize contact with sharp edges. Joints shall be sealed by means of pressure sensitive tape. Where pipes and conduits pass through the plastic membrane, they shall be wrapped tightly with separate sheets of membrane which shall then be sealed with tape to the main membrane. Reinforcing steel or mesh shall be supported by small precast placing chairs designed with flat bases to protect the membrane. CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to maintain the integrity of the membrane at all times. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 INSULATION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 21 00 - 1 SECTION 07 21 00 INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This Section covers the work required to provide and install insulation in buildings and structures, complete and in place. RELATED WORK Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 272 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich Constructions ASTM C 518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus ASTM C 547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation ASTM C 549 Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation ASTM C 553 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications ASTM C 578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation ASTM C 592 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type) ASTM C 612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation ASTM C 665 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing ASTM C 1029 Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation ASTM D 1622 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics ASTM D 1621 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics ASTM D 2842 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics 06/2024 INSULATION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 21 00 - 2 ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL1256 Fire Test of Rook Deck Constructions FACTORY MUTUAL (FM) Approval Standard for Class 1 Fire Rating of Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Panels, Interior Finish Materials or Coatings and Exterior Wall Systems SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit manufacturer’s literature, installation instructions, product test reports and technical data. Submit manufacturer’s certification that the proposed materials comply with this Section. For foam-in-place insulation, submit a copy of the foam insulation contractor’s certification and ICC-ES report and manufacturer’s documentation confirming material conforms to ASTM C 1029. DELIVERY AND STORAGE Materials shall not be allowed to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice and snow. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling storage and protection shall be strictly followed. If required, during cold weather, store in heated storage areas following the manufacturer’s guidelines for minimum and maximum temperatures. Material shall not be exposed to sunlight and shall be protected against ignition. Materials shall be concealed as quickly as possible after completion of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS INSULATION Thermal resistance of insulation shall be not less than the R-values shown on the Contract Drawings. R-values shall be determined at 75 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 518. Insulation shall be the standard product of a manufacturer and factory marked or identified with manufacturer's name or trademark and R-value. Identification shall be on individual pieces or individual packages. The materials and application of building insulation shall conform to the applicable requirement of the Underwriters Laboratories “Fire Resistance Index”, Factory Mutual requirements, and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Minimum R-Value in all roof insulation shall be R-30. 06/2024 INSULATION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 21 00 - 3 FOAMED-IN-PLACE THERMAL INSULATION Foamed-in-place or sprayed polyurethane foam plastic insulation conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 1029 shall be placed in cavities of masonry walls. Foamed-in- place thermal insulation in walls shall be 2-component cellular plastic insulation comprised of a spray-dried polymeric resin and a foaming catalyst concentrate insulation by frothing/pouring in place. It shall have the following characteristics: Foamed-in-place insulation shall be InsulSmart Interior Foam Insulation by CFI FOAM, Inc., Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, or approved equal. CMU BLOCK INSULATION INSERTS As an alternative to Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation, CMU Block Insulation Inserts may be installed. Inserts shall be flame retardant, expandable polystyrene design specifically to fit inside standard two (2) core masonry units. Inserts shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 578 with minimum density of 1.25 pcf. Inserts shall meet the following characteristics: Property Requirement Standard Thermal Resistance (R) per inch at 75°F (minimum) 4.1 ASTM C 518 Water Vapor Permeance per inch of thickness (minimum) 1.1 ASTM C 355 or ASTM E 96 Water Absorption Percent (%) by Volume (maximum) 1.8 ASTM C 272 CMU Block Insulation Inserts shall be ThermaSound CMU Block Insert, Korfil by Concrete Block Insulating Systems (DRIS), or approved equal. BLANKET INSULATION Blanket insulation shall be glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets complying with ASTM C 665, Type III, with foiled back vapor barrier laminated to one face, with 1-inch flanges on long edges, and vapor transmission not more than 0.50 perms. Manufacturers shall be Owens-Corning, CertainTeed, Johns- Manville, or approved equal. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD (RIGID) INSULATION Rigid insulation shall be polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578, Type IV with surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84 maximum of 5 for flame-spread and 175 for smoke developed. Minimum thermal resistance per inch of R-5.0 per ASTM C 518 at 75°F mean temperature. Minimum compressive strength of 25 psi per ASTM D 1621. Property Requirement Standard Core Density 0.5-1.0 pcf ASTM D 1622 Termal Resistance at 140°F/90 day Aged R Value, at 75°F mean Temp, min R4.6/inch ASTM C 518 06/2024 INSULATION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 21 00 - 4 Insulation for roof decks shall be listed per UL 1256 and shall be in compliance with FM Class I roof decks. Insulation thickness in interior walls shall be 4 inches. Manufacturers shall be Dow Chemical, Owens Corning, or approved equal. Sill Sealer: Mineral wool, 1 inch thick and compressible to 1/32-inch, width of sill, designed to perform as an air, dirt, and insect seal. ALUMINUM SHEETING WITH RIGID INSULATION Vaults with electric power shall be insulated with a combination of rigid insulation (see 2.4) and 24-mil thick (min) aluminum sheeting coated flat white. Accessories: Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. Adhesive shall be formulated specifically to bond insulation to steel (hatches and panels) and to concrete surfaces. Tape: Aluminum foil tape with facing to match rigid insulation as recommended by the manufacturer. J-Channel: PVC Closure strip as recommended by manufacturer for terminations. Clip Strip: PVC closure strip for vertical and horizontal seams. Fasteners: Hilti Insulation Fasteners (IZ-type), or approved equal. Aluminum Sheet Manufacturer: Insul-Mate by RPR Products, Inc., or approved equal. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD (RIGID) INSULATION (BURIED LOCATIONS) Rigid insulation for buried locations shall be polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578, Type IV with surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84 maximum of 75 for flame-spread and maximum of 450 for smoke-developed. Minimum thermal resistance per inch of R-5.0 per ASTM C 518 at 75°F mean temperature. Minimum compressive strength of 25 psi per ASTM D 1621. Insulation thickness for exterior foundation walls shall be 1.5 inches minimum. Manufacturers shall be Dow Chemical, Owens Corning, or approved equal. Sill Sealer: Mineral wool, 1 inch thick and compressible to 1/32 inch, width of sill, designed to perform as an air, dirt, and insect seal. SOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BATTS (SAFB) Sound attenuation batts shall be mineral wool made from inorganic fibers. SAFBs shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced and shall have a maximum flame spread index of zero (0) and a maximum smoke developed index of zero (0) per ASTM E84. Minimum Density shall be 2.4 pcf. R-value shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. 06/2024 INSULATION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 21 00 - 5 Manufacturer, or approved equal: Rockwool – Safe’n’Sound Owens Corning – Thermafiber SAFB Johns Manville – MinWool SAFB PART 3 EXECUTION PREPARATION Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation board are dry and ready to receive adhesive. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION Insulation shall be installed after construction has advanced to a point that the installed insulation will not be damaged by remaining work. For thermal insulation the actual installed thickness shall provide the R-values shown. For acoustical insulation the installed thickness shall be as shown. Insulation shall be installed on the weather side of such items as electrical boxes and water lines. Unless otherwise specified, installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. INSTALLATION OF FOAMED-IN-PLACE THERMAL INSULATION The polyurethane foam shall be placed in 4-foot lifts. All insulation shall be done in close coordination with the masonry contractor to allow quality control. The polyurethane foam shall be applied by qualified firms with proper dispensing equipment. Apply in accordance with ASTM C 1029 guidelines and the manufacturer’s instructions. INSTALLATION - RIGID INSULATION Foundation Perimeter: Adhere a 6 inches wide strip of polyethylene sheet over joints with double beads of adhesive each side of the joint. Tape seal joints between sheets. Extend sheet full height of joint. Install boards on foundation wall perimeter, horizontally. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to foundation 12 inches either side of joint. Exterior Walls: Apply adhesive in 3 continuous beads per board length. Daub adhesive tight to protrusions. 06/2024 INSULATION 178.24.200 PAGE 07 21 00 - 6 Install boards on wall surface perimeter, vertically. Place membrane surface of insulation against adhesive. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger side joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. Place 24" side polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings from adhesive vapor and air retarder bed to window and door frames. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor and air retarder. Cavity Walls: Secure impale fasteners to substrate at a frequency of 6 per insulated board. Apply adhesive in 3 continuous beads per board length. Daub adhesive tight to protrusions to ensure continuity of vapor and air retarder. Install boards horizontally between wall reinforcement. Under Concrete Slabs: Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing concrete slab. INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION Install batt insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install batt insulation without gaps or voids Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces airtight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Protect all insulation materials during storage and insulation from moisture, tears, or other damage. All damaged material shall be replaced at no additional cost to OWNER. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 32 00 - 1 SECTION 07 32 00 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install metal roofing and soffit panels, system support framing, and appurtenant work, complete and in place. Provide and install a standing seam, concealed fastener metal roofing system. The principal items of sheet metal work included in the metal roofing system shall include sheet metal flashing, covers, trim, enclosure batts, collars and sleeves at all roof penetrations, metal soffit panels, and all other sheet metal items necessary for a complete and watertight metal roofing system. The metal roofing applicator shall coordinate his work with sheet metal gutter work and shall report to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER if any sheet metal work provided by others affects his work negatively. RELATED WORK Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A 924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM D 226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 06/2024 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 32 00 - 2 ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension ASTM D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds ASTM D 1938 Standard Test Method for Tear-Propagation Resistance (Trouser Tear) of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting by a Single-Tear Method ASTM D 1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection ASTM D 3767 Standard Practice for Rubber—Measurement of Dimensions ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM E 330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 1646 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 1680 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY (UL) UL 580 Test for Uplift Resistance of Prepared Roof Assemblies SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit detailed shop drawings showing materials, gages, finishes, layout, corners, trim, flashing, enclosures, edge conditions, jointing, profiles, supports, fasteners, fabrication of special shapes, and method of attachment to adjacent construction to Engineer prior to fabrication. Submit drawings indicating roof size, location and type of penetrations, perimeter and penetration details, roof insulation make-up and sheet layout that have been accepted by an authorized manufacturer’s representative. Submit manufacturer’s literature indicating materials, finish, construction, and method of installation of prefabricated items and sealant. Provide color samples for color selection by OWNER. Submit the following test reports, certified by an Independent Testing Laboratory or a professional engineer registered in the State of Utah to verify the proposed roofing will meet performance requirements of this Specification: Thermal Cycle Test ASTM E 330 Adapted to Test Formed Metal Panels Clip Fastener Pull-Out Tests and Calculations UL 580 Class 90 Concentrated Load Test Data Air Infiltration and Water Penetration Test Results Coating Performance Testing 06/2024 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 32 00 - 3 Submit certification by the manufacturer that the roofing assembly is listed in the UL Building Materials Directory with a Class 1-90 wind uplift rating, including relevant construction number. WARRANTIES Manufacturer shall provide to OWNER written warranty that the roof panels will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate due to corrosion for a period of 20 years from the date of installation. Roofing manufacturer shall provide written 10-year material and labor warranty beginning at the date of final acceptance. CONTRACTOR shall provide to OWNER written warranty that the roof system is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and will be free from defective workmanship and remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two (2) years following Project Substantial Completion date. QUALITY ASSURANCE A single installer shall perform the work of this Section and shall have completed projects of similar scope and complexity. PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL Subject to compliance with the requirements, manufacturers who may offer metal roofing systems and products, which may be incorporated into the work, include Holcim Elevate UC-6, or approved equal. ROOF PANELS Minimum Performance Ratings and Properties: Air infiltration: Panel shall have less than 0.01 cfm/sf air infiltration at ±6.24 psf pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680. Water penetration: Panel shall have no leakage through panel joints when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1646 at static pressure differential of 12.0 psf. Provide UL90 rated roofing system that has been tested in accordance with UL 580 test procedure. Profile: Roof panels shall be factory formed ribbed seam pattern with 1 3/4-inch high seams and a nominal panel width of 18-inches. Panel surface shall be smooth. Soffit panels shall be 12-inches wide, 1-1/2” deep, 22- gauge, AZ50 Galvalume galvanized finish steel, with concealed fastener, lock-joint design and shall be continuous-vented. Length: Provide panels of sufficient length to minimize end laps. 06/2024 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 32 00 - 4 Profile Composition: Base metal shall be a minimum 24-gage structural steel (minimum yield strength 50,000 psi) with AZ50 Galvalume hot dipped galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A 653. Sheet metal trim, flashing, and accessories shall be the same material, gauge, finish, and color as the metal roofing. Paint Finish: a. All panels shall receive a factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 finish applied to both sides of the panel over the base protective coating, or approved equal. The exposed side coating shall have a minimum total dry film thickness of 1.0 mil and the underside coating shall have a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. Color to be as determined by OWNER. Concealed-Clips: Material: 18-gauge steel with class G60 galvanized coating. Configuration: clips shall be designed so as to attach with two concealed fasteners, and fully attach two ribs of every panel. Spacing: In accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Fasteners: Self-drilling or self-tapping galvanized steel screws and/or stainless-steel pop rivets painted to match the panels where visible, per the panel manufacturer's recommendations. Sealants: Sealants shall not contain oil, asbestos, or asphalt. Factory applied sealant shall be applied in the seam and designed for metal to metal concealed joints. Field applied panel end sealant shall be mastic tape sealant. Exposed sealant shall be one- part polyurethane joint sealant. All sealants used shall be as recommended by the metal roofing manufacturer for the job conditions and warranty requirements. Leak Barrier (Water and Ice Shield) shall be a cold applied, self-adhering membrane composed of high strength polyethylene film coated with a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive and interwound with a disposable release sheet designed for use with metal roofing systems. An embossed lip resistant surface shall be provided on the polyethylene. Underlayment shall be UL 790 (ASTM E 108) listed Class A fire classification and meet the requirements of Table 07 32 00-1. Leak Barrier shall be Ice and Water Shield HT by Grace Construction Products, or approved equal. Table 07 32 00-1 Property Value Test Method Color Gray-Black Thickness 40 mil ASTM D 3767 method A Tensile Strength MD 25 lbf/in CD 25 lbf/in ASTM D 412 (Die C modified) Elongation 250% ASTM D 412 (Die C modified) Low Temperature Flexibility Unaffected @ -20°F ASTM D 1970 Adhesion to Plywood 3.0 lbs/in width ASTM D 903 Permeance (maximum) 0.05 Perms ASTM E 96 06/2024 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 32 00 - 5 Weather resistive barrier: Membrane underlayment shall be composed of a high-strength, spun-bonded polypropylene base sheet, co-extruded on both sides with UV stabilized polyolefin, weight 30-pound. Membrane underlayment shall conform to ASTM D 226, Type II. Permeability shall be 0.54 perms maximum in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and tear strength shall be minimum 20 pounds in accordance with ASTM D 1938. Membrane underlayment shall be Grace Tri-Flex 30 by Grace Construction Products, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify proper placement of all roof openings, pipes, curbs, sleeves, ducts, vents and drains. SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for preparation of substrate to receive roofing. Clean substrate of dust, debris and other substances detrimental to the roofing work. NAILERS Install treated wood nailers at roof perimeters, at base of roof projections, and around specified roof penetrations. Total nailer height shall match total thickness of insulation being used. Install with 1/8” gap between each length and at changes in direction. Firmly fasten nailer to the deck, wall, or existing structurally sound and secured nailer at (16”) o.c. maximum, so as to resist a force of 200 pounds per lineal foot in any direction. Taper nailer where applicable to be flush at point of contact with membrane in either the vertical or horizontal applications. GENERAL The metal roofing shall be installed by an applicator and fabricator approved by the roofing system manufacturer who has working experience with the roofing system. Contractor shall provide a letter signed by the roofing manufacturer that the installer is an approved applicator and fabricator of the roofing system. The metal roofing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations applicable to the job conditions and supporting substrates. The panels and other components of the system shall be securely anchored and placed with concealed fasteners and shall be provided with provisions for thermal/structural movement. Shim and align panel units within installed tolerances of 1/4-inch in 20 feet on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 06/2024 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 32 00 - 6 Joint sealers shall be furnished and installed where necessary or where required for weatherproofing of the system. INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT General: Install underlayment using methods recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with local building codes. When local codes and application instructions are in conflict, the more stringent shall take precedence. Eaves: Install eaves with metal flashing tight with fascia boards. Lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement or high-quality urethane sealant. Nail at the top of the flange. Install leak barrier up slope from eaves edge a full 36 inches or to at least 24 inches beyond the interior “warm wall”. Lap ends of leak barrier at least 6 inches. Valleys: Install leak barrier at least 36 inches wide and centered on the valley. Lap ends at least 6 inches. Hips and Ridges: Install leak barrier along entire lengths. If ridge vents are to be installed, position leak barrier so that the ridge slots will not be covered. Roof Deck: Install a layer of roof underlayment over the entire area not protected by leak barrier. Install sheets horizontally so water sheds and nail in place. On roofs sloped more than 4:12 lap horizontal edges at least 2 inches and at least 2 inches over leak barrier. For roofs sloped between 2:12 and 4:12, lap horizontal edges at least 19 inches and at least 19 inches over leak barrier. Lap ends at least 4 inches and stagger ends laps at least 36 inches. Lap roof underlayment at least 6 inches over leak barrier in valley. Penetrations: Vent Pipes: Install a 24-inch square piece of leak barrier lapping over roof underlayment and seal tightly to pipe. Skylights or Access Hatches: Install leak barrier membrane extending at least 6 inches up the wall and 12 inches on to the roof surface. Lap the membrane over the roof deck underlayment. INSTALLATION Metal panels shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. Remove any strippable protective coating on the panels and flashings prior to installation and in any case do not allow the strippable coating to remain on the panels in extreme heat, cold, or in direct sunlight or other UV source. Loosely lay roof insulation with end joints staggered. (Stagger joints between layers.) Joints shall be 1/4-inch or less in width. Neatly cut and fit insulation around roof penetrations and projections. Install only dry insulation and only as much insulation as can be covered the same day with membrane and completed. 06/2024 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 32 00 - 7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-ups or similar minor repair procedures, shall be removed, and replaced at no cost to OWNER. Temporary protective coverings and strippable films shall be removed from the materials during installation. Upon completion of the work, the roofing systems shall be cleaned as recommended by the roofing manufacturer and shall be maintained in a clean condition until acceptance of the Work by OWNER. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 JOINT SEALANTS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES: Polyurethane Sealants Tape Mastic Sealants Silicone Sealants RELATED DOCUMENTS Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURER’S ASSOCIATION (AAMA) AAMA 800-10 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A 653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM A 792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM C 639 Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of Elastomeric Sealants ASTM C 661 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric- Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer ASTM C 681 Standard Test Method for Volatility of Oil- and Resin-Based, Knife Grade, Channel Glazing Compounds ASTM C 711 Standard Test Method for Low-Temperature Flexibility and Tenacity of One-Part, Elastomeric, Solvent-Release Type Sealants ASTM C 794 Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C 834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants ASTM C 908 Standard Test Method for Yield Strength of Preformed Tape Sealants ASTM C 919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM D 56 Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed Cup Tester 06/2024 JOINT SEALANTS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 92 00 - 2 ASTM D 217 Standard Test Methods for Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension ASTM D 792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement ASTM D 925 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Staining of Surfaces (Contact, Migration, and Diffusion) ASTM D 2452 Standard Test Method for Extrudability of Oil- and Resin-Base Caulking Compounds ASTM D 2453 Standard Test Method for Shrinkage and Tenacity of Oil- and Resin Base Caulking Compounds ASTM D 1475 Standard Test Method For Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products ASTM D 2202 Standard Test Method for Slump of Sealants ASTM D 2203 Standard Test Method for Staining from Sealants ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements ASTM E 814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems ASTM E 1966 Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ASTM G 154 Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials INTERIM FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS) FS TT-S-00230C Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component FS TT-C-1796A Caulking Compounds, Metal Seam and Wood Seam FS TT-S-001543A Sealing Compounds: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD) Rule 1168 Adhesive and Sealant Applications UNDERWRITER’S LABORATORIES (UL) UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies SUBMITTALS Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Provide in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Product Test Reports: Reports of tests required by this section performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that the sealants comply with the requirements. 06/2024 JOINT SEALANTS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 92 00 - 3 VOC Content: Provide documentation of the Volatile Organic Content (VOC) in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168 USDA Approval: Provide documentation that the product is approved for use in meat and poultry processing areas by the USDA for the following types of sealants: Polyurethane Tape Mastic Non-skinning Sealant WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within 5 years of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Substrate Requirements: When testing is required on a substrate, the material used shall be either ASTM A653 G-90 or ASTM A792 AZ50 and tests shall be conducted with each of the following coatings: Bare (No coating) Acrylic (Galvalume Plus) Polyester Siliconized Polyester Polyvinylidene Fluoride Resin (PVDF) POLYURETHANE SEALANT General: Provide Sealants that meet the following specifications: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use: NT, A, M, G and O paintable sealant AAMA 808.3 FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A Color: The sealant color shall be selected by OWNER. Physical Properties: The sealant shall have the following additional physical properties: Peel Adhesion: All panels shall have at least a 90% cohesive failure of at least 15 lb/in when tested in accordance with ASTM C 794. Tensile Strength: Sealant shall have a tensile maximum of 300 psi and an elongation of 500-600% when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. Sag: There shall be no sag when tested in accordance with ASTM C 639. Hardness: Shore “A” hardness on all three samples shall not exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 661 Service Temperature Range: -40 degrees F to 200 degrees F. 06/2024 JOINT SEALANTS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 92 00 - 4 Water Resistance: There shall be no presence of voids, cracks, separation, or breakdown of the compound when tested in accordance with AAMA 800-10, Section 2.11.1. Flash Point: No less than 145 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM D 56. Shelf Life: The compound shall have a shelf life of 9 months or more when stored at or below 80 degrees. Skin Time: The compound shall have a skin time of 2-4 hours. Cure Time: The compound shall have a cure time of 24-48 hours. VOC Content: The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content shall be less than 250 g/L when calculated SCAQMD Rule 1168. TAPE MASTIC SEALANT General: Provide Sealants that meet the following specifications: AAMA 804.3 AAMA 807.3 FS TT-C-1796A, Type II, Class B Approved by Underwriters Laboratories for use in roof deck constructions classified under UL-518 Class 90 Color: The sealant color shall be selected by OWNER. Physical Properties: The sealant shall have the following additional physical properties: Specific Gravity: 1.4 or higher when tested in accordance with ASTM D 792 Tensile Adhesive Strength: 20 psi or higher when tested in accordance with ASTM C 908 Elongation: 1000% or higher when tested in accordance with ASTM C 908 Cone Penetration: The sealant shall meet the following conditions when tested in accordance with ASTM D 217 with a 300g cone in 5 seconds: 8.5 – 100 mm at 77 degrees F 125-135 mm at 120 degrees F 45-55 mm at Zero degrees F VOC Content: The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content shall be less than 250 g/L when calculated SCAQMD Rule 1168. SILICONE SEALANT General: Provide sealants that meet the following specifications: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 AAMA 802.3, Type I and II AAMA 805.2 Group C AAMA 808.3 FS TT-S-001543A, Class A FS TT-S-00230C, Class A Color: Clear Physical Properties: The sealant shall have the following additional physical properties: 06/2024 JOINT SEALANTS 178.24.200 PAGE 07 92 00 - 5 Mechanical Properties: The sealant shall have the following mechanical properties as determined by ASTM D 412: Tensile Strength: 150 psi minimum (Method A) Modulus at 100% Elongation: 35 psi minimum Elongation: 400% minimum Recovery: 100% Hardness: Maximum Shore A hardness of 15 when determined in accordance with ASTM C 661. Tack-free Time: 1/4-inch diameter bead at 77 degrees F, 50% relative humidity, 10- 15 minutes. Cure Time: 1/4-inch diameter bead at 77 degrees F, 50% relative humidity, 10-12 hours. Service Temperature: -60 degrees F to 300 degrees F. Shelf Life: 9 months when stored in unopened original containers at 80 degrees F or less. VOC Content: The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content shall be less than 250 g/L when calculated SCAQMD Rule 1168. INSTALLATION Install joint sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and requirements. Install acoustical sealant in accordance with ASTM C 919. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 178.24.200 PAGE 08 10 00 - 1 SECTION 08 10 00 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section covers all the work necessary to furnish and install the new doors, frames, and hardware, complete and operable. B. All doors and their pressed steel frames shall be steel, insulated, and the type and size as indicated on the Door Schedule on the Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related work in other Sections includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes 1.3 REFERENCES A. Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1. ANSI A 115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 2. ANSI A 156.6 Standard for Architectural Door Trim 3. ANSI A 156.16 Standard for Auxiliary Hardware 4. ANSI A 250.8 SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 5. ANSI A 250.10 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames 6. ANSI A 250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A 108 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold- Finished 3. ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 4. ASTM A 229 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Quenched and Tempered for Mechanical Springs 5. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process 6. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable 06/2024 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 178.24.200 PAGE 08 10 00 - 2 7. ASTM A 1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low- Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength 8. ASTM C 177 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded- Hot-Plate Apparatus 9. ASTM D 256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics 10. ASTM D 635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position 11. ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 12. ASTM D 792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement 13. ASTM D 882 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 14. ASTM D 1622 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics 15. ASTM D 2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor 16. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 17. ASTM E 330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference D. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding - Steel 2. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Manufacturer's catalog data and preprinted installation instructions of doors. C. A schedule showing the location of each door shall be included with the drawings. Submittal drawings shall include elevations of each door type, details and method of anchorage, details of construction, method of assembling sections, location and installation of hardware, shape and thickness of materials, details of joints and connections. D. Manufacturer’s certificates that certify products meet or exceed the specified requirements. E. Warranty: Provide documentation of the manufacturer’s standard written one (1) year warranty. 06/2024 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 178.24.200 PAGE 08 10 00 - 3 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Doors shall be delivered to the job site wrapped in a protective covering with the brands and names clearly marked thereon. Doors shall be stored in a dry location that is adequately ventilated and free from dust or water, and in a manner that permits easy access for inspection and handling. Doors shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the faces, edges, and ends. Damaged items that cannot be restored to like-new condition shall be replaced. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOORS A. Steel doors and frames shall be of hollow metal construction and shall be full flush design with no visible seams. Interior and Exterior door face sheets shall be hot-dip galvannealed according to the requirements of ASTM A 653. Manufacturer’s shall be Republic Doors and Frames, Steelcraft, Ceco Door Products, or approved equal. Doors shall conform to ANSI A 250.8 and to the following requirements: 1. Hollow metal door, 1 3/4 inches thick flush type, constructed of two sheets of not less than stretcher leveled, 16-gauge steel sheets formed and welded for flush pan assembly, with internal 20-gauge vertical reinforcing channels spaced not over 8 inches on centers the full height of the door. There shall be no visible joints on the face of the doors. Reinforcing channels shall be uniformly spot welded to face plates at top and bottom of all doors. Filler channels shall be provided at the top and bottom of doors to provide a flush closure. The top of exterior doors shall be provided with flush, water- and weather-tight top enclosures. 2. All interior void spaces shall be completely filled with EPS foam or polyurethane. 3. Concealed sheet or bar steel reinforcement shall be provided for mortise type hardware. Reinforcing shall not be less than the following: 9-gauge for butts, 12- gauge for locksets and 14-gauge for surface applied hardware. Reinforcing shall be drilled and tapped to template requirements. Concealed reinforcing shall be provided for closures. Door bottom weather stripping shall be included to match thresholds. 4. Door frames shall be pressed steel constructed of not less than 16-gauge steel and shall be of the shape indicated on the plans and as required to fit the various wall constructions. Frames shall be of welded unit construction assembled and welded in the shop. Welding shall be to a hairline joint with all exposed beads ground smooth. 5. Concealed reinforcing of the frames for the mortise hardware shall be not less than the following: 3/16 inch for butts, 12- gauge for lock strike, 14-gauge for surface applied items and 18-gauge for plaster guards over mortised hardware reinforcement. Frames shall be mortised drilled, and tapped to template requirements. Lock reinforcing units shall be supplied by finishing hardware supplier. Frames shall be anchored as shown in the drawings. 6. Hinges shall be heavy duty ball bearing hinges with non-removable pins. 7. Pull plates shall be chrome plated or stainless steel and mounted on interior and exterior sides of all doors. 8. All double doors are to be supplied with a “Z” astragal of 14-gage steel for 1-3/4-inch doors and 16-gage for 1-3/8-inch doors. 9. Hardware including locksets and hinges shall be stainless steel. 06/2024 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 178.24.200 PAGE 08 10 00 - 4 2.2 DOOR HARDWARE A. Trim material shall be stainless steel, unless noted otherwise. B. Pull Plates: 8” CTC pull, 4” x 16” plate, stainless steel, No. 110 x 70C by Rockwood Mfg. Co., or approved equal, conforming to ANSI A 156.6. C. Hinges: satin stainless steel, 5 knuckles minimum, non-rising pin for interior doors and non-removable pin for exterior doors, number of hinges per door manufacturer’s recommendation (minimum of 3 hinges per door). Where necessary to keep door leaf clear of walls, casings, jambs or reveals in door opening, wide throw hinges of an approved type shall be furnished. Finish shall be stainless steel satin (32D or 630). Manufacturer shall be Mckinney T4A3386, Hager, Stanley Works FBB199 (32D), or approved equal. D. Deadbolt with Cylinder Lock Set: Schlage B60N single-cylinder deadbolt system with Grade 1 polished nickel finish. Minimum 7/8 inch throw. E. Cylindrical Lock Set: Schlage ND Series Grade 1 Cylindrical Lock for exterior doors. Locks must be compatible with Owners existing keys. CONTRACTOR shall provide lock sets and keys that will match OWNER’s requirements. Match deadbolt material and finish. F. Handles: Lever Handle. Match deadbolt material and finish. G. Exit Devices: Interior Panic Bar listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. H. Threshold: #277AS by Pemko Corporation, or approved equal, raised interior, extruded aluminum threshold with neoprene seal. I. Drip Cap: Provide drip cap on all exterior doors. Drip cap shall be clear anodized aluminum, Pemko 346C, or approved equal. J. Door Closers: Door closers shall be full rack and pinion, cast iron, with adjustable regulators for closing and latching speed, back check and spring power. Closers shall be mounted for 180 degrees of swing whenever possible. All closers shall be LCN Model 4040XP with 4041-3071 DEL cylinder with extra duty hold open arm. Mounting plates shall be supplied as necessary. All door closers attached to mineral core or particle filled doors shall be installed with hex bolts. Cover shall be metal 4040XP-72MC with 689 Aluminum finish. K. Lock Strikes: Strikes shall have extended curved lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Strike lips shall not protrude more than 1/8-inch beyond door frame trim. Wrought box strikes shall be furnished on all locks, latches and deadlocks. L. Door Stop: Solid cast brass, DuraFlex bumper, Rockwood #445, or approved equal (Inactive leaf only) M. Non-Mortise Door Edge with Astragal: 0.06” thick stainless steel, Rockwood HD306B- AST, or approved equal (double doors only) 06/2024 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 178.24.200 PAGE 08 10 00 - 5 N. Kick Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, kick plates shall be provided and shall be satin stainless 18-8, 18 gage, Rockwood No. K1050F, or approved equal. O. Weatherstripping and Seals: silicone gasketing, Pemko S88D, or approved equal. P. Door Bottom Sweep: stainless steel with neoprene seal, Pemko 3151SSN, or approved equal. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Fabricate doors and frames as shown on the drawings and in accordance with best shop practices. Frames shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Field measurements shall be taken as required for coordination with adjoining work. B. Form exposed surfaces free from warp, wave and buckle, with all corners square, unless otherwise shown. Set each member in proper alignment and relationship to other members with all surfaces straight and in a true plane. C. Reinforce members and joints with plates, tubes or angles for rigidity and strength. D. Doors and frames shall be mortised and reinforced for hardware in accordance with the hardware manufacturer’s instructions and templates. The reinforcing shall be designed to receive hinges, locks, strikes, closures, etc. E. Mortar guard boxes shall be provided for hardware cutouts in frames. F. Furnish at least three (3) metal anchors or polymer spacers in each jamb of frames up to 84" high and one (1) additional anchor for each 24" in height above 84", in shapes, sizes and spacing shown or required for anchorage into adjoining wall construction. Fabricate joint anchor of stainless steel. G. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. H. Provide clearance for doors of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/4" clearance above threshold. 2.4 FINISH A. Surfaces shall be provided with a shop-primed galvannealed finish. Prior to receiving primer, all surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and phosphate-treated to assure maximum paint adherence. Primer shall be a metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer of the manufacturer's standard type and shall be applied by dipping or spraying in accordance with ANSI A 250.10. B. Field painting of doors and frames shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes. Finish coat shall be compatible with the shop applied primer coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Doors shall be installed in accordance with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with ANSI A 115IG. Anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, hardware, and other accessories shall be accurately located. Upon completion, 06/2024 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 178.24.200 PAGE 08 10 00 - 6 doors shall be weather tight and shall be free from warp, twist, or distortion. Doors shall be lubricated, properly adjusted, and demonstrated to operate freely. B. Access Door Frame Installation 1. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Frame must not be drilled for brace supports as finish may be damaged. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A 250.11. 2. Locate three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Frames may be grouted full of mortar at jambs and anchors shall be built into the joints as walls are laid up. A continuous bead of silicone sealant is to be applied between the head and jamb at the miter joint. C. Adjust doors for free swing without binding. Adjust hinge sets, locksets, and other hardware. Lubricate using a suitable lubricant compatible with the door and frame coatings. D. Install work of this Section in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions. Where installations require field welding, all work must be performed by certified welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.3. E. Upon installation, secure the services of a qualified representative of the manufacturer to visit the jobsite and inspect the complete installation of the door and frame assemblies, test all components thru a minimum of ten (10) cycles of operation and direct installer in correcting any non-conforming items found. F. Remove temporary coverings. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions before acceptance by OWNER. G. Clearances at edge of doors: 1. Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch. 2. At meeting edges pairs of doors and at mullions: 1/8 inch. 3. At transom panels, without transom bars: 1/8 inch. 4. At sills without thresholds: 5/8-inch maximum above finish floor. 5. At sills with thresholds: 1/8-inch above threshold. 3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The hardware schedule is arranged for convenience of locating hardware and does not preclude in any way the requirements that all necessary hardware shall be furnished and properly installed. Hardware not specifically called out shall be similar to that required for similar uses. B. Hardware equal in quality and utility will be accepted provided it conforms in operation, quality, weight, size, workmanship, and finish to the products hereinafter described. All component parts of locksets shall be the product of one manufacturer. 06/2024 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE 178.24.200 PAGE 08 10 00 - 7 Hardware Set 100 (Doors 102,103 and 104) Each to Receive: Quantity Item Model No.Finish Manufacturer 3 each*Hinge T4A3386 4.5”x4.5” 32D McKinney 1 each Lockset NS Series Grade 1 625 Schlage 1 each Panic Bar TDE-2000R 689 Trudoor 1 each Closer 4040XP 689 LCN 1 each Kickplate K1050F 630 Rockwood 1 each Wall Stop 409 32D Rockwood 3 each Silencer 608 Gray Rockwood 1 each Threshold 277AS Alum Pemko 1 each Drip Cap 346C Alum Pemko 1 set Perimeter Seal S88D Alum Pemko *Five Knuckle, Stainless Steel, Non-removal Pin Hinges (size and quantity by door manufacturer) - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 SKYLIGHTS 178.24.200 PAGE 08 62 00 - 1 SECTION 08 62 00 SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section covers all the Work necessary to furnish and install curb mount, double dome, impact resistant skylights, complete and in place. B. Refer to roofing system Section(s) for roofing accessories to be built into the roofing system to accommodate the Work of this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes 1.3 REFERENCES A. Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURER’S ASSOCIATION (AAMA) 1. AAMA 1606 Voluntary Uniform Load Structural Standard for Plastic Domed Skylights C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2. ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 3. ASTM D 256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics 4. ASTM D 4802 Standard Specification for Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide unit skylights capable of withstanding loads as prescribed by the prevailing code for the project location and includes the following: 1. Thermal stresses transferred to the building structure. 2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing. 3. Noise or vibration created by thermal and structural movement and wind. 4. Weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 06/2024 SKYLIGHTS 178.24.200 PAGE 08 62 00 - 2 B. Structural Loads: Provide unit skylights that meet the requirements of AAMA 1606-82, which requires acrylic thickness adequate to withstand a positive and negative test pressure of 60 PSF. C. Unit skylights must be tested and certified by NFRC for thermal performance. Products must be listed in the NFRC Certified Products directory. D. System Performance Requirements: 1. Double dome models: a. U-factor shall be 0.61 BTU/HR-ft2-F maximum per NFRC 100 b. SatinSky2/Clear: 1) SHGC shall be 0.45 maximum per NFRC 200 2) Visible Light Transmission shall be 60% per ASTM E972 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data Sheet: For each type of skylight specified, include details of construction and installation, relative to applicable roofing materials, materials, gauges, sizes, finishes, and fasteners. C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing a full range of colors available for each type of skylight glazing and Aluminum Finish. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Skylights shall be delivered to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering with the brands and names clearly marked thereon. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this section shall not deprive OWNER of other rights OWNER may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Skylight Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace work that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship and guaranteeing weather-tight and leak-free performance. “Defects” is defined as uncontrolled leakage of water and abnormal aging or deterioration. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Plastic Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work that has or develops defects in the plastic. “Defects” is defined as abnormal aging or deterioration. 1. Warranty Period for Acrylic: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 06/2024 SKYLIGHTS 178.24.200 PAGE 08 62 00 - 3 D. Finish Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work with finish defects. “Defects” are defined as peeling, chipping, chalking, fading, abnormal aging or deterioration, and failure to perform as required. 1. Warranty Period for Anodized Finish: 5 years from date of shipment from the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SKYLIGHTS A. Skylights shall be as noted in the Contract Drawings and be manufactured by Wasco Skylights (Velux Group), Aladdin Industries, or approved equal. Skylights shall be factory assembled with square double-dome type designed to meet applicable OSHA and building code requirements. Skylights shall be watertight with curb frame insulation and meet the requirements specified herein. All hardware shall be stainless steel throughout. Skylights shall be provided with a permanent label showing the manufacturer's name and address and the model number. 1. Curb Frame: Bright white high-performance PVC with bronze cap stock and minimum effective thickness of 0.060-inch. Provide integral condensation gutter system with corners fully welded for waterproof quality. 2. Retainer Frame: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 (min) conforming to ASTM B 221 with minimum effective thickness of 0.60-inch. 3. Integral Curbs (Where indicated): Fabricated from double skin of 1100-H14 sheet aluminum, insulated with 1-inch fiberglass insulation. Provide thermal break at top and bottom. Provide minimum 0.025 inch minimum thickness inner and outer skin. Outer skin to be 0.032 inch when length exceeds 48 inches. 4. Plastic Sheets: Monolithic, formable, transparent (colorless/tinted) sheets with good weather and impact resistant. a. Impact Modified Acrylic: Conforming to ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, acrylic (methacrylate) impact modified sheets manufactured by the extrusion process, category C-2 or CC-2, type UVA (formulated with ultraviolet absorber) with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). Average impact strength of 0.75 ft-lb/inch (40 J/m of notch) when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A (Izod). 5. Thermal Break: Fabricate skylight units with thermal barrier separating interior metal framing from materials exposed to outside temperature. 6. Shape and Size: As indicated by model number. 7. Gaskets: Structural glazing tape to form adhesive bond between PVC curb and inner dome, between inner and outer dome, and between outer dome and extruded aluminum retainer. Gaskets form an air and water impenetrable barrier between adjacent surfaces. 8. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened or non-magnetic stainless steel as recommended by the manufacturer. B. ALUMINUM FINISHES FOR GLAZING RETAINER 1. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” recommendations for application and designations of finishes. 06/2024 SKYLIGHTS 178.24.200 PAGE 08 62 00 - 4 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designations of aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association. a. Mill Finish: Manufacturer’s standard mill finish. 2.2 PREFABRICATED CURBS A. Provide and install a thermally enhanced, thermally broken aluminum curb, if indicated on the Contract Drawings. Curb shall have 1-1/2-inch-thick rigid insulation with a R- value of 5.8 and 2”x2” nailer on top. 2.3 SKYLIGHT SCREENS A. All skylights that do not meet OSHA and building code requirements for opening protection shall be provide with skylight screens. Screens shall be designed to meet OSHA regulation 29 CFR 910.23(e)(8) and shall meet the code requirements for opening protection. The entire assembly and anchoring system shall be designed and tested to withstand a minimum impact load of 300 foot pounds. B. Screens shall be hot-dip galvanized, 3-inch by 4-inch welded wire mesh with a minimum diameter of 0.195-inch. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 123. C. Screens shall be manufactured by Wasco Skylights (Velux Group), Aladdin Industries, Plasteco, Inc., or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting skylight performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Skylights shall be installed in accordance with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, hardware, and other accessories shall be accurately located. Upon completion, skylights shall be weather tight and shall be free from warp, twist, or distortion. B. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape as recommended by the manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. Where aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by methods recommended by the manufacturer. C. Coordinate with installation of the roof deck and other substrates to receive skylights. Coordinate vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing material, and flashing as required to assure that each element of the work performs properly and that combined elements was waterproof and watertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structure substrates 06/2024 SKYLIGHTS 178.24.200 PAGE 08 62 00 - 5 to adequately withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. D. Where counter flashing is required as a component of the skylight, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing. Seal with a thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according to manufacturer’s instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. B. Final cleaning by CONTRACTOR. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 1 PSECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This section covers furnishing, surface preparation, and applying paints and coatings, complete and in place, to all specified surfaces including exposed valves, piping or fittings. Definitions The term “paint”, “coatings”, or “finishes” as used herein, shall include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins, and other protective coatings, excepting galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. The term “DFT” means minimum dry film thickness, without any negative tolerance. The term “mil” means thousandths of an inch. The term “SSPC” means The Society for Protective Coatings. The following surfaces shall not be coated: Concrete, unless required by items on the concrete coating schedule below or the Contract Drawings. Stainless steel Machined surfaces Grease fittings Glass Equipment nameplates Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces, unless specifically indicated to be coated. The protective coatings applicator (Applicator) shall possess a valid state license as required for the performance of the painting and coating work called for in this specification and shall provide 5 references which show the Applicator has previous successful experience with the indicated of comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which the Applicator provided the protective coating. RELATED WORK Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limit to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Specialties Section 08 10 00 Doors, Frames, and Hardware Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe Section 33 11 10 Miscellaneous Appurtenances Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings Section 40 05 13.13 Steel Process Piping 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract: OSHA Occupation Safety and Health Act: State of Utah and Federal ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute Guideline No. 310.2 – Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A 13.1 Standard for Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ANSI Z 535 Standard for Safety Colors AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM D 520 Standard Specification for Zinc Dust Pigment ASTM D 521 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Zinc Dust (Metallic Zinc Powder) ASTM D 6943 Standard Practice for Immersion Testing of Industrial Protective Coatings Linings ASTM D 1653 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films ASTM D 2370 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings ASTM D 2794 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method ASTM D 4414 Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages ASTM D 4417 Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel ASTM D 7234 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers ASTM D 7682 Standard Test Method for Replication and Measurement of Concrete Surface Profiles Using Replica Putty ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C 210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C 222 Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe and Fittings 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 3 AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI) ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete NACE International (NACE) NACE RP0287 Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast-Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using a Replica Tape NACE SP0188 Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Linings NACE SP0892 Standard Practice for Coatings and Linings over Concrete for Chemical Immersion and Containment Service NACE No. 1/SSPC-SP 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning NACE No. 2/SSPC-SP10 Near White Metal Blast Cleaning NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) SSPC PA1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel SSPC-PA2 – Paint Application Specification No. 2: Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. SSPC-PA11 - Protecting Edges, Crevices, and Irregular Steel Surfaces by Stripe Coating SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 - Near White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP16 – Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals SSPC-VIS 1 - Guide to Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. CONTRACTOR shall supply shop drawings for approval on all paint materials at least 30 days prior to installation. Submittals shall include the following data sheets: For each paint system used herein, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS), Technical Data Sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable) for each product used in the paint system, except for products applied by equipment manufacturers. Where ANSI/NSF 61 approval is required, submit ANSI/NSF 61 certification letter for each coating in the system indicating the product application limits on size of tank or piping, dry film thickness, number of coats, specific product tests, colors certified, and approved additives. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish a list of references for the Applicator substantiating the requirements as specified. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 4 Manufacturer’s certification stating factory applied coating systems meets or exceeds requirements specified herein. If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, provide both manufacturers’ written confirmation that materials are compatible. PAINT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver paint to the project site in unopened containers that plainly show, at the time of use, the designated name, date of manufacture, color, and name of manufacturer. Store paints in a suitable protected area that is heated or cooled as required to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by the manufacturer. QUALITY ASSURANCE All inspection for quality assurance shall ultimately be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. OWNER retains the right to observe, accept, or reject the work based on the results of CONTRACTOR’s inspection or observations by ENGINEER, at OWNER’s discretion, in accordance with the specifications. Repair and recoat all runs, overspray, roughness, or any other signs of improper application in accordance with paint manufacturer’s instructions and as reviewed by ENGINEER. Observations by OWNER or ENGINEER, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, shall not be construed to relieve CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these specifications. MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES Furnish paint manufacturer’s representative to visit jobsite at intervals during surface preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications, and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with, manufacturer’s products furnished under this Contract. SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENTS An inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of coating work. CONTRACTOR and a representative of the coating material manufacturer shall attend this inspection. Defective work shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of OWNER. OWNER may, by written notice to CONTRACTOR, reschedule the inspection to another date within the one-year correction period or may cancel the inspection altogether. CONTRACTOR is not relieved of its responsibilities to correct defects whether or not the inspection is conducted. PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Materials shall comply with Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits applicable at the Site. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 5 Where manufacturers and product numbers are listed, it is to show the type and quality of coatings that are required. If a named product does not comply with VOC limits in effect at the time of Bid opening, that product will not be accepted, and CONTRACTOR shall propose a substitute product of equal quality that does comply. Proposed substitute materials will be considered as indicated below. Coating materials shall be materials that have a record of satisfactory performance in industrial plants, manufacturing facilities, and water and wastewater treatment plants. In any coating system only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, a barrier coat shall be applied between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. Colors and shades of colors of coatings shall be as indicated or selected by ENGINEER. Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade to facilitate observation of surface coverage of each coat. Finish colors shall be as selected from the manufacturer's standard color samples by OWNER. Substitute or “Or-Equal” Products Basis of Design: The Coating Systems listed below in paragraph 2.3 are based on products from Tnemec Company Incorporated, except where indicated below. Product Substitution: To establish equality under Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements, the specified coating systems are the minimum standard of quality for this project. Equivalent materials of other manufacturers may be substituted only by approval of ENGINEER. Requests for material substitutions shall be in accordance with requirements of the project specification. Product Requirements: CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed substitute or "or equal" product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent or better in the following properties: Quality, Durability, Resistance to abrasion and physical damage, Life expectancy, Ability to recoat in the future, Solids content by volume, Dry film thickness per coat, Compatibility with other coatings, Suitability to chemical attack, Temperature limitations during application and in service, Type and quality of recommended undercoats or topcoats, Ease of repairing damaged areas, and stability of colors. Manufacturers of “or equal” products shall provide direct performance comparison with the materials specified, in addition to complying with all other requirements of these Specifications. “Or equal” products shall employ the same generic type materials and system components as the specified coating systems. Requests for product substitution shall be made and approved at least 10 days prior to bid date. CONTRACTOR shall bear any additional costs if a proposed substitution requires changes or additional work. COLORS Provide colors as selected by OWNER or ENGINEER. Colors shall be formulated with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials which might be affected by the presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at the project. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 6 Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Any authorized manufacturer may supply color matches. Equipment colors; Equipment shall mean the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural supports and fasteners. Paint non-submerged portions of equipment in the same color as the process piping it serves, except as indicated below: Dangerous parts of equipment and machinery: OSHA Orange Fire protection equipment and apparatus: OSHA Red Radiation hazards: OSHA Purple Physical hazards in normal operating area: OSHA Yellow Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) equipment with an integral colored gel coat does not require painting, provided the color is as specified. Piping color coding shall be in accordance with ANSI A13.1, Division of Drinking Water R- 309-525, and International Plumbing Code. Color code non-submerged metal piping except electrical conduit. Paint fittings and valves the same color as the pipe unless otherwise specified. Pipe supports: If pipe supports are not galvanized or stainless steel, supports shall be painted ANSI No. 70 light gray as specified in ANSI Z535. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located outside of buildings and enclosed structures will not require painting, unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings. COATING SYSTEMS System No. 1 Steel – Immersion Potable Water NSF 61 Certification Materials Type Epoxy conforming to AWWA C 210 and D 102 (for steel tanks). VOC content, max, g/L 311 Volume Solids, min, % 67 Demonstrated Suitable for Long term immersion in water, resistant to corrosion, good color retention Certification NSF 61 if in contact with potable water Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning with 6” -16” Pipes Primer: Tnemec Series 1220 (White) Intermediate: N/A Finish: Tnemec Series 1220 (White) 6” – 16” Pipes (Tnemec Only) Primer: 6-8 DFT Finish: 6-8 DFT 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 7 minimum angular profile of 1.5 mils Max thinner: 15%, Recoat cure time 6 hrs @ 75-deg F, Final cure time 7 days @ 75- deg F, Mix ratio 2:1 (A:B by volume), Series 44-700 Accelerator may be added up to 1 fl. oz./gal 18” and Greater Primer: 3-5 DFT Intermediate: 4-6 DFT Finish: 4-6 DFT 18” and Greater Primer: Tnemec N140 Pota-Pox Plus (00WH White or 15BL Tank White) Intermediate: Tnemec N140 Pota-Pox Plus (00WH White or 15BL Tank White) Finish: Tnemec N140 Pota-Pox Plus (00WH White or 15BL Tank White) Max thinner: 5% No. 60 by volume, Recoat cure time 9 hrs @ 75-deg F (5 hrs @ 75- deg F with accelerator), Final cure time 30 days @ 75-deg F; Mix ratio 1:1 (A:B by volume), Series 44-700 Accelerator may be added to Part A in the field and may be added at up to 4 fluid ounces per two mixed gallons of parts A and B. Primer: Sherwin Williams Tank Clad HS Intermediate: Sherwin Williams Tank Clad HS Finish: Sherwin Williams Tank Clad HS Primer: Carboline Carboguard 891 VOC Intermediate: Carboline Carboguard 891 VOC Finish: Carboline Carboguard 891 VOC (For AWWA C210 only) Application For use on the interior and exterior of steel tanks, pipes, valves, pumps, equipment in potable water service including concrete embedded surfaces of metallic items under submerged conditions, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves, access manholes, gate guides and thimbles, and structural steel, except reinforcing steel, and the following specific surfaces unless noted otherwise: System No. 2 Steel – Immersion Non-Potable Water (NOT USED) System No. 3 Steel – Interior Exposed Materials Type Polyamide Epoxy VOC content, max, g/L 250 Volume Solids, min, % 67 Demonstrated Suitable for Ferrous, galvanized, surfaces in industrial exposure, resistant to mild 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 8 corrosion and chemical fumes, has good color and gloss retention Certification None Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) Ferrous Metal: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils Galvanized and Non-Ferrous: SSPC-SP16 with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Finish: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Primer: 3-5 DFT Finish: 4-6 DFT Primer: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy Finish: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy Primer: Carboline Carboguard 60 Finish: Carboline Carboguard 60 Application All exposed metal surfaces located inside of structures. Special Requirements The surface preparation and primer shall be shop applied to all surfaces prior to installation. Finish coats need only be applied to the surfaces exposed after completion of construction. System No. 4 Steel – Exterior Exposed (NOT USED) System No. 5 Buried Steel Pipe (NOT USED) System No. 6 Steel – Doors and Frames Materials Type Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy with Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane (topcoat) VOC content, max, g/L 250 Demonstrated Suitable for Interior and Exterior Industrial, Architectural, and Commercial applications Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) SSPC-SP2/SP3 Hand and Power Tool Primer: Tnemec Series 135 Chem- Build Primer: 3-5 DFT Finish: 3-5 DFT 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 9 Cleaning; feather rough edges; remove loose rust, dirt, and other contaminants with sandpaper Finish: Tnemec Series 1095 Endura-Shield Primer: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy Finish: Sherwin Williams HS Polyurethane 250 Primer: Carboline Carboguard 60 Finish: Carboline Carbothane 133LV(Satin) or 134VOC(Gloss) Application Factory primed steel doors and frames Exterior and Interior steel in corrosive and non-immersion environments. Maintenance of existing marginally prepared rusty steel and tightly adhering old coatings. System No. 7 Galvanized Steel and Cast/Ductile Iron – Exterior Exposed (NOT USED) Materials Type Polyamide Epoxy with Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane (topcoat) VOC content, max, g/L 250 Demonstrated Suitable for Ferrous, galvanized, nonferrous, cast/ductile iron surfaces in industrial exposure, highly resistant to abrasion, wet conditions, corrosive fumes, and exterior weathering Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous: SSPC- SP16 brush-off blast cleaning of coated and uncoated galvanized steel and non-ferrous metals to achieve a uniform anchor profile of 1.0- 2.0 mils. Ductile and Cast Iron: Prepare all surfaces as per NAPF 500-03 - Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Finish: Tnemec Series 1095 Endura-Shield Primer: 3-5 DFT Finish: 2.5-4 DFT Primer: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy Finish: Sherwin Williams HS Polyurethane 250 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 10 Uniformly abrasive blast the entire exterior surface using abrasive to an NAPF 500-03-04 with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. Primer: Carboline Carboguard 890 Finish: Carboline Carbothane 133LV(Satin) or 134VOC(Gloss) Application Exposed galvanized and cast/ductile iron surfaces located outside of structures requiring painting and the following specific surfaces unless noted otherwise: All exposed galvanized pipe All exposed cast/ductile iron pipe System No. 8 Galvanized Steel and Cast/Ductile Iron – Interior Exposed Materials Type Polyamide Epoxy VOC content, max, g/L 250 Demonstrated Suitable for Ferrous, galvanized, nonferrous, cast/ductile iron surfaces in industrial exposure, resistant to mild corrosion and chemical fumes, has good color and gloss retention Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous: SSPC- SP16 brush-off blast cleaning of coated and uncoated galvanized steel and non-ferrous metals to achieve a uniform anchor profile of 1.0- 2.0 mils. Ductile and Cast Iron: Prepare all surfaces as per NAPF 500-03 - Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Finish: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Primer: 3-5 DFT Finish: 3 – 5 DFT Primer: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy Finish: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 11 Uniformly abrasive blast the entire exterior surface using abrasive to an NAPF 500-03-04 with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. Primer: Carboline Carboguard 60 Finish: Carboline Carboguard 60 Application Exposed galvanized and cast/ductile iron surfaces located inside of structures requiring painting and the following specific surfaces unless noted otherwise: All exposed galvanized pipe All exposed cast/ductile iron pipe Do not paint galvanized steel mechanical pipe and equipment supports unless noted otherwise. System No. 9 Concrete Floors – Light Traffic, Low Impact Materials Type Modified Polyamine Epoxy VOC content, max, g/L 75 Demonstrated Suitable for Concrete floors providing protection against various acids and alkalis and frequent cleaning Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) SSPC-SP13 Concrete Surface Preparation, ICRI CSP 2-4 Primer: Tnemec Series 201 Epoxoprime Intermediate: Tnemec Series 281 Tneme-Glaze Finish: Tnemec Series 281 Tneme-Glaze Primer: 6-8 DFT Intermediate: 6-8 DFT Finish: 6-8 DFT Primer: Sherwin Williams Armorseal 33 Intermediate: Sherwin Williams 650 SL/RC Finish: Sherwin Williams 650 SL/RC Primer: Carboseal 720 Intermediate: Carboline Carboseal 745 Finish: Carboline Carboseal 745 Application 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 12 Concrete floors not exposed to wastewater or chemicals unless noted otherwise. System No. 10 Concrete Floors – Chemical Exposure Materials Type Modified Polyamine Epoxy (primer) with Polyamine Novolac Epoxy (topcoats) VOC content, max, g/L 75 Demonstrated Suitable for Highly chemical- and solvent-resistant on concrete floors and walls providing protection against abrasion, impact, most acids, alkalis, and solvents Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) SSPC-SP13 Concrete Surface Preparation, ICRI CSP 2-4 Primer: Tnemec Series 201 Epoxoprime Intermediate: Tnemec Series 282 Tneme-Glaze Finish: Tnemec Series 282 Tneme-Glaze Primer: 6-8 DFT Intermediate: 6-8 DFT Finish: 6-8 DFT Primer: Carboline Semstone 110 Intermediate & Finish: Semstone 145 (Applied in singe coat at total 12-16 DFT) Application Concrete floors exposed to wastewater or chemicals unless noted otherwise. System No. 11 – Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster Materials Type Waterborne Epoxy/Acrylic Polymer VOC content, max, g/L 175/94 Demonstrated Suitable for long term protection in both interior/exterior exposures Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) Sand joint compound smooth and feather edge. Clean and dry. Primer: Tnemec Elasto-Grip FC Series 151-1051 Intermediate: Tnemec Enduratone Series 1028 Primer: 0.7-1.5 DFT Intermediate: 2-3 DFT Finish: 2-3 DFT 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 13 Finish: Tnemec Enduratone Series 1028 Primer: Carboline Sanitile 120 Intermediate: Carboline Carbocrylic 3359 Finish: Carboline Carbocrylic 3359 Application Interior gypsum wallboard and plaster on walls and ceilings. System No. 12 – Concrete Walls and Concrete Masonry Units, Interior – Not Exposed to Chemicals Materials Type Latex Filler/Water Based Acrylic Epoxy VOC content, max, g/L <60/244 Demonstrated Suitable for long term protection for interior exposures Coating System Products Total System (mils) Filler: Tnemec Series 54 Intermediate: Tnemec H.B. Tneme- Tufcoat Series 113 Finish: Tnemec H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat Series 113 Surfacer/Filler Intermediate: 4-6 DFT Finish: 4-6 DFT Filler: Sherwin-Williams PrepRite B25W25 Finish: Sherwin-Williams Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70 Series Filler: Carboline Sanitile 100 Finish: Carboline Sanitile 555VOC Surface preparation Surface cracks, holes, or other imperfections in concrete surfaces only that exceed 1/64 of an inch shall be filled with pointing mortar. Masonry joints found to be unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective shall be raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch and pointed with mortar. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove oil or foreign substance with a cleaning agent which will not affect the coating. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water, and let dry. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating and landscaping, property and vehicles from over spray and drift. Concrete shall cure a minimum of 28 days before application. Apply coating per manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. Application 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 14 Interior concrete and concrete masonry unit walls not subject to splashing from wastewater and/or chemicals. System No. 13 – Concrete Walls and Concrete Masonry Units, Interior – Exposed to Chemicals Materials Type Epoxy VOC content, max, g/L <50/244 Demonstrated Suitable for long term protection for interior exposures Coating System Products Total System (mils) Filler: Tnemec Series 130 Environfill Intermediate: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Finish: Tnemec Hi-Build Series 69 Epoxoline II Surfacer/Filler: 60 to 115 sq ft per gallon Intermediate: 4-6 DFT Finish: 4-6 DFT Surface preparation Masonry joints found to be unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective shall be raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch and pointed with mortar. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove oil or foreign substance with a cleaning agent which will not affect the coating. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water, and let dry. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating and landscaping, property and vehicles from over spray and drift. Concrete shall cure a minimum of 28 days before application. Apply coating per manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. Application Interior concrete and concrete masonry unit walls subject to splashing from wastewater and/or chemicals. System No. 14 Concrete – Concrete Exposed to Severe Wastewater Materials Type Epoxy Modified Cementitious Mortar Modified Aliphatic Amine Epoxy Mortar Modified Polyamine Epoxy Finish VOC content, max, g/L 50 Demonstrated Suitable for Severe Wastewater immersion and fume environments. Withstand high levels of hydrogen sulfide gas, sulfuric acid, as well as other gases common to sewer exposures. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 15 Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) SSPC-SP13 Concrete Surface Preparation, ICRI CSP 5 Surfacer/Filler: Tnemec Series 218 MortarClad Intermediate: Tnemec Series 434 PermaShield H2S Finish: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze Surfacer/Filler: Entire Surface at a minimum 1/16-inch Basecoat: 125 mils Finish: 15 -20 mils Application Concrete exposed to severe wastewater immersion and fume environments, abrasions and impacts– high levels of hydrogen sulfide gas (H2S), sulfuric acid (H2SO4). Use on concrete Digesters, Lift Stations, Wet Wells, Splitter Box, Scum Pit, Process Basin. Manufacturer Training Required Application according to manufacturer application guides. System No. 15 Wood, Interior Exposed Materials Type Acrylic VOC content, max, g/L 50 Demonstrated Suitable for Wood trim and plywood sheathing in pump stations and similar municipal water and wastewater facilities. Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) Surface Preparation: Sand rough areas, Clean and Dry Primer: Sherwin Williams Multi- purpose Interior-Exterior Latex Primer-Sealer Intermediate: Sherwin Williams Pro-Industrial Acrylic Coating Finish: Sherwin Williams Pro- Industrial Acrylic Coating Primer: 0.7-1.5 DFT Intermediate: 2-3 DFT Finish: 2-3 DFT Primer: Tnemec Series 51-1051 Elasto-Grip Intermediate: Tnemec Series 1026 EnduraTone Finish: Tnemec Series 1026 EnduraTone Primer: Carboline Sanitile 120 Intermediate: Carboline Carbocrylic 3359 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 16 Finish: Carboline Carboguard 3359 Application Trim and plywood sheathing SPECIAL COATING SYSTEMS System 200 - PVC Tape: Prior to wrapping the pipe with PVC tape, the pipe and fittings first shall be primed using a primer recommended by the PVC tape manufacturer. After being primed, the pipe shall be wrapped with a 20-mil adhesive PVC tape, half-lapped, to a total thickness of 40 mils. PVC Tape wrap buried pipe where indicated on the Contract Drawings. System 201 – Water Retardant, Concrete and Masonry Materials and Coating System Type Silane-modified siloxane Demonstrated suitable for Repelling water from vertical concrete and masonry surfaces VOC Content, g/L, max 250 Products, or approved equal TAMMS Barracade M.E./9 Rainguard Blok-Lok Tnemec Dur A Pell 20 Series 636 Preparation Surface cracks, holes, or other imperfections in concrete surfaces only that exceed 1/64 of an inch shall be filled with pointing mortar. Masonry joints found to be unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective shall be raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch and pointed with mortar. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove oil or foreign substance with a cleaning agent which will not affect the coating. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water, and let dry. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating and landscaping, property and vehicles from over spray and drift. Concrete shall cure a minimum of 28 days before application. Apply coating per manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. Application Exterior concrete walls of pump station System 202 – Polyethylene Encasement: Application of polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105 using Method C. Provide polyethylene encasement where indicated on the Contract Drawings or per Section 30 05 05 – Ductile Iron Pipe. System 203 - Cement Mortar Coating: A 1-1/2-inch minimum thickness mortar coating reinforced with 1/4-inch galvanized welded wire fabric shall be provided. The cement mortar shall contain no less than one part Type V cement to 3 parts sand. The cement 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 17 mortar shall be cured by a curing compound meeting the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type II, white pigmented, or by enclosure in an 8-mil thick polyethylene sheet with all edges and joints lapped by at least 6-inches. Cement mortar coat buried steel pipe where indicated on the Contract Drawings or in Section 33 92 10 – Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings. System 204 – Ductile or Cast-Iron, Valves and Gates - Immersion in Water and Wastewater Materials Type High Solids Epoxy VOC content, max, g/L 285 Demonstrated Suitable for Ductile or Cast-Iron immersion in water or wastewater Certification NSF 61 if used for immersion in potable water Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) Prepare all surfaces by uniformly abrasive blasting the entire exterior surface to ensure cleanliness and to create a minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. Primer: Tnemec Hi-Build Epoxoline II Series N69(1) Intermediate: Tnemec Hi-Build Epoxoline II Series N69(1) Finish: Tnemec Hi-Build Epoxoline II Series N69(1) Primer: 3 - 5 DFT Intermediate: 4 - 6 DFT Finish: 4 - 6 DFT Primer: Ameron Amerlock 400 Intermediate: Ameron Amerlock 400 Finish: Ameron Amerlock 400 Primer: International Interseal 670 HS Intermediate: International Interseal 670 HS Finish: International Interseal 670 HS Primer/wastewater: Carboline Phenoline 1205 Finish/wastewater: Carboline Phenoline 1205 Prime (NSF61): Carboline Carboguard 635VOC Intermediate (NSF 61): Carboline Carboguard 635VOC Finish (NSF 61): Carboline Carboguard 635VOC (1) For NSF 61 certified potable water applications use Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series N140. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 18 Application Ductile or Cast-Iron Slide Gate Covers and Frames System 205 – Anti-Graffiti Coating, Concrete and Masonry Materials and Coating System Type Siloxane or Silicone Demonstrated suitable for Graffiti resistance on concrete and masonry surfaces and excellent cleanability. VOC Content, g/L, max 250 Products, or approved equal Sherwin-Williams Anti-Graffiti Coating Tnemec Dur A Pell GS Series V626 Preparation Surface cracks, holes, or other imperfections in concrete surfaces only that exceed 1/64 of an inch shall be filled with pointing mortar. Masonry joints found to be unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective shall be raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch and pointed with mortar. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove oil or foreign substance with a cleaning agent which will not affect the coating. Surfaces shall be clean and dry. Surface preparation per SSPC-SP13/NACE 6. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating and landscaping, property and vehicles from over spray and drift. Concrete and mortar shall cure a minimum of 28 days before application. Apply coating per manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. Coating dry film thickness to be 6.0 to 9.0 mils. Application Exterior masonry block walls and pilasters. System No. 206 PVC – Exterior Coated Materials Type Spray paint Suitable plastic. Surface preparation and Coating System Surface Preparation Products Total System (mils) 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 19 Clean the pipe with an ammonia based cleaner such as window cleaner. Scuff the surface of the pipe using 200-300 grit sandpaper until the pipe surface is dull and not shiny. Wipe off excess material. Primer: not required. Protect metal roof surface from overspray. Finish: Kyrlon Fusion for Plastic or Rust-Oleum Paint for Plastic Apply three thin coats with 5 minutes of cure time between coats. First Coat: thin coverage Intermediate: : thin coverage Finish: thin coverage Application For use on and exterior of PVC vent pipes. CONCRETE FINISHES Exterior Above Grade Concrete: Concrete surfaces exposed to view outside the building and including 6 inches below finished grade on the building or structure should be finished with a “Class B” finish. Products for the “Class B” finish are identified or specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Interior Exposed Above Floor Concrete: Interior above grade concrete shall be finished with a “Class B” finish. Products for the “Class B” finish are identified or specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Interior Concrete Floors: Interior concrete floors shall be finished with a “Trowel” finish. Products for the “Trowel” finish are identified or specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In- Place Concrete. Exterior Concrete Flat Surfaces: Exterior concrete flat surfaces shall be finished with a “Broom” finish. Products for the “Broom” finish are identified or specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION GENERAL The intention of this specification is for all new, interior and exterior, masonry, concrete, and metal, whether atmospheric or submerged exposure surfaces to be painted whether specifically mentioned or not, except as modified herein. Concealed structural steel surfaces shall receive a prime coat only unless modified herein. Surface preparation and coating application shall be in accordance with these specifications and the coating manufacturer’s written product data sheets and written recommendations of the manufacturer’s technical representative. Where conflict occurs 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 20 between the manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications, the more stringent of the two shall apply unless approved by ENGINEER. For immersion coatings, obtain full cure for completed system before immersing or allowing exposure to water of condensation for more than 12 hours. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and worker exposures. Protect workers and comply with applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and environmental regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent aggregate and debris, coating application, and dust prevention including but not limited to the following Acts, Regulations, Standards, and Guidelines: Clean Air Act National Ambient Air Quality Standard Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) SSPC Guide 6 Comply with applicable federal, state, and local regulations for confined space entry. Provide and operate equipment that meets explosion proof requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Do not apply paint in extreme heat, temperatures below 40 degrees F, nor in dust, smoke- laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather. The Applicator shall adhere to the manufacturer’s recommendations regarding environmental conditions. The Applicator shall monitor humidity, air temperature, and surface temperature with properly calibrated instruments. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, nor whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air. Strictly adhere to manufacturer’s recommendations. Surface preparation power tools and blast equipment shall contain dust collection devices that will prevent discharge of dust particles into the atmosphere around electrical or mechanical equipment unless otherwise permitted by ENGINEER. Where weather conditions or project requirement dictate, the Applicator shall provide and operate dehumidification equipment to maintain environmental conditions suitable for abrasive blasting and coating application as specified. WORKMANSHIP Skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision shall be used on coating work. Coating shall be done in a workmanlike manner so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to insure thorough surface preparation. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 21 so complete that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Special attention shall be given so that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas, and installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other precautionary measures. Damage to other surfaces resulting from the work shall be cleaned, repaired, and refinished to original condition. STORAGE, MIXING, AND THINNING OF MATERIALS Unless otherwise indicated, the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protecting its coating materials, for preparation of surfaces for coating, and for other procedures relative to coating shall be strictly observed. Coating materials shall be used within the manufacturer's recommended shelf life. Coating materials shall be stored under the conditions recommended by the Product Data Sheets, and shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings from different manufacturers shall not be mixed together. SURFACE PREPARATION All surfaces which receive paint or other coatings shall be prepared in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being used. The Applicator shall examine surfaces to be coated and shall correct surface defects before application of any coating material. Marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and on factory-finished surfaces shall receive touch-up restoration prior to any field coating application. Perform sandblasting for piping and any other items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed. Materials, equipment, and procedures shall meet requirements of the Society for Protective Coatings (formerly the Steel Structures Painting Council). PROTECTION OF MATERIALS NOT TO BE PAINTED Surfaces that are not to receive coatings shall be protected during surface preparation, cleaning, and coating operations. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect working parts or mechanical and electrical equipment and motors from damage. Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent work during blasting operations. Spraying shall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blasting or coating operations. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 22 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS The following referenced surface preparation specifications of the Society for Protective Coatings shall form a part of this specification: Solvent Cleaning (SSPC SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, salts, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion, or steam. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by power tool chipping, descaling, sanding, wire brushing, and grinding. White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP5): Removal of all visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, paint, oxides, corrosion products and foreign matter by blast cleaning. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP6): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP7): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. Near-White Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP10): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area. Surface Preparation of Concrete (SSPC-SP13): Removal of protrusions, laitance and efflorescence, existing coatings, form-release agents, and surface contamination by detergent or steam cleaning, abrasive blasting, water jetting, or impact or power tool methods as appropriate for the condition of the surface and the requirements of the coating system. Surface Preparation (SSPC-SP16): Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED) The minimum abrasive blasting surface preparation shall be as indicated in the coating system schedules included at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these requirements and the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning shall apply. Oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants shall be removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 - Solvent Cleaning prior to blast cleaning. Round or chamfer all sharp edges and grind smooth burrs and surface defects and weld splatter prior to blast cleaning. Surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation by dry air blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum cleaned and wiped with a tack cloth. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 23 Damaged or defective coating shall be removed by the blast cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. If the required abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be submerged in service, then SSPC SP2 or SSPC SP3 may be used as per manufacturers recommendations. Shop-applied coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed before the indicated coatings are applied. Valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment shall be examined for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Temporary coatings shall be completely removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 before the abrasive blast cleaning has been started. Shop primed equipment shall be solvent-cleaned in the field before finish coats are applied. Exposed ductile iron pipe shall be given a shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer conforming to these specifications. Abrasive blasting of the asphaltic coating on ductile iron pipe will not be allowed. FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (GALVANIZED) Galvanized ferrous metal shall be alkaline cleaned per SSPC SP1 to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of the protective coating system, followed by blast cleaning per SSPC SP16. Pretreatment coatings of surfaces shall be in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer. CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY SURFACE PREPARATION Surface preparation shall not begin until at least 30 Days after the masonry has been placed. Oil, grease, and form release and curing compounds shall be removed by detergent cleaning per SSPC SP1 before abrasive blast cleaning. Concrete block masonry surfaces to be coated shall be abrasive blast cleaned to remove existing coatings, laitance, deteriorated concrete, and to roughen the surface equivalent to the surface recommended by manufacturer. If acid etching is required by the coating application instructions, the treatment shall be made after abrasive blasting. After etching, rinse surfaces with water and test the pH. The pH shall be between neutral and 8. Surfaces shall be clean and as recommended by the coating manufacturer before coating is started. Unless required for proper adhesion, surfaces shall be dry prior to coating. The presence of moisture shall be determined with a moisture detection device such as Delmhorst Model BD-2100, or equal. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 24 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SURFACE PREPARATION Concrete surfaces to receive protective coating shall be cast with a Smooth Form Finish in accordance with ACI 301. Surfaces shall not be rubbed, sacked, troweled or otherwise finished in any manner that will obscure or cover the parent concrete surface with materials other than materials as specified in this Section. All surfaces must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants, prior to preparation in accordance with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13. Concrete surfaces must be sound and capable of supporting the corrosion protection lining system. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 Joint Surface Preparation Standards and ICRI Technical Guidelines. Abrasive blast, shot-blast, water jet or mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to remove laitance, curing compounds, hardeners, sealers, existing coatings, and other contaminants and to provide the recommended ICRI-CSP Profile. Level or grind concrete substrates to produce a uniform and smooth surface, including removal of sharp edges, ridges, form fins, and other concrete protrusions. Unless required for proper adhesion, surfaces shall be dry prior to coating. The presence of moisture shall be determined with a moisture detection device such as Delmhorst Model BD-2100, or equal. SHOP COATING REQUIREMENTS Unless otherwise indicated, items of equipment or parts of equipment which are not submerged in service shall be shop-primed and then finish-coated in the field after installation with the indicated or selected color. The methods, materials, application equipment, and other details of shop painting shall comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specific period of time, the equipment shall be finish coated in the shop and then be touched up after installation. Items of equipment or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves, shall have surface preparation and coating performed in the field. For certain pieces of equipment, it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in the shop and touched up in the field with the identical material after installation. CONTRACTOR shall require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its Shop Drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. The coating material data sheet shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings for the equipment. For certain small pieces of equipment, the manufacturer may have a standard coating system that is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the Shop Drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. Shop-painted surfaces shall be protected during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and the use of canvas or nylon slings. Primed 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 25 surfaces shall not be exposed to the weather for more than 2 months before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by the coating manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Copies of applicable coating manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted with equipment Shop Drawings. Damage to shop-applied coatings shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. APPLICATION General Schedule inspection with ENGINEER in advance for cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to each succeeding coat. Apply coatings in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications, whichever is more stringent. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint. Blast cleaned ferrous metal surfaces shall be painted before any rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Blast cleaning shall be limited to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same day. Special attention shall be given to materials that will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Such contact surfaces shall be coated prior to assembly or installation. Finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats shall be applied in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color matched appearance. Non-buried steel piping shall be abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. Finish coats shall be applied after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete, and the working areas are clean and dust free. CURING OF COATINGS CONTRACTOR shall maintain curing conditions in accordance with the conditions recommended by the coating material manufacturer or by this Section, whichever is the most stringent, prior to placing the completed coating system into service. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation, using heated air, if necessary, may be required until the coatings have fully cured. SHOP AND FIELD OBSERVATION AND TESTING CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER a minimum of 3 Days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation or coating application, and a minimum of 7 Days advance notice of the start of any surface preparation activity in the shop. Observation by ENGINEER, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of its responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these Specifications. CONTRACTOR shall furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry film thicknesses of coatings. Dry-film 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 26 thickness gauges shall be made available for ENGINEER's use while coating is being done, until final acceptance of such coatings. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of a trained operator of the holiday detection devices until the final acceptance of such coatings. Holiday detection devices shall be operated only in the presence of ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall test for continuity (holiday test) all coated surfaces inside reservoirs, other surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, surfaces that are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures, and surfaces coated with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Areas that contain discontinuities shall be marked and repaired or recoated in accordance with the coating manufacturers’ printed instructions and then be retested. Coatings with thickness exceeding 20-mils total DFT: Pulse-type holiday detector such as Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, or equal shall be used. The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the required coating thickness. Coatings with thickness of 20-mils or less total DFT: Tinker & Rasor Model M1 nondestructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, or equal shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10- and 20-mils, a nonsudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flo or equal, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. On ferrous and non-ferrous the dry film coating thickness shall be measured in accordance with the SSPC PA 2 using a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge such as Mikrotest Model FM, Elcometer Model 111/1EZ, or equal. Each coat shall be tested for the correct thickness. No measurements shall be made until at least 8 hours after application of the coating. On non-ferrous metals and other substrates, the coating thicknesses shall be measured at the time of application using a wet film gauge. Evaluation of blast cleaned surface preparation will be based upon comparison of the blasted surfaces with the standard samples available from SSPC and NACE, such as using NACE standards TM-01-70 and TM-01-75. Visually inspect concrete, nonferrous metal, plastic, drywall, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. CLEANUP Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroy at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from the site or destroy in a legal manner. Completely remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean. Damages due to overspray on buildings, vehicles, trees, or other surfaces not specified to be painted would be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 06/2024 PAINTING & FINISHES 178.24.200 PAGE 09 90 00 - 27 MANUFACTURER’ SERVICES Furnish paint manufacturer’s representative to visit jobsite at intervals during surface preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications, and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with, manufacturer’s products furnished under this Contract. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 10 44 00 - 1 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The CONTRACTOR shall provide fire protection equipment and appurtenant work, complete and in place, according to the Contract Documents. If more than one fire extinguisher or other fire protection equipment is required, provide products from a single manufacturer. RELATED WORK Related work in other Sections includes but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM E 814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION PUBLICATIONS (NFPA) NFPA No. 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (IFC) SUBMITTALS Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Submit manufacturer’s literature, installation instructions, and fire protection equipment details. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT There shall be no separate measurement and payment for fire protection equipment. Full compensation for the equipment shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the Contract to which it relates. 06/2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 10 44 00 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL Fire protection equipment shall comply with the IFC, NFPA Pamphlet No. 10, and the manufacturer’s recommendations. MATERIALS Fire Extinguisher Designated FE-1: FE-1 fire extinguishers shall be 10 pound minimum capacity, A.B.C. dry-chemical type, with minimum UL rating of 4A:80BC. Fire Extinguisher Designated FE-2: FE-2 fire extinguishers shall be 20 pound minimum capacity, A.B.C. dry-chemical type, with minimum UL rating of 20A:120BC. Fire Extinguisher Designated FE-3: FE-3 fire extinguishers shall be 10 pound minimum capacity, carbon dioxide type, with minimum UL rating of 10B:C. Fire Extinguisher Designated FE-4: FE-4 fire extinguishers shall be 5 pound minimum capacity, A.B.C. dry-chemical type, with minimum UL rating of 2A:10BC. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC) shall be semi-recessed stainless steel cabinet with stainless steel door and frame, and projecting, convex, butyrate plastic, canopy type viewing door cover. The size shall be as necessary to hold the fire extinguisher indicated at the cabinet location. Fire-rated cabinets conforming to ASTM E 814 shall be used in fire-rated walls. Mounting brackets shall be specially designed for fire extinguisher. Other materials not specifically shown on the drawings or listed in the specifications but required for a complete and proper installation shall be as selected by the CONTRACTOR, subject to approval by the ENGINEER. Fire protection equipment shall be manufactured by Larsen’s Manufacturing, Amerex Corporation, Potter-Roemer, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION DELIVERY AND STORAGE Fire protection equipment shall be delivered to the site in unbroken packages or containers bearing the manufacturer’s label with product description and rating. Products shall be carefully stored in an area that is protected from deleterious elements as recommended by the manufacturer. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and finish of the equipment. INSTALLATION All equipment shall be mounted and installed as per NFPA Pamphlet No. 10 and the manufacturer recommendations unless otherwise directed by the Fire Marshall. Coordinate final location and mounting heights with the fire Marshall prior to installation. 06/2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 178.24.200 PAGE 10 44 00 - 3 Fire extinguishers shall be provided with and installed on brackets or brackets within cabinets. The CONTRACTOR shall provide blocking and other reinforcing in walls to support the fire extinguishers. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 1 SECTION 22 10 10 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install plumbing piping and specialties, complete and operable, as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the Contract Documents. Plumbing piping and specialties includes piping, pipe hangers, sleeves, supports, brackets, valves, drains, cleanouts, hose bibs, yard hydrants, and related items. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other Sections includes but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes Section 33 05 03 Copper Pipe Section 33 05 26 Utility Identification Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection Section 40 05 13.19 Stainless Steel Process Piping MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Plumbing piping shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as part of the various items to which it relates. REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) B31.1 Power Piping AMERICAN STANDARDS FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A 74 Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM B 43 Standards for Seamless Red Brass Pipe CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI) CISPI 301 Standard Specification for Hub-less Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC) 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 2 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC) FACTORY MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY (FM GLOBAL) FM 1680 Approval Standard for Couplings Used in Hubless Cast Iron Systems for Drain, Waste or Vent, Sewer, Rainwater or Storm Drain Systems Above and Below Ground, Industrial/Commercial and Residential PIPING SYSTEM LAYOUTS Piping system drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location of equipment and piping. Verify dimensions, whether in figures or scaled, in the field. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the installation of complete and workable systems whether completely detailed on the plans or not. Ascertain locations of apparatus, fixtures, equipment, and piping in the field, and layout work accordingly. ENGINEER reserves the right to make minor changes in location of piping and equipment up to the time of installation without additional cost to OWNER. SUBMITTALS Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit general arrangement drawings of system components. Submit product catalog cut sheets and other manufacturer information. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Install work per applicable provisions of codes, rules, regulations, statutes, and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL Plumbing piping and specialties shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended use. Any pipe, plumbing fitting or fixture, solder, or flux used in the installation or repair of any potable water system shall be “lead free” except where necessary for the repair of leaded joints of cast iron pipes. PIPING AND FITTINGS Cast iron sanitary, storm, vent pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM A 74. Hub-less cast iron soil pipe and fittings with Camp-All type pipe couplings, or approved equal, shall be used for above ground sanitary, storm, and vent piping where approved for use by local authorities. 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 3 Hub-less cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall meet CISPI Standard 301. Pipe couplings shall have high-torque capacity and shall meet FM Standard 1680. Copper tubing and fittings for potable water shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 03 – Copper Pipe. Brass piping shall match iron pipe size standards and meet ASTM B 43 Standards for Seamless Red Brass Pipe. Stainless Steel Pipe shall be Type 304 Stainless Steel, unless otherwise specified, and shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 13.19 – Stainless Steel Process Pipe. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Pipe hangers and supports shall meet the requirements of IMC Section 305 Pipe Support, Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports, and the following. If there is a discrepancy in the requirements of these documents the more stringent requirement shall apply. Properly support, suspend, or anchor all piping and fittings to prevent sagging, over stressing, or longitudinal movement of piping, and to prevent thrust or loads on or against other equipment. Support horizontal piping on adjustable split steel ring or clevis hangers. The following schedule shows minimum spacing. Steel, Brass and Copper: a. 1-1/4" and smaller 6'-0" on center b. 1-1/2" thru 3" 8'-0" on center c. 4" and larger 12'-0" on center PVC, CPVC, AND ABS: a. 1" and smaller 4'-0" on center b. 1-1/4" thru 2" 5'-0" on center c. 2-1/2" thru 4" 6'-0" on center d. 5" and larger 8'-0" on center Support insulated piping with pipe saddles and hangers that fit on outside of insulation. Do not compress or damage pipe insulation with hangers or supports. Provide all rigid hangers with a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Use copper or copper plated hangers for supporting uninsulated copper pipe. All vertical and horizontal piping supports shall be fiberglass EnduroStrut by Enduro Systems, Inc., or approved equal. Perforated strap hangers or wire supports will not be permitted. 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 4 INSERTS Furnish and set inserts in concrete forms; provide reinforcing rods for pipe sizes over 3 inches or equivalent. Furnish concrete inserts as follows: Black, malleable iron, universal type for threaded connections with lateral adjustment. Inserts shall be galvanized unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. INSULATION Hot water piping, valves, fittings, and exposed horizontal sanitary, storm, and vent piping shall be provided with one-inch thick insulation. Covering valves, flanges, fittings, and ends of insulation with pre-molded high- and low- temperature PVC fitting cover, end cap, or similar pre-formed unit. The pre-formed unit covers shall be sized to receive the same thickness insulation as used in adjacent ping. Exposed supply and drain piping for lavatories shall be insulated under the wash basins in order to prevent burns and abrasions to handicapped persons. Removeable insulated covers shall be Handy-Shield Type by Plumberex Specialty Products, or approved equal. SHIELDS Provide shields to protect insulation in all areas. Provide approved galvanized form shields to isolate pipe in contact with hangers and supports. Furnish low compressive insolation protector shields. Size the shields per the manufacturer’s recommendations. SLEEVES Where pipes pass through floors, footings, foundations, walls, or ceilings, furnish and install pipe sleeves. Sleeves for concealed piping shall be of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe one size larger than the pipe passing through. For exposed piping Schedule 40 black steel pipe installed so as to be completely covered by escutcheons. Extend sleeves through floors 1/2 inch above finish floor. ESCUTCHEONS Fit pipe passing through walls, floors, or ceilings with escutcheons with set screws. Use prime painted escutcheons where surface is to receive a paint finish; otherwise, use escutcheons that are nickel or chromium plated. Where piping is insulated, use escutcheon outside the insulation. 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 5 JOINTS For screwed pipe make ends with sharp, clean tapered threads using Teflon tape on the male thread only. Do not use mill cut threads. Ream cut pipe to full inside diameter. Welding may be done by either the arc or acetylene process conforming to the requirements for the ASME B31.1. For solder joints use fittings specifically made for soldering. Clean all burrs and roughen pipe to clean; solder complete around joint. For grooved pipe jointing systems use mechanical pipe couplings and fittings. For no-hub cast iron soil pipe use double screw joint neoprene coupler. UNIONS Furnish and install unions for each valve or piece of equipment to permit easy installation and removal of equipment. VALVES Water shutoff valves shall be the gate or ball type as designated on the drawings, except on fixture supply piping where globe style valves shall be used. Hose Bibs shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. The hose nipple shall be a female iron pipe thread inlet with hose thread outlet. Hose bibs shall be 3/4-inch size unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Gate and ball valves shall be in accordance with Section 33 12 00 – Mechanical Appurtenances. FLOOR DRAINS IN CONCRETE FLOORS Floor drains in concrete floors shall be constructed of cast iron of the size indicated on the Contract Drawings and provided with sediment buckets. Each floor drain located on an upper floor shall have a clamping collar with 4 pound sheet lead flashing 12 inches minimum all around. Where flashing does not comply with local code use epoxy waterproofing membrane. Floor drains shall be Z520-Y by Zurn Industries, 32100-AE-81 by Josam Company, Figure 2350 by Jay R Smith Mfg. Co., or approved equal. FLOOR CLEANOUTS Cleanouts in concrete floors shall be heavy plugs with tapered shoulders against heavy brass plugs. Cleanout shall have a minimum diameter of 3-inches. Floor cleanouts shall be fabricated from cast iron with gas and watertight ABS tapered thread plug. 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 6 Floor cleanout shall be Z1400 by Zurn Industries, 55000 Series by Josam Company, 4237 Series by Jay R Smith Mfg. Co., or approved equal. NON-FREEZE HYDRANTS Hydrants in exposed locations subject to freezing shall be the non-freeze type. Hydrant shall have a brass pipe outer casing, brass operating rod, and brass male hose nozzle. Hydrants shall be Model Iowa Y1 by Woodford Manufacturing Co., or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION PREPARATION Prior to installation of piping, verify that it will not interfere with clearances required for the erection and finish of structural members, architectural members, electrical, sprinkler, or mechanical items. Hang or support piping materials from roof support system whenever possible. Do not cut any structural members for installation of piping. INSERTS Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 3 inches in diameter. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod with recessed squared steel plate and nut above slab. SLEEVES Set sleeves in position in advance of concrete work. Provide suitable reinforcing around sleeves. Extend sleeves through potentially wet floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate. Where piping passes through floor, ceiling, or wall, close-off space between pipe and construction with noncombustible insulation. Provide tight-fitting metal caps on both sides and caulk. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Support all piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. The use of pipe hooks, chains, or perforated metal for pipe support will not be permitted. 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 7 Suspend all piping in the building as indicated. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. Place a hanger within 1 foot of each horizontal elbow. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch minimum after piping is erected. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. PIPING INSTALLATION Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site and work into place without springing or forcing. Remove burrs and cutting slag from pipe by reaming or other approved cleaning methods. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. Arrange piping so as not to interfere with the removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices. Do not block doors, windows, or access openings. Provide unions in the piping at connections to all equipment. Unions must be accessible. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment with PVC caps or expanding neoprene plugs to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of the system. Plugs of rags, wool, cotton, waste, or similar materials are not acceptable. Install all piping systems so they can easily be drained. Provide anti-siphon hose bibbs at low points on water lines. Slope all soil and waste lines within the building at 1/4 inch per foot fall in the direction of flow unless indicated otherwise. PRIMING AND COATING Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports and hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes. PIPE LABELING Exposed pipe shall be labeled in accordance with Utah State Regulation R309-525-8, Section 33 05 26 – Utility Identification, and the IPC. Labeling shall include direction arrows for flow. 06/2024 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES 178.24.200 PAGE 22 10 10 - 8 DISINFECTION AND TESTING The CONTRACTOR shall perform such tests as are required by local ordinances and codes in the presence of the local governing authority inspector to show that piping is tight, leak free, and otherwise satisfactory, and shall perform such tests as the ENGINEER may direct to ensure that fixtures and equipment operate properly. Disinfect potable water piping in accordance with Section 33 13 00 - Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. Test all potable water piping. Repair defects which develop under tests promptly and repeat tests. No caulking or screwed joints, cracks, or holes will be permitted. Replace pipe or fitting or both with new material when repairing leaks in screwed joints. Repair leaks in copper tubing by melting out joint, thoroughly cleaning both tubing and fitting, and resoldering. - END OF SECTION - 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 1 SECTION 23 05 00 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Sections of other Divisions which relate to HVAC work apply to the work of this section. See various Sections on sitework, underfloor work, structural work, finish materials, etc. Related Sections: Refer to Section 23 06 07 "Motors, Drives & Electrical Requirements’ for basic electrical requirements for all HVAC equipment. Special and specific electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification section. Section 26 05 00 – “Electrical General Requirements” applies to the HVAC work. 1.2 SUMMARY: This Section specifies the basic requirements for HVAC installations and includes requirements common to more than one of the Division 23 HVAC sections. It expands and supplements the requirements of Division 1 and the Mechanical Sections 21, 22 and 33. This Division does not define, nor is it limited by, trade jurisdictions. All work described herein is a part of the General Contract and is required of the Contractor regardless. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: The HVAC work described in these Division 23 specifications is for Hole-In-The-Rock #2 Well House project located in Tooele County, Utah. Design weather conditions are: 95°F db, 63°F wb and winter 0°F. Altitude readings, unless otherwise noted, are for an elevation of approximately 5,500 feet above sea level. Make adjustment to manufacturer's performance data as needed. Work includes: A. HVAC systems for the New Well House and related facilities. 1.4 CODES AND PERMITS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION: A. Perform the HVAC work in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the various codes. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or construction in excess of code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications govern. B. Hold and save the Owner and Engineer free and harmless from liability of any nature or kind arising from Contractor failure to comply with codes and ordinances. C. Secure permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract. Contractor to pay all fees. 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 2 D. Referenced Standards: American Welding Society International Mechanical Code/State Code International Building Code/State Code International Plumbing Code with amendments International Fuel Gas Code 2006 SMACNA Duct Design Standards Locally enforced NFPA Codes NFPA 90A related to general Heating and Ventilation NFPA 820 related to Ventilation of Water Treatment Plants Local Fuel Utility Regulations Local Power Utility Regulations American Gas Association Standards ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping ANSI B31.1 Piping E. Review of work in progress will be made throughout the course of the work. Final review by the Engineer will not be made nor Certificate of Substantial Completion issued until certificates of acceptability from the Authorities having jurisdiction are delivered. 1.5 DEFINITION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The HVAC drawings at reduced scale show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., and, after prior coordination, are to be followed as closely as the actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The architectural and structural drawings shall be considered as part of the work insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the building. Structural, Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings take precedence over HVAC drawings. Request clarification and participate in resolution in the event of conflict. Because of the small scale of the HVAC drawings, it is neither possible nor intended to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly, providing such extensions, offsets, adaptations, fittings, valves and accessories to meet the conditions as may be required. Some small scale work is not shown such as control conduit and piping, incidental piping, and specialties. Only those who are experienced in this type of construction are invited to the work. Provide in complete detail as directed by note, specification, and common “good practice or standard.” Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the existing conditions under which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made for failure to make such examination. During construction, set up the rough work, and verify the evolving dimensions governing the HVAC work at the building. Do not claim or expect extra compensation because of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work on which HVAC work is dependent for perfect efficiency, and report any work of other trades which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 3 work shall be claimed or allowed due to unfavorable construction consequent conditions affecting the HVAC work. 1.6 ROUGH-IN: A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 3 through 44 for rough-in requirements. 1.7 HVAC INSTALLATIONS: A. Equipment Arrangement: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the arrangement of equipment indicated is based upon information available at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions particular to a specific manufacturer. Some aspects of the drawings are diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment arrangement may require revision to meet the actual equipment requirements. Structural supports, foundations, piping and valve connections, and electrical and instrumentation connections indicated may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided. No additional payment will be made for such revisions and alterations. Substantiating calculations and drawings shall be submitted prior to beginning the installation of equipment. B. Coordinate HVAC equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. D. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for HVAC installations. E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. F. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of HVAC materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation of HVAC equipment and materials. H. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install HVAC services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. I. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. J. Coordinate the installation of HVAC materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations. 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 4 K. Coordinate connection of HVAC systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. L. Where HVAC work penetrates other trade work such as poured in place concrete, gypsum board or masonry walls, etc., penetration shall be neatly cut and sleeved, and the rough wall opening shall be filled and patched. 1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Equipment Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads as stated in the 2015 (or latest edition) International Building Code (IBC), Chapter 16 and ASCE 7-05. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports and anchorage shall bear the signature and seal of a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Utah, unless otherwise indicated. Calculations shall account for forces and distribution of forces on supporting structures resulting from normal operation, normal operation plus seismic loadings, normal operation plus wind loadings, as well as the other load combinations stated the 2006 IBC. B. Wall-mounted equipment weighing more than 250 pounds or which is within 18-inches above the floor shall be provided with fabricated steel supports. Pedestals shall be of welded steel. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet or is enclosed with removable sides, the pedestal shall match the supported equipment in appearance and dimensions. C. Wind Load: The wind load shall be calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-05, Chapter 6, using the following design parameters: 1. Wind Speed: 90 mph 2. Exposure: C 3. Importance Factor: lw = 1.15 D. Seismic Loads: The seismic lateral and vertical forces shall be calculated in accordance with the ASCE 7-05, Chapters 11 and 13, using the appropriate design parameters for the respective site location. Provide values for the following categories as part of the Seismic Submittal. 1. Site Class 2. Seismic Design Category (SDC) 3. Seismic Importance Factor: a.Short Period Spectral Acceleration b.Second Period Spectral Acceleration E. Hydrodynamic Forces: Hydrodynamic forces calculated in accordance with AWWA D100, API 650 or ACI 350.3-06 shall be based on the appropriate parameters for the respective site location. Provide values for the following categories as part of the Seismic Submittal. 1. Site Class 2. Seismic Design Category (SDC) 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 5 3. Seismic Importance Factor: a.Short Period Spectral Acceleration b.Second Period Spectral Acceleration F. Anchors: Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork, and shall be designed to resist the above loads. Anchor bolt calculations shall clearly show that the capacity of the anchor and the capacity of the concrete that the anchor is embedded in are adequate to resist all loads stated in the 2015 (or latest edition) IBC and ASCE 7-05, including lateral wind and lateral and vertical seismic loads. Reduction factors associated with edge distance embed length, and bolt spacing shall all be considered and based on the actual dimensions of the concrete that resists the anchorage forces. Anchor bolt details shall include required bolt diameter, embed, and edge distances. Further, the design of Anchors shall consider the ductility requirements stated in ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13, Section 13.4.2 and Chapter 15, Section 15.7.3. Anchor bolt calculations and details shall be submitted and shall bear the signature and seal of a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Utah. G. Equipment Foundations: Mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, enclosures, and related equipment shall be mounted on minimum 4-inch high concrete bases, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment foundations are indicated on Drawings. The CONTRACTOR, through the equipment manufacturer, shall verify the size and weight of equipment foundation to insure compatibility with equipment. The dimensions of all concrete bases shall be sufficient to provide the edge distances required by the anchor bolt calculations. 1.9 ACCESSIBILITY A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and maintenance. Respect manufacturer’s recommendations for access and clearance. D. Access Doors - General: All items of HVAC equipment which may require maintenance, replacement or which control a system function shall be made readily accessible to personnel operating the building. 1. Provide access doors in all ductwork or plenums as required to maintain filters, dampers, equipment, controls or other elements of the system. Doors shall be double wall, framed, hinged and provided with latches and shall conform to SMACNA standards, unless otherwise detailed or specified. 1.10 CHANGE ORDERS: See General Conditions. 1.11 ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION: These documents outline a way in which the Owner may be delivered a functional and reliable facility. Drawings and 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 6 specifications describe reasonable engineering practice for the Contractor to follow. Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from that indicated, but in no case shall the intended function be compromised. The Contractor may perceive some material or work methods which differ from those specified which could save time and effort without compromising quality. These may be presented to the Engineer with a breakdown of possible cost savings for review. Implement changes only with authorization. Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After bidding, material or equipment substitutions shall be proposed only on the basis of definitive cost accounting and implemented only with authorization. 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Lay out the project where new work is involved ahead of time, providing sleeves and block outs, and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate HVAC installations. Cut and patch only as needed. Repair wall or floor where cutting and patching is needed to match existing. B. Refer to Division 26 Section: ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for requirements for cutting and patching for electrical equipment, components, and materials. C. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other and any work damaged as a result of HVAC installations. E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of HVAC equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work; 2. Remove and replace defective Work; 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing: 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. G. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work. H. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected HVAC equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of HVAC piping and other HVAC items 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 7 made obsolete by the new Work. I. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. J. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 1.13 SUBMITTALS: Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only from the Contractor to the Engineer. Submittal shall meet the requirements of section 01 30 00 – Submittals. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Engineer will not be processed. There is opportunity and allowance for discussion prior to submittal. Document each transmittal at each transfer level of the process, and sign and stamp the submittal indicating that it has been reviewed and is in compliance with the criteria of the project, any exceptions being clearly noted. Submittals are to include all supporting calculations for the equipment, supports and anchorage of the equipment. A. SHOP DRAWINGS: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, submit to the Engineer, an electronic copy of the descriptive literature covering all equipment and materials to be used in the installation of HVAC systems for this project. Obtain written confirmation of acceptable review by the Owner's Representative before ordering, purchasing, acquiring or installing any such equipment or materials for the project. Prepare the submittals in an orderly manner after the order of this specification, with identification tabs for each item or group of related items. Clearly indicate performance, quality, utility requirements, dimensions of size, connection points and other information pertinent to effective review. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for space and utility requirements for equipment installed. Do not submit anything that will not fit or will not work. Factory-wired equipment shall include shop drawings of all internal wiring to be furnished with unit. Review by the Engineer will be for general conformance of the submitted equipment of the project specification; in no way does such approval relieve Contractor of his obligation to furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification, nor does it relieve the Contractor of his obligation to lay out ahead of time to determine actual field dimensions and conditions which may affect his work. B. Record Drawings: See Division 1. During the course of construction, maintain a set of drawings, specifications, change orders, shop drawings, addenda, etc., for reference and upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. Turn these marked up documents over to the Engineer within 90 days of system acceptance so that the original tracings can be revised. If the Contractor fails to mark up the prints, he shall reimburse the Engineer for the time required to do so. 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 8 1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: At a time prior to Owner making use of a device or system, and in general after testing and balance work for a building or major system is complete, prepare, schedule and conduct a series of training sessions for Owner's operating and supervisory personnel. Instructions shall cover each device and system with emphasis on understanding of the purpose and function, the maintenance requirements and the proper adjustment and operating technique. B. Instruct building operating staff in operation and maintenance of HVAC systems utilizing Operation and Maintenance Manual when so doing. C. Contractor to video tape instruction sessions, and give video tape to owner. D. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows: 1. HVAC - 8 hours, or more as needed. 2. Temperature Control - 8 hours, or more. Programming help as needed. Coordinate with Divisions 26 and 40 for Instrumentation and HVAC control. E. Initial instruction periods shall occur after pre-final inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. Schedule subsequent visits with the Building Operation Personnel throughout the first year. F. Vendors for each piece of equipment, controls, etc., shall participate along with the Contractor(s). 1.15 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY: The following guarantee is a part of this specification and is binding on the part of the Contractor and his assigns: "Contractor guarantees that this installation is in accordance with the terms of the Contract and is free from HVAC defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. See also the General Conditions of these specifications. Failed equipment in the repair or replacement shall be guaranteed for one full year from the date of “Substantial Completion." Compile and assemble the warranties required by Division 23 into a separated set of vinyl covered, insert sheets, tabulated and indexed for each reference, included in the O & M Manual. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. HVAC systems and equipment shall not be considered for substantial completion and initiation of warranty until they have performed in service continuously without malfunction 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 9 for at least thirty (30) working days. 1.16 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS: Make all tests required by code or specification in the presence of a representative of the Owner, with tests recorded and certified by the Contractor and Representative. Involve local authorities where required. 1.17 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: Refer to General Conditions. 1.18 CEILING SPACE AND OPEN SPACE COORDINATION: Carefully coordinate ceiling cavity and open space with all trades; however, installation of HVAC equipment within the ceiling cavity space allocation, in the event of conflict, shall be in the following order: process piping, cable tray plumbing waste lines; supply, return and exhaust ductwork; domestic hot and cold water; fire protection; control conduit. Respect clearances required for lights, electrical conduits, protected structure, etc. All spaces above any and all ceilings shall be defined and considered as return air plenum space. 1.19 HVAC RELATED CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. The Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC systems installed by this project are to be provided under Divisions 26 - Electrical and Division 40 – Process Interconnections but to be fully supported and complemented in a conventional way by providers of Sections 23 work. Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1. See following sections for Control Systems and instrumentation requirements: a. Section 26 05 00 – Electrical General Requirements b. Section 40 10 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation System – General c. Section 23 09 00 – HVAC Control Systems 2. Control sequences will be provided for Owner’s programming. See Division 40. B. Provide for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical HVAC systems. C. Include Divisions 26 – Electrical and 40 – Instrumentation sections in the following work. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels. Includes starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically operated equipment units; and between equipment and field installed control devices. Interlock wiring specified as factory installed is work of this section. 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 10 3. Control wiring between field installed equipment, controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels. 4. 24 volt and 120 volt service work required by instrumentation/control systems. D. Participate in "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing". PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 QUALITY AND CHARACTER OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. New and conventional: All equipment and materials shall be new, and shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Specific equipment shown in schedules on drawings and specified herein is to be the basis for the Contractor's bid. Provisions for substitute equipment are outlined in the General Conditions. B. Complete: Furnish and install all major items of equipment herein specified and/or called out in the equipment schedules on the drawings complete with all accessories normally supplied with catalog items listed, and with all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation. C. Code Compliant: There are certain Code defined hazards associated with the Waste Water Treatment Plant environment, generally outlined in NFPA Standard 820. The Contractor in all if its entities should be familiar with the standard and provide installations which will be compliant in all regards. Of particular interest are the requirements where vagrant flammable process gases such as methane and hydrogen sulfide may develop. Such areas include the Wet Wells, Grinder Rooms and other similarly classified spaces where exhaust fans are involved to dilute the concentration of gases. All HVAC equipment involved in these areas must have an “explosion-proof” characteristic. Impose this requirement on all materials, motors, etc. provided by these Division 23 specifications. 2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Close pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs to prevent lodgement of dirt or trash during the course of installation. Cover equipment tightly and protect against dirt, water and chemical or HVAC injury. Plumbing fixtures intended for the final installation shall not be used by the construction forces. At the completion of the work, clean fixtures, equipment and materials and polish thoroughly and deliver in a factory dock condition for the Owner's acceptance. Make damage and defects developing before acceptance of the work good at Contractor's expense. B. Do not make temporary use of project equipment, during construction. DO NOT USE PERMANENT HVAC SYSTEMS FOR TEMPORARY HEAT!! 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 11 2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN: A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them. Apprentices may be used with appropriate direction. B. Do not employ unskilled persons in the work; execute all work in a skillful and workmanlike manner. All persons employed shall be competent, faithful, orderly and satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Owner's Representative deem anyone employed on the work incompetent or unfit for his duties, and so certify, Contractor shall remove that employee from this project and he shall not be again employed upon the project without permission of the Owner's Representative. C. All welders involved in welding of pressure piping systems shall be certified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Written verification of successful test completion shall be submitted to Architect prior to initiating work. 2.4 FOREMAN: Designate an experienced and qualified general HVAC foreman for the project work to be consistently available on site during the life of the project for consultation. Do not replace this individual without prior approval from the Owner's Representative. 2.5 USE OF COMMON VENDORS: Regardless of subcontract delegations, coordinate purchasing between trades so that equipment and materials of similar nature come from a single vendor, i.e., all package HVAC units shall be common source. Valves, variable volume boxes, etc., the same. Do not burden the Owner with multiple brands of similar equipment unless so directed. 2.6 ROOF/WALL/FLOOR PENETRATIONS - FLASHINGS: A. Install sleeves through the floor into dry rooms flush with the floor, caulked and sealed. Into wet rooms, extend piping above floor level to create 1" dam. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for all pipe sleeves. B. Let pipe sleeves allow for movement of the pipe due to expansion and contraction, yet to include seismic restraint. C. Fire stopping: Provide fire stopping for all Division 23 penetrations of rated walls, floors, structure, etc. in conformance with ASTM E814 and with UL 1479. D. Flashings: 1. Flash all equipment supports, pipes and conduit penetrating the roof. Provide required flashing components. See drawings or Architect/Engineer for additional detail. 2. Clamp roof drains to roof membrane, follow manufacturer's directions. 3. Make all ductwork penetrating a roof watertight with flashings, counter flashing and sealant. Provide curbs for any and all such openings. 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 12 2.7 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING (GENERAL): Reference, if required. A. Provide all excavation, trenching and backfilling for HVAC underground duct and piping work. Excavation and backfilling shall comply with applicable paragraphs of Division 31. Tamp bottoms of trenches hard and, for soil and waste piping, grade to secure uniform fall of 1/4" per foot, or as noted. Excavate bell holes for hub and spigot pipes so that pipe rests on solid ground for its entire length. Lay sewer and water pipe in separate trenches, except where otherwise noted, as detailed. B. After work has been tested, inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative and/or State/Local Inspector, and prior to backfilling, clean the excavation of all rubbish, and clean backfill materials free of trash. Place backfill in horizontal layers not exceeding 12" in thickness, properly moistened. Compact each layer with suitable equipment to a dry density of not less than 95 percent as determined by the Modified AASHO Test T-18O. See Division 31 for additional requirements. 1. Provide adequate shoring to safeguard workers from cave-ins for all excavations. 2. In areas where General Contractor has finish grade work to do, HVAC Contractor shall backfill and compact to 8" below finish grade. Where no finish surface work is to be done, HVAC Contractor shall backfill and compact to and match adjacent undisturbed surface with allowance for settling, etc. 3. Protect from damage all existing underground utilities or utility tunnels indicated on the contract drawings (or field located for the Contractor by the Owner prior to excavation operations). Any damage to identified existing utilities or utility tunnels shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL): A. Provide mountings, hangers and/or supports for all HVAC equipment, piping and ductwork. Primary information is contained in these specifications as noted in, but not limited to, paragraph 1.8 above and on the drawings. Correlate HVAC work with the work of other trades to obtain a consistent manner of installation. B. Provide hangers and supports to correlate with seismic restraint, expansion/contraction, and vibration isolation. 2.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: Install all equipment in strict accordance with directions and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the plans and specifications, report such conflicts to the Engineer. 2.10 LUBRICATION: Lubricate equipment at startup. Then, provide all lubricants for the operation of all equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is held responsible for all damage to equipment consequent to pre-acceptance operation. 2.11 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL: A. In general, primary motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring indicated on the electrical drawings and control diagrams are to be furnished and installed under the Division 26 Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically 178.24.200 04/2024 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 00 - 13 mentioned to be furnished by the HVAC/Instrumentation (Controls) Contractor either in these specifications or on the related drawings, shall be obtained and mounted by this Contractor and shall be connected under and as required by specifications, all in compliance with the National Electric Code, and Divisions 26 and 40. Many control devices and fan motors are to be furnished and terminal block wired to a unit mounted power or control panel. The project requires this single location of connection for fan and pump motors, damper actuators, valve actuators, sensors smoke detectors and the like. B. Refer to the control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor. C. HVAC electrical work must be fully coordinated with Division 26 to insure that all required components of the work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of coordination. D. Where the detailed electrical work is not shown on the electrical drawings, the HVAC Contractor shall furnish, install and wire or have prewired all specified and necessary controls for package air equipment specified for this project. The objective of this paragraph is to make sure a complete operating system is obtained at no additional cost to the Owner for field wiring required related to the equipment. 2.12 FLUSHING AND DRAINING OF SYSTEMS/CLEANING OF PIPING AND DUCTS: Blow out all refrigerant piping systems with compressed air or nitrogen to remove foreign materials that may have been left or deposited in the piping system during its erection. Duct systems shall have all debris removed and fans shall be run to blow out all dust and foreign matter before outlets are installed and connected. Damp wipe all ductwork on installation, cap open ducts, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place. 2.13 JOBSITE CLEANUP: A. Keep site clean during progress of work. B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly. Leave equipment in a factory dock condition. Correct any damage and touch up or repaint if necessary. Remove all debris from site. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 04/2024 HVAC IDENTIFICATION 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 20 - 1 SECTION 23 05 20 HVAC IDENTIFICATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods section apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Label all heating, air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment (excluding thermostats), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical switches and starters for all HVAC equipment. PART 2 – GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIAL AND METHODS 2.1 EQUIPMENT, PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION: A. Equipment Identification: 1. Identify all equipment including, but not limited to, all mechanical equipment, ATC panels, controller, etc., and all other devices with signs made of laminated plastic with 1/8" or larger engraved letters. 2. Give each piece of equipment its own unique equipment number or symbol. 3. Information on sign shall include name of equipment, identification on plans and schedules, rating, maintenance instructions, and any other important data not included on factory attached name plate. 4. Signs shall be attached to equipment so they can be easily read. Attachment shall be by rust proof screws or rivets. Do not use adhesive. 5. Identification signs for equipment shall be similar to the following: a. Supply Fan (F-2) Rating: 49,850 cfm @ 3.5" s.p. (At 1600 ft. elevation) Maintenance: Check bearings for lubrication every 30 days and lubricate as required with S.A.E. 30 oil. b. “ATC Panel A” 2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION: 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC IDENTIFICATION 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 20 - 2 A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved black face Formica with white engraved lettering labels. B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved black face Formica labels with white engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device. C. Numerically or alphabetically code all panel wiring and tubing. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 30 - 1 SECTION 23 05 30 HVAC OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. B.Division-23, Section 23 05 00 General HVAC Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A.Furnish four sets of bound operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals within 90 days of system acceptance. Manuals shall contain descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project and detail the procedures and parts required to operate, maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of approved submittals shall be included for all equipment. 1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL HVAC SYSTEMS: A.General: 1.The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" is a bound compilation of drawings and data that the owner requires for each building or project. Furnish these manuals, complete with drawings and data, to the Owner through the Engineer. 2.The mechanical contractor has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data from and compile the data as set forth in this specification. 3.The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of information to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2A. 4.Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size, model, type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed. B.Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready reference to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project. It is also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by service personnel. It is also to provide information required for checking equipment performance or for planning of plant expansion or redesign. PART 2 – MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 PAGE SIZE: All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples (preferably 17 x 11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch. 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 30 - 2 2.2 DRAWINGS: All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-1/2" x 11" manila pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face of each manila pocket. 2.3 BINDERS: Binders shall be piano hinge, bar-lock type, Buckram (stiffened fabric cover) binders with block lettering for sheet size 8-1/2 x 11 inches with 2" to 3-1/2" expandable metal capacity as required for the project. The number of binders, on not filling them beyond 4". A. Place the following information on the front cover and backbone: 1."Operation and Maintenance Manual". 2.Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume). Project Number (Per owner’s project number). ` 3.Building name and number. 4.Owner’s name. 5.(Architect’s name.) 6.Engineer's name. 7.General Contractor's name. 8.HVAC Contractor's name. Items 5 through 7 need not be printed on the backbone. 2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING: A.Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation. B.All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section additional indexing of component parts may be required. C.Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed shall be as follows: 1.11 x 17 size project drawings in “As-built” condition. 2.Outline drawings, special construction details, “As built” electrical wiring and control diagrams for all major and supplementary systems. 3.Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves. 4.Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list and 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 30 - 3 sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and plan number. 5.Manufacturer’s brochures marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not manufactured directly by him, shall also be included. Include performance data similar if not equivalent to the shop drawing submittal. 6.List the serial numbers of each item of equipment installed with the model numbers and plan symbols. 7.Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index dividers into the following suggested parts: Part I Building and System Descriptions Part II Purchased Equipment Data Part III Test Reports and Valve Charts Part IV Start-Up and Operation Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations 8.A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment. 9.A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports. 10.Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol. 11.Operating and Maintenance Manuals data for Part I shall be obtained directly from the mechanical and electrical consultants. (Allow consultant preparation cost.) 12.The index for each section shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained. PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 04/2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS: A. Work of this section shall be subject to the requirements of the General Conditions of this contract, the Mechanical - General Requirements, HVAC General Requirements, General Electrical Requirements and other sections where this work shares a responsibility. B. System commissioning and startup of the HVAC systems shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Division 23 Contractor and his subcontractors with the participation of the Divisions 26/40 Electrical and Instrumentation Contractor(s) related to electrical and instrumentation work and the General Contractor related to general construction items. C. Testing and balancing shall be under the direction of the General Contractor with the full participation of all of the mechanical and electrical trades employed on the project and shall include the participation of an independent testing and balance subcontractor to coordinate all elements of the work and to perform special technical services outlined herein. 1.2 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING - SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work required under this section shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. The pre-startup inspection of all HVAC systems and subsequent correction of any incorrect items. 2. The initial first run inspections. 3. System operations inspection. B. The intent of this section is to provide for proper installation, startup, service and operation of the mechanical systems in preparation for system balancing. See section for balancing of air system. After completion of the balancing, the mechanical system shall be ready for owner occupancy, with all systems operating as intended. C. Repair, replacement or adjustment of each item shall be performed by the respective installing subcontractor. 1.3 TESTING AND BALANCING - SCOPE OF WORK: A. This work incorporates a checkout of construction work, individual component activation and overall system activation into one work program which shall serve as the transition period from the Contractor's job to Owner's facility. B. The Contractor shall be skilled in the operation and manipulation of systems and in the direction of parties involved in the work. 178.24.200 04/2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 93 - 2 C. The Contractor shall participate in the startup and shakedown of all mechanical systems installed and modified in this contract; test adjust and balance these systems to obtain optimum performance at a level which minimizes the required energy input, prepare and submit a complete report of work done and the final system condition obtained, participate in the instruction of Owner's personnel in the proper operation of systems and equipment. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF SYSTEM COMMISSIONING AND TAB TEAM: A. Representatives of Contractor shall be available on a daily basis through the commissioning and adjustment period. These men shall be experienced journeymen with prior experience in system operation and with specific experience on the construction of this project. Section 23 09 00 – HVAC Control Systems is a particular participant in the work. B. Balancing shall be done at the Contractor's expense by an independent firm specializing in this work. A definition of independent shall mean the firm is not associated with any engineering, contracting, or manufacturing firm and derives its income solely from testing, adjusting and balancing mechanical systems. Approved firms to do this work include: Bob’s Test and Balance – Salt Lake City, UT Certified Test and Balance – Salt Lake City, UT Barnett, Inc. (Payson Sheet Metal) – Payson, UT C. The balancing work shall be performed by the same firm having total professional responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire system. A principal of the firm shall be directly involved in the project. D. The testing and balancing firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders that are required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and make all necessary adjustments. E. After all adjustments are made a detailed written report shall be prepared and submitted for approval, and shall bear the signature of the professional supervising the work. Final acceptance of this project will not be made until a satisfactory report is received. Furnish an electronic copy of the report for Engineer Review. F. Treat each individual system as separate elements for reporting purposes. PART 2 – EXECUTION, SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 2.1 PRE-STARTUP INSPECTION: A. The pre-startup inspection of all systems shall provide for verifying that each piece of equipment is properly installed and prepared for startup. B. All pertinent items shall be checked, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Removal of shipping stops. 2. Vibration isolators properly aligned and adjusted. 178.24.200 04/2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 93 - 3 3. Flexible connections properly aligned. 4. Belts properly adjusted. 5. Belt guards and safety shields in place. 6. Safety controls, safety valves and high or low limits in operation. 7. Filters in place and seal provided around edges. 8. All test stations and measuring devices installed. 9. Initial lubrication of equipment is complete. 10. Filters are clean. 11. Motor rotations are correct. 12. Voltages match nameplate. 13. Control system is in operation. 14. All interlocks are wired and verified. 15. All controls have been connected and verified. 16. All dampers and operators are properly installed and operating. 17. All ductwork is installed and connected. 18. All other items necessary to provide for proper startup. C. Correct all incomplete or defective items. 2.2 FIRST RUN INSPECTION: A. Recheck all items outlined in pre-startup inspection to insure proper operation. B. Check the following items: 1. Excessive vibration or noise. 2. Loose components. 3. Initial control settings. 4. Motor amperages. 5. Heat buildup in motors, bearings, etc. 6. Control system is properly calibrated and functioning as required. C. Correct all items which are not operating properly. 2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION: A. Observe the mechanical systems under operating conditions for sufficient time to verify proper operation under varying conditions, such as day-night and heating-cooling. B. Periodically check the following items: 1. Filters. 2. Visual checks of air flow for "best guess" settings for preparation for system air balancing under section applying. 3. Control operation, on-off sequences, system cycling, etc. 4. Visual checks of seals, packings, operation pressures. 5. Cleaning of excessive oil or grease. 6. Dampers close tightly. 7. All other items pertaining to the proper operation of the mechanical system whether specifically listed or not. 178.24.200 PG-899-1608 230593-4 September 2018 PART 3 – EXECUTION – TESTING AND BALANCING 3.1 TOTAL MECHANICAL SYSTEM BALANCE: A. The mechanical systems consist of many elements. Total system balance requires that all elements be not only individually correct, but also correct as a composite system. Therefore, participation of all parties is required in the test and balance procedure. B. Prior to beginning work, submit a written description of the anticipated sequence of action to the Engineer for review and comment. C. The testing and balance specialist shall review the contract drawings during the bid period and shall advise the Engineer of any modifications to the layout which he might suggest to facilitate the balance procedure. Modifications will be incorporated into the contract by Addendum during the bidding period. D. The test and balance specialist shall visit the project from time to time during the rough installation making a thorough inspection of those items which will affect his subsequent work. He shall advise the Contractor in writing with a copy to the Engineer of any work required by the contract which is not being performed adequately. This is in addition to the regular review efforts of the Engineer. 3.2 AIR SYSTEMS BALANCE: A. Before any adjustments are made, the systems shall be checked for such items as dirty filters, duct leakage, filter leakage, damper leakage, equipment vibrations, correct damper operations, etc. All fan systems are to be adjusted to deliver design air quantities within +5%. Design static pressure is based on filters approximately 50% loaded with dirt. Pressure drop across filters during balancing shall be simulated to that condition. After balancing is completed, check motor amperage with the filters clean. B. Adjust exhaust air systems for air quantities shown on drawings and the proper relationship between supply and exhaust established. C. Exchange sheaves and/or belts as needed to adjust the RPM of all fans so they handle specified air quantity. 1. Determine the sheave on supply fans so that the VFD driven fan will deliver not less than 100% cfm with fully loaded filters. 2. Determine the sheave on the exhaust fans so that the VFD driven fan will fully load the motor at design cfm and 100% speed. D. Verify the proper operation of all air side related control functions. 44 04/2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 93 - 5 3.3 MAJOR EQUIPMENT: A. The Testing and Balancing subcontractor shall work with the Instrumentation/Controls Contractor, Owners technical staff, and Electrician in placing new fans, and other major equipment in operation. The factory representative of the equipment manufacturer shall also participate in a team effort to place this system(s) in all anticipated operating modes and make adjustments as required to obtain correct operation. The Project Engineer shall witness the final operating sequence. 3.4 INSTRUMENTATION/CONTROL SYSTEMS: A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall go through the entire HVAC portion of the PLC based instrumentation and control system with the Instrumentation Contractor and Owner’s technical staff, verifying proper operation of each and every device and the proper function of each system. The report shall indicate and certify such effort. 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS: A. Observe all furnished thermal overload protection and note such in the data sheets. If thermal overload protection is incorrect, it shall be the responsibility of the trade or vendor which furnished the overload devices to furnish and install the correct size overload protection devices, and it is the responsibility of the balancing firm to verify that proper overload protection has been installed at the completion of the job. B. The adjusting crew shall measure and set any special conditions such as minimum air quantities; coordinate outside air, return air and relief air damper operation; check and adjust outside and return air intakes so that the system will deliver substantially the same volume on either; make tests and record data as required in "REPORT" below. C. When deemed necessary, take 24-hour space temperature recording and any required partial rebalance of the system shall be performed without additional cost. Successful function supercedes nominal settings in order of importance. 3.6 REPORT: A. Provide a bound report in four copies which shall contain a general information sheet listing instruments used, method of balancing, altitude correction, and manufacturer's grille, register and diffuser data. B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating, etc., of all mechanical equipment including fans, motors, starters and drives. Operating data shall include rotational speed, pressure drop across filters, coils, and other system components and measured motor current and voltage. 178.24.200 04/2024 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 178.24.100 PAGE 23 05 93 - 6 C. Reports shall contain a reduced set of contract drawings with outlets marked thereon for easy identification of the nomenclature used in the data sheets. D. The report shall contain any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in the above. E. Keep and submit a copy of a daily log of all work performed with a list of work scheduled for the day and the workers on the job. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 04/2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 03 - 1 SECTION 23 06 03 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B.This section is a Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-23 HVAC section making reference to supports and anchors specified herein. C.This section heavily references Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) manuals of standard practices. 1.2 SUMMARY: A.Extent of supports and anchors described by this section is generally indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-23 HVAC sections. Much support and anchorage is implied in that all HVAC installation, piping, ductwork, equipment and specialties require support and restraint. Correlate this section with Section 23 06 05 related to sound, vibration and seismic restraint. B.Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 1.Hanger-Rod Attachments. 2.Building Attachments. 3.Saddles and Shields. 4.Miscellaneous Materials. 5.Anchors. 6.Equipment Supports. C.Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified or presumed as part of equipment assembly. D.Relate this section to Section 23 06 05 regarding seismic and vibration control. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Typical vendors of support systems include Grinnell. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of 178.24.200 04/2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 03 - 2 components. C.Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-1. 1.5 REFERENCES: A.Codes and Standards: 1.Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building, mechanical and plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2.UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved. 3.MSS Standard Compliance: Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS: A.General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. B.Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. (For adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads.) C.Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. (For use on high temperature piping installations.) D.Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. (For use with split pipe rings, MSS type 11.) E.Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. (For attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments.) 2.2 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: A.General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems. 178.24.200 04/2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 03 - 3 B.Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. (For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.) C.Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. (Use under roof installations with bar joist construction, for attachment to top flange of structural shape.) D.Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. (For attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.) E.Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. (For attachment to center of bottom flange of beams.) F.Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22. (For attachment to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.) G.C-Clamps: MS Type 23. (For attachment to structural shapes.) H.Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. (For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to edge of flange.) I.Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. (For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams.) J.Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) K.Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) L.Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. (For attachment to structural steel.) M.Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading: 1.Light Duty: MSS Type 31, to 570 pounds. 2.Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, to 1,500 pounds. 3.Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, to 3,000 pounds. N.Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. (For use on sides of steel or wooden beams.) O.Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. (For attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired.) P.Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. (For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movements where head room is limited. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: 1.Kin-Line, Inc. 2.Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Div. Figgie International 3.ITT Grinnel Corp. 4.B-Line 178.24.200 04/2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 03 - 4 5.Unistrut 2.4 OUTSIDE AREAS: Use galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts, and other accessories for all outside areas. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A.Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B.Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36. C.Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. Use Embeco or Engineer approved equal grout for non-shrink applications. D.Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E.Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A.Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION: A.Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. B.Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section and Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: A.Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete 178.24.200 04/2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 03 - 5 is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through the openings at the tops of inserts. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A.General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to rigidly support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. B.Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. C.Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by isolating with foam rubber covering or 30 mil insulating tape. D.Provisions for Movement: Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install supports within 2 feet of non-vertical flex connectors E.Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. F.Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. G.Insulated Piping: Do not allow hangers to come in contact with pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated. H.Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. I.Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install galvanized steel protective shields. Install calcium silicate blocks (12" long minimum) at support points. J.Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS: A.Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer for loading and stresses to connected equipment. 178.24.200 04/2024 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 03 - 6 B.Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. C.Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit. D.Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A.Concrete curbs for exterior mounted HVAC equipment shall be provided by the General Contractor. Anchor to curbs provided. Provide weather tight seal. B.Provide structural steel supports for equipment not floor or wall mounted. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A.Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. B.Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations. C.Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 04/2024 MECH. SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 05 - 1 SECTION 23 06 05 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. This section is a Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-23 HVAC section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein. 1.2 SUMMARY: Furnish and install complete support, restraint and vibration control systems for all work installed under Division 23 HVAC sections. Work to be responsive to the intent of the International Building Code, latest adopted edition, for the respective seismic zone. Correlate this work with 23 06 03 related to general supports of Mechanical / HVAC systems and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent support, restraint and vibration control subcontractor who has the technology, the experience, computer capabilities and manufactured products to prepare the required computations, shop drawings and special devices to meet the minimum requirements described herein. The support, restraint and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during construction at a minimum of two specific periods. 1.When equipment is set in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for the purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the approved devices. 2.At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose of verifying the correctness of the support, restraint and vibration isolation device installation and preparing certification of the vibration-isolation work. The support, restraint, vibration control subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for this work and shall include, but not be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical (Division-23 and Division-33) Contractor concerning: Anchoring of all mechanical equipment. Vibration mounting of equipment. Equipment base coordination with restraint requirements. Snubbing of equipment. Bracing and anchoring of ductwork, piping and conduit. Provision for vibration of piping. Concrete and/or steel pads or bases to assure proper mounting of restraints and isolators. 178.24.200 04/2024 MECH. SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 05 - 2 Vibration isolation of exhaust fans, ventilation fans, other rotating equipment. The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of steel sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete. The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning properly. Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration isolation selection, equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole plate data, restraint locations and type of restraints. Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations, thermal expansion, building expansion joints, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit. Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork are proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints. Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis for selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed. Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor bolts, sole plates and other support steel for restraining devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in the State of Utah. 1.5 REFERENCES: A.Codes and Standards: International Building Codes Latest Adopted Edition NFPA bulletin 90A,Latest Adopted Edition UL Standard 181 Latest Adopted Edition National Electric Code Latest Adopted Edition Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems. Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the Plumbing and Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - PRODUCTS: Restraint devices shall be especially designed to resist system induced forces in all directions. A.Snubbers: Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion shall be cushioned with a resilient elastomer neoprene (bridge bearing neoprene) to protect equipment. Restraints shall allow a maximum of 1/4" before engaging and shall not interfere in normal starting or stopping operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection to determine clearances during system operation. Restraints shall be field adjustable and be positioned for up to 1/4" clearance both horizontally and vertically. Mountings and snubbers are to be manufactured under a Quality Assurance (QA) Program. B.Snubbers and Isolator Combination Devices: Combination unitized devices may be used 178.24.200 04/2024 MECH. SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 05 - 3 where equipment isolation is required. They shall include the requirements listed for snubbers. Isolation portion shall be stable spring type with combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening device. Base plate shall have adequate means for bolting to structure. The spring assembly shall be removable and shall fit within a welded steel enclosure. C.Piping, Conduit and Duct Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be standard fabricated flat steel, angle rod and channel members. Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be used only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 RESTRAINT GUIDELINE: Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as the basis for restraint methods. (Exception – Use rigid member bracing and attachment concepts. No cabling shall be used in the restraint systems except as noted.) 3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - DUCTWORK: Ductwork, four feet square and larger in cross sectional area or 26" diameter and larger shall be protected in all places by restraints. Locations shall include, but not be limited to: A.At all equipment connections. B.At all duct turns and duct run ends (transverse bracing). C.Transverse bracing to occur 30'-0" O.C. maximum. Rectangular ducts 61" and larger in either direction may be braced at 32'-0" O.C. D.Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60'-0" O.C. maximum. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with maximum weight for selection of restraint members. No bracing is required if the top of the duct is suspended 12" or less from supporting member and attached to the top of the duct. 3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION: A.General: Furnish and install devices to isolate moving equipment from the structure. (Or confirm that equipment may be securely fastened directly to the structure without negative effect.) Review isolation furnished with factory package equipment, require conformance with project criteria. B.Basic Criteria: Vibration isolation devices which have natural frequencies approximately 1/10 that of the related driving frequency. C.Equipment to Include: Exhaust Fans: D.Field Verify: All required devices and installation. 178.24.200 04/2024 MECH. SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 05 - 4 3.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION - DUCTWORK AND PIPING: A.Furnish and install devices to isolate all piping and ductwork from other moving equipment. Provide flex connections, spring hangers, grooved joint couplings for pipe, etc., as required. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 04/2024 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELEC. REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 07 - 1 SECTION 23 06 07 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B.Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and electrical connections are specified in Division-26 and Division-40. C.Reference 26 29 23 for description related to Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)’s. All Variable Frequency Drives shall be furnished by Division 26. 1.2 SUMMARY: A.This section specifies the basic requirements for motors furnished by Division-23 HVAC and for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged HVAC equipment. Package components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches, etc. B.Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for HVAC equipment are noted within these documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.For items with electrical aspects furnished by this Division and these Sections, provide electrical components and materials which are UL labeled and assembled with U.L. listings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A.Submit product data for motors, belts, drives, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections. Verify project electrical characteristics with submittal. Confirm suitability for altitude, maintaining full nameplate rating plus service factor. Include this data in maintenance manual in accordance with 23 05 30 "HVAC Operation and Maintenance Manuals". 1.5 REFERENCES: A.NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators. B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C.NEMA Standards 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. D.NEMA Standards KS 1: Enclosed Switches. E.IEEE Standard 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. F.Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). 178.24.200 04/2024 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELEC. REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 07 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS: See 26 05 74 “Electric Motors” but not less than the following: A.The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are given in the individual equipment specifications. 1.Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate and maintain the driven loads. 2.Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. 3.Provide two-speed motors with two separate windings for poly-phase motors. Confirm 2-speed starter requirements with Division-26. 4.Fraction Horsepower Single speed motors shall be of the permanent split capacitor type. (PSC) 5.Temperature Rating: Minimum rate for 40oC environment with maximum 90oC temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class H Insulation for altitude, Class B leads allowed). 6.Starting Capability: Capable of handling not less than 6 evenly timed/spaced starts per hour, (10 minute cycle time) or more as indicated by the automatic control system, 7.Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors, 1.0 for TEFC motors. 8.Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, TEFC, continuous duty, design "B", except design "C" where required for high starting torque. Provide motors rated for “Inverter duty” where motors are fed power from variable frequency drives. 9.Motor Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; T-frame, use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application. 10.Bearings: a.Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. Provide with electrically isolated bearings when the motor is fed power from a variable frequency drive. b.Re-greasable with zerk fittings, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance; c.Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust on motor; d.For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted; 11.Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) for wet or harsh/dirty environments. Typical throughout this project. Explosion proof (EP) rating for all installation in hazardous locations. 12.Overload Protection: Provide motors with built-in thermal overload protection. Where indicated for industrial motor applications, Provide motors with an internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. 178.24.200 04/2024 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELEC. REQUIREMENTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 06 07 - 3 13 Noise Rating: "Quiet" 14.Efficiency: "Premium Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. Motors used with Variable Frequency Drives shall be compatible and designed for use with Variable Frequency Drives. Any “explosion proof” motor set in a classified area and scheduled for use with a variable frequency drive shall be listed for inverter duty applications. 15.Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. 16.Acceptable Manufacturers: Allis-Chalmers, Baldor, Century, General Electric, Gould, Lincoln, Louis-Allis, Marathon, Reliance, U.S. Motors, Westinghouse. 2.2 MOTOR DRIVES: A.Provide fan/motor-compressor/motor drives with cast steel sheaves and V-belts of fabric and rubber construction by Browning, Dodge, or Woods. Match multiple belts and adjust the assembly to properly drive the apparatus and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting. Design drives for 150 percent or more of the specified motor nameplate rating. Furnish all drives with shaft bushings. Belts shall be A, B or C section belts. Narrow gauge belts are not acceptable. Provide adjustable driver sheaves for motors five horsepower and smaller, adjust drives or replace sheaves (on larger motors) as needed to obtain required driven speeds and system capacities. B.Provide shaft to shaft coupled drives for pumps and blowers equivalent to the Dodge “Paraflex” design by Browning, Dodge or Woods. C.Provide a removable (for maintenance) galvanized steel guard for each V-belt drive, coupled drive or rotating shaft constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. Design the guard to completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. Provide hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" for access to motor and fan shaft for test purposes. For double inlet fans, construct the belt guard cover of 1/2" mesh expanded metal, arranged as not to restrict the air flow into the fan inlet. 2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Reference 26 29 23. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 04/2024 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 1 SECTION 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B.Division-23, Section 23 05 00 - General HVAC Requirements sections apply to work of this section. C.Division 40 is responsible for the overall instrumentation and control work for the exhaust fans. The HVAC systems are supportive of, but in many ways are independent of the fundamental process control aspects of the project. This section is an integration of the HVAC work into the overall plant instrumentation and control system. 1.2 SUMMARY: A.Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on “H” drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.This work has a multi-faceted HVAC Controls responsibility. a.Provide Local Control Panels (LCPs) as described below to manage and control the HVAC devices and systems. b.Controls for the stand alone HVAC related systems is to be provided by the Division 23 HVAC controls contractor using components described in this Section. 2.Follow control sequences as described in these documents. It is common for sequences and set points to require adjustment in the field to accommodate the final character of overall assemblies. Allow time to make adaptations and adjustments as needed. System setups are often seasonally variable. Re-visit the operation at least four times during the first year to make sure that the functions of the systems are being satisfied. 3.During the bidding period, thoroughly review the documents and request clarification of insufficient, ambiguous or contradictory presentation. The fundamental assumption is that there is a duty to be met and that the documents require as a minimum that devices, materials and installation will be provided to result in fully coherent and functional systems. Provide devices with any and all optional features required to obtain required function. Provide devices of materials that are compatible with the plant environment. 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 2 B.Refer to other Section 23 31 10 – “Ductwork Accessories” for installation dampers in mechanical systems. C.Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work. 1.Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between equipment and field-installed control devices. a.Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section. D.Provide all field electrical work complying with and as work of the Division-26 sections. 1.Control wiring between field-installed equipment, controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels. 2.120 volt service required by instrumentation and control systems. E.Participate in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of instrumentation and electric control equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B.INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms and workmen specializing and experienced in programmable logic control, pneumatic and electric control system installations for not less than 5 years. Installer shall be under the direction of the instrumentation subcontractor and able to act as an authorized agent thereof. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A.PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start-up instructions. Confirm that devices offered are suitable for the indicated duty, inherently hardened against the adverse environment of the wastewater treatment plant. Note that exposed copper and copper bearing materials (i.e. bronze) are inappropriate for this duty. Provide devices of stainless steel, etc. B.SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit material catalog sheets and shop drawings for each control system, containing the following information: 1.Schematic flow diagram of system showing, but not limited to, fans, unit heaters, coils, dampers and control devices, etc. 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 3 2.Label each control device with final designated setting or adjustable range of control. 3.Indicate all required tubing and/or electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of work that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Note contract responsibility to provide complete system regardless of delegation. Completely interface with and show existing installation in the existing building. 4.Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5.Include verbal written description of sequence of operation. Confirm correct function of proposed sequences. C.SAMPLES: Submit sample of each type of proposed thermostat cover. D.MAINTENANCE DATA: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Section 23 05 93. 1.5 REFERENCES: A.CODES AND STANDARDS: 1.Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards. 2.NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for electric control systems. 3.NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences. 4.Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electric Code" for all electrical installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 1.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: (See Section 23 05 00) A.Purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner, leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and maintain the systems. 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 4 B.Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to show proper operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique. C.Prepare an outline of information to be conveyed, list materials available for reference. Submit to Engineer along with a proposed schedule of instruction. Schedule to allow individual time for each trade and each system. D.Convey information in formal classroom session. Teachers to include qualified contractor personnel and sales representatives for each major piece of equipment. Go from the classroom to the actual location to graphically illustrate concepts discussed. 1.8 WARRANTIES: A.As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion not date of delivery). B.Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems. 1.9 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: All instruments, control panel and control piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before final acceptance. Provide lubrication for all furnished equipment. 1.10 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: A.During the system commissioning, testing and balancing of the various building systems, have a controls representative(s) present and available to interpret and adjust controls as needed. Demonstrate and report the integrity and accuracy of each function and control point. B.At the termination of the testing period, the Controls representative shall spend one working day instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the control system operation, and one working day checking each system for day-night and manual override with the Owner's operating personnel on each air handling system. A complete operating booklet shall be provided and used during the training period. Schedule this training with the Owner and Mechanical Contractor. Since system performance is partly a function of climatic conditions, the Controls contractor shall be available during the changing seasons of the warranty period to make further adjustments and modifications if required. A final complete check of all systems shall be made at the conclusion of the one year warranty period. 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOM THERMOSTATS: A.The thermostats and controllers for the Unit Heaters shall be furnished by the respective vendors. Coordinate field wiring requirements with each vendor’s installation instructions manual. 2.2 AUXILIARY RELAYS: A.Light Duty - as required. (verify current model number) B.Heavy Duty - Square D, Class 8501, Type X. (For motor control) 2.3 ACCESSORIES A.Provide devices with all components needed to make a complete and functional installation. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A Factory-calibrate each instrument according to manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST. B.Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. 2.5 HVAC CONTROL DAMPERS: A.A.In supplying dampers, vendor shall instruct workers in the proper installation of the dampers. Ductwork shall be reinforced and the damper properly supported at the point of insertion without strain. In mounting dampers at a wall, provide clearance for the damper actuator and linkages. Make the damper installation airtight in terms of the air flow path. B.Protect all dampers with a phenolic epoxy powder coating. C.Provide damper operators with motors of proper size, so that the motors will operate against the static pressure of the systems. Provide each damper motor with a bracket for attaching to ductwork, building structure or equivalent. Damper motors in plenums shall be rigidly mounted on damper frames. Do not install motors in ducts. Modulating motors shall be provided with end switches and with integral stops for both minimum and maximum stop. Voltage ranges or pressure ranges shall be adjustable, the equivalent of pilot positioning for pneumatic or electric functions. 178.24.200 04/2024 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 6 D.Control dampers for handling of outside air, relief air, exhaust air, ventilating air and other dampers exposed to weather temperatures in built-up or factory assembled systems: shall be low leakage type with spring loaded side seals, inflatable butyl or neoprene fabric edge seals, sleeve type bearings of stainless steel, nylon or Teflon, reinforced extruded blades. Parallel or opposed action or a combination thereof. Air leakage not to exceed 6 CFM per square foot at 4" upstream static pressure. E.Provide dampers equivalent to Ruskin CD-403 (3”), CD-40 (4"), CD-50 (6") F.Provide actuators for control dampers with not less that 33% excess torque capacity over and above the minimum needed to drive a given damper, load at not more than 5 inch-lbs per square foot of damper, more if damper requires. Actuators shall be configured for the duty, typically modulating, explosion proof for rated areas, manual over-ride, dual end switches, 24 volt or 120 volt drive as indicated, on board choice of 2 – 10 volt DC or 4 – 20ma signal input, mounting bracket assemblies, jack shafting and adapters as needed. G.Provide actuators equivalent to Belimo AF(SR). PART 3 – CONTROL SEQUENCES AND EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A.Provide control systems to manage and manipulate mechanical equipment in a functional and energy conserving way. B.Reference Division 40 for control sequences related to the exhaust fans under a separate contract. 3.2 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER (UH-1&2): A.Each electric unit heater cycles on its own controls to satisfy the heating set point temperature of 45°F (adj.) when activated by the local unit mounted thermostat. Electric Unit Heater UH-2 shall serve as backup heat source if the heat pumps cannot maintain the space temperature set point. 3.3 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FAN (REF-1): A.Reference Electrical drawings and specifications for exhaust fan control diagrams and sequences. 3.4 WALL MOUNTED A/C UNIT (WAC-1): A.WAC-1 operates through its own internal controls based upon a signal from a wall- mounted remote programmable controller. B.The remote programable controller is furnished with the unit and shall be capable of controlling the unit in cooling mode. The unit shall operate in full outside air economizer mode when the outdoor conditions permit as sensed by the unit logic board (outdoor temperature, humidity, and particulate level are monitored by the 178.24.200 B. 04/2024 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 7 unit logic board). The remote controller is to be field programmed so that the system maintains a space temperature set point of 70°(adjustable) in cooling mode. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 04/2024 DUCTWORK 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 00 - 1 SECTION 23 31 00 DUCTWORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of metal and high density polypropylene ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ductwork required for the project include the following: 1. Rectangular C. Refer to Section 23 05 93 for system commissioning, testing and balancing. D. Refer to Section 23 09 00 for mechanical controls and control dampers (HVAC related only). E. Refer to Section 23 31 10 for ductwork accessories. F. Refer to Section 23 37 00 for louvers. G. Refer to Section 23 82 00 for power ventilators. H. Refer to Section 23 90 00 for filters. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal and high density polypropylene ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal and high density polypropylene ductwork systems work similar to that required for project. The installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. All workmen on the project shall carry Utah state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for metal and high density polypropylene ductwork materials and products. 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 00 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: Submit coordinated scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spacial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced. C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork and ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of Division-1. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-1. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems". 4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code/equivalent Utah Codes: Comply with all sections pertaining to mechanical work. B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK - GENERAL: A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by SMACNA "Duct Construction Manuals" for the appropriate pressure class, and with the ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment, 2016 edition, Chapter 19, Duct Construction 2.2 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK: 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 00 - 3 A. General: For all rectangular ductwork and fittings construct/fabricate from aluminum, PVC coated galvanized steel or stainless steel. Contractor may choose between aluminum, PVC coated galvanized steel or stainless steel except where specifically directed on the drawings. If using galvanized sheet steel, provide galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality, with G 120 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; mill phosphatized for exposed locations. If using stainless steel, fabricate of Type 304 SS or Type 316 SS stainless steel sheet complying with ASTM A-167 with all welded joints and seams. Provide polished No. 4 satin finish for all duct exposed to view, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill applied adhesive protective paper through fabrication and installation. If using aluminum ductwork, aluminum ductwork shall be constructed of 3003-H-14 aluminum using construction for nominal 4" SMACNA rated systems. Seal all transverse joints with duct cement. B. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Installation of exposed ductwork shall be laid out in advance and submitted for review. Ductwork shall be hung straight and uniform, points shall be true, and seams shall show continuity. C. Note a special requirement for hangers and supports for process areas. Project rejects strap hangers for ductwork. Make angle, insert, or clamp attachment to structure and hang suspended duct with rod or angle iron verticals and angle, channel or Unistrut horizontals. Brace and restrain ductwork as for piping with rigid assemblies. Do not use a cabling system for such duty. 2.3 FITTINGS AND FABRICATION: A. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15o change of direction per section. B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width. Limit angular tapers to 30o for contracting tapers and 20o for expanding tapers. C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer to Division-23 section "Duct Accessories' for accessory requirements. D. Offset, transition, and adapt ductwork to structural obstacles and work of other trades in a coordinated effort. Layout work to avoid conflict with piping, etc. With review of conditions, teardrop around conflicting piping, lights, etc., all at no added cost to the project. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 00 - 4 B. Duct Sealing Compound for metal ductwork: Use a U.L. listed, fiber reinforced, water based adhesive duct sealing compound by Foster, Hard cast, United-McGill, Nova, Miracle, 3M, Duct mate, Duro Dyne. Verify that the material is listed for use in a moist, corrosive environment compatible with duct material. Follow manufacturer’s directions for joint cleaning and preparation; seal all duct and plenum joints prior to and during assembly. Use mastics that will not weep if the duct is warmed above room temperature. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK: A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be required. Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be maintained. All of these changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at project. During the installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering. B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop- fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Except as indicated, do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Maintain clearances above of and in front of electrical panels. E. Ducts at Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting to 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 00 - 5 or passing through concrete, gypsum board, masonry openings and along edges of all plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" stainless steel angle iron which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron. Round high velocity ducts in vertical chases shall be supported with rolled angle rings. Close openings between duct and structure. F. Cross Breaking: Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross broken or rolled rib reinforced on the four sides of each 4-foot panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as 4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be cross broken. Cross breaking shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles; the center of cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being rigid. Larger ducts shall include intermediate reinforcing angles or members to stiffen the panel faces. G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Related to final installation cleanliness, damp wipe all ductwork on installation. Cap open duct ends, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL DUCTWORK. A. It is essential that all ducts shall be rigidly supported. Hangers for low velocity ducts up to 18" in width shall be placed on not more than 10' centers. Low velocity ducts 19" through 35" in width and greater shall be supported on not more than 5' centers. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs, heavy supporting angles shall be attached to ducts, and to structure. Angles shall be of sufficient size to support the ductwork rigidly and shall be placed on at least two sides of the duct. B. For rectangular ducts 36" and greater in width, construct hangers with all-thread rods and aluminum channel, galvanized iron channel, or Unistrut sections, minimum dimension 2” x 2” x 1/8". C. Ductwork Support Materials for ductwork in Process Areas: Provide 316 stainless steel fasteners, anchors, and rods, washers, nuts and provide 316 stainless steel or 6061-T6 aluminum alloy angles for support of ductwork in process areas. Do not use straps. D. Supporting Dampers: Parallel and opposed blade motor operated dampers shall be supported by reinforcing the ductwork or sheet metal walls at the damper locations to carry the weight of the dampers and the force exerted on the dampers due to air pressure, or shall be supported independent of ductwork from the ceiling or floor, as conditions at the site determine. 3.5 CONNECTIONS: All duct joints, transverse and longitudinal, shall be made airtight by coating joints with duct sealing compound before joining, and then sealing the joint with one layer of "Glass Fab" reinforcing tape set in a coating of the compound. Tape and sealant shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke development of 50. 3.6 WELDED JOINTS: Welded metal ductwork shall have either an angle or a piece of 1/8" 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 00 - 6 steel bar behind each weld to allow lying of a neat and continuous bead. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Air leaks which are in excess of that required to bubble the soap suds (that is, actually blow the suds away) shall be sealed by additional taping and caulking to reduce the leakage to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage conforms with Chart of Figure 4-1, Seal Class A, Leakage Class 3 for round/oval, 6 for rectangular. B. Allow 24 hours for the HDPE ductwork sealant to cure after final assembly before testing the duct system. Additional curing time may be required in high ambient conditions. 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 00 - 7 3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION: A. General: Connect metal and high density polypropylene ductwork to equipment as indicated; provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors where indicated. 3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, as follows: With filters in place where applicable, operate the fans at full capacity to blow out dirt and debris from ducts. If it is not practical to use the main supply blower for this test, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a portable fan. B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. C. Balancing: 1. Refer to Section 23 05 93 section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" for air distribution balancing of metal or high density propylene ductwork; not work of this section. However, the Sheet Metal Contractor shall participate fully in this work. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. 2. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified conditions. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 1 SECTION 23 31 05 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for a Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork system. 1. Ducts and fittings. 2. Flexible connections. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Supports. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. RTP-1 - Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion-Resistant Equipment. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. M45 - Fiberglass Pipe Design. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C582 - Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment. 2. D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. 3. D2105 - Standard Test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Tube. 4. D2344 - Standard Test Method for Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their Laminates. 5. D2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. 6. D2992 - Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings. 7. D2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe. 8. D3982 - Standard Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Ducts. 9. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 91 - Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists, and Particulate Solids. E. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): 1. PS 15 - Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced-Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment. 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 2 F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions. B. Shop drawings: 1. Scaled ductwork layout. a. Size, joint types, horizontal dimensions, and elevations. b. Support locations. c. External stiffeners and expansion joints locations. 2. Fabrication details. 3. Support, flexible connections, and external stiffeners. a. Materials and configuration. C. Calculations: 1. Wall thickness calculations based upon design criteria. 2. Stresses and reaction loads at supports. D. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Detailed instructions for field butt joints including lay-up sequence, width of each reinforcement layer, and total number of layers. 1.04 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. As specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic ductwork: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Daniel Mechanical. b. Engineered Composite Systems. c. Perry Fiberglass Products, Inc. d. NOV Fiber Glass Systems. 2.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Ducting for HVAC, Chlorine Scrubber systems and Ventilation systems: 1. Minimum internal pressure: 20.0 inches water gauge. 2. Minimum internal vacuum: 20.0 inches water gauge. 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 3 B. Support spacing: As needed to comply with wall thicknesses calculations but not greater than the following: 1. Contact-molded ductwork: Not greater than 5 foot centers. 2. Filament-wound ducts: In accordance with SMACNA standards below: Duct Inside Diameter (Inches) Maximum Span (Feet) 3 to 19 10 20 to 29 15 30 to 35 20 C. Minimum flooding: Design ductwork for water accumulation as follows: 1. Rectangular ductwork: 1-inch deep across bottom of duct. 2. Round ductwork: 2 inches deep across bottom of duct. D. Physical and mechanical properties: Duct shall meet the following standards for physical and mechanical properties: Pipe Property Standard Design Properties Hoop (PSI) Axial (PSI) Ultimate Flexural Stress ASTM D2412 50,000 18,000 Flexural Modulus 3.05 X 106 1.0 X 106 Ultimate Tensile Stress ASTM D2105 52,000 7,485 Tensile Modulus 1.5 X 106 1.56 X 106 Ultimate Shear Strength Approximate Typical Values (PSI) Interlaminar ASTM D2344 2130-2730 Cross 15,000 Density ASTM D792 0.065-0.072 lb./In3 E. Design tensile stress: 1. Calculations for design of wall thickness assume a laminate ultimate tensile stress of 9,000 pounds per square inch maximum. 2. Decrease ultimate tensile stress as appropriate to the laminate design. a. Round ducting: The maximum allowable design tensile stress shall be the ultimate tensile stress divided by 5. b. Rectangular ducting: The maximum allowable design tensile stress shall be the ultimate tensile stress divided by 10. F. Manufacturer shall provide design calculations for FRP ductwork design and construction. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by licensed engineer registered in the state of the project location 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 4 2.04 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. As specified in applicable portions of Section 06608 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. B. Minimum corrosion liner: 1. Interior surfacing "C" or Nexus veil as specified for the service environment. 2. Exterior surfacing: “C” or “A” veil. 3. Remainder 1-1/2 ounce per square foot mat to total minimum thickness of 0.096 inches on surface exposed to the service environment. 4. Duct shall be resistant to the following in accordance with ASTM C582: Sulfuric Acid 75 percent At 100 degrees Fahrenheit Nitric Acid 20 percent At 100 degrees Fahrenheit Sodium Hydroxide 50 percent At 100 degrees Fahrenheit Hydrofluoric Acid 20 percent At 100 degrees Fahrenheit C. Ultraviolet stabilizer: 1. All exposed external surfaces of all FRP ductwork installed outdoors shall be provided with protection against ultraviolet degradation and weather erosion. 2. The duct shall carry the flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84 and a smoke contribution rating in excess of 1,000 in accordance with NPFA 91. 3. External duct protection shall be provided by an ultraviolet stabilizer added to the final coat or resin that also incorporates paraffin wax curing elements and color pigment. 4. An alternative system to polyurethane paint with color pigments may be used if approved by the Owners Designated Representative. D. Resin: 1. The external surface and structural layers of all FRP ductwork shall carry a flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84 and a smoke contribution of 50 or less in accordance with NFPA 91. 2. Premium vinyl ester as follows unless otherwise recommended by the resin manufacturer for the service environment: a. Resin for structural layers: Resin with sufficient antimony trioxide or pentoxide for Class I fire rating. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Ashland, Hetron 992FR. 2) Reichhold Dion, VER 9300FR. E. Color: Add pigment to the exterior surface resin coat such that the color of the duct will be similar to paint used for equipment, except that ducting for air conditioning systems which are concealed above suspended ceilings need not be pigmented. Color selected by Owner. F. Provide fasteners, field joints, expansion joints, and supports required for complete installation of a duct system. 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 5 G. Flanges: 1. All flanges shall be hand laid up to the thickness specified in accordance with ASTM D3982. 2. FRP flanges shall be made of the same materials as the FRP ductwork. 3. Flange bolt hold pattern as well as flange dimensions, shall be in accordance with NIST PS 15 Tables 2 and 5 for duct and pipe, respectively, except for thickness. Thickness of flange shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch. 4. Flanges shall be manufactured using the hand lay-up technique and shall be integral to the duct in accordance with ASME RTP-1. Filament-wound and/or random chopped methods of constructing flanges will not be acceptable. Pipe Diameter, Inches Minimum Flange Thickness, Inches Less Than 12 1/2 12-24 1/2 25-41 5/8 42-60 3/4 2.05 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Hand lay-up or filament wound construction as specified in Section 06608 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 1. Provide wall thickness necessary to comply with design criteria but not less than the following minimum thicknesses. 2. Structural wall thicknesses shall not include the thickness of the interior corrosion barrier, inner surface, and interior layer: Duct Size Round Ducting (wall thickness, inches) Rectangular Ducting (wall thickness, inches) Buried Ducting (wall thickness, inches) For 18 inch & smaller ducts 0.1875 0.25 0.34 20 to 36 inch ducts 0.25 0.375 0.42 42 to 54 inch ducts 0.375 0.500 0.60 60 to 72 inch ducts 0.438 0.625 0.625 B. Fittings: 1. Type: Hand lay-up contact molded. 2. Resin: Identical to and with same strength as resin used for FRP ductwork. 3. Wall thickness: At least equal to the thickness of the thickest adjacent ducting. 4. Internal diameter: Equal to the adjacent duct. 5. Tolerance: a. Angles for all fittings shall be within 1 degree for up to 30-inch diameter duct. b. Angles for all fittings shall be within 1/2 degree for over 30-inch diameter and above duct. 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 6 6. Round standard elbows: a. Standard elbow centerline radius shall be equal to 1-1/2 times the diameter unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Standard elbows up to 24-inch diameter shall be smooth radius elbows. Standard elbows of 26-inch diameter and greater may be mitered sections as follows: 1) 0 to 44 degree elbows shall contain 1 mitered joint and 2 sections. 2) 45 to 80 degree elbows shall contain a minimum of 2 mitered joints and 3 sections. 3) Elbows greater than 80 degrees shall contain a minimum of 4 mitered joints and 5 sections. c. Provide turning vanes in all round mitered elbows. Round elbow turning vanes shall be of FRP construction, solid or double wall construction with an airfoil shaped profile. 7. Rectangular elbows: a. Fittings shall be factory manufactured to meet the specified design criteria and in accordance with approved submittals. Factory install reinforcing ribs as required to meet the specified deflection requirements and to provide a system free from pulsing, warpage, sagging, and undue vibration. b. Provide turning vanes in all rectangular elbows. Rectangular elbow turning vanes shall be of FRP construction, solid or double wall construction with an airfoil shaped profile. C. Joints: 1. Flanged: a. Flanged in accordance with ASTM D3982 and bolt hold patterns in accordance with NIST PS 15, Table 2. b. Flanged joints shall be provided at the following locations: 1) At each damper and each item of equipment to facilitate disassembly. 2) At each change in material. 3) Where indicated on the Drawings. c. Gaskets for flanged joints: 1/8-inch neoprene over full flange face. d. Bolt nuts and washers: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Butt and strap welded: a. Field butt and strap welded joints shall be provided at the following locations: 1) 12 inches from any increasing or decreasing cross-section of pipe. 2) Where the pipe to be joined has the same diameter. b. Thickness of butt and strap joint overlays: At least equal to the thickness of the thickest adjacent duct. c. Field weld kits: 1) All necessary fiberglass and reinforcing material shall be supplied pre-cut and individually packaged for each joint. 2) Bulk Glass rolls will not be acceptable. 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 7 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Flexible connection shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. When flexible connections are not shown, they shall be provided at all duct to rotating equipment connections. B. FL-3, Duct to Equipment Heavy Duty Flexible Connection: 1. Materials: EPDM rubber vulcanized with minimum of 1 ply of reinforcing fabric; 3/16 inch thick. 2. Unit shall have minimum movement of: a. Axial compression: 2.25 inches. b. Axial extension: 1.25 inches. c. Lateral offset: 1.25 inches. 3. Provide 3/8-inch thick by 2-inch wide pre-drilled retaining rings/back-up bars to clamp the expansion joints into the ducting system. 4. The expansion joint shall be of fully molded construction. Splices will not be allowed in the body of the expansion joint. 5. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Proco Series 500, Style 530 Fabric Fan Connector. b. Holz Rubber Style 952 Arch Design Expansion Joint. 2.07 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joints shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. When expansion joints are not shown, they shall be provided in above grade duct at maximum spacing of 40 foot centers. B. Construction: 1. Body: EPDM. 2. Reinforcing: Multiple layers (2 minimum) of impregnated polyester or Kevlar tire cord fabric. 3. Flange rings: Type 316 stainless steel or minimum 3/4 inch thick FRP. 4. Hardware/Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Minimum pressure rating: 1 pounds per square inch. 6. Minimum vacuum rating: 1 pounds per square inch. 7. Minimum operating temperature: 175 degree Fahrenheit. 8. Connections: Flanged in accordance with NIST PS 15, Table 2. 9. Seamless construction built as on continuous piece. Wrapped, seamed, or spliced type expansion joints are not acceptable. 10. Provide Type 316 stainless steel control rods. C. Minimum movement: 1. Axial compression: 2.25 inches. 2. Axial extension: 1.25 inches. 3. Lateral offset: 1 inch. D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Daniel Co., DanFLEX Model 101. 2. Mercer Rubber Co., Model ME for Rectangular, Model MI-9 for Round. 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 8 2.08 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Provide duct supports as indicated on the Drawings. B. Protect the duct from clamping force of strap hangers with a 1/8-inch thick layer of neoprene pad. C. When anchors are required, they shall be externally bonded to the duct. Drive screws or other penetrations of the duct linter are not permitted. D. When duct supports are not indicated on the Drawings provide supports and seismic bracing in accordance with the SMACNA Design Manual. 2.09 SHOP INSPECTION A. Each load of FRP duct or pipe shall be shop inspected during fabrication and prior to shipment. 1. Inspection shall be conducted by qualified third-party inspectors that have extensive experience in the design, manufacture, testing, and installation of all FRP duct and pipe. 2. The cost for third-party inspection shall be borne by the manufacturer. 3. The name, resume, and qualifications of the third-party inspector shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Acceptable inspection engineers shall be one of the following or equal: a. Fiberglass Structural Engineers, Inc. b. FEMech Engineering. 2.10 SHIPPING, SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. As specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. As specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements with additional requirements in Section 15500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All ductwork shall be fabricated and erected where indicated on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. Ductwork shall be rigidly supported and secured in an approved manner. A. Install ductwork parallel to walls and/or roof and vertically plumb. B. Bracing and vibration isolators shall be installed, where necessary, to eliminate vibration, rattle and noise. 1. Hangers shall be installed plumb and securely suspended from supplementary steel or inserts in concrete slabs. 178.24.200 05/2024 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 05 - 9 2. Lower ends of hanger rods shall be sufficiently threaded to allow for adequate vertical adjustment. 3. Building siding and metal decking shall not be used to hang ductwork. C. Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owners Designated Representative has approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. D. Wherever ducts are divided, the cross-sectional area shall be maintained. All such changes must be approved and installed as directed by the Owners Designated Representative or as approved on shop or erection drawings. E. Do not remove or alter factory installed duct reinforcing ribs except as required to accommodate duct alterations due to unexpected field conditions. 1. Notify the Owners Designated Representative prior to starting any field modifications involving ductwork structural reinforcing members. 2. Submit additional design calculations to demonstrate structural design integrity of ductwork and fittings requiring reinforcing modifications in the field. F. No ductwork or components shall be shipped prior to complete resin cure. G. Cover ductwork openings with tape, plastic, or sheet metal to reduce the amount of dust or debris which may collect in the system at each of the following times: 1. At the time of rough installation. 2. During storage on the construction site. 3. Until final start-up of the heating and cooling equipment. H. Before installation remove dust and debris from ducts. I. Install products in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Drawings indicate general routing only and shall be modified as necessary. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 04/2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 10 - 1 SECTION 23 31 10 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following: 1. Duct hardware. 2. Flexible connections. C. Refer to 23 05 93 for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings for each type of ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-1. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 10 - 2 3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Where possible, store accessories inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT HARDWARE: A. General: Provide duct hardware, typically of one manufacturer, for all items on project, for the following: 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test holes, cover, for instrument tests. Ventlok No. 699 closures shall be provided and installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co. 2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Extent of Work: Provide flexible connections between ductwork and equipment, such as at fan inlets and discharges, and at other places indicated on the drawings or called for by note or specification. B. Non-Corrosive Environment or Airstream: For system pressures up to 5” w.c, provide material of heavy waterproof woven glass fabric double coated with neoprene or Hypalon equivalent to “Ventglas” for interior locations and “Ventlon” for exterior locations, fabric not less than 3-1/4" wide clamped between strips of 24 gauge stainless steel or 20 gauge aluminum alloy. Material by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill. C. Corrosive Environments or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven fiberglass fabric coated with Teflon equivalent to “Ventel” by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill. By nature, the material is slippery and requires rigid clamping in the field installation. Install with the coated side to the corrosive air stream. Clamp the material into a stainless steel edging or hinge with a folded fabric edge. Be careful in securing the clamped fabric to the fan or duct as to not penetrate or disturb any protective coatings or surfaces. 178.24.200 04/2024 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 178.24.100 PAGE 23 31 10 - 3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES: A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leak proof performance. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings Label access doors in accordance with Division-23 section "Mechanical Identification". Cleaning: Clean factory finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 04/2024 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 37 00 - 1 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following: 1. Louvers. C. Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section. D. Refer to other Division-23 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Installer. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. 178.24.200 04/2024 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 37 00 - 2 B. Samples: 3 samples of each type of finish furnished. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawing for each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division-1. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 5. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAINABLE BLADE LOUVERS: A. Extent of Work: At air openings in the outside wall where indicated on drawings, install AMCA rated drainable stationary extruded aluminum 6" deep weather louvers with bird screens. B. Material: Blades shall be 6 inches deep with integral downspouts to drain the water from the louver blades. Stationary louvers shall pass 1000 fpm free area velocity with less than 0.15" static pressure drop and shall carry less than .03 ounces of water per square foot when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Install screens on interior face and louver. C. Finish system shall be 2.0-mil, PVF2 Kynar 500, formulated by a licensed formulator to 178.24.200 04/2024 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 37 00 - 3 contain 70 percent PVF resin and applied by a licensed applicator. 1. Epoxy prime coat shall be applied to exposed sides to a dry film thickness of approximately 0.2-mil. One coat of PVF color coating shall be applied to exposed sides to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 0.8-mil, for a total of 1.0-mil total coating. 2. The surface condition of this finish coat shall be 100 percent free of holidays, drip marks, scratches, roll marks, or abrasions that are visible from a distance of 5-feet in good light when in installed position. Surfaces shall be free of checking, crazing, peeling, or loss of adhesion. 3. Finish shall meet or exceed AAMA 2605. 4. Color shall be selected and approved by owner from manufacturer’s standard color selections. a. Color shall be uniform with no variation in shade, and louvers or accessories of different color batches will not be acceptable. b. The Owner reserves the option of changing this tentative color selection during the submittal process at no additional cost to Owner. D. Manufacturer: Louvers shall be equal to American Warming and Ventilating, Louvers and Dampers, Krueger, Ruskin, Cesco, NCA Manufacturing or U.S. Louvers. E. Contractor is required to coordinate louver size, flange type, and construction with structural and architectural openings to assure fit and appearance. Except for very large units, louvers shall be one piece. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended function. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 04/2024 PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT 178.24.100 PAGE 23 61 00 - 1 SECTION 23 61 00 PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All pertinent sections of Section 23 05 00 - General HVAC Requirements are a part of the work described in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section specifies: 1. Wall Mounted Air Conditioning Units 1.3 STANDARDS: A. Uniform Building Code/International Mechanical Code B. Local Codes and Ordinances C. State Pressure Vessel Regulations D. EPA Requirements. E. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. F. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in new Building Design. G. ARI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Equipment. H. ARI 360 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS/SUBMITTALS: A. Submit a list of all materials to be used indicating brand or source, type and service. B. Submit shop drawings for all equipment including shop drawing showing proposed sizes, capacities, accessories, manufacturer and model numbers, wiring diagrams, etc. 1.5 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION: A. The Piping Contractor for this work shall be licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the state where the work is performed. B. The Subcontractor shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Subcontractor. C. All workmen employed in the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders. 178.24.200 04/2024 PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT 178.24.100 PAGE 23 61 00 - 2 1.6 SCOPE OF THE WORK: A. Furnish and install all refrigeration equipment and related work to effect a complete installation. 1. Provide and install Refrigeration Equipment as indicated on the drawings. 2. Other work indicated on the drawings. 1.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: A. Purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner, leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and maintain the systems. B. Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to show proper operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique. 1.8 WARRANTIES: See Section 23 05 00. PART 2 – MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 WALL MOUNTED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (WAC-1 & 2) A. GENERAL: Provide self-contained, factory-assembled and tested, wall mounted, horizontal discharge supply and return, single-piece, 3 stage cooling unit with electric heat and full outside air economizer suitable for outdoor use. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R- 410A), and special features required prior to field start-up. B. PERFORMANCE: 1. See Equipment Schedule. C. UNIT CABINET: 1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge zinc-coated galvanized steel, bonderize and coated with baked enamel or satin beige polyester finish on all externally exposed surfaces and interior panels which shall allow it to withstand a minimum of 1000 hours of salt spray exposure per ASTM B117-03. 2. The fan cabinet interior shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2-in thick, closed cell foam insulation with acrylic or neoprene coating on the air side. 3. The evaporator cooling section shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2-in thick, 2 lb. closed cell foam insulation with acrylic or neoprene coating on the air side. 4. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing. 5. Cabinet shall include a sloped top and built-in mounting flanges. Slots or holes shall be provided in the unit to facilitate transporting unit to location of installation. 178.24.200 04/2024 PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT 178.24.100 PAGE 23 61 00 - 3 6. Unit shall have a factory-installed, sloped stainless steel condensate drain pan, providing a minimum 3/4 in. connection with both vertical and horizontal drains and shall comply with ASHRAE 62. 7. Unit shall have factory-installed filter access panel to provide filter access with tool-less removal. 8. Unit shall have standard single point power connection point. D. FANS: 1. Indoor blower (evaporator fans) shall be of the direct-driven, EC Motor Plenum fan. Impeller blades shall be made from aluminum with steel frame construction and shall be dynamically balanced. 2. Condenser fan shall be of the direct-driven propeller type and shall discharge air horizontally. E. COMPRESSOR: 1. The compressors shall be scroll type with one 2-stage compressor and one single stage compressor. F. COILS: 1. Evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes with all joints brazed. Coils shall be provided with a corrosive resistant coating. 2. Tube sheet openings shall be belled to prevent tube wear. 3. Evaporator coil shall be of the full-face active design. G. REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS: Each of the two refrigerant circuits shall include: 1. Refrigerant strainer. 2. Sight Glass. 3. Expansion Valve. 4. Service gauge connections on suction, discharge, and liquid lines. 5. Suction and liquid access valves. 6. Filter drier. H. FILTER SECTION: 1. Filter section shall consist of factory-installed low-velocity, throwaway, 2-in. thick, pleated filters of commercially available sizes (Farr 30-30 or equal). 178.24.200 04/2024 PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT 178.24.100 PAGE 23 61 00 - 4 2. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 300 fpm at nominal airflows. 3. Filters shall be accessible through an access panel with 'no-tool" removal. 4. Provide dirty filter indicator switch. I. CONTROLS AND SAFETIES: 1. Unit Controls: Furnish unit with factory wired on-board PLC and a remote mounted PGDx touchscreen temperature and humidity controller. Furnish unit with the optional Free Cooling Economizer and all associated controls. Furnish unit with optional factory wired electric heat package and all associated controls. 2. Safeties: a. Unit shall incorporate a solid-state compressor protector which provides anti- cycle reset capability at the space temperature controller, should any of the following standard safety devices trip and shut off compressor. 1) Compressor over temperature, over current. 2) Loss-of-charge/low-pressure switch with automatic reset. 3) Freeze-protection thermostat, evaporator coil. 4) High-pressure switch. The lockout protection shall be easily disconnected at the control board, if necessary. J. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single factory-predrilled location. The air conditioner shall have a factory installed disconnect. K. MOTORS: 1. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant passing through motor windings and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection. 2. Evaporative fan motor shall be electrically commutated with sealed, permanently lubricated, ball-bearings, temperature protection, soft start and an integrated PID controller. Maximum 1100 RPM. 3. Condenser-fan motor shall be totally enclosed, electrically commutated with sealed, permanently lubricated, ball-bearings, temperature protection, soft start and an integrated PID controller. Maximum 1100 RPM. 178.24.200 04/2024 PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT 178.24.100 PAGE 23 61 00 - 5 L. SPECIAL FEATURES: 1. Service: Air conditioning unit shall be equipped with hinged access panel for the filter, compressors(s), evaporator fan, and control box areas. Filter hinged access panels permit tool-less entry by removing and discarding screws. Each external hinged access panel shall be permanently attached to the air conditioning unit and equipped with a retainer for service convenience. The electrical control box, including the low voltage compartment, shall be accessible from the front of the air conditioner. 2. Fused disconnect switch: Provide fused disconnect switch factory-installed, internally-mounted. NEC and UL approved fused switch shall provide unit power shutoff. The control access door shall be interlocked with the fused disconnect. The disconnect switch must be in the OFF position to open the control box access door. Shall be accessible from outside the unit and shall provide power off lockout capability. 3. Furnish unit with factory supply and return grilles with brushed aluminum finish. M. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air conditioning unit from: a. Bard MEGA-TEC b. Engineer approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WALL MOUNTED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: A. General: Install unit where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including wall construction, wall openings and electrical as necessary to interface installation of units with other work. C. Access: Provide access space around units for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by the manufacturer. D. Support: Securely anchor units to the wall. 178.24.200 04/2024 PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT 178.24.100 PAGE 23 61 00 - 6 E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. F. Duct Connections: Refer to Division-23 Sections Air Distribution sections. Provide ductwork sleeves connecting to unit supply and return air openings as indicated on the drawings in preparation for insertion of unit supply air diffuser and return air grille. 3.2 DUCTWORK - GENERAL: A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by SMACNA "Duct Construction Manuals" for the appropriate pressure class, and with the ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment, 2016 edition, Chapter 19, Duct Construction. B. Sheet Metal: Fabricate ductwork sleeves from galvanized steel, in gauges corresponding to the SMACNA recommendations. C. Provide galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 120 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525. D. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. E. Ducts at Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" stainless steel angle iron which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron. Close openings between duct and structure. F. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for wall mounted air conditioning unit components. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 04/2024 TERMINAL ELEC. HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 76 00 - 1 SECTION 23 76 00 TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 Motors Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Systems, General Mechanical Requirements, and General Pipes and Fittings sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Types of terminal units required for project include the following: 1. Unit heaters, electric PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WASH DOWN TYPE ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (UH-1 & 2): A. General: Provide wash down type electric unit heaters in location as indicated, and of capacities, and style and having accessories as scheduled. B. Unit shall be complete factory assembled, wired and tested. Ready for installation and connection to electrical power source and control package. C. Electric unit heaters shall be provided with totally enclosed, corrosion-resistant, UL listed motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings, NEMA 4X enclosure, epoxy coated, aluminum fan blade. Single point power connection. Furnish with heavy duty hanging bracket. D. Heating elements and motor shall be enclosed in a round, heavy-gauge stainless steel shroud. E. Provide unit heaters with an adjustable stainless steel louvered air outlet grille, heavy gauge plate rear grille for protection against accidental contact with the fan blade. F. Provide with automatic temperature controls built into unit with field mounted thermostat, 40 degree to 100 degree temperature range, three position switch wired to control for on, standby and fan only settings, indicating light for when heating elements are energized. 24 volt transformer and control circuit. 178.24.200 04/2024 TERMINAL ELEC. HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 76 00 - 2 G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric unit heaters of one of the following: 1. Markel 2. Reznor 3. Indeeco 4. Ruffneck 5. Q-Mark 6. Raywall PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS: A. General: Install heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Locate heaters where indicated. C. Provide and install hangers and supports for heater. 3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING: A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets. B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 04/2024 POWER VENTILATORS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 1 SECTION 23 82 00 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. C. See Section 23 06 07 Motors, Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Work. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of power and gravity ventilator work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of power and gravity ventilators specified in this section include the following: 1. Centrifugal Rooftop Mounted Exhaust Fans. C. Refer to Division 23, Section 23 05 93 "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing" for balancing of power and gravity ventilators; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division-23 and 40 temperature control and instrumentation systems sections for control work required in conjunction with power and gravity ventilators; not work of this section. E. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between ventilators; and between ventilators and field installed control devices as shown in Division-26. Interlock wiring specified as factory installed is work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power and gravity ventilators, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 178.24.200 04/2024 POWER VENTILATORS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for power and gravity ventilators, including specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to power ventilators. Submit manufacturer's ladder type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and gravity ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-23. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. AMCA Compliance: Provide power ventilators which have been tested and rated in accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed. 3. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA standards. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFTOP MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FAN - UPBLAST (REF-1): A. General: Fans shall be spun aluminum, curb mounted, direct drive, upblast, with air flow capacity as scheduled, centrifugal exhaust ventilator. B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. Fan shall be provided with a phenolic coating for all components exposed to the airstream. C. The fans shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. D. Fans shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. 178.24.200 04/2024 POWER VENTILATORS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 3 E. Provide fans with a wind band or discharge baffle having a rolled bead for added strength. F. Provide fans with a two piece cap having stainless steel quick release latches to provide access into the motor compartment without the use of tools. G. An integral conduit chase shall be provided into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. H. The motor, bearings and drive shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust air stream. Lifting lugs shall be provided to help prevent damage from improper lifting. I. The fan wheels shall be non-sparking centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100 percent aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic inlet cone. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96. J. The Motor shall be an electronically commutated motor rated for continuous duty and furnished either with internally mounted potentiometer speed controller or with leads for connection to 0-10 VDC external controller. K. Accessories: 1. Provide fans with galvanized wire insect screen on fan outlets and backdraft dampers. L. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wall mounted centrifugal exhaust fans of one of the following: 2. Acme 3. Cook 4. Pace 5. Greenheck 6. Penn 7. Twin-City PART 3 - GENERAL 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power ventilators are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF POWER VENTILATORS AND FANS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install power ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that products serve the intended function. 178.24.200 04/2024 POWER VENTILATORS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 4 B. Coordinate ventilator work with work of roofs, walls and ceilings, as necessary for proper interfacing. C. Ductwork: Refer to Divisions-23 sections 23 31 00 "Ductwork" and 23 31 10 “Ductwork Accessories.” Connect ducts to ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. E. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers for free operation. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: After installation ventilators have been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Cleaning: Clean factory finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 04/2024 AIR FILTERS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 90 00 - 1 SECTION 23 90 00 AIR FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23, Section 23 05 00 General HVAC Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of air cleaning work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of air cleaning equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Air Filters. a. Extended surface self-supporting. C. Refer to Division-23 duct accessories section for duct access door work required in conjunction with air filters; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air cleaning equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including, dimensions, weights, required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated air flow, efficiency and test method, fire classification, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for filter rack assemblies indicating dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of filter and rack required. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-23. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety performance of air filter units. 178.24.200 04/2024 AIR FILTERS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 90 00 - 2 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for method of testing, and for recording and calculating air flow rates. 3. ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 pertaining to test and performance of air filter units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR FILTERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, replaceable filter media and holding frames shall be a product of one of the following: 1. American Air Filter 2. Continental 3. Farr B. Holding Frames: Suitable for filters specified. Frame and brace into solid assemblies. 1. May be side access, factory fabricated type. C. Replaceable pleated media type filters. 1. Pleated, medium efficiency in a cardboard holding frame, 2" or 4" thick as scheduled, 0.32" s.p. maximum initial pressure drop at 500 feet/minute, to change out at 0.50". U.L. Class 2, 25-30% efficiency, 90-95% arrestance per ASHRAE Standard 52-76. Typical selection for 300 feet/min, or less. 2. Equivalent to Farr 30/30. D. Startup Set: 1. Install a set of filters immediately upon fabrication of any filter bank. Install scheduled set of filters at completion of construction at the time of testing and balancing. E. Replacement Set: 1. Furnish a second set of filters for each unit to be turned over to Owner as initial replacement stock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which air filters and filter housings will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with installation requirements as specified elsewhere in these specifications pertaining to air filters housing/casings, and associated supporting devices. 178.24.200 04/2024 AIR FILTERS 178.24.100 PAGE 23 90 00 - 3 B. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated, and where shown; in accordance with air filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to ensure that filters comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. C. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated, in relation to other work. Position unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames securely to substrate. D. Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air handling unit work, as necessary to interface installation of filters properly with other work. E. Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. F. Install air filter gage pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate air pressure drop through air filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages if any, for proper readings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Operate installed air filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 178.24.200 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 1 SECTION 26 29 23 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, place in operation and field test a variable frequency drive. B. The adjustable frequency controller shall be a flux vector sine-wave, pulse width modulated (PWM) design. A modulation method which incorporates “gear changing” is not acceptable. The final responsibility of the completed drive system is that of the manufacturer. Qualified system integration will be by manufacturers approved and should use methods and procedures approval in writing by the VFD manufacturer prior to shipping the drive system to customer site. One manufacturer shall provide all drives systems under this contract. The drive systems shall be manufactured within the United State of America to alleviate concerns of future spare part availability and technical support. All drive systems shall be purchased and furnished by the CONTRACTOR. C. Drives shall be configured with harmonics filtration to meet the requirements which follow. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE STANDARDS A. The entire VFD system as described herein shall be assembled and factory tested to assure a properly coordinated system. B. Codes: Provide equipment is full accordance with the latest applicable rules, regulations, and standards of: 1. Local Laws and Ordinances. 2. State and Federal Laws. 3. National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). C. The complete drive system shall be UL listed. D. The manufacturer will have a minimum of 12 years experience in Integrated Bi-polar Transistor technology. 1.3 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 2 A. US Drives model D4-0250N1. Only if model D4-0250N1 accounts for elevation deration. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform in all respect to this section. B. Submittals shall be prepared specifically for this project by the VFD manufacturer. For this specific application submittal package will be due three weeks upon request. C. Submittal information shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Equipment dimensions, including stub-up locations, shipping split and shipping weights. 2. Approval electrical drawings, termination drawings and component location diagrams. 3. Manufactures equipment specification. 4. Catalog cut sheets of major components. 5. Spare parts list, per Paragraph 3.03. 6. Certifications, including: a. Warranty, per section 1.04 b. Efficiencies, per section 2.02. A.1. c. Harmonic distortion analysis study, per section 2.01E. 1.5 WARRANTY A. All equipment furnished under this section shall be warranted for all parts and labor by the CONTRACTOR and the original equipment manufacturer for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of startup. B. The manufacturer shall meet the quality and program requirements of ISO 9001. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Any modification to the standard product required to meet this specification shall be performed by the VFD manufacturer or approved systems integrator only. Distributors and panel manufactures changes to the VFD products are specifically disallowed. 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 3 B. The VFD system shall consist of harmonic filter unit, input rectifier-grade phase shifting transformer, converter section, output inverter and control logic. All components shall be wired and tested together as a complete system. The labor and materials for field interconnection of the system are to be provided by the VFD manufacturer. Each drive shall be designed for stand alone operation. Multiple drive units shall not utilize shared components. The drive shall be housed in a free standing, front accessible, general purpose indoor enclosure rated NEMA 12, gasketed, with fans and filters. Cabinets shall be single or multi-bay, sheet steel with hinged doors. Doors will have concealed hinges with lockable through-the-door handle operator mechanism. Provisions shall be made for top or bottom entry/exit of incoming line power cables, outgoing load cables and control wiring. All VFD’s shall include DC link reactors. C. Each VFD shall have a molded case, circuit breaker type main power disconnect switch, with an external operating handle. The circuit breaker and the drive unit shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity and shall be labeled in accordance with UL Standard 489. D. The following safety features shall be standard on all drives: 1. Provisions to padlock main disconnect handle in the “OFF” position. 2. Mechanical interlock to prevent opening cabinet door with disconnects in the “ON” position, or moving disconnect to the “ON” position while the unit door is open. 3. Auxiliary contact on main disconnects to isolate control when fed from external source. 4. Barriers and warning signs on terminals that are energized with the power disconnect “OFF”. E. Any VFD over 60 horsepower shall meet all requirements as outlined in the most recent adopted edition of IEEE 519 for each individual and total harmonic voltage and current distortion and as indicated in this specification. As per Table 10.2 of IEEE 519, individual or simultaneous operation of the VFD’s shall not add more than 3% total voltage harmonic distortion while operating at full load and speed from the utility source, or more than 5% while operating from a standby generator (if applicable). 1. The VFD manufacturer cannot predict or be responsible for pre-existing voltage distortion on the line or distribution from sources supplied by others. Maximum input voltage unbalance shall be .5% as defined in NEMA MG1 section 14.35.2. 2. As per Table 10.3 of IEEE 519, maximum allowable total harmonic current demand distortion limits for each VFD operation at full load and speed shall not exceed 5% as calculated and measured at the point of common coupling Isc/II>20). 3. The point of common coupling for all harmonic calculation and field measurement for both voltage and current distortion shall be defined as the main bus feeding each drive. 4. The short circuit current used for harmonic calculations shall be defined as the total full load current with all VFD’s operating multiplied by twenty. Example (5) 100 HP VFD’s Full load current = 5 x 126 amps = 630 amps. Short circuit current = 20x 630 amps = 12600 amps. 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 4 5. If harmonic filters are required to meet these requirements, the VFD manufacturer must provide as a minimum 5th, 7th, and 11th harmonics filters and is responsible for the design and manufacturing of the filters. The vendor must supply cabling and installation for the filters. The filters are to be provided with a separate contactor such that the VFD can operate in the event of a filter failure. Failure of a filter shall not cause the entire drive system to shutdown. F. Harmonic compliance shall be verified with onsite field measurement of both the voltage and current harmonic distortion on the main bus of the VFD termination without the VFD in operation. A recording of harmonic analysis displaying individual and total harmonic currents and voltage must be utilized. G. In order to achieve the IEEE519 results, in no condition or situation will the VFD and its harmonics mitigation ever introduce a leading power factor. Provided the result can be guaranteed, the following methods are acceptable. 1. Provide an active-front end VFD 2. Provide an active harmonic filter (separate or integral) 3. Provide an 18-pulse transformer 4. Provide a passive harmonic filter H. VFD system shall maintain a 95 minimum true power factor throughout the entire speed range. I. Displacement power factor shall be .95 percent or higher throughout the entire operating speed range, measured at drive input terminals. J. For motors over 250hp, the drive shall include an RTD monitoring module which shall monitor 8 – 100 ohm platinum RTD’s in the motor. The RTD module shall provide a trip and an alarm contact. The RTD alarm contact shall cause an alarm light to illuminate on the VFD front panel. The RTD Trip contact shall cause the VFD to trip, and send the trip status to the PLC. The alarm and trip contacts shall be settable and adjustable to variable trip and alarm settings. K. For Motors under 250hp, the drive shall monitor overtemperature using temperature monitoring equipment to cause a trip and alarm. L. Variable Frequency Drive Ratings: 1. The minimum drive efficiency for NEMA 12 enclosed drive shall be 95.0 percent or better at motor base speed and rated torque. Losses shall include all control power and cooling system losses associated with the drive as well as the input phase shifting transformer. 2. Input Power rating shall be 400-460VAC, plus 10 percent, minus 10 percent, 3 phase, 60 Hz, plus 2, minus 2 Hertz. 3. The voltage ride through of the VFD shall be capable of sustaining continued operation with a 40% dip in normal line voltage. Output speed may decline only if current limit rating of VFD is exceeded. 4. Power loss ride through of the VFD shall be capable of a minimum of 3 cycles loss. 5. The output power shall be HP, 460 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz, per motor nameplate FLA at installed altitude plus service factor of 25%. 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 5 6. The operating ambient Temperature -10 to 40oC (14 to 104oF). 7. The storage temperature shall be -20 to 60oC (4 to 140oF). 8. The relative operating humidity shall be 0 to 95% Non-Condensing. 9. The site operating vibration condition shall be acceleration at 0.6 G maximum (10-55 Hz). Amplitude at 0.1mm maximum (50-100 Hz). 10. Drives shall be sized/de-rated to operate at full load at an elevation of 4700 ft. 11. Power unit rating bases shall be 100% rated current continuous and 120% for one minute at rated temperature. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION A. The controller shall produce an adjustable AC voltage / frequency output. It shall have an output voltage regulation to maintain correct output V/Hz ratio despite incoming voltage variations. B. The controller shall have a continuous output current rating of 100% of the motor nameplate rating as a minimum. C. The converter section will incorporate three distinct diode bridges configured in a series connection. The series connection will provide continued balance of the bridges to insure the harmonic litigation remains consistent throughout the life of the drive. The input to the diode bridges will be a full phase shifting isolation transformer with multiple secondaries. The variable frequency drive system shall also include a filter network and a transistorized inverter section. The drive manufacturer will also manufacture the Transistors used in the inverter section of the drive to reduce harmonics to flow back to the incoming power source. D. The inverter output shall be generated by to be Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT’s) with a PIV rating of 1200 volts minimum. The VFD shall not induce excessive power losses in the motor. The worst case RMS motor lines current measured at rated speed, torque and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for a pure sin wave operation. E. The controller (s) shall be suitable for operating standard NEMA Design-B induction squirrel-cage motor having a 1.15 service factor. The drive can be located up to 300 feet from the motor without requiring special cabling or a separate motor protection devices. Motor nameplate information shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR, prior to contract award to the VFD manufacture to properly size the inverter. In the future, is shall be possible to substitute any standard inverter rate motor (equivalent house power, voltage and RPM) in the field. Output filters shall be installed for motors over 300 foot from VFD. F. The control logic section shall be fully digital and not require analog adjustment pots or fixed selector resistors. A power failure will not necessitate a reload of any drive parameter or configuration. 2.3 BASIC FEATURES 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 6 A. The door of each adjustable speed drive system shall include an operator interface station (OIT/HMI) and key pad with a manual speed device. Each drive shall have operator interface devices at a minimum as called out in the drawings. B. For safety the drive will require manual restart for customer programmable faults. The fault displays shall include over current, over voltage, heat sink overheat, load side short circuit, load-side ground fault, inverter overload, stator over-current during start- up, load-side over current during start-up, EEPROM error, RAM error, ROM error, communication error, (Dynamic braking resistor over current), Under voltage, low current, over torque, lose of phase, and motor overload. C. The door mounted operator interface shall be capable of controlling the VFD and setting the drive parameters. The key pad shall have the following programming features: 1. The digital display must present all diagnostic messages and parameters values in English engineering units when accessed. 2. The digital interface keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact numerical settings in engineering units. A plain English user menu (rather than codes) shall be provided in software in nonvolatile memory as a guide to parameter setting and reset table in the field through the key pad. The drive set up parameters must be able to be transferred to new boards to reprogram spare boards. 3. The VFD shall have the capabilities of communicating via network to the PLC. All status shall be communication to the PLC including 3 phase voltage, 3 phase current, speed, status alarms, errors, etc. 4. Programmable output relay contacts and inputs shall be rated for 250 VAC, 2 Amps. A separate 24 VDC power supply (50 mA) shall be available to control exterior control devices. Programmable analog output signals shall be available to meet system requirements. Programmable analog input speed signals shall be available to accept a speed command. 5. The principle output frequency shall be programmable from 0-400 Hz and acceleration / deceleration from .1 to 6000 seconds. The PWM carrier frequency shall be adjustable from .5 to 15 kHz and shall be self adjusting. 6. The VFD shall have internal to the drive a proportional gain; integral gain anti- hunting gain, lag time constant and PID error limit adjustments. This shall be programmable through the key pad. 2.4 ENCLOSURE A. All VFD components shall be factory mounted and wired on a dead front, grounded indoor NEMA Type 12, gasketed enclosure. It shall be suitable for mounting on a concrete house keeping pad. The steel enclosure shall have a minimum of two-layer of primer and one-layer of industrial finished Sherwin Williams Precision enamel paint or equal. B. A forced air cooling system will automatically start and stop as necessary to extend the life of the fan. 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 7 C. VFD systems shall be stand alone system with an integral through the door mounted disconnect switch operator. D. The dimensions of the VFD enclosure shall be maximum 36” wide, 24” + 8” depth, 90” height. 2.5 PROTECTIVE FEATURES AND CIRCUITS A. The VFD shall have the following additional protective features that will protect against damage to the motor, load conductor, contactors or solid state soft starts and the VFD internal devices and electronics. B. Three phase short circuit on the VFD output terminals. C. Losses of input power due to opening VFD input disconnect device or loss of utility power during VFD operation. D. A loss of one (1) phase of the input power shall cause the drive to trip off protecting the drive systems electronics. E. The VFD will run without connection to the motor load. F. The VFD shall sense an output short circuit that may occur during operation. G. The key pad display shall provide a minimum of the last 50 system faults. H. There shall be stall protection on an overload condition with inverse time overcurrent trip. Current limits shall be adjustable from 10 to 215% of the drive current. 2.6 PARAMETER SETTINGS A. The following system configuring setting shall be provided and field adjustable, without exception, through the keypad/display unit. Except for motor nameplate data, all parameters must be adjustable while the processor is on-line and the drive is running. 1. Motor Nameplate Data. 2. Motor Full Load Amps. 3. Motor Frequency. 4. Number of poles. 5. Full Load RPM’s. 6. Motor Voltage. 7. Operating current limits. – Min/Max. 8. VFD Configuration Parameters. 9. Independent accel/decel rates. 10. Min./Max. speed (Frequency 11. Forward or Reverse operation. 12. Catch a spinning load selection. 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 8 13. Preset Speed capabilities. 14. Volts per Hertz ratio. 15. No load / Full Load boost. 16. Over current trip selection. 17. Frequency jump selection. 18. Programmable meter output signals (Hz. Speed, RPM, Voltage, Torque, PID feed back, input/output power, and DC bus voltage. B. Automatic Control 1. 4-20 mA input control signal. 2. PID internal or external set point capabilities. 3. Programmable preset speed operational run conditions. 4. Automatic load reduction during overload condition or soft stall. 5. Programmable loss of signal control: Stop, maintain speed or default to preset speed or set point. C. All drive setting adjustable and operation parameters shall be restored in a parameter log which allows minimum and maximum points as well as the present set values. This parameter log shall be accessible via a RS-232 or RS485 serial port or other communications method as well as on the keypad or internal to the drive. D. The drive shall have the following inputs/output features that will provide control and monitoring of the VFD. The analog outputs shall be isolated as required by this specification. 1. Three programmable analog outputs. 2. Two programmable analog inputs. The 4-20mA analog input speed reference signal will be galvanically isolated. Calibration adjustments shall be provided by the keypad. 3. 4-groups of 8 pattern runs or 32 pattern runs shall be available. 4. Three programmable digital output (form C, dry contact relays) 5. One potential pot input (three wire control) +10 V, wiper and common, if specified in drawing. 6. System control program providing built–in drive control or application specific configuration capabilities. 7. Input / output function shall match those indicated in the drawings. 8. Minimum / maximum dry contact output. 2.7 DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES AND FAULT HANDLING A. The VFD shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital diagnostic system that monitors its own control functions and displays faults and operating conditions. 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 9 B. A “Fault Log” shall be accessible through the keypad digital illustrations in English. The display shall be capable of illustrating 50 past faults. Optional output shall be through the serial port link. All drive possible fault conditions will be accessible through the fault log. 2.8 DRIVE OPTIONS A. For drives located more then 300 feet from motor, the drive shall be modified to include a factory or SI wired output line reactor. B. Information included elsewhere: 1. Drive feed location – See Drawings. 2. Drive overall dimensions allowed – See Drawings. 3. Additional control information – See Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTING A. The drives will be completely assembled, wired, and tested in the United States of America. The following tests will be performed: 1. The manufacturer shall use the ISO-9001 standards in the purchase, engineering, manufacturing and testing of the VFD system. 2. Upon completion of manufacture and assembly, the drives shall be subjected to a complete factory test to demonstrate compliance with specified features and characteristics of the specification. The purchaser at his option shall be able to witness factory testing of his unit, with factory coordination. 3. The testing procedure shall be the manufacturer’s standard procedure (except for loss of phase) to assure maintenance free service. The buyer shall be given a 5 day notice prior to the start of factory testing for the buyer's representative to witness the testing. 4. All equipment, devices, instrumentation, and personnel required to perform the factory tests shall be supplied by the manufacturer. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, the seller shall upon request submit two (2) certified copies of the test report to the buyer. Component failure during testing will require repeating any test associated with the failure or modified components to demonstrate proper operation. 5. A loss of each phase testing shall be conducted at the factory to guaranty the safe and orderly shutdown of the drive under load. These tests shall conclude that the drive will not fail its electronic circuits or causes sever over heating of the bridges. These tests shall not limit the life of the drive system. There are no exceptions to this test. This test shall be performed and test reports provided to the ENGINEER prior to installation of the drive system package. 3.2 STARTUP AND FIELD TESTING 06/2024 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 29 23 - 10 A. The VFD manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory trained technician for startup assistance, programming and testing. Verification of the VFD input harmonics voltage and current distortion limits specified must be verified as part of the start-up and acceptance. If harmonics distortion requirements are not met, it is the responsibility of the VFD supplier to meet these specifications at the manufacturer’s expense. Meg-ohm testing will be done to the load conductors and motor to verify condition of the equipment prior to startup. The VFD manufactures shall certify the VFD and motor system as compatible. UL508 technicians shall not be allowed to perform startup procedures. B. A 10% payment retention will be released upon factory field test verification of harmonic specifications requirements and final test report and acceptance. C. Spare Parts 1. The following spare parts shall be furnished. The net price per item shall be provided with the request for proposal. Each spare part shall be package and identified by part number and type for long term customer storage. a. Three of each type of fuse rated 480 Volts or less. b. Two of each type of converter power semi-conductor. c. Two of each type of inverter power semi-conductor. d. One of each type of control board, gate firing board and communication board. e. One key pad assembly. f. OR Replacement VFD for items b. through e. g. Five of each type of panel lamp. h. Three of each size MOV’s. END OF SECTION 06/2024 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 35 53 - 1 SECTION 263553 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 1.01 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish and install the Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings, and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. To maximize performance and reliability and to obtain the lowest possible let-through voltages, the ac surge protection shall be integrated into electrical distribution equipment such as switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, busway (integrated within bus plug), or motor control centers. Refer to related sections for surge requirements in: 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 262418 – Switchboards – Low Voltage 2. Section 262417 – Distribution Panelboards – Low Voltage 3. Section 262416 – Branch Circuit Panelboards - Low Voltage (Commercial Metering) 1.03 REFERENCES 1. SPD units and all components shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards A. ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition or later B. ANSI/UL 1283 5th Edition or later (type 2 applications) C. IEEE C62.41.1 D. IEEE C62.41.2 a. IEEE C62.43-2005 E. IEEE C62.45-2002 F. IEEE C62.48-2005 G. IEEE C62.62-2010 H. UL 96A I. NFPA 780 1.04 SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL 1. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: A. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition or later listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Compliance may be in the form of a file number that can be verified on UL’s website www.ul.org, the website should contain the following information at a minimum: model number, SPD Type, system voltage, phases, modes of protection, Voltage Protection Rating (VPR), and Nominal Discharge Current (In). 2. Where applicable the following additional information shall be submitted to the engineer: PART 1 - GENERAL 06/2024 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 35 53 - 2 A. Descriptive bulletins B. Product sheets 1.05 SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION 1. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: A. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Section 1.04 and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS 1. The manufacturer of the electrical distribution equipment shall be the manufacturer of the SPD within the electrical distribution equipment. 2. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 14001 and ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 3. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of twenty-five (25) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 4. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2011/65/EU and have a visible label showing compliance. 5. The SPD shall be UL 1449 current edition listed, 20 kA nominal discharge current, Type 1 or Type 2 for use in UL 96A systems. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One (1) copy of manufacturer’s instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each SPD shipped. 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1. Shall match the manufacture of the equipment protected. 2. Square D is not an acceptable manufacturer for this project. 3. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2.02 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL 4. Electrical Requirements PART 2 - GENERAL 06/2024 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 35 53 - 3 A. Unit Operating Voltage – Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. B. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) – The MCOV shall not be less than 115% of the nominal system operating voltage. C. The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards. End of life mode to be open circuit. Unit with end of life short-circuit mode are not acceptable. D. Unit shall operate without the need for an external overcurrent protection device, and be listed by UL as such. Unit must not require external overcurrent protective device or replaceable internal overcurrent protective devices for the UL Listing. E. Protection Modes – The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical system being utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the following table: Protection Modes Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G Wye ● ● ● ● Delta N/A ● ● N/A Single Split Phase ● ● ● ● High Leg Delta ● ● ● ● A. Nominal Discharge Current (In) – All SPDs applied to the distribution system shall have a 20kA In rating regardless of their SPD Type (includes Types 1 and 2) or operating voltage. SPDs having an In less than 20kA shall be rejected. B. ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) – The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition VPR for the device shall not exceed the following: Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 L-N; L-G; N-G 700 1200 1500 L-L 1200 2000 3000 2. SPD Design F. Maintenance Free Design – The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable single-mode modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted. 06/2024 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 35 53 - 4 G. Balanced Suppression Platform – The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules shall not be accepted. H. Electrical Noise Filter – Each Type 2 unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. Products unable able to meet this specification shall not be accepted. a. Type 2 units with filtering shall conform to UL 1283 5th Edition b. Type 1 units shall not contain filtering or have a UL 1283 5th Edition Listing. I. Internal Connections – No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. J. Monitoring Diagnostics – Each SPD shall provide the following integral monitoring options: a. Protection Status Indicators - Each unit shall have a green / red solid- state indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each phase. i. For wye configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-N and L-G modes. Wye configured units shall also contain an additional green / red solid-state indicator light that reports the status of the protection elements and circuitry in the N-G mode. SPDs that indicate only the status of the L-N and L-G modes shall not be accepted. ii. For delta configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-G and L-L modes iii. The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate that damage has occurred on the respective phase or mode. All protection status indicators must indicate the actual status of the protection on each phase or mode. If power is removed from any one phase, the indicator lights must continue to indicate the status of the protection on all other phases and protection modes. Diagnostics packages that simply indicate whether power is present on a particular phase shall not be accepted. a. Remote Status Monitor (optional) – The SPD must include Form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of its status. Both the NO and NC contacts shall change state under any fault condition. b. Audible Alarm and Silence Button (optional) – The SPD shall contain an audible alarm that will be activated under any fault condition. There shall also be an audible alarm silence button used to silence the audible alarm after it has been activated. c. Surge Counter (optional) – The SPD shall be equipped with an LCD display that indicates to the user how many surges have occurred at the location. 06/2024 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 35 53 - 5 The surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 ± 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard, allowing the surge counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall contain a mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a single, short-duration button press. In order to prevent accidental resetting, the surge counter reset button shall be depressed for a minimum of 2 seconds in order to clear the surge count total. i. The ongoing surge count shall be stored in non-volatile memory. If power to the SPD is completely interrupted, the ongoing count indicated on the surge counter’s display prior to the interruption shall be stored in non-volatile memory and displayed after power is restored. The surge counter’s memory shall not require a backup battery in order to achieve this functionality. B. Thermal MOV Protection The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. These self-protected MOVs shall have a thermal protection element integrated with the MOV and a mechanical disconnect with arc quenching capabilities in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal protection assembly shall disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition. Fully Integrated Component Design – All of the SPD’s components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. The use of plug in single-mode modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality shall not be accepted. K. Safety Requirements The SPD shall minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no single- mode plug in user serviceable / replaceable parts and shall not require periodic maintenance. SPDs containing items such as replaceable single- mode plug in modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted. a. SPDs designed to interface with the electrical assembly via conductors shall require no user contact with the inside of the unit. Such units shall have any required conductors be factory installed. 2.03 SYSTEM APPLICATION 5. The SPD applications covered under this section include distribution and branch panel locations, busway, motor control centers (MCC), switchgear, and switchboard assemblies. All SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments. 6. Surge Current Capacity – The minimum surge current capacity the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table: 06/2024 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 35 53 - 6 Minimum surge current capacity based on ANSI / IEEE C62.41 location category Category Application Per Phase Per Mode C Service Entrance Locations (Switchboards, Switchgear, MCC, Main Entrance) 250 kA 125 kA B High Exposure Roof Top Locations (Distribution Panelboards) 160 kA 80 kA A Branch Locations (Panelboards, MCCs, Busway) 120 kA 60 kA 2.04 LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS 3. The SPD application covered under this section includes lighting and distribution panelboards. The SPD units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B environments. A. The SPD shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs, sub-feed lugs, and sub- feed breaker options. B. SPDs shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main breaker. SPDs installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately following the incoming main lugs. C. The panelboard shall be capable of re-energizing upon removal of the SPD. D. The SPD shall be integral to the panelboard and connected directly to the bus. Alternately, an integral SPD can be connected to a circuit breaker for disconnecting purposes if a disconnect is required. E. The SPD shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the manufacturer of the panelboard. F. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard. G. The complete panelboard including the SPD shall be UL67 listed. 2.05 SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARD, MCC AND BUSWAY REQUIREMENTS H. The SPD application covered under this section is for switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and busway locations. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments. I. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchgear, switchboard, MCC, or busway J. The SPD shall be factory installed integral to the switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and/or bus plug at the assembly plant by the original equipment manufacturer K. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bar. L. The SPD shall be connected through a disconnect (30A circuit breaker or as recommended by the manufacturer). The disconnect shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD and shall be kept as short as possible. 06/2024 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 26 35 53 - 7 M. The SPD shall be integral to switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and/or bus plug as a factory standardized design. N. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 2.06 SERVICE ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS O. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and designed for applications within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments.EXECUTION 2.07 EXAMINATION 2.08 FACTORY TESTING 7. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA, IEEE, and UL standards. 2.09 INSTALLATION 4. The installation of the SPD shall be factory installed integral to the distribution equipment. The Contractor shall install all distribution equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations, applicable electrical codes and the contract drawings. 2.10 WARRANTY 8. The manufacturer shall provide a ten (10) year warranty (15 year warranty with registration) that covers replacement of the complete unit from the date of shipment against any SPD part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or local electrical code. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 1 SECTION 31 05 19 GEOSYNTHETICS PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This Section covers the manufacturing and installation of geosynthetics. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 31 22 00 Site Grading Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines Section 33 46 16 Sub-Drainage System Section 33 16 00 Underground Water Storage Reservoir REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) B16.1/ASTM D 751 Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics ASTM D 1777 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials ASTM D 3786 Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics - Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method ASTM D 4533 Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles ASTM D 4632 Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles ASTM D 4751 Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile ASTM D 4833 Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products ASTM D 5034 Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test) ASTM D 5035 Standard Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method) ASTM D 5261 Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Quality Control Certificates shall be provided at a minimum frequency of one (1) per every hundred thousand (100,000) square feet of geosynthetics produced consecutively, 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 2 and which is supplied to the project. These certificates shall be supplied only for the individual rolls of geosynthetics sampled and tested by the Manufacturer or his representative. An individual Quality Control Certificate shall be provided for each roll of geosynthetics provided to the project, which was not produced consecutively within the hundred thousand (100,000) square foot lot. Quality Control Certificates shall be submitted two (2) weeks prior to installation of geosynthetics and shall state that the geosynthetics meets the requirements of these specifications for: Mass per Unit Area Grab Tensile Strength Mullen Burst Strength Equivalent Opening Size Geosynthetics shall not be accepted and/or incorporated into the project without the approved quality control documentation. Certification stating that all geosynthetics is furnished by one manufacturer shall be submitted two (2) weeks prior to installation. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Storage and handling of the geosynthetics shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. During shipment, handling and storage, the geosynthetics shall be protected from ultraviolet light exposure, precipitation, or other inundation, mud, dirt, dust, puncture, cutting or any other damage or deleterious conditions. To that effect, geosynthetics rolls shall be shipped and stored in relatively opaque and watertight wrappings. An opaque tarp shall be placed over all rolls where the outer wraps are removed or damaged and where the geotextile is exposed. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the replacement of damaged or unacceptable materials at no cost to OWNER. Storage of Materials: A storage area shall be provided on site by OWNER. The storage of geosynthetic materials shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR until the completed installation is accepted by ENGINEER. Damaged Geosynthetics: Damaged geosynthetic materials shall be repaired, if possible, in accordance with these specifications, or shall be replaced at no additional cost to OWNER. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Geosynthetics shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as part of the various items to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS GEOSYNTHETICS (FILTER FABRIC) The geosynthetics shall be 10-ounce (or heavier) non-woven filter fabric. Geosynthetics shall be provided in rolls. 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 3 Each roll of geosynthetics shall be externally labeled or tagged to provide product identification sufficient for field determination as well as inventory and quality control purposes. Each roll shall be labeled with the name of manufacturer, roll number, physical dimensions (length and width) and the material type. Any roll of geosynthetics from which the labeling has been removed or has become illegible, shall not be used, but shall be removed from the site and replaced at the expense of CONTRACTOR. The geosynthetics shall be sampled, tested, and certified by the manufacturer for the following properties: MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC Property Specification ASTM Test Method Mass per Unit Area (min) 10.0 oz./S.Y. D-5261 Grab Tensile Strength (min) 250 lbs. D-4632 Elongation at Break 50 % D-4632 Tear Strength (min) 100 lbs D-4533 Apparent Opening Size (maximum U.S. Sieve size) 100 mesh D-4751 Filter Fabric shall be Mirafi 1100N by TenCate, 250NW by U.S. Fabrics, or approved equal. GEOSYNTHETIC (DRAINAGE COMPOSITE) Geosynthetic drainage composite materials shall be provided in rolls. The system shall have a polypropylene dimpled core bonded to a non-woven filter fabric. Each roll of geosynthetic material shall be externally labeled or tagged to provide product identification sufficient for field determination as well as inventory and quality control purposes. Each roll shall be labeled with the name of manufacturer, roll number, physical dimensions (length and width) and the material type. Any roll of geosynthetic material from which the labeling has been removed or has become illegible, shall not be used, but shall be removed from the site and replaced at the expense of CONTRACTOR. The geosynthetic materials shall be sampled, tested, and certified by the manufacturer for the following properties: 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 4 MATERIAL PROPERTIES PREFABRICATED DRAINAGE COMPOSITE Property Specification ASTM Test Method Mass per Unit Area (min) 15.8 oz./S.Y. D-5261 Grab Tensile Strength of Geotextile (min) 100 lbs. D-4632 Puncture of Geotextile 30 lbs D-4833 AOS of Geotextile (min) 70 D-4751 Thickness 0.40 inch D-1777 Compressive Strength of Core 15,000 psf D-1621 Flow (gal/min/ft) 17.5 D-4716 @ 4000 psf and i=1 Prefabricated Drainage Composite shall be J-DRain 420 by JDR Enterprises, Inc., Delta-Drain 6000 by Cosella-Dorken, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION DEPLOYMENT Prior to deployment, CONTRACTOR shall inspect each roll of geosynthetics to verify that the roll has a valid Quality Control Certificate and that has been previously approved by ENGINEER. Adjacent rolls shall be joined by overlapping the edges a minimum of twelve (12) inches. The overlap shall be glued, sewn or otherwise fastened or secured at intervals no greater than two feet along a line through the midpoint of the overlap. Additional fasteners shall be installed as necessary to prevent slippage of the geosynthetics regardless of location. CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect the geosynthetics during deployment for holes, tears or improperly formed geosynthetics. Defective areas shall be repaired or removed and replaced by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER. Smoking shall not be permitted on the geosynthetics. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide adequate loading (e.g., sand bags or similar items that will not damage the underlying geosynthetic) to prevent movement of the geosynthetics. Any damage to the geosynthetics shall be repaired at CONTRACTOR’s expense. The geosynthetics shall not be exposed to the sun and elements for more than 72 hours unless the filter fabric has ultraviolet inhibitors. Fabric with ultraviolet inhibitors shall not be exposed for a period in excess of the manufacturer’s recommendations, in which case manufacturer shall provide prior to product delivery. 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 5 Any damage to the geosynthetics during installation or any fabric that has been exposed to the sun or elements for longer than the 72 hours, or as specified by the manufacturer, shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to observe placement of geosynthetics. CONTRACTOR shall provide a daily inventory of all geosynthetics deployed to ENGINEER. REPAIRS Any holes, tears or defective areas in the geosynthetics shall be repaired by patching with same type of geosynthetics. The patch shall extend a minimum of twelve (12) inches in all directions beyond the area to be repaired. The patch shall be secured in place by gluing, sewing, or securing the fabric as per these specifications. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 GEOSYNTHETICS 178.24.200 PAGE 31 05 19 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 11 00 - 1 SECTION 31 11 00 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Work shall consist of removing and disposing of all trees; shrubs; brush; stumps; windfalls; roots; and other vegetation, including dead and decayed matter; and debris that exist within the designated construction limits, borrow areas, and soil stockpile areas and which are not specifically designated to remain. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Clearing: Clearing operations shall consist of cutting, removing and disposing of trees, shrubs, bushes, windfalls and other vegetation within the construction limits, borrow areas, and soil stockpile areas. All brush shall be cut off within six inches of the ground surface. B. Grubbing: Grubbing operations shall consist of removing and disposing of stumps, roots, debris deleterious materials, and other remains (such as organic and metallic materials) which if left in place would interfere with proper performance or completion of the contemplated work, would impair its subsequent use or form obstructions therein. Organic material from clearing or grubbing operations shall not be incorporated in fill or backfill. C. Stripping: Stripping operations shall consist of removing all soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation and topsoil to a minimum depth of six (6) inches from all areas that will receive fill or over all trenches in field or yard areas. 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement and payment for clearing, grubbing and stripping shall not be paid as a unit item, but considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum prices for the various items of the contract to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING A. All trees, stumps, shrubs, bushes, windfalls and other vegetation (except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed by ENGINEER to be left standing) shall be cut off to within six inches of the ground surface and shall be removed from the construction limits. Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage incident to clearing, grubbing, and construction operations by such means as the circumstances require. 3.2 GRUBBING A. All stumps, roots, debris, deleterious and other organic or metallic materials not suitable for foundations shall be removed completely from the construction limits, borrow areas 06/2024 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 11 00 - 2 and soil stockpile areas. Unless otherwise permitted by ENGINEER, stumps shall be removed completely. If any stumps are permitted to remain, they shall be cut off not more than six inches above the ground. 3.3 STRIPPING A. Soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation and topsoil shall be removed to a minimum depth of six (6) inches from all areas to receive fill from the area within lines 5 feet outside all foundation walls, over all trenches, and from beneath pavement and curb and gutter areas. The stripped material shall be deposited in such locations as are acceptable to ENGINEER. Topsoil shall be placed over designated areas to be landscaped, and over all trench areas (outside of paved areas). B. All areas to be sodded shall have a minimum thickness of 3 inches (or thicker if required elsewhere in these documents or on the Contract Drawings) of topsoil. 3.4 DISPOSAL A. Open burning of combustible materials will not be allowed. B. All trees, timber, stumps, roots, debris, shrubs, bushes, and other vegetation removed during the clearing and grubbing operations shall be removed from the project site and disposed of by CONTRACTOR subject to specific regulations imposed by laws and ordinances and in a manner that will not create a public nuisance nor result in unsightly conditions. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for acceptable disposition of the material as well as for any damages resulting from his disposal operations. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 1 SECTION 31 22 00 SITE GRADING PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This Work consists of site grading and related activities. RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing Section 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities & Environmental Controls Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures Section 32 11 23 Untreated Base Course REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of these Specifications to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) ASTM D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Site grading shall not be paid as a separate item but shall be paid as part of the items to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS EMBANKMENT MATERIAL Embankment materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487, the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) of CL, ML, SM, SC, SP or combinations of these materials. Embankment material shall be free from frozen lumps, rocks larger than 6 inches in the larger dimension, roots, trash, lumber, or organic material. Suitability of material for embankment in accordance with these criteria will be as determined by ENGINEER. It is not anticipated that CONTRACTOR will be required to furnish additional quantities of embankment fill material from off-site sources to supplement material available from on-site excavations. However, if required, CONTRACTOR shall not borrow materials from adjacent private or public lands without providing to OWNER written verification of such approval from the appropriate landowner or agency. CONTRACTOR shall be 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 2 responsible for all costs associated with providing additional quantities of embankment fill as may be required to complete the work described herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION GENERAL Grading shall produce uniform grades or slopes between spot elevations or contours shown. Areas of construction activity shall be left in condition of uniform grade, blending into pre-existing contours and concealing, as much as possible, evidence of construction activity by back dragging or raking to conceal tire marks. Revegetation shall not be performed until the subgrade is acceptable to OWNER. Unless otherwise directed by OWNER, all excess excavated materials shall be removed from the site and disposed of by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall restore stockpile area to pre-existing condition. SITE PREPARATION Prior to placement of embankment fill, loose or disturbed soil shall be removed and replaced with compacted structural fill, or disturbed soil shall be properly compacted. Prior to placement of embankment fill, the top 6-inches, or as noted on the Contract Drawings, of the subgrade shall be scarified and compacted to 95% minimum Modified Proctor density as determined by ASTM D1557. Embankment shall include the placement of materials to raise the existing grade to the established elevations indicated and the construction of driving surfaces. Embankment material shall be placed in no more than 8-inch loose lifts for heavy equipment, and 4-inch loose lifts for hand operated equipment. All embankment fill material shall be placed and compacted to 96% minimum Modified Proctor Density as determined by ASTM D1557. Embankment under roadways, to a minimum depth of four feet, shall be compacted to 96% minimum as determined by ASTM D1557. Where the moisture content is not suitable and/or sufficient compaction has not been obtained, the fill shall be reconditioned to an approved moisture content and recompacted to the minimum required compaction, unless recommended otherwise by the Soils Testing Agency, prior to placing any additional fill material. Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging for the placing and compacting of approved fill material in accordance with these Specifications. If the Soils Testing Agency should determine that CONTRACTOR is failing to meet the minimum requirements, CONTRACTOR shall stop operations and make adjustments as necessary to produce a satisfactorily compacted fill at no additional cost to OWNER. 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 3 GRADING The final grade of all completed areas shall be between plus and minus one-tenth (± 0.1) of a foot from the grade designated on the Contract Drawings. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 SITE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 00 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 FINE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 16 - 1 SECTION 31 22 16 FINE GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Fine Grading Work, includes, but is not limited to: 1. Perform fine grading work required to prepare site for landscape finish grading and soil preparation as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnishing of conditioner to stockpiled topsoil. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 32 91 13 Finish Grading and Topsoil Preparation 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)) 1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. There shall be no separate measurement and payment for this section. Full compensation for Fine Grading shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the Contract to which they relate. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Do not commence work of this Section until site grading tolerances are met. B. Surface Preparation: 06/2024 FINE GRADING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 22 16 - 2 1. Before placing topsoil, dig out weeds from planting areas by their roots and remove from site. Remove rocks larger than 1-inch in size and foreign matter such as building rubble, wire, cans, sticks, concrete, etc. 2. Remove imported paving base material present in planting areas down to natural sub-grade or other material acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. Interface with Other Work: Do not commence work of this Section until site grading tolerances are met. B. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot. 2. To allow for final finish grades of planting areas, sub-grade elevations in landscape areas, before placing topsoil are: a. Shrub Areas: 15 ½ inches below top of walk or curb. b. Sod Areas: 5 ½ inches below top of walk or curb. C. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots designated to remain. D. Distribute approved imported topsoil as required. Remove organic material, rocks, clods greater than 1-inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. E. Slope grade away from structure for 12 feet minimum from walls at slope of 1/2 inch in 12 inches minimum unless otherwise noted. Direct surface drainage in manner indicated on Drawings by molding surface to facilitate natural run-off of water. Fill low spots and pockets with specified fill material and grade to drain properly. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 1 SECTION 31 23 15 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This item shall consist of excavating all pipeline trenches to the lines and grades indicated on the Contract Drawings or as directed by ENGINEER in the field, and the backfilling of all pipeline trenches. Excavation shall include the removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered to the depths shown on the Contract Drawings, or as modified in the Field by ENGINEER. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 45 00 Quality Control & Materials Testing 3. Section 01 57 00 Temporary Construction Aids and Environmental Controls 4. Section 31 23 19 Dewatering 5. Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe 6. Section 33 05 11 HDPE Pressure Pipe 7. Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referred. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) 1. M 145 Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes 2. T 27 Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 3. T 88 Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils 4. T 96 Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine 5. T 180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 in (457 mm) Drop 6. T 191 Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Sand Cone Method 7. T 205 Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method 8. T 238 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 9. T 239 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 10. T 310 Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 2 C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. C 131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine 2. C 136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 3. D 422 Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils 4. D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3) 5. D 1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone method 6. D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3) 7. D 2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications 8. D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) 9. D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Degree of Compaction: Degree of compaction shall be expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557. B. Pipe Zone: That zone in an Excavation which supports, surrounds, and extends to 12 inches above the top of the pipe barrel. Specifically, 4 inches below the bottom (where rock, hard pan, boulders, etc. are encountered), 12 inches above the top of the pipe, and 1 foot laterally beyond both sides of the pipe, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. C. Trench Zone Backfill: That zone in an Excavation which begins 12 inches above the top of the pipe barrel and extends to the natural surface level or the finished grade indicated on the Plans. D. Unyielding Material: Unyielding material shall consist of rock and gravelly soils with stones greater than 12 inches in any dimension or as defined by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. E. Unstable Material: Unstable material shall consist of materials too wet to allow backfill compaction or to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structures. F. Rock: Solid mineral material which cannot be removed with equipment reasonably expected to be used in the Work without cutting, drilling or blasting. Minimum equipment size, in good running order, shall be similar to a Komatsu 300, Caterpillar 320 or 330, or equal. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 3 1. Copies of Field Density Test reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER or RPR at the beginning of each workday for the previous day’s testing of subgrades, embankments and backfill Materials. 2. Copies of all Laboratory Test Reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER or RPR within 24 hours of the completion of the test. 3. Submit gradations and proctors for Pipe Zone Material and Trench Zone Backfill. 4. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural calculations to support plan. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Unsuitable Weather Limitations: CONTRACTOR shall not place, spread, or roll any fill material during unsuitable weather conditions. CONTRACTOR shall not resume operations until moisture content of material is satisfactory. B. Weather Softened Subgrade: CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace at no additional cost to OWNER soft subgrade materials resulting from adverse weather conditions. C. Protection of Graded Areas: CONTRACTOR shall protect all graded areas from traffic and erosion and shall keep these areas free of trash and debris. Work required to repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas shall be completed to specified tolerances at CONTRACTOR’s expense. D. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: All areas compacted to required specifications that become disturbed by subsequent construction operations or weather conditions shall be scarified, moisture conditioned, and re-compacted to the required density prior to further construction. E. Grading: the final compacted surface of base course shall not vary more than 1/4 inch above or below design grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stabilization Material: Stabilization material shall consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and gradation. The material shall be free from vegetation matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter and shall conform to the following gradation when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27 or ASTM C 136. 1. Coarse material shall be crushed or washed and fine material shall be wasted to meet the grading requirements set forth below. Note that if stabilization material is required, an 8 oz. non-woven filter fabric shall be placed between the stabilization material and the pipe zone material. 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 4 2. Coarse aggregate, retained on the No. 4 sieve, shall have a percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested by the Los Angeles Test, AASHTO T-96 or ASTM C 131. Sieve Size (Square Opening) Percent By Weight Passing Screen 2-inch 100 1-1/2 inch 10 - 50 3/4-inch 0 - 25 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 200 0 - 3 B. Pipe Zone Material: All material in the pipe zone shall be clean and free from alkali, salt, petroleum products, vegetative matter or other deleterious matter, slag, cinders, ashes and rubbish or other material that in the opinion of the ENGINEER may be objectionable or deleterious. “Squeegee” or any other flowable material shall not be permitted. Pipe zone material shall conform to the following: 1. Floor Drain – Gravel, 100 percent crushed mineral aggregate per the following gradation: U.S. Standard Sieve Size (Square Opening) Percent By Weight Passing Screen 1 1/2 - inch 1 - inch 1/2 - inch No. 4 No. 200 100 95-100 25-60 0-10 0-5 2. Water and Pump-to-Waste Pipes – Sand per the following gradation: U.S. Standard Sieve Size (Square Opening) Percent By Weight Passing Screen No. 4 No. 8 No. 200 100 80-95 0-10 C. Select Trench Backfill: Select backfill shall consist of native or imported materials (soils or bedrock which can be broken down to a compactible size). Maximum particle size for 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 5 backfill shall be no greater than 4-inches. Select backfill shall be capable of meeting the compaction requirements. D. Native Trench Backfill: Trench backfill may consist of native fill material meeting soils classifications A-1, A-2 or A-3 (A-1-a for Granular Borrow material) of AASHTO M 145, with a maximum particle size no greater than 4-inches in any dimension and shall be capable of meeting the compaction requirements. Trench backfill shall be non-plastic. Trench backfill shall be free from alkali, salt, petroleum products, vegetative matter or other deleterious matter, slag, cinders, ashes and rubbish or other material that in the opinion of the ENGINEER may be objectionable or deleterious. “Squeegee” or any other flowable material shall not be permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated. All excavated materials not intended for reuse shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. B. Rock Removal 1. CONTRACTOR shall cut away Rock at excavation bottom to form level bearing. 2. All shaled layers shall be removed to provide sound and unshattered base for foundations. 3. CONTRACTOR shall remove and legally dispose of excess excavated material and debris off-site unless indicated otherwise. 4. CONTRACTOR shall correct unauthorized Rock removal at no additional cost to OWNER. 3.2 SAFETY A. Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with applicable State safety requirements and the latest requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction (29 CFR 1926). CONTRACTOR is responsible for assessing safety needs to meet such requirements, arranging for proper equipment and/or construction methods, and maintaining such equipment, methods and construction practices so as to fully comply with all safety requirements. B. CONTRACTOR is responsible for assessing needs related to confined space entry, as defined by OSHA. CONTRACTOR shall meet all such requirements, arranging for proper equipment and/or construction methods, and maintaining such equipment, methods and construction practices so as to fully comply with all confined space safety requirements. 3.3 DEWATERING A. Water removal shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering. 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 6 3.4 TRENCH WIDTH A. The bottom of the trench shall have a minimum width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24-inches or as detailed on the Contract Drawings. B. The width of the trench shall be ample to permit the pipe to be laid and jointed properly, and the backfill to be placed and compacted as specified. Trenches shall be of such extra width, when required, as will permit the convenient placing of timber supports, sheeting, and bracing, and the handling of special units as necessary. 3.5 TRENCH PREPARATION A. Each trench shall be excavated so that the pipe can be laid to the alignment and grade as required. The trench wall shall be so braced that the workmen may work safely and efficiently. All trenches shall be drained so the pipe laying may take place in dewatered conditions. B. Bottom Preparation 1. Where rock, hard pan, boulders or other material which might damage the pipe are encountered, the bottom of the trench shall be over excavated 4 inches below the required grade and replaced with Stabilization Material. Otherwise, the bottom of the trench shall be over excavated 6 inches or 1/12 the outside diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater, below the required grade and replaced with Pipe Zone Backfill. 2. The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Bell holes shall be excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Stones of 1-inch or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, shall be removed to avoid point bearing. C. Removal of Unstable Material 1. Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be removed to the depth directed by ENGINEER and replaced to the proper grade with Stabilization Material. When removal of unstable material is required due to the fault or neglect of CONTRACTOR in his performance of the work, the resulting material shall be excavated and replaced by CONTRACTOR without additional cost to OWNER. D. The trench bottom (at the level of the base of the pipe) shall be given a final trim using a string line, laser, or another method approved by ENGINEER for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the ground along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Bell holes shall be provided at each joint to permit the jointing to be made properly. The trench grade shall permit the pipe spigot to be accurately centered in the preceding laid pipe joint, without lifting the pipe above the grade, and without exceeding the permissible joint deflection. 3.6 SHEETING AND SHORING A. Sheet, shore, and brace excavations to prevent danger to persons, structures and adjacent properties and to prevent caving, erosion, and loss of surrounding subsoil. 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 7 B. Support trenches excavated through unstable, loose, or soft material. Provide sheeting, shoring, bracing, or other protection to maintain stability of excavation. C. Design sheeting and shoring to be removed at completion of excavation work. D. Repair damage caused by failure of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for settlement of filled excavations or adjacent soil. E. Repair damage to new and existing Work from settlement, water or earth pressure or other causes resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring, or bracing. 3.7 LAYING AND JOINING PIPE A. Laying pipe: Provide proper facilities for lowering pipe sections into place. Dropping pipe will not be permitted. Place each section true to line and gradient in close and true contact with adjacent sections. B. Joining pipe: 1. Use methods of joining conduit sections ensuring ends are fully entered and inner surfaces are flush and even. The equipment used to force the joints together must be adequate to overcome the gasket pressure involved. Pipe shall be installed in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturers written specifications. 2. Just prior to joining the pipes, both spigot and bell ends shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all foreign substances which may have adhered to the bell and spigot surfaces. All dust and dirt shall be removed with a clean rag. An approved lubricant (recommended by the manufacturer), that is not injurious to the gasket, shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. In the event any foreign material becomes embedded in the lubricant, or the lubricant becomes contaminated by water or other substances before the joint is started, the area affected shall be re-cleaned and new lubricant applied. 4. The pipe being joined shall be carefully moved into position, line and grade checked, and, as the spigot end is started into the bell of the section previously laid, the gasket shall be checked to insure uniform entry into the bell at all points. Align the spigot to the bell and insert the spigot into the bell until it contacts the gasket uniformly. Apply firm steady pressure either by hand or by bar and block assembly, until the spigot easily slips through the gasket. Care must be taken to ensure that the spigot is not over-inserted and that previously assembled pipe joints are not disturbed. 3.8 PIPELINE TRENCH BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. Pipe Zone: 1. Pipe Zone Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness for compaction by hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose thickness for other than hand operated machines, unless otherwise approved or specified. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum Modified Proctor density (ASTM D-1557), unless otherwise specified. 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 8 2. Replacement of Unyielding Material: Unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench shall be replaced with Stabilization Material placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness. 3. Replacement of Unstable Material: Unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation shall be replaced with Stabilization Material placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness. 4. Where the pipe grade exceeds 30%, cohesive material shall be used in lieu of pipe bedding. The cohesive material shall be moistened to within 2% of optimum moisture and compacted as noted. 5. The relative density of the compacted cohesionless material shall not be less than 60% as determined by the Bureau of Reclamation Relative Density of Cohesionless Soil Test (Designation E-12) of the "Earth Manual." B. Trench Backfill: Trenches shall be backfilled to the grade shown with Trench Backfill material as specified. 1. Trench backfill in asphalted road shall consist of backfilling the trench from above the pipe zone up to underneath the noted recommended depth for untreated base course and asphalt or concrete of finished grade with Trench Backfill material compacted to 95 percent of maximum density (ASTM D-1557). Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6-inches loose thickness for compaction by hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose thickness for other than hand operated machines, unless otherwise approved or specified. 2. Trench backfill in unimproved or landscaped areas shall consist of backfilling the trench from above the pipe zone to 8-inches below finished grade with Trench Backfill material compacted to 95 percent of maximum density (ASTM D-1557). Backfill from 8-inches below finished grade to finished grade shall consist of topsoil replacement in addition to replacement of all landscaped materials. Trench backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 8 inches loose thickness. 3. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to be assured that the Trench Backfill material is capable of being compacted to the degree specified. It shall be CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to remove and dispose of all excess excavated material. C. Final Backfill: 1. Unimproved and Landscaped Areas: The top 8-inches of the trench shall be filled with topsoil. Topsoil may be native material stripped prior to excavation of the trench. Backfill shall be deposited in layers of a maximum of 12-inch loose thickness and compacted to a minimum of 85 percent maximum density (ASTM D-1557). Compaction by water flooding or jetting will not be permitted. This requirement shall also apply to all other areas not specifically designated above. 2. Roadways shall be completed with the type and thickness of materials (i.e., Untreated Road Base and Asphalt) as indicated or shown on the Contract Drawings 3.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities from above the pipe zone to the natural surface level or the finished grade indicated on the Plans shall be placed and compacted as follows: 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 9 1. Where existing underground pipes or conduits larger than 3 inches in diameter and all sizes of sewer lines or sewer laterals cross the trench above the new work, the backfill from the bottom of the trench to 1 foot above the top of the intersecting pipe or conduit shall be pipe zone material compacted to 95 percent of maximum density (ASTM D-1557). The pipe zone material shall extend 2 feet on either side of the intersecting pipe or conduit to ensure that the material will remain in place while other backfill is placed. B. The maximum trench length open at any given time shall not exceed 200 feet unless approved by ENGINEER and must be backfilled in a timely manner. 3.10 MAINTENANCE OF BACKFILL A. All backfill shall be maintained in satisfactory condition, and all places showing signs of settlement shall be filled and maintained during the life of the Contract and for a period of one year following the day of final acceptance of all work performed under the Contract. When CONTRACTOR is notified by ENGINEER or OWNER that any backfill is hazardous, CONTRACTOR shall correct such hazardous condition at once. Any utility, road and/or parking surfacing damaged by such settlement shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of OWNER and ENGINEER. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost to OWNER of all claims for damage filed with the Court, actions brought against the said OWNER for, and on account of, such damage. 3.11 FINISH GRADING AND CLEANUP A. CONTRACTOR shall grade the trench line to a smooth grade to affect a neat and workmanlike appearance of the trench line. B. All tools, equipment and temporary structures shall be removed. All excess dirt and rubbish shall be removed from the site by CONTRACTOR. C. CONTRACTOR shall restore the site to at least as good as original condition, including but not limited to final trench grade and restoration of affected public and private facilities whether in the public right-of-way or on private property. Any exception to this requirement must be in writing from ENGINEER for the job specific conditions. 3.12 COMPACTION TESTS A. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to accomplish the specified compaction for backfill, fill, and other earthwork. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to control his operations by performing any additional tests necessary to verify and confirm that CONTRACTOR has complied, and is complying at all times, with the requirements of these Specifications concerning compaction, control, and testing. 1. Testing of Backfill Materials a. Characteristics of backfill materials shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control & Materials Testing. b. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate the adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any of the following amounts of earthwork quantities: i) 50 linear feet of trench backfill. 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 15 - 10 c. Until the specified degree of compaction on the previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, no additional earthwork of the same kind shall be performed. d. After satisfactory conclusion of the initial compaction demonstration and at any time during construction, earthwork which does not comply with the specified degree of compaction shall not exceed the previously specified quantities. e. Compliance tests may be made by ENGINEER to verify that compaction is meeting the requirements previously specified at no cost to CONTRACTOR. f. ENGINEER may require retesting of backfill that has settled from water penetration in the trench. CONTRACTOR shall remove the overburden above the level at which ENGI¬NEER wishes to test and shall backfill and recompact the excavation after the test is complete at no additional cost to the OWNER. g. If compaction fails to meet the specified requirements, CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace the backfill at proper density or shall bring the density up to specified level by other means acceptable to ENGINEER. Subsequent tests required to confirm and verify that the reconstructed backfill has been brought up to specified density shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR's confirmation tests shall be performed in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER 2. Field Density Tests a. Field density tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 1557. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 ROCK EXCAVATION 178.24.200 31 23 17 - 1 SECTION 31 23 17 ROCK EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This work shall consist of the requirements for Rock removal and the use of explosives (only by written permission by ENGINEER) to assist in Rock removal. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other sections: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 22 00 Measurement and Payment DEFINITIONS Rock: Solid mineral material which cannot be removed with equipment reasonably expected to be used in the Work without cutting, drilling or blasting. Minimum equipment size, in good running order, shall be similar to a Komatsu 300, Caterpillar 320 or 330, or equal. REFERENCES NFPA 495: Code for the Manufacture, Transportation, Storage and Use of Explosive Materials. UOSH Construction Standards Chapter U: Blasting and the Use of Explosives SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Proposed method of blasting, delay pattern, explosive types, type of blasting mat cover, and intended rock recovery method. Photographs of existing site conditions and facilities in vicinity of Work prior to blasting. QUALITY ASSURANCE Seismic Survey firms utilized shall be specialized in seismic survey and have a minimum 2 years documented experience. Explosive firms shall be specialized in explosives for disintegration of Rock with at least 2 years documented experience. 06/2024 ROCK EXCAVATION 178.24.200 31 23 17 - 2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT CONTRACTOR must coordinate measurement of existing Rock profile with ENGINEER before proceeding in Rock removal operations. Any Rock excavation done for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or in error shall not be approved or paid for by OWNER. No separate measurement and payment will be made for Rock Excavation beyond the dimensions of the line and grade or pay limits of excavation. Measurement and Payment shall be as noted in Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS EXPLOSIVES Explosives shall be of the recommended type by an explosive firm following seismic survey and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Delay devices shall be as recommended by the explosive firm. Blasting Mat Materials shall be as recommended by the explosive firm and approved by ENGINEER. PART 3 EXECUTION PREPARATION CONTRACTOR shall verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this SECTION. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and obtain all permits from authorities having jurisdiction before explosives are brought to site or drilling is started. CONTRACTOR shall locate and protect all utilities. The beginning of work of this Section constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. All work must comply with NFPA 495. STORAGE OF BLASTING MATERIALS Securely store all explosives in compliance with Laws and Regulations. Mark all storage places clearly. Where no local Laws or Regulations apply, the CONTRACTOR shall provide storage not closer than 1,000 feet from any road, building, camping area or place of human occupancy. 06/2024 ROCK EXCAVATION 178.24.200 31 23 17 - 3 ROCK REMOVAL - NONEXPLOSIVE METHOD CONTRACTOR shall cut away Rock at excavation bottom to form level bearing. All shaled layers shall be removed to provide sound and unshattered base for foundations. CONTRACTOR shall remove and legally dispose of excess excavated material and debris off-site unless indicated otherwise. ROCK REMOVAL - EXPLOSIVE METHOD CONTRACTOR shall comply with UOSH Construction Standards Chapter U rules and regulations. CONTRACTOR shall provide a qualified explosive expert to act as an advisor and consultant during drilling and blasting operations. All owners with adjacent buildings or structures and utility companies shall be notified in writing prior to setting up seismographics. The notice shall describe blasting and seismic operations. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for a seismic survey prior to Rock excavation to determine maximum charges that can be used at different locations in area of excavation without damaging adjacent properties and utilities. Seismograph monitoring shall continue during progress of blasting operation. Any excess rock designated by ENGINEER shall be disintegrated or removed from excavation operations and legally disposed of unless indicated otherwise. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect bearing surfaces and cavities formed by removed Rock. All voids shall be filled and compacted as required elsewhere in the specifications. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 DEWATERING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 19 - 1 SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides specifications for dewatering systems and appurtenances to be used during construction as required to remove water and continuously maintain groundwater at a level at least 1-foot below the bottom of the excavation. B. CONTRACTOR shall obtain all necessary permits for disposal of water removed from the excavation. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Before dewatering is commenced, CONTRACTOR shall provide information to ENGINEER outlining the method, installation and details of the proposed dewatering system. CONTRACTOR shall provide ENGINEER with plans setting forth details of the proposed dewatering systems. The dewatering system plans shall be of sufficient detail to indicate sizes of pumps, piping, appurtenances, the ultimate disposal point for water, and to indicate the overall completeness and effectiveness of the proposed system. C. CONTRACTOR shall certify to OWNER that the design and implementation of the proposed dewatering system is sufficient to complete the Work. D. Submit a plan to monitoring settlement of adjacent structures. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to control the rate and effect of dewatering to avoid all settlement and subsidence. B. Where critical structures exist immediately adjacent to areas of proposed dewatering, reference points shall be established and observed at frequent intervals to detect any settlement which may develop. CONTRACTOR is responsible for protecting adjacent structures from settlement. The cost of repairing any damage to adjacent structures and restoration of facilities shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for selection of dewatering means, methods and materials. 06/2024 DEWATERING 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 19 - 2 B. Standby pumping equipment shall be maintained on the Site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for complete design and implementation of the dewatering system. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the design and implementation of any modifications that may be required to the initial design of the dewatering system (at no additional cost to OWNER) to provide a dewatering system that operates adequately to complete the Work. C. CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, operate and maintain all machinery, appliances, and equipment to maintain all excavations free from water during construction. D. CONTRACTOR shall dispose of water so as to not cause damage to public or private property, or to cause a nuisance or menace to the public or violate the law. E. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to obtain groundwater discharge permits, if required. F. CONTRACTOR shall install and operate the dewatering system so as to not cause damage or endanger adjacent structures or property. G. The control of groundwater shall be such that softening of the bottom of excavations, or formation of "quick" conditions or "boils," does not occur. Dewatering systems shall be designed and operated so as to prevent removal and migration of the natural soils. H. CONTRACTOR shall have sufficient stand-by equipment at the project site at all times to continuously maintain the dewatering program until Work necessitating dewatering is complete. I. CONTRACTOR shall have on hand equipment and machinery in good working condition for emergencies and shall have personnel available for operation of such equipment and machinery. J. CONTRACTOR shall control surface water to prevent entry into excavations. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 23 - 1 SECTION 31 23 23 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This section covers excavating, backfilling, and compacting of disturbed areas for structures and roadways as directed by ENGINEER. RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing Section 01 45 23 Testing Agency Services Section 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls Section 31 11 00 Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines Section 31 23 19 Dewatering REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the extent referred. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) M 145 Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes T 27 Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates T 88 Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils T 180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 in (457 mm) Drop T 191 Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Sand Cone Method T 310 Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) D 422 Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3) D 1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone method D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3) 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 23 - 2 D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) The latest Edition of the Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction. The latest Edition of the American Public Works Association (APWA) and Associated General Contractors of America Standard Plans and Standard Specifications. SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Submit gradations and proctors for structural fill materials and backfill materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS WALL BACKFILL MATERIAL Wall backfill material shall consist of native or import fill material meeting soils classifications A-1, A-2 or A-3 of AASHTO M 145, with a maximum particle size no greater than 6 inches in any dimension and shall be capable of meeting the compaction requirements. Wall backfill material shall be free from frozen lumps, rocks larger than 6 inches in the largest dimension, roots, trash, lumber and organic material. STRUCTURAL FILL Structural fill material, if required, shall meet the following requirements. Material shall be non-expansive granular soil with less than 35 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, with a liquid limit less than 30, and free from rocks larger than 4 inches in the largest dimension, frozen lumps, roots, trash, lumber and organic material. The natural soils may be used as structural fill where it meets the above stated criteria. FLOOR SLAB FILL (Upper 4 inches) Material shall be non-expansive granular soil with less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, and free from rocks larger than 2 inches in the largest dimension, frozen lumps, roots, trash, lumber and organic material. The natural soils may be used as fill for the first 4 inches directly under the slab where it meets the above stated criteria. FLOOR SLAB Material shall be non-expansive granular soil with less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, with a liquid limit less than 30, and free from rocks larger than 6 inches in the largest dimension, frozen lumps, roots, trash, lumber and organic material. The natural soils may be used as fill below the first 4 inches under the slab where it meets the above 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 23 - 3 stated criteria. 3/4" WASHED ROCK 3/4" Washed Rock shall consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or crushed, to the required size and gradation. The material shall be free from vegetation matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter and shall conform to the following gradation when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27 or ASTM C 136. Sieve Size (Square Opening) Percent By Weight Passing Screen 3/4-inch 100 3/8 inch 78-92 No. 4 0 - 50 No. 8 0 - 5 No. 200 0 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION EXCAVATION Excavation shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated. Excavated material not required or not satisfactory for backfill shall be removed from the site. Excavations shall be braced and supported as needed to prevent the ground adjacent to the excavation from sliding or settling. Slides shall be promptly removed and corrected by CONTRACTOR. PREPARATION Unsuitable fill, topsoil, organics, debris and other deleterious material should be removed from the area of the proposed building, slabs, pavement and other improvements sensitive to differential settlement. The base of footing and floor slab excavations should be undisturbed natural soil or bedrock prior to structural fill or concrete placement. DEWATERING Water removal shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering. BACKFILL Backfill material shall not be placed against concrete structures that have not been properly cured. No backfill material shall be placed until concrete has cured for a minimum of 7 days or until the compressible strength is 3,400 psi, whichever is greater. Backfill material shall be placed in no more than 6-inch loose lifts for compaction by hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose lifts for other than hand operated machines. 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 23 - 4 Structural fill placed beneath foundations, footings or the floor slab shall be placed and compacted to at least 96% of maximum dry density at a moisture content within 2 percent of optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Backfill material shall be placed and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density at a moisture content within 2 percent of optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Where the moisture content is not suitable and/or sufficient compaction has not been obtained, the fill shall be reconditioned to an approved moisture content and re- compacted to the minimum required compaction prior to placing any additional fill material. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging for the placing and compacting of approved fill material in accordance with these Specifications. If it is determined that CONTRACTOR is failing to meet the minimum requirements, CONTRACTOR shall stop operations and make adjustments as necessary to produce a satisfactorily compacted fill at no additional cost to OWNER. Sufficient personnel, equipment, sumps or other means should be provided to maintain the site in an acceptable dry condition for the duration of this contract. Excavations shall be so braced and supported as needed to prevent the ground, adjacent to the excavation, from sliding or settling. Localized slides or settlements shall be promptly removed and corrected by CONTRACTOR. FINISHED GRADE The finished subgrade and grade of the fill shall not vary more than 0.05 feet from the established grades and cross sections shown on the Contract Drawings. COMPACTION TESTS Compaction testing shall be the provided and paid for in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control and Materials Testing. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to accomplish the specified compaction for backfill, structural fill, Untreated Base Course and other earthwork. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to control his operations by performing any additional tests necessary to verify and confirm that CONTRACTOR has complied, and is complying at all times, with the requirements of these Specifications concerning compaction, control, and testing. Testing of Backfill Materials a. Characteristics of backfill materials shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 45 00. b. Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any of the following amounts of earthwork quantities: 06/2024 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 178.24.200 PAGE 31 23 23 - 5 Two (2) tests per 1.0 feet of backfill thickness placed per structure. c. Until the specified degree of compaction on the previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, no additional earthwork of the same kind shall be performed. d. After satisfactory conclusion of the initial compaction demonstration and at any time during construction, earthwork which does not comply with the specified degree of compaction shall not exceed the previously specified quantities. e. Quality Control tests may be made by ENGINEER to verify that compaction is meeting the requirements previously specified at no cost to CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER requires retesting of backfill, CONTRACTOR shall remove the overburden above the level at which ENGINEER wishes to test and shall backfill and recompact the excavation after the test is complete at no additional cost to OWNER. f. If compaction fails to meet the specified requirements, CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace the backfill at proper density or shall bring the density up to specified level by other means acceptable to ENGINEER. Subsequent tests required to confirm and verify that the reconstructed backfill has been brought up to specified density shall be paid in accordance with Section 01 45 23 – Testing Agency Services. The confirmation tests shall be performed in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. Frequency of confirmation tests for remedial work shall be double that amount specified for initial confirmation tests. Field Density Tests a. Tests shall be performed in sufficient numbers to meet the requirements of Section 01 45 00 and to ensure that the specified density is being obtained. Field density tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D6938. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 RIPRAP 178.24.200 31 37 00 - 1 SECTION 31 37 00 RIPRAP PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This Section covers furnishing and placing the loose riprap materials in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the drawings and/or as directed by the ENGINEER. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 31 05 19 Geosynthetics REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation only. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM C-127 Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate ASTM C-535 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large- Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Testing certificates shall be submitted prior to acceptance of the rock source to verify the conformity for abrasion resistance or compressive strength to the requirements of this Section. STORAGE OF MATERIALS Materials shall be arranged and used in a manner to avoid excessive segregation and to prevent contamination with other materials. 06/2024 RIPRAP 178.24.200 31 37 00 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS LOOSE RIPRAP Riprap shall consist of quarry stone which is sound and durable against disintegration under conditions to be met in handling and placing, and is hard and tenacious and otherwise of suitable quality to ensure permanency in the specified kind of work. Riprap sources shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to use. Concrete masonry or concrete pavement may not be used for riprap. Riprap shall be well graded with additional gradation requirements for riprap as follows: LOOSE RIPRAP GRADATIONS Riprap Designation % Smaller Than Given Size By Weight (Inches) D50** (Inches) RIPRAP D50 = 12" 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 21 18 12 4 12 RIPRAP D50 = 24" 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 42 30 24 12 24 ** D50 = Nominal particle size All stone shall be angular (no rounded rock will be permitted), each piece having its greatest dimensions not greater than three times its least dimensions. All stone shall conform to the following test requirements of the American Society for Testing and Materials Standards: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining (by selective mining, crushing, screening, or some other method) loose riprap that will meet the specified material requirements. GEOSYNTHETIC (FILTER FABRIC) Filter Fabric shall be non-woven and shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 05 19 – Geosynthetics. Requirements ASTM Standard Specific Gravity (min) 2.6 C 127 Los Angeles Abrasion, (max %) 40 C 535 06/2024 RIPRAP 178.24.200 31 37 00 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION LOOSE RIPRAP Prior to placement of loose riprap, the subgrade shall be graded to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. Surfaces to receive riprap shall be smooth and firm, free of brush, trees, stumps, and objectionable material. Where filter fabric is placed under the riprap, the fabric shall be overlapped a minimum of 2-feet at all joints. Upstream sheets shall overlap downstream sheets. The fabric shall be anchored using trenches or aprons at the crest or toe of the slope. Fabric exposed to sunlight longer than 7 days shall be removed and replaced. Riprap shall generally be placed starting at the lowest elevations and working upward. Riprap shall be placed to the minimum thickness designated on the drawings and shall be positioned in such a manner that will provide uniform distribution of the various sizes of stone and produce a well-keyed mass of rock with the least practical amount of void space. The surface shall be leveled as necessary, to produce a reasonably uniform appearance and the required thickness. Where riprap is placed over a filter fabric, the riprap shall be placed so as to avoid damage to the fabric. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 ROAD BASE – UNTREATED BASE COURSE 178.24.200 PAGE 32 11 23 - 1 SECTION 32 11 23 ROAD BASE - UNTREATED BASE COURSE PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This Work consists of the placement of Sub-Base and Untreated Base Course (UBC) material at designated roadways and all driving surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. RELATED SECTIONS Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publication forms a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO T 88 Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils AASHTO T 180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 in (457 mm) Drop AASHTO T 191 Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method AASHTO T 310 Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods. (Shallow Depth) AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D 422 Standard Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) ASTM D 1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone method ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lnf/ft3) ASTM D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) ASTM D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) The latest edition of the Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction (UDOT). 06/2024 ROAD BASE – UNTREATED BASE COURSE 178.24.200 PAGE 32 11 23 - 2 SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Untreated Base Course (State approved 1-1/2” gradation, APWA Grade 1 or Grade 3/4). MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Road Base shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as part of the various items to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Untreated Base Course: Untreated Base Course Materials shall meet the APWA Specifications for Grade 1 or Grade 3/4 as shown in Table 32 11 23-1. TABLE 32 11 23-1 SIEVE SIZE MASTER GRADING BAND LIMITS (PERCENT PASSING) GRADE 1 GRADATION (PERCENT PASSING) GRADE 3/4 GRADATION (PERCENT PASSING) 1 1/2 inch 1 inch 3/4 inch 1/2 inch 3/8 inch No. 4 No. 16 No. 200 100 90-100 70-85 65-80 55-75 40-65 25-40 7-11 - 100 - 79 - 91 - 49 - 61 27 - 35 7 - 11 - - 100 - 78 -92 55 - 67 28 - 38 7 - 11 PART 3 EXECUTION SUBGRADE PREPARATION Prior to placement of untreated base course materials, the foundation area to receive untreated base course materials shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 8-inches and recompacted to 95% minimum laboratory density as determined by ASTM D1557. UNTREATED BASE COURSE MATERIAL PLACEMENT No Untreated Base Course material shall be placed on sub-grade materials until the sub-grade has been checked and accepted by ENGINEER. Road base material placed on driving surfaces shall be compacted to a minimum 06/2024 ROAD BASE – UNTREATED BASE COURSE 178.24.200 PAGE 32 11 23 - 3 density of 96% in accordance with ASTM D1557 to provide a uniform graded smooth surface. Untreated Base Course material shall be placed to a minimum thickness eight (8) inches or as shown on the Contract Drawings. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for directing proper placement of all road base materials. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the stability of the road base materials during placement and shall replace any portions which have become displaced due to careless or negligent work on the part of CONTRACTOR, or to damage resulting from natural causes, such as storms. Whenever the work areas to receive Sub-Base and/or Untreated Base Course material are covered with snow, the snow must be removed prior to placing the road base and/or Untreated Base Course and deposited outside the immediate construction areas at CONTRACTOR's expense. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 COPPER PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 03- 1 SECTION 33 05 03 COPPER PIPE PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all copper pipes, fittings, couplings, supports, joint materials and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system. RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 22 10 10 Plumbing Piping and Specialties Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT There shall be no separate measurement and payment for this section. Full compensation for Copper Pipe shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which Copper Pipe relates. REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM B88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C 800 Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO) INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC) INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC) SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 06/2024 COPPER PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 03- 2 Submit catalog information on all fittings and valves shown on the Contract Drawings, referencing each item by number as shown on the Contract Drawings. Information shall indicate manufacturer specification compliance and dimensional data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Reject any pipe which does not conform to Contract Documents or is cracked, chipped, crushed, dented, kinked, or otherwise unacceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS PIPE The type and class of the pipe and fittings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall be Type K copper for buried services lines and Type L copper for interior piping. Type K and Type L copper pipe shall have smooth surfaces free from bumps. Type K shall also be flexible enough to be coiled. All piping shall have the capacity to function at design working pressures. Copper pipe to be buried or encased in concrete shall be polyethylene coated or installed in a polyethylene sleeve. Polyethylene coated pipe shall have a coating thickness of 0.025 inches and shall be Mueller Industries Streamline Plastic Coated Pipe, or approved equal. Polyethylene sleeve shall be a minimum 6 mil thick and shall be Northtown Polywrap C, or approved equal. Color shall be blue for cold water, red for hot water, or purple for reclaimed water. Seal seam joints and around fittings with Polyken #930, or approved equal, adhesive tape. CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS Connections shall be flared or compression type for service lines. All other connections for above ground and in interior to structures shall be hot 95-5 lead free soldered joints. Connections for dissimilar piping shall include dielectric insulation unions. Fittings shall conform to AWWA C-800 standards and shall be capable of operating at 150 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Pipe shall be installed per manufacturers’ instructions and per the requirements of the INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC) and INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC). In case of a conflict between the two installation requirements the more stringent requirement shall apply. The pipe shall be plugged at the end of each work day or period of suspension. 06/2024 COPPER PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 03- 3 PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in accordance with good practice to insure that any foreign materials do not remain in any of the piping. TESTING OF PIPING Source of Water: CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for pressure testing of the pipeline. Testing Procedure: Pipe shall be tested in accordance with the INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE, Section 312 - Tests and Inspections. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall repeat the pipeline testing until the pipeline passes the leakage test, all at no additional cost to OWNER. ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so that ENGINEER may be present during the test. DISINFECTION For all potable water systems and where otherwise required all pipelines shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 33 13 00 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection and approved before being allowed to be connected into a culinary system. Sewer pipelines do not require disinfection. Source of Water: CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for disinfection of the water line system. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 1 SECTION 33 05 05 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all pipe, fittings, closure pieces, supports, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing material, polyethylene wrap, marker tape, tracer wire, and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 50 30 Protection of Existing Utilities Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ASTM D 2041 Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, and 250 AMERICAN STANDARDS FOR TESTING AND MATERIAL (ASTM) ASTM A 193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless-Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications ASTM A 194 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless- Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both ASTM A 283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates ASTM A 536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads, (UN And UNR Thread Form) ASME B18.2.1 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, And Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, And Lag Screws (Inch Series) ASME B18.2.2 Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, And Coupling Nuts (Inch Series) 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 2 AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C 104 Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings AWWA C 105 Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C 110 Standards for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-inch Through 48-inch, for Water AWWA C 111 Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C 115 Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray- Iron Threaded Flanges AWWA C 150 Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe AWWA C 151 Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water AWWA C 153 Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch Through 64- inch for Water AWWA C 219 Standard for Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe AWWA C 600 Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances AWWA C 606 Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains AWWA M 11 Steel Pipe – A Guide for Design and Installation SUBMITTALS Submit catalog information on all pipe, fittings, valves, couplings, gaskets, tapes, bolts and nuts, wraps, safety tapes, and tracer wires as shown on the Drawings. Information shall indicate manufacture specification compliance and dimensional data. Submit shop drawings on all fabricated piping and pipe supports. Submit bolting patterns, procedures, and bolting equipment data, and calculations for target torque calculations. Certified affidavit of compliance for pipe and fittings or other materials furnished under this Section and as specified in the referenced standards. QUALITY ASSURANCE Except as modified herein, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the referenced standards as applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of the AWWA C151 and AWWA C150 and pipe must be certified for potable water use by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF/ANSI 61) and must bear the logo "NSF-pw" or "NSF-61" indicating such certification. Pipe thickness rating shall be minimum Class 51 for pipe larger than 12" diameter, and Class 350 for pipe 12" diameter and smaller, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 3 The pipe shall be provided with rubber gaskets, specials, and fittings as required. Nominal pipe laying lengths shall be 20-feet. Buried Ductile Iron Pipe shall be encased with 8 mil (minimum), Group 2, Class C black polyethylene, conforming to the requirements of AWWA C105. All seams in the polyethylene encasement shall be taped with a minimum 12 mil adhesive tape, Polyken #900, 3M Scotchrap 51, or approved equal, to completely seal the seam. FITTINGS MJ and Push-on fittings shall conform to the (AWWA C110 or C153), be NSF certified to ANSI/NSF 61 and shall be for a minimum rated working pressure of 250 psi. Flanges shall conform to AWWA C110 AWWA C111, and ANSI B16.1, Class 125 and shall have either raised or plain faces, and shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 250 psi. For pipe sizes 24-inch and smaller, flanged joints may be rated for a maximum of 350 psi with the use of specially designed gaskets. JOINTS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joints, push-on joints, flanged joints, or restrained joints as required. Mechanical and push-on joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C111. Flanged joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C115. Restrained joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C151. Restrained joints shall be TR-Flex by U.S. Pipe, MegaLug Model 1100 by EBAA Iron or approved equal. Joint restraining devices that impart point loads and/or wedging action on the pipe wall as a means of joint restraint shall not be allowed unless there are no other options available. CONTRACTOR may propose such devices by providing a formal substitution request indicating the locations the devices are to be used and that the devices is rated at least for the class of pipe being supplied. MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED) Mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C606. Mechanical type couplings shall be designed for a water working pressure not less than the design pressure of the pipe on which they are to be installed. Mechanical-type couplings shall be Victaulic Style 31 (flexible or rigid), or approved equal. Gaskets shall be the flush seal type. Mechanical-type couplings for equipment connections shall be provided with rigid grooved couplings or flexible type coupling with harness, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Grooved fittings, couplings and valves shall be furnished from the same manufacturer as the coupling. Grooving tools shall be from the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 4 SOLID SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS Solid sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Coupling shall be of ductile iron and shall be of the size to fit the pipe and fittings shown. Coupling shall be pressure rated 250 psi and comply with AWWA C110. Restraints shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTER (DISMANTLING JOINT) Provide flanged coupling adapters (dismantling joint) were shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to substitute any other type of flanged coupling adapter unless approved by ENGINEER. The coupling shall be rated as indicated on the Drawings. Flanged coupling adapter bodies shall be fabricated from steel, ASTM A512 or A 513 or Ductile Iron ASTM A536, without pipe stop. The body shall not be less than 1/4-inch thick or at least the same wall thickness as the pipe to which the coupling is connected. If the strength of the body material is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness of the middle ring shall be increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The follower ring shall be fabricated from steel, ASTM A576 or A36. For flanged coupling adapters installed in piping systems rated for positive pressure, the coupling shall be restrained with harness bolts or tie rods. Other means of restraining the coupling such as set screws will not be accepted. Harnesses shall be designed in accordance with AWWA Manual 11, or as indicated. Harness sets shall be designed for the maximum test pressure of the pipe in which they are installed. Gaskets shall be composed of a rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Flanged coupling adapters (dismantling joints) shall be Model 975 by Smith-Blair, Model 309 by JCM, Model DJ400 by Romac, or approved equal. GASKETS Except as otherwise provided, gaskets for flanged joints shall be 1/8-inch thick rubber fabric. Class 250 or less flange gaskets shall be Flange-Tyte by U.S. Pipe, higher pressure joint gaskets shall be Garlock BLUE-GARD Style 3000, or approved equal. Wherever blind flanges are shown, the gaskets shall consist of 1/8-inch thick cloth- inserted rubber sheet which shall cover the entire inside surface of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the surface of the blind flange. All buried fittings using steel bolts shall be coated with no-oxide wax and wrapped with polyethylene or as otherwise approved by ENGINEER. BOLTS AND NUTS Bolts and nuts shall be rated for the system working pressure with a minimum safety factor of three. Bolts and nuts buried, submerged, and inside vaults shall have a Xylan 1014 or 1424 fluoropolymer coating. 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 5 Bolts and nuts above grade, exposed or inside structures, shall be zinc coated steel. Bolts and nuts in exposed to wastewater or in corrosive environments shall be Type 304 stainless steel. All flange bolt lengths shall be selected by CONTRACTOR such that three full threads, as a minimum, protrude from the hex nut and washer after assembly. Flange bolts shall have ASME B1.1, Class 2A threads, and be manufactured of ASTM A 193, Grade B7 steel. Bolts shall conform to ASME B18.2.1. Flange nuts shall have Class 2A fit, and be manufactured of ASTM A 194, Grade 2H steel, having square or hex heavy dimensions in accordance with ASME B18.2.2. Connection T-bolts for mechanical joint (MJ) fittings shall be Cor-Ten high strength, low alloy steel conforming to AWWA C111. CEMENT MORTAR LINING Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with cement mortar in accordance with the requirements of the AWWA C104 except that the lining thickness shall be not less than 1/8 of an inch. The pipe interior surfaces shall be smooth and free from factures, excessive crazing, and roughness. THRUST BLOCKS/ RESTRAINTS All fittings for pipe 20-inch diameter and larger shall not have thrust blocks, but joint restraints for the adjacent pipe shall be provided for the distances indicated on the drawings. All fittings for pipe smaller than 20-inch diameter shall have proper thrust blocks and restraints as noted for the type of installation required. Joint restraint shall be provided for all bends, fittings, and valves regardless of pipe size or location. Thrust blocks shall be concrete as per OWNER’s Standards. Joint restraints may be tie rods, TR Flex piping system as manufactured by US Pipe or McWane Ductile, Flex-ring joint pipe by American Ductile Iron Pipe. Restrained joints shall be suitable for 250 psi test pressures. SAFETY TAPE Safety tape shall be a minimum of 3-inch wide by 5.0 mil overall thickness, with no less than a 0.35 gauge solid aluminum foil core. It shall be Safety Blue in color per American Public Works Association (APWA) National Color Code and shall be clearly labeled with the words “CAUTION WATER LINE BELOW” or similar wording approved by ENGINEER. Safety tape shall be MagnaTec by Empire Level Mfg Corp, or approved equal. TRACER WIRE All piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 12 gauge insulated tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line tracer. The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe on the top of the pipe and be held in place with poly tape at all pipe joints and at 5 foot intervals. 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 6 Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and waterproof seals. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable. Wires terminate inside all valve boxes. PIPE COATINGS All exposed piping, valves, and fittings including inside vaults and buildings shall be painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes. Exposed piping, valves and fittings to be painted shall be primed by the manufacturer in preparation for painting. CONTRACTOR shall provide verification from the finish coating supplier that the field applied coatings are compatible with the manufacturer’s prime coat. Pipe to be painted shall not have asphalt emulsion coating. The exterior of buried pipe and fittings shall be an asphaltic coating approximately one-mil thick. COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING Apply wax tape coating over all flanges, valves, actuators, joints, nuts, bolts, and all metallic appurtenances which are buried. Primer: Primer shall be a blend of petrolatums, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors having a paste-like consistency. The primer shall have the following properties: Color Brown Pour Point 100°F to 110°F Flash Point 350°F Coverage 1 gallon/100 square feet Manufacturer Trenton Wax Tape Primer, Denso Paste Primer, or approved equal. Wax Tape: Wax tape shall consist of a synthetic-fiber felt, saturated with a blend of microcrystalline wax, petrolatums, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors, forming a tape coating that is easily formable over irregular surfaces. The tape shall have the following properties: Color Brown Saturant Pour Point 115°F to 120°F Thickness 50 to 70 mils Tape Width 6 inches Dielectric Strength 100 volts/mil Manufacturer Trenton No. 1 Wax Tape, Denso "Densyl Tape”, or approved equal. Plastic Wrapper: Wrapper shall be a polyvinylidene chloride plastic with three 50-gauge plies wound together as a single sheet. The wrapper shall have the following properties: Color Clear Thickness 1.5 mils Tape Width 6 inches Manufacturer Trenton Poly-Ply, Denso Tape PVC Self-Adhesive, or approved equal. 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 7 PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines. Ductile iron fittings shall be installed in accordance with the ANSI/AWWA C600. Inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to verify there is no damage and clean each pipe and fitting prior to installation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading. No pipe shall be installed on a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation before backfilling occurs. Immediately before joining the pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned. The spigot end of the pipe and the inside surface of the gasket shall be cleaned and lubricated. The lubricant shall be non-toxic, shall not support bacteria growth, shall not be harmful to the gasket material, and shall be compliant with NSF/ANSI 61 requirements. The lubricant shall not impart a taste or odor to the water in the pipe. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. Buried Ductile Iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C105 Method A. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc. on the pipe surface before installation of the encasement. During installation, soil or embedment material shall not be trapped between the pipe and the polyethylene. Cut polyethylene tube to a length at least 2 feet longer than the pipe section. Wrap shall overlap the adjacent pipe joint at least 1 foot. After assembling the pipe joint, overlap the joint with the polyethylene tube and secure to the pipe with adhesive tape completely around the seam. Overlap the joint on the previous pipe with the polyethylene tube and secure to the existing wrap with adhesive tape and completely seal the seam. Take up the slack width at the top of the pipe to make a snug but not tight fit along the barrel of the pipe and secure with poly tape at 5 foot intervals. For installations below the water table or wet areas, circumferential wraps of tape should be placed at 2 foot intervals along the barrel of the pipe prior to lowering the pipe into the trench. Repair punctures to the polyethylene wrap with adhesive tape. Repair cuts, tears, or damage to the polyethylene wrap with a tube cut open, wrapped around the pipe to cover the damaged area, and secure in place with Polyken #900, 3M Scotchrap 51, adhesive tape, or approved equal, to completely seal the seam. Provide openings for branches, service taps, blowoffs, air valves, and similar appurtenances by cutting an “X” in the polyethylene and temporarily folding back the film. After the appurtenance is installed, tape the slack securely to the appurtenance, and repair the cut and any other damaged areas. To make a direct tap, apply two or three wraps of adhesive tape completely around the polyethylene encased pipe to cover the area where the tapping machine and chain will be 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 8 mounted. Install the corporation stop directly through the tape and polyethylene encasement. After the direct tap is completed, inspect for damage and repair if needed. Where polyethylene wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend the polyethylene wrap to cover the adjacent pipe for a distance of 3 feet. Secure the end with adhesive tape completely around the seam. Service lines with dissimilar metals shall be wrapped with polyethylene or approved dielectric tape for a minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from the ductile iron pipe. Valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent damage to any part of the valve. CONTRACTOR shall adjust stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure proper operation. Valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and, in the location, indicated on the drawings. The pipe shall be plugged at the end of each work day or period of suspension. Safety tracer tape shall be installed 12-inches above the pipe along the entire length of pipeline. Tracer wire shall be brought up at valve boxes as shown on the Drawings. When splicing a wire use a greased filled or approved connector. All splices should occur within a valve box. Wire is to be continuous underground. Underground splices may only be used by specific permission of the OWNER and must be inspected before backfilling. THRUST BLOCKS Thrust blocks shall be installed at points where the pipe changes direction such as: at all tees, elbows, wyes, caps, valves, hydrants, reducers, etc. Thrust blocks shall be constructed so that the bearing surface is in direct line with the major force created by the pipe or fitting. Thrust blocks shall bear against solid undisturbed earth at the side and bottom of the trench excavation and shall be shaped so as not to obstruct access to the joints or the pipe or fitting. Thrust blocks shall be sized and constructed per OWNER’s Standards or the drawings, whichever is greater. PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in accordance with good practice to ensure that sand, rocks, or other foreign material do not remain in any of the pipeline. If possible, the flushing shall be made with an open pipe end. CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER a proposed schedule and method of flushing for review before the flushing starts. BOLTING PROCEDURES FOR FLANGED JOINTS Flange joints shall be assembled per the gasket manufacturer’s instructions and as specified herein. Utilize calibrated bolting equipment capable of applying a measured 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 9 torque to flange bolts during joining. Bolting patterns, procedures, and bolting equipment data shall be submitted prior to pipe fitting and bolting. Gaskets, bolts, and anti-seize lubricant used in the bolting procedure shall be selected from those specified herein. Submit target torque calculations for each application. Calculations shall identify specific gasket (manufacturer, model, size, configuration, material), bolts (size and material), and anti-seize lubricant. The calculations shall document and take into consideration the pipe service, working and test pressures, pipe diameter, gasket data sheet, bolt material, gasket supplier-recommended assembly stress, and gasket-supplier recommended bolt stress. Calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer. Target torque calculations shall be used in the assembly of bolted joints. Flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be visually inspected and cleaned prior to bolting. Lubricate bolts and nuts; if hardened washers are not used, lubricate the flange surface around the bolt holes. This lubricant must be removed by cleaning solvent prior to applying a coating system. Hand-tighten all nuts and bolts then tighten them to 10 to 20 percent of the target torque. The initial torque shall not exceed 20 percent of the target torque. The bolts shall be tightened according to the pattern included in AWWA Manual M11, Figure 12-3. For flanges having 4 to 8 bolts there shall be three rounds of tightening, after hand tightening, to 30 percent, 60 percent and then 100 percent of the target torque. For flanges having 12 or more bolts there shall be four rounds of tightening, after hand tightening, to 20 percent, 40 percent, 80 percent and 100 percent of the target torque. At 100 percent of target torque the flange gap shall be measured at every other bolt to confirm uniformity. The bolts shall be re-tightened to the target torque 24 hours after completion of the initial bolting sequence. COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING APPLICATION Surfaces shall be clean and free of all dirt, grease, water, and other foreign material prior to the application of the primer and wax tape. Apply primer by hand or brush to all surfaces of the pipefitting or valve. Work the primer into all crevices and completely cover all exposed metal surfaces. Apply the wax tape immediately after the primer application. Work the tape into the crevices around fittings. Wrap the wax tape spirally around the pipe and across the fitting. Use a minimum overlap of 55 percent of the tape width. Work the tape into the crevices and contours of irregularly shaped surfaces and smooth out so that there is a continuous protective layer with no voids or spaces under the tape. For larger voids or irregular shaped surfaces fill spaces with a moldable mastic. Moldable mastic shall be Trenton Fill-Pro PM-GP, or approved equal. Overwrap the completed wax tape installation with the plastic wrapping material. Wrap spirally around the pipe and across the fitting. Use a minimum overlap of 55 percent of the tape width and apply two layers or applications of overwrap. Secure plastic wrapper to pipe with adhesive tape. TRACER WIRE TESTING 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 10 Tracer wire shall be installed where indicated above or shown on the Contract Drawings on the pipe along the entire length of pipeline. Upon completion of the pipe installation, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the wire is continuous and unbroken through the entire run of the pipe. Demonstration shall include full signal conductivity (including splices) when energizing for the entire run in the presence of OWNER and/or ENGINEER. If the wire is broken, CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace it. Pipeline installation will not be accepted until the wire passes a continuity test. TESTING OF PIPELINE CONTRACTOR shall provide additional temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed prior to placing pipeline into service. Source of Water CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for pressure testing of the pipeline. Testing Procedure Pipe shall be tested at a static pressure of 200 psi for 2 hours and in accordance with the AWWA C600 standards. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the excessive leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall repeat the pipeline test, all at no additional cost to OWNER. ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so that ENGINEER may be present during the test. Pressure and Leak Test CONTRACTOR shall test all piping either in sections or as a unit. The test shall be made by placing temporary bulkheads as needed in the pipe and filling the line slowly with water. Care shall be taken to see that all air vents are open during the filling. Bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If any leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to ENGINEER shall be taken. The test shall consist of holding a minimum pressure as shown on the Drawings in the section being tested for a minimum period of two hours using either pneumatic or hydraulic means to maintain the pressure. Suitable means shall be provided by CONTRACTOR for determining the quantity of water lost by leakage under the test pressure. The testing allowance is defined as the quantity of water that must be applied to the pipe section being tested to maintain a pressure within 5 psi of the specified hydrostatic test pressure. The maximum allowable leakage shall be defined as follows: L = SD(P)1/2/148,000 L = Testing allowance (makeup water) in gallons per hour of test S = Length of pipe in feet 06/2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 178.24.200 PAGE 33 05 05 - 11 D = Nominal diameter of pipe in inches P = Average Test Pressure in pounds per square inch (gauge) DISINFECTING Disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 33 13 00 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. PAINTING All exposed piping including inside vaults shall be painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900) 178.24.200 33 05 07- 1 SECTION 33 05 07 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS (AWWA C900) PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all PVC pipe, fittings, closure pieces, supports, gaskets, jointing material and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system. This Section includes PVC pressure pipe meeting the requirements of AWWA C900. PVC pressure pipe with solved-welded, flanged, or threaded joints is included in Section 33 05 07.1 - PVC Pressure Pipe (ASTM D 1785, modified). RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01300 Administrative Requirements (Submittal Procedures) Section 02415 Disinfection of Water Distribution System Section 01 50 30 Protection of Existing Facilities Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM D 3139 Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM F 477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C 605 Standard for Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains AWWA C 900 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4-Inch through 60-Inch for Water Transmission and Distribution 06/2024 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900) 178.24.200 33 05 07- 2 AWWA M 23 Manual of Water Supply Practices - PVC Pipe - Design and Installation SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01300 Administrative Requirements (Submittal Procedures). Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test results and the date each test was completed. Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances showing compliance with this Section; and manufacturer’s literature on tracer wire and accessories. Submit plan for commissioning the waterline, including but not limited to cleaning, pressure testing, and disinfection. PART 2 PRODUCTS POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE All polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe intended for use in public drinking water supply pipelines or in pressure pipeline systems shall be manufactured of material conforming to AWWA C900, ASTM D1784, and cell classification 12454 PVC materials for the size and class required. All PVC pipe used for drinking water pipeline must be certified for potable water use by the National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NSF 61) and must bear the logo "NSF-pw" or "NSF-61" indicating such certification. Standard laying lengths shall be 20-feet. Pipe sections shall be clearly marked to: Identify manufacturer's name or trademark Nominal pipe size and OD base AWWA material code designation Dimension ratio AWWA pressure class AWWA specification designation Product record code The PVC pipe shall be DR-18 (235 psi) POLYVINYL CHLORIDE JOINTS All joints and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier. Joints shall be bell and spigot conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3139. Gaskets shall comply with the requirements of ASTM F477. Deflection at the joint shall not exceed 1.0 degree for AWWA C900 pipe or the maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No deflection of the joint shall be allowed for joints that are over-inserted or not inserted to the assembly or stop mark. All PVC joints shall be fully restrained. Restraint of PVC joints shall be via internal or external joint restraint. 06/2024 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900) 178.24.200 33 05 07- 3 Internal joint restraint shall be Eagle Loc900 by JM Eagle, or approved equal. External joint restraint shall be Series 1900 by EBAA Iron, Series 1100G2 by Star Pipe Products, or approved equal. FITTINGS Fittings shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 05 – Ductile Iron Pipe. THRUST BLOCKS/ RESTRAINTS All fittings shall have proper thrust blocks and restraints as noted for the type of installation required. Joint restraint shall be provided for all bends, fittings, and valves regardless of pipe size or location. Thrust blocks shall be 3,000 psi concrete. Joint restraints may be EBAA Iron Megalug Series 2000PV and Series 2200, Star Pipe Product Series 1100 Pipe Restrainers, Romac Industries RomaGrip for PVC Pipe or 470 Series Pipe Restraining System with tie rods, or approved equal. (RESTRAINTS WITH A POINT LOADING ON THE PIPE WILL NOT BE ALLOWED ON PVC PIPE.) Restrained joints shall be suitable for a minimum of 200 psi test pressures. SAFETY TAPE Safety tape shall be a minimum of 3-inch wide by 5.0 mil overall thickness, with no less than a 0.35 gauge solid aluminum foil core. It shall be Safety Blue in color per American Public Works Association (APWA) National Color Code and shall be clearly labeled with the words “CAUTION WATER LINE BELOW” or similar wording approved by ENGINEER. Safety tape shall be MagnaTec by Empire Level Mfg Corp, or approved equal. TRACER WIRE All piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 14 gauge solid copper HMWPE tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line tracer. The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe on top of the pipe and be held in place with poly tape at all pipe joints and at 10 foot intervals. Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved rated splice caps and waterproof seals. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA Manual M23. The pipe shall be plugged at the end of each work day, or period of work suspension. Tracer wire shall be installed 3-inch minimum above pipe as required by the Drawings. 06/2024 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900) 178.24.200 33 05 07- 4 THRUST BLOCKS AND JOINT RESTRAINTS Thrust blocks and/or joint restraints (as indicated on the drawings) shall be installed at points where the pipe changes direction such as: at all tees, elbows, wyes, caps, valves, hydrants, reducers, etc. Thrust blocks shall be constructed so that the bearing surface is in direct line with the major force created by the pipe or fitting. Thrust blocks shall bear against solid undisturbed earth at the side and bottom of the trench excavation and shall be shaped so as not to obstruct access to the joints or the pipe or fitting. Thrust blocks shall be sized and constructed per the drawings. PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in accordance with good practice to ensure that sand, rocks, or other foreign material are not left in any of the pipeline. If possible, the flushing shall be made with an open pipe end. CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER a proposed schedule and method of flushing for review before the flushing starts. TRACER WIRE TESTING Upon completion of the pipe installation, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the wire is continuous and unbroken through the entire run of the pipe. Demonstration shall include full signal conductivity (including splices) when energizing for the entire run in the presence of OWNER OR ENGINEER. If the wire is broken, CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace it. Pipeline installation will not be accepted until the wire passes a continuity test. TESTING OF PIPELINE CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed prior to placing pipeline into service. Source of Water CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for disinfection and pressure testing of the pipeline. Testing Procedure PVC pipe shall be tested at a static pressure of 200 psi for 2 hours and in accordance with the AWWA C605 standards. Pipe shall be tested in segments such that the test pressure at the high point in the segment shall be 200 psi, and test pressure at low point shall not exceed 210 psi. 06/2024 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900) 178.24.200 33 05 07- 5 In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the excessive leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall repeat the pipeline test, all at no additional cost to OWNER. ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so that the ENGINEER may be present during the test. Pressure and Leak Test The Contractor shall test all piping either in sections or as a unit. The test shall be made by placing temporary bulkheads as needed in the pipe and filling the line slowly with water. Care shall be taken to see that all air vents are open during the filling. Bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If any leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to ENGINEER shall be taken. The test shall consist of holding a minimum pressure as shown on the Drawings on the section being tested for a minimum period of two hours using either pneumatic or hydraulic means to maintain the pressure. Suitable means shall be provided by CONTRACTOR for determining the quantity of water lost by leakage under the test pressure. The testing allowance is defined as the quantity of water that must be applied to the pipe section being tested to maintain a pressure within 5 psi of the specified hydrostatic test pressure. The maximum allowable leakage shall be defined as follows: L = SD(P)1/2/148,000 L = Testing allowance (makeup water) in gallons per hour of test S = Length of pipe in feet D = Nominal diameter of pipe in inches P = Average Test Pressure in pounds per square inch (gauge) DISINFECTING Disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 02415 Disinfection of Water Distribution System. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785) 178.24.200 33 05 07.1 - 1 SECTION 33 05 07.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D 1785, modified) PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all PVC pressure pipe and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system. This Section includes PVC pressure pipe with solvent-welded, flanged, or threaded joints in accordance with ASTM D 1785 as modified herein. PVC pipe with bell and spigot joints is included in Section 33 05 07 - PVC Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joints (AWWA C900 and C905). RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines Section 33 05 07 PVC Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joints (AWWA C900 and C905) Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 150 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D 2467 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM F 1498 Standard Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60 Degrees for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C 605 Standard for Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains 06/2024 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785) 178.24.200 33 05 07.1 - 2 AWWA C 900 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4-Inch through 12-Inch for Water Transmission and Distribution AWWA C 905 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings 14-Inch through 48-inch AWWA M 23 Manual of Water Supply Practices - PVC Pipe - Design and Installation SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test results and the date each test was completed. Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances showing compliance with this Section; and manufacturer’s literature on tracer wire and accessories. Submit plan for commissioning the waterline, including but not limited to cleaning, pressure testing, and disinfection. PART 2 PRODUCTS POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE PVC pipe shall be made from new rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride and shall be normal impact Type 1, Grade 1, class 12454, listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61, unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with ASTM D 1785. Clear PVC pipe shall be rigid PVC (polyvinyl chloride) Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 as indicated on the Contract Drawings which complies with the material requirements of ASTM D1784. The compound shall be listed with NSF 61 for potable water service. Manufacturer shall be IPEX Clear-Guard, GF Piping Systems Harvel Clear, or approved equal Pipe sections shall be clearly marked to: Identify manufacturer's name or trademark Nominal pipe size and OD base ASTM material code designation Schedule Pressure class ASTM specification designation Product record code The PVC pipe shall be schedule 80 for a maximum working pressure of 150 psi. PIPE JOINTS Pipe joints shall be solvent-welded type with solvent cement and primer as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the chemical in the pipe. 06/2024 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785) 178.24.200 33 05 07.1 - 3 Threaded joints that are necessary to match up to threaded valves or fittings shall be made up with appropriate thread sealant, either paste or tape. Flanged joints shall be made with solvent-welded PVC flanges, drilled to ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Gaskets shall be ANSI 150 lb. full face, 1/8-inch thick Neoprene for water or wastewater service. Gasket material for chemicals shall be suitable for the chemical service. FITTINGS Solvent-welded and threaded fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC fittings in accordance with ASTM D 2467 - Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. Flanged fittings shall be Schedule 80 fabricated PVC fittings with 150 lb. flanges to ASME B 16.5. TRACER WIRE All buried piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 12 gauge solid copper THHN tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line tracer. The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe on the top of the pipe and be held in place with ties or hitches spaced not more than 12-feet apart. Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and waterproof seals or solder. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines. PVC pipe shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in accordance with Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports (Pipe Supports). Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature changes. Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. Valves and flanges attached to PVC pipe shall be provided with adequate supports. 06/2024 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785) 178.24.200 33 05 07.1 - 4 PIPE PREPARATION Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly PIPE JOINTS Pipe threads shall conform to ASTM F 1498 and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies or molded. Joints shall be made with Teflon tape or thread sealant. Solvent-welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and solvent cement on clean, dry pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept closed at all times and the joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, according to the pipe or cement manufacturer's written recommendations. Pipe ends shall be inserted to the full depth of the socket. Solvents used on potable water pipes shall be ANSI/NSF 61 certified. Flanged joints shall be made with gaskets and Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts, unless noted otherwise. Care shall be taken not to over-torque the bolts, in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in accordance with good practice to insure that sand, rocks, or other foreign material are not left in any of the pipeline. If possible the flushing shall be made with an open pipe end. CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER a proposed schedule and method of flushing for review before the flushing starts. TRACER WIRE TESTING Upon completion of the pipe installation, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the wire is continuous and unbroken through the entire run of the pipe. Demonstration shall include full signal conductivity (including splices) when energizing for the entire run in the presence of OWNER OR ENGINEER. If the wire is broken, CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace it. Pipeline installation will not be accepted until the wire passes a continuity test. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINE CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed prior to placing pipeline into service. Source of Water CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for disinfection and/or pressure testing of the pipeline. 06/2024 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785) 178.24.200 33 05 07.1 - 5 Testing Procedure CONTRACTOR shall allow adequate time for the solvent cement joints to cure. Curing time shall be per the solvent cement manufacturer's recommendation. Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required on the Contract Drawings, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the tolerances listed on the Contract Drawings. Caution - Do not use air or gas for testing PVC pipe. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1 - 1/2 times the maximum working pressure. CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices In Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories that would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines shall be plugged or capped as appropriate during the testing procedures. Leaks shall be repaired, and the piping shall be re-tested until no leaks are found. ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so that ENGINEER may be present during the test. DISINFECTING Disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 33 13 00 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 178.24.200 33 05 26- 1 SECTION 33 05 26 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install identification markers for all exposed valves, piping, equipment, tanks, and warning signs, all in accordance with these specifications and the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related work specified in other sections includes: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1. ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 2. ANSI Z535 Safety Signs and Colors C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 1593 Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Plastic Film and Sheeting 2. ASTM D 3652 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Pressure-Sensitive Tapes 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets showing wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding. C. Submit one sample of each type of identification device to be used. D. Submit sample of each proposed color required by the color schedule. E. Submit the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 Quality Certified. 06/2024 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 178.24.200 33 05 26- 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE TAGS A. General: Provide each valve of size 2-inch and larger with an identification tag. Tag shall show the pipeline station (if applicable), type, manufacturer, date of manufacture, and pressure rating. B. Metal Tags: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.6 mm (0.025 inch) thick, Grade 304 stainless steel. Manufacturer shall be Seton, Brady, or approved equal. 2. Lettering: Pre-Stamped, Stamped], or Engraved letters; character size and words according to ANSI A13.1. C. Beaded Chains: No. 6 stainless steel, 114 mm (4-1/2 inch) long, with locking link. D. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. General: Labels for piping shall bear the full piping system name. Provide flow arrows and working pressure next to each label. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: 1. Vinyl: Factory fabricated vinyl, 0.102 mm (5 mil) thick, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Model Opti-Code by Seton, B-946 by Brady, or approved equal. 2. Polyester: Factory fabricated polyester, 0.05 mm (2 mil) thick, coated with acrylic adhesive. Model Poly-Code by Seton, or approved equal. 3. Plastic: Factory fabricated plastic film, roll formed, clear laminated to protect lettering. C. Identify fluid being conveyed and include flow direction arrow. 1. Language: English. 2. Lettering: Size and Color according to ANSI A 13.1. D. Color and Text per the Schedule at the end of this Section. 2.3 HOSE BIB SIGNS NON-POTABLE WATER A. Provide a properly labeled, rigid sign for each hose bib. Signs shall contain the header, pictogram/alert symbol, and messaging conforming to OSHA/ANSI A 535 requirements. Minimum size shall be 7-inch high by 10-inch wide. Signs shall be plastic with overlaminate and be pre-drilled for mounting. Manufacturer shall be Seton, Brady, or approved equal. 2.4 LABELS FOR EQUIPMENT AND TANKS A. Provide a label for each piece of mechanical equipment and/or tank. The label shall contain the equipment name, tag number, and identifying information such as size, liquid, horsepower, etc. Minimum label size shall be1-1/2 inches by 4-inches. Labels 06/2024 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 178.24.200 33 05 26- 3 shall be stainless steel, brass, or aluminum. Fiberglass labels may be used for corrosive environments. Manufacturer shall be Brady, Seton, or approved equal. 2.5 LABELS FOR AUTOMATIC START/STOP EQUIPMENT A. Provide a sign reading “CAUTION – EQUIPMENT STARTS AND STOPS AUTOMATICALLY” on equipment as shown on the drawings on identified in the specifications. Signs shall be vinyl with self-adhesive for application to the equipment. Minimum size shall be 7-inches by 10-inches. Manufacturer shall be Brady, Seton, or approved equal. 2.6 WARNING SIGNS A. Provide a properly labeled, rigid warning sign as shown on the drawings. Signs shall contain the header, pictogram/alert symbol, and messaging conforming to OSHA/ANSI A 535 requirements. Minimum size shall be 7-inch high by 10-inch wide. Signs shall be plastic with overlaminate and be pre-drilled for mounting. Manufacturer shall be Seton, Brady, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Markers and identification tags shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and shall be neat and uniform in appearance. Tags and markers shall be readily visible from all normal working locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Install tags with corrosion resistant chains. 2. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. 3. Identify small devices, such as in-line pumps, with tags. 4. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. B. Pipe Markers: 1. Identify all above grade piping. Include service, flow direction, and working pressure. 2. Provide snap-on type markers for pipes 6-inch diameter and smaller. Provide strap- on type for pipes over 6-inch diameter. 3. Each pipe shall me marked at: a. Intervals of 20-feet in straight runs. b. At least once in every room. c. Within 2 –feet of bends and valves. d. On the upstream side of Tees, branches, and other distribution points. e. On both sides of walls and floors through which the piping passes. C. Automatic Start/Stop Equipment 06/2024 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 178.24.200 33 05 26- 4 1. Attach signs for exposed equipment directly to the equipment. 2. Attach signs for sump pumps on the adjacent wall. D. Warning Signs 1. Attach to walls according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Equipment and Tank Labels 1. Attach labels to equipment with a pop rivet or equal. 3.4 SCHEDULES Color Schedule Pipe Contents Abbreviation Identification Pipe Color Marker Color Letter Color AHP Air, High Pressure Dark Green Blue White AI Air, Instrument Dark Green Blue White CL Chlorine (gas or liquid state)Yellow Orange Black CLS Chlorine Solution Yellow Orange Black CLV Chlorine Gas Under Vacuum Yellow Orange Black CV Chlorine Vent & Detection Line Yellow Orange Black FL Fluoride Light Blue/Red Orange Black FOR Fuel Oil Return Brown White FOS Fuel Oil Supply Brown White FSP Fire Protection Sprinkler System Red Red White HWR Domestic Hot Water Return Yellow Black HWS Domestic Hot Water Supply Yellow Black LSS Landscape Sprinkler System Green White NG Natural Gas Org-Red/Black Yellow Black OF Overflow Green White PPS Pump Suction (Potable Water)Light Blue Green White PTW Pump to Waste Green Yellow Black PW Potable Water Dark Blue Green White SA Sample Line Yellow Black SD Sanitary Drains Dark Gray Yellow Black SDR Storm Drain Green Green White UW Utility Water (Non-Potable Water) Magenta Yellow Black V Vent Dark Brown Yellow Black - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING 178.24.200 33 08 30- 1 SECTION 33 08 30 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTRACTOR shall test sanitary system, overflow, storm drain, and other gravity drains in accordance these specifications and with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining permits for discharging excess testing water and dechlorination of such water, if required. RELATED SECTIONS Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 828 Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines ASTM C 969 Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines ASTM C 1103 Standard Practice for Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines ASTM D 3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM F 1417 Standard Test Method for Installation of Plastic Gravity Sewer Line Using Low Pressure Air SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Furnish a written testing plan and schedule, including water source and methods for conveyance to the project, sequence, control, and disposal. Where deflection testing of flexible pipe is required, submit a method for mandrel testing or other measurement, as applicable to pipe size. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Gravity flow sanitary sewers are required to have a straight alignment and uniform grade between manholes. 06/2024 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING 178.24.200 33 08 30- 2 Flexible pipe, including “semi-rigid” pipe, is required to show no more than 5 percent deflection. Test pipe no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of a line segment but prior to final acceptance using a standard mandrel to verify that installed pipe is within specified deflection tolerances. Maximum allowable leakage for infiltration and exfiltration: The total infiltration or exfiltration shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole or 2 feet above the groundwater elevation, whichever is greater. Time allowed for pressure loss from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig shall be per Table 33 08 30 – 2 at the end of this section. PART 2 MATERIALS DEFLECTION MANDREL Design: CONTRACTOR shall construct a mandrel of steel or rigid plastic which can withstand a force of 200 psi without deforming. The mandrel shall have 9 or more "runners" or legs, as long as the number is an odd number. The mandrel barrel length shall be at least 75 percent of the pipe inside diameter. Sizing: The rigid mandrel shall have an outside diameter (O.D.) equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter (I.D.) of the pipe. The inside diameter of the pipe, for the purpose of determining the outside diameter of the mandrel, shall be the average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and the average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe. Dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other “tolerance package” shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. VIDEO EQUIPMENT Use color video equipment. Prepare three copies of the video in DVD format and deliver two copies to OWNER and one copy to ENGINEER. Record the project name, contractors name, date recorded, and locations of the video on the DVD. Produce a DVD using a pan-and-tilt radial-viewing pipe inspection camera that pans 275 degrees and rotates 360 degrees. Use a camera with an accurate footage counter which displays on the monitor the exact distance of the camera from the centerline of the starting manhole. Use a camera with camera height adjustment so that the camera lens is always centered at one-half the inside diameter, or higher, in the pipe being videoed. Provide a lighting system that allows the features and condition of the pipe to be clearly seen. A reflector in front of the camera may be required to enhance lighting in dark or large diameter pipe. PART 3 EXECUTION GENERAL Gravity pipes shall be tested for exfiltration or infiltration and deflection as indicated. Manholes and pipe shall be backfilled prior to testing. The maximum length of pipe 06/2024 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING 178.24.200 33 08 30- 3 tested shall be the 4 reaches between 5 manholes. Leakage tests shall be completed and approved prior to placing of permanent resurfacing of pavement. When leakage or infiltration exceeds the allowed amount, CONTRACTOR shall locate the leaks and make the necessary repairs or replacements to reduce the leakage or infiltration to the allowable limits. Individually detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of whether the test results are acceptable or not. CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water for testing of the gravity pipes. No materials shall be used which could damage the pipeline. Air test gauges shall be laboratory-calibrated test gauges, and if required by ENGINEER, shall be recalibrated by a certified laboratory prior to the leakage test. Air test gauges shall have a size and pressure range appropriate for the pipe being tested. Testing shall be performed in the presence of OWNER and/or ENGINEER. Remove debris, sediment, and other material from installed pipe prior to testing. Do not discharge or flush sand, gravel, concrete, debris, or other foreign material into any existing pipeline system. Flushing with clean water only will be allowed but with minimal flows to eliminate exceeding capacities of the existing gravity systems. TESTING SCHEDULE Leakage Tests Perform leakage tests as determined from the Table 33 08 30 - 1 below: 06/2024 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING 178.24.200 33 08 30- 4 TABLE 33 08 30 - 1 Criterion 1 Slope Between Manholes Criterion 2 Difference in Water Levels Pipe Size Manhole Delta H (feet) Test Water vs Ground Water Delta H (feet) Less than or equal to 10 ft Greater than 10 ft Greater than or equal to 4 ft Less than 4 ft Less than or equal to 24 inches See Criterion 2 Infiltration or Air (See Note 1) Exfiltration Infiltration or Air Greater than 24 inches See Criterion 2 See Criterion 2 Exfiltration Infiltration Notes: 1) If groundwater is present and at least 1 foot above the top of the pipe, perform an infiltration test. If groundwater is not present, perform an air test. 2) Definitions: a) Manhole Delta H is the invert elevation difference between two adjacent manholes. b) Test Water vs Groundwater Delta H is the required elevation of water surface for testing minus the average elevation of groundwater adjacent to the pipe to be tested. AIR PRESSURE TEST Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than 36-inch average inside diameter. Lines 36-inch average inside diameter and larger shall be “joint” tested at each joint. The minimum allowable for the pressure drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig during a joint test shall be 10 seconds, regardless of pipe size. Joint test shall be conducted as follows: Each joint shall be tested successfully. Joint tester shall be set over joint to be tested so that the two inflation tubes straddle the joint. Inflate tubes to 25 psig to seal off joint to be tested. Apply air pressure into void between inflation tubes until pressure reaches 4 psig. After pressure has stabilized, bleed air pressure back to 3.5 psig. Record time required for pressure to drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig. If the time in seconds for the air pressure to decrease from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig is greater than 10 seconds, the joint shall be presumed to be free from defect. When the time is less than 10 seconds pipe breakage, joint leakage, or leaking testing seals are indicated and an inspection must be made to determine the cause. CONTRACTOR shall affect such repairs as may be required to accomplish a successful air joint test. For pipe sections less than 36-inch average inside diameter: Determine the groundwater level. Plug both ends of the pipe. For concrete pipe, flood pipe and allow 2 hours to saturate concrete. Then drain and plug pipe. 06/2024 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING 178.24.200 33 08 30- 5 After a manhole to manhole section of pipe has been sliplined and prior to any services lines being connected to new liner, plug liner at each manhole with pneumatic plugs. Pressurize pipe to 4.0 psig. Increase pressure 1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of ground water over highest point in the system. Allow pressure to stabilize for 2 to 4 minutes. Adjust pressure to start at 3.5 psig (plus adjustment for ground water table). See Table 33 08 30 - 2 at the end of this Section. To determine air loss, measure the time interval for pressure to drop to 2.5 psig. The time must exceed that listed in the Table 33 08 30 - 2 at the end of this Section for pipe diameter and length. For sliplining, use diameter of carrier pipe. The test of the pipe and service laterals shall be conducted in the presence of ENGINEER. Testing of pipe, regardless of the pipe material, shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 828, C 1103, or ASTM F 1417, as applicable. Any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements shall be repaired and retested. EXFILTRATION TEST Exfiltration testing shall be completed in accordance with ASTM C 969 and as modified below. Testing shall be conducted in the presence of ENGINEER and/or OWNER. Each section of gravity lines shall be tested between successive manholes by closing the lower end and the inlet gravity lines of the upper manhole with stoppers or inflatable plugs. The pipe and manhole shall be filled with water to a point 4-feet above the centerline of the gravity line at the center of the upper manhole; or if ground water is present, 4-feet above the average adjacent ground water level, whichever is higher. Water shall remain in the pipe for at least one hour or until the water level stabilizes, whichever is longer, before the test begins. The minimum test duration shall be 4 hours. Unless indicated otherwise, CONTRACTOR shall measure exfiltration. Measure the amount of water added to the upstream manhole to maintain the water level at the elevation set above. Compare the amount added to the allowable leakage calculated below, and if the amount added is equal to or less than the allowable amount, the tested section of the pipe has passed. The allowable leakage will be computed by the formula: E = 0.000012 LD (H)1/2 Where: E = Allowable leakage in gallons per minute of gravity line tested. L = Length of gravity line and house connections tested, in feet. D = Internal diameter of the pipe, in inches. H = Elevation difference in feet between the water surface in the upper manhole and the centerline of the pipe at the lower manhole; or if ground water is present above the centerline of the pipe in the lower manhole, the difference in elevation between the water surface in the upper manhole and the ground water at the lower manhole. 06/2024 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING 178.24.200 33 08 30- 6 INFILTRATION TEST Infiltration testing shall be completed in accordance with ASTM C 969 and as modified below. Testing shall be conducted in the presence of ENGINEER and/or OWNER. Groundwater elevation must be not less than 2 feet above the highest point of pipe or service lead (house service). Determine groundwater elevation Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. Insert calibrated 90° V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes. Take five readings of accumulated volume over a period of 2 hours and use average for infiltration. The average must not exceed that calculated using the equation in paragraph 3.4.D above. DELFECTION TEST Mandrel Test CONTRACTOR shall test all flexible and semi-rigid pipe 30-inches and smaller for deflection, joint displacement, and other obstructions by passing the mandrel through the pipe not less than 30 days after completion of the trench backfill, but prior to permanent pavement resurfacing. Testing shall confirm the pipe has no more than 5 percent deflection. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D 3034. Pull the approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections. Pipe with diameter less than the mandrel will be considered defective and CONTRACTOR shall replace it. Flexible or semi-rigid pipe larger than 30-inches shall have deflections measured by a rigid metal bar, a rigid frame, or other method approved by ENGINEER. The average inside diameter shall be measured before the pipe is installed and backfilled. Deflection is defined as the difference between vertical inside diameter in the pipe before and after installation and backfilling. MANHOLE TEST Manholes shall be hydrostatically tested for leakage prior to backfilling. Prior to testing, manholes shall be visually inspected for obvious defects. Leaks or cracks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. All pipes entering the manhole shall be sealed at a point outside the manhole walls to include testing of the pipe to manhole joints. The manhole shall be filled with water to a level 2-inches below the top of the frame. Safety lines shall be secured to all plugs utilized. After a period of at least one hour to allow the water level to stabilize, the manhole shall be refilled and the water level shall be marked. The water level shall again be checked after 4 hours. The maximum leakage shall be 0.025 gallons per foot of manhole diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour. The exterior of the manhole shall be inspected during this period for visible evidence of leakage. Visible moisture, 06/2024 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING 178.24.200 33 08 30- 7 sweating, or beads of water on the exterior of the manhole shall not be considered leakage, but any water running across the surface will be considered leakage and shall be repaired to the satisfaction of ENGINEER regardless of the volume of water lost. VIDEO INSPECTION Immediately after cleaning and testing, video the gravity pipeline to document the condition of the line. Notify ENGINEER 24 hours in advance of any video inspection so that ENGINEER or RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE may observe inspection operations. Survey video inspection DVDs shall be continuous for pipe segments between manholes. Do not leave gaps in the videotaping of a segment between manholes and do not show a single segment on more than one DVD. Do not pull or propel the video camera through the line at a speed greater than 30 feet per minute. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE TEST Line and grade of pipe may not vary more than 1/2 inch in 10 feet and not more than 1 inch variance from true line at any location. Grade of pipe may not vary more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet for all design grades less than or equal to 1 percent and not more the 1/2 inch total variance from true grade at any location. Also, grade of pipe may not vary more than 1/2 inch in 10 feet for all design grades greater than 1 percent and not more than 1 inch total variance from true grade at any location. These tolerances shall be acceptable provided that such variation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert. The variation in the invert elevation between adjoining ends of pipe due to eccentricity of joining surface and pipe interior surfaces shall not exceed 1/64 inch per inch of pipe diameter, or 1/4 inch maximum. - END OF SECTION - TABLE 33 08 30 – 2 (1.0 psi Pressure Drop) Pipe Diameter (inch) Minimum Time (min:sec) Length for Minimum Time (ft) Time for Longer Length (sec/ft) Specification Time for Length (L) Shown (min:sec) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 6 5:40 398 0.8548 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 8 7:33 298 1.5196 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 10 9:27 239 2.3743 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11:52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 12 11:20 199 3.4190 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39 28:30 15 14:10 159 5.3423 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43 31:10 35:37 40:04 44:31 18 17:00 133 7.6928 17:00 19:14 25:39 32:03 38:28 44:52 51:17 57:42 64:06 21 19:50 114 10.4708 19:50 26:11 34:54 43:38 52:21 61:05 69:48 78:32 87:15 24 22:40 99 13.6762 22:48 34:11 45:35 56:59 68:23 79:47 91:10 102:34 113:58 27 25:30 88 17.3089 28:51 43:16 57:42 72:07 86:33 100:58 115:24 129:49 144:14 30 28:20 80 21.3690 35:37 53:25 71:14 89:02 106:51 124:39 142:28 160:16 178:05 36 34:00 66 30.768 51:17 76:55 102:34 128:12 153:50 179:29 205:07 230:46 256:24 42 39:48 57 41.883 69:48 104:42 139:37 174:30 209:24 244:19 279:13 314:07 349:02 48 45:34 50 54.705 91:10 136:45 182:21 227:55 273:31 319:06 364:42 410:17 455:53 54 51:02 44 69.236 115:24 173:05 230:47 288:29 346:11 403:53 461:34 519:16 576:58 60 56:40 40 85.476 142:28 213:41 284:55 356:09 427:23 498:37 569:50 641:04 712:18 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 1 SECTION 33 11 34 DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR (OIL LUBRICATED) PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Furnish, deliver, and install a deep well, vertically suspended dry-location centrifugal well pump, oil lubricated with surface discharge into existing well casing of 12-inches in diameter to depths as shown in the Contract Drawings. The deep well pump shall also be provided with a vertical squirrel cage induction motor with a Weather Protected Type I (WPI) enclosure. The hydraulic grade line elevation or head of the system that controls the design head for the well pumps will vary depending on the demand of the system. The range of the hydraulic grade line is shown in the Contract Drawings. RELATED WORK Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 26 05 74 Electric Motors Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract: AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A 36 Structural Steel ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains AWWA C 652 Standard for Disinfecting of Water-Storage Facilities AWWA E 103 Standard for Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 2 NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) NSF 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Components NSF 372 Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content NSF 600 Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria for Chemicals in Drinking Water SUBMITTALS CONTRACTOR shall submit for review to ENGINEER, sufficient literature, detailed specifications, and drawings to show dimensions, make, style, speed, size, type, horsepower, head-capacity, efficiency, materials used, design features, internal construction, weights, and any other information required by ENGINEER for review of all pumping equipment. No pumping equipment will be accepted, and installation will not be allowed, until such review has been completed. All submittals shall clearly state any deviations from the specified requirements. The following shall also be furnished with the submittal: Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. The equipment manufactured shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the specified design point. Equipment manufactured shall provide complete and detailed information regarding the installation of the pumps. Any installation requirements or operating conditions which the supplier or manufacturer’ feel to be critical to the safe and reliable operation of the pumps should be identified and described in detail. Shop drawings submitted for review also shall include electrical diagrams, schematic control diagrams, and a detailed description of how the control system is to function. OPERATING CONDITIONS Table 33 11 34-1 indicates the operating conditions of the pumps. TABLE 33 11 34-1 OPERATING CONDITIONS DEEP WELL TURBINE PUMP DESCRIPTION HITR #2 WELL Design capacity of pump (gpm) 1,400 Design total dynamic head at discharge bowl assembly (feet) 468 Pump Setting Depth (feet) 450 Nominal Operating Speed (rpm) 1800 Minimum Efficiency at Design Point 84% Maximum NPSHR at Design Point, ft 15.8 DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 3 DESCRIPTION HITR #2 WELL Minimum Motor Horsepower 250 Column Size (diameter), inch 10 Minimum Shaft Size (inches) 1.69 (SS 416) Inside Diameter of Well Casing, inch 15.25 Maximum Bowl Diameter, inch 11.6 Approx. Discharge Elevation (ft. above MSL) 4,646 Model No.: National K12HC Utility Power (volts, phase, hertz) 480,3,60 MECHANICAL DEFECTS AND REJECTIONS CONTRACTOR furnished pumps that have mechanical defects or do not meet the requirements for head-capacity, horsepower, efficiency, and vibration requirements will be rejected, and shall be replaced without additional cost to OWNER for furnishing, removal, reinstallation, and retesting. Mechanical defects shall include excessive vibration, improper balancing of any rotating parts, improper tolerances, binding, excessive bearing or motor heating, defective materials, including materials that do not conform to the Specifications, improper fitting of parts, and any other defect which will in time damage the pump or unreasonably impair its efficiency or operation. WARRANTY CONTRACTOR furnished equipment covered by these specifications shall be warranted against defective parts due to faulty material or workmanship for one (1) year after date of installation. CONTRACTOR shall guarantee to replace any defective parts within the period of time specified at no additional cost to OWNER. If CONTRACTOR has to pull pump to replace defective parts, CONTRACTOR shall guarantee to pull and replace pump at no additional cost to OWNER. FACTORY TESTING Equipment shall be factory tested and inspected as specified hereinafter. All costs for the tests shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall submit the complete shop test procedures to ENGINEER for approval at least 30 days prior to the shop test. In the event any equipment fails to meet the performance values set forth in this specification, the equipment shall be modified and re-tested or replaced with equipment that performs in accordance with this specification. DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 4 Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall be checked for compliance to the customer's purchase order. Pump and motor shall be performance tested as specified hereinafter; all pumps shall be tested with motor cables to be supplied with the pumps. Three copies of certified test reports, including actual test records, shall be submitted, and approved by ENGINEER prior to shipment of the equipment. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation defects shall be made. Rotation shall be checked with the pumps running dry, after which each shall be submerged and run for 30 minutes. Any deficiencies identified shall be corrected and appropriate testing redone. A certified test report on the results of the factory testing shall be supplied with each pump at the time of shipment. Pumps shall be tested at the actual motor drive speed and at the “Design capacity of the pump” and “Design total dynamic head” conditions specified in Table 33 11 34-1. Factory test of the pumping equipment shall be made in accordance with the Test Code of Hydraulic Institute Standards. Each pump shall be tested for performance at the factory to determine the head vs. capacity, motor total electrical power draw (KVA), and motor active electrical power draw (KW) for the full speed at which the pumps are specified and shown on a performance test curve, certified by a registered professional engineer, as continuous functions throughout the pump's performance range. Tests of models, prototypes or similar units will not be acceptable. All tests shall be run in accordance with the test code for centrifugal pumps of the Standards of Hydraulic Institute, latest edition. The motor and cable on each pump shall be tested for moisture content or insulation defects. After the test, the pump cable end shall be fitted with a shrink-fit rubber boot to protect it from moisture or water. Test curves for each pump shall have the capacity plotted as abscissas, and the operating head, brake horsepower, and efficiency plotted as ordinates. Test curves shall cover the full range of operation from shut-off to maximum capacity. The characteristics of the pumps shall conform with this specification. All pumping equipment which fails to meet the requirements of the Test Code shall be removed and shall be replaced with pumping equipment which meets the specifications requirements. Five (5) notarized copies of certified factory performance test curves for each pump shall be furnished and approved before shipment of the pumps to the site. Pumps shall have design and operational characteristics which provide for maximum efficiency and minimum hydraulic turbulence in the pump casing at the design capacity of the pump and design total dynamic head specified in Table 33 11 34-1, "Operating Conditions Deep Well Turbine Pump". Each pump shall operate without excessive noise, vibration, heating, cavitation, or damage to the pump. The actual certified pump capacities shall at a minimum meet the design conditions specified in Table 33 11 34-1. PART 2 PRODUCTS DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 5 DEEP WELL VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP The pumps shall be the deep well, oil lubricated, vertical turbine type suitable for pumping drinking water. All material, manufacturing, and performance standards shall be in compliance with AWWA E 103 [and with NSF 60, NSF 61, NSF 372, and NSF 600, as applicable for potable water applications. The NSF certifications shall be for the entire pump assembly from the suction bell, pump bowls, column piping assembly and up to, and including, the discharge head.] Performance Requirements Pump Speed - The pumps shall operate as specified in Table 33 11 34-1. Pump Characteristics - The pump shall be characterized by head capacity curves of steadily decreasing head with increasing capacity. Maximum head shall be at zero flow. The pump shall have a minimum efficiency as provided in Table 33 11 34-1 during operation against the system head. Pump head - capacity curves shall indicate that these losses have been included. Pumps shall have head-capacity curves similar to that of the specified pump. Pumps having curves that show a flatter or near horizontal slope over a section in the head – capacity curve will not be accepted. Curves with head-capacity curves with slopes of the curve flatter than that shown for the specified pump will not be accepted. The pump and motor shall be capable of producing the flow rate and total dynamic heads indicated in Table 33 11 34-1. Motor Characteristics - Under no operating conditions shall the required pump brake horsepower exceed the nameplate rating of the motor being furnished. The pump shall be designed to operate throughout its entire range without excessive vibration or noise. Vertical Turbine Pump Components Pumps The vertical turbine pump for the wells shall be as manufactured by National Pumps, Flowserve, American Marsh, or approved equal and shall be a multi stage oil lube lube bowl assembly (or approved equal). Unless otherwise stated herein, the pump shall in all respects conform to the American National Standard ANSI/AWWA E 103 for “Standard for Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps” and shall comply with all local and state sanitary and safety regulations. Discharge Head The discharge head shall be fabricated steel, (ASTM A53 Grade B Pipe and ASTM A 36 Steel Plate), accurately machined and with a surface discharge. Discharge flange shall be machined and drilled to ANSI standards for 150 lb. rating and shall be sized to match the specified system. The top of the discharge head shall have a rabbet fit to accurately locate the vertical hollow shaft driver, and have a diameter equal to the driver base diameter (BD) and not less than 24.5- inches. Lifting lugs of sufficient strength to support the weight of the complete unit shall be provided. The base shall be round or square. Head must be able to accept the monitoring tube, well vent, and other tubing as shown on the Contract Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall modify the well base dimensions on the drawings to match supplied head. DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 6 The high-pressure bleed-off stuffing box shall be cast iron and rated for a minimum 50 psi discharge pressure and shall contain a minimum of five acrylic graphite packing rings and shall have a grease chamber. The packing gland shall be bronze secured in place with stainless steel studs and adjusting nuts. The stuffing box bearing shall be C-844 bronze. A rubber slinger shall be installed on the top shaft above the packing gland. The top shaft shall be Type 416 stainless-steel and shall extend though the stuffing box. Discharge head shall be equipped with a standard (aluminum, four quart lockable) oil reservoir fitted with solenoid valve (120 VAC) and site drip oiler. The top line shaft (head shaft) shall be of A582 Grade 416 Stainless Steel and shall not exceed 10 feet in length. Impeller adjustment shall be provided at the top of the head shaft by means of a bronze adjusting nut of ASTM B584 alloy C83800 which shall be positively locked in position. A lifting soleplate shall be supplied and installed, if required by the pump manufacturer. Bolt holes shall be tapped into the sole plate and capped on the bottom side to prevent concrete intrusion. A neoprene gasket and cadmium plate bolts shall be used to seal the discharge head to the sole plate. The pump manufacture shall include the method of adjusting the pump impellers at the top of the head shalt. This method shall provide a positive locking device. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that the discharge head is structurally and mechanically adequate for the provided and installed pump configuration. Column Assembly The line shaft for the well shall be of A582 Grade 416 Stainless Steel (118,000 psi min.). They shall be furnished in interchangeable sections not over 20 feet in length. The butting faces shall be machined square to the axis of the shaft, with maximum permissible axial misalignment of the thread axis with the shaft axis 0.002-inch in 6-inch. The size of the shaft shall be no less than that determined by ANSI/AWWA E101 Specifications, Section 5.5 for C1045 line shaft, adjusted for A582 Grade 416 Stainless Steel material, and shall be such that elongation due to hydraulic thrust will not exceed the axial clearance of the impellers in the pump bowls. Maximum runout in 10-feet shall not exceed 0.005-inches. The line shaft bearing shall be provided with ASTM A269 grade 304 stainless steel sleeves at the location of each line shaft bearing. The line shaft bearing shall be of 70 minimum shore hardness, neoprene, snap-in type, internally spiral grooved to flush out sand and other abrasives and mounted in ductile iron A536 Gr. 60-40- 18 bearing retainers held in position in the column coupling by means of the butted ends of the column pipe. Bearing spacing shall not exceed 10 feet. The shaft enclosing tube shall be of ASTM A 120, Schedule 80 with the ends machined square and parallel, threaded internally to receive the line shaft bearings. Maximum tube thread runout in 5-foot length shall not exceed 0.005". Bearing spacing shall not exceed 5 feet. The outer column piping shall be of ASTM A53 Grade B Schedule 40 steel pipe in interchangeable sections not over 10 feet in length with the ends of each section faced parallel and machined with 8 straight threads per inch permitting the ends to butt and ensuring alignment when connected by standard mill steel couplings. The weight of the column pipe shall be no less than that stated in AWWA E 103, Section 5.1, “Standard Specifications for Discharge Column Pipe”. Top and bottom sections of column pipe shall not exceed 5-feet in length. DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 7 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that the column piping is structurally and mechanically adequate for the provided and installed pump configuration. Pump Bowl Assembly Pump bowl castings shall be of close-grained cast iron ASTM A48 Class 30 or ASTM A536 ductile iron Class 60-40-18 where required to meet the hydrostatic pressure criteria listed below. The water passages shall be free of blowholes, sand holes, and other detrimental defects, shall be lined with porcelain enamel, and shall be accurately machined and fitted. The finished bowls shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the head at rated capacity or 1- 1/2 times the shut-off head, whichever is greater. The impellers shall be no-lead bronze ASTM B584 alloy C83800, enclosed type, and shall be statically balanced, and shall be fastened securely to the impeller shaft with taper split bushings of steel. Impellers shall be adjustable vertically by an external means. Impeller skirt and series case throat area shall be thick enough to allow for machining and wearing at the time of repair. The bowl wear rings and impeller wear rings shall be hardened 17-4 stainless steel with a Rockwell C-Scale Hardness number of 44. The pump shaft shall be of A582 Grade 416 Stainless Steel turned, ground and polished. Bearings shall be Morse Marine Bearings consisting of sleeve bearings with a Naval Brass outer shell super-bonded to a fluted rubber bearing surface (or approved equal) above and below each impeller. The pump shaft shall have chromed journals at the bearing points. The size of the shaft shall be no less than that determined by AWWA Specifications E103, Section A4.3, Paragraph 4.3.3. The discharge case shall be fitted with bypass ports to allow release of fluids escaping through the throttle bearing and oil from the line shaft bearings. The discharge case shall also be fitted with a bronze ASTM B505 alloy C84400 tube adaptor bearing of proper size to connect to the shaft enclosing tube. The discharge case shall be threaded on the outside for column sizes up to 14 inches and fitted with a cast iron ASTM A48 Class 30 column adaptor of the proper size to connect to the column selected. Likewise, the suction case shall also be threaded on the O.D. and fitted with a cast iron or steel suction adaptor. Suction Pipe and Strainer. The suction pipe shall not be required. A stainless steel cone strainer shall be provided having a net inlet area equal to at least four times the suction pipe area. The maximum opening size shall not be more than 75% of the minimum opening of the water passage through the bowl or impeller. ANALYSIS Tests may be conducted with shop motor to facilitate the manufacturing process. A minimum speed curve shall be plotted on the performance curve, based on the affinity laws and the test data. All gauges shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. All flow meters and other test instruments shall be calibrated as required by ANSI/HI standards. DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 8 In order to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur to the pump structure at any speed within the specified operating range, the following analysis shall be required: Pump manufacturer shall perform a structural frequency analysis of the above ground structural components utilizing a FEA method to ensure that no structural natural frequencies are excited to a degree that would cause measured vibration amplitudes at the top of the discharge head to exceed the requirements of ANSI/HI 9.6.4-2009. When deemed necessary by the experience of the manufacturer, the below ground structural components shall also be included in the analysis. The FEA method should include the use of ProE/Mechanica or an equivalent software. All pump assembly components, including the motor, shall be represented as solid elements, and if idealizations are used in place of solid elements, then a complete description of method for the idealization shall be included in the report. The analysis shall also include all modes of interest and pictorially represent each mode shape. Modes of interest are defined as those structural frequencies that exist below 120% of the maximum operating speed. When significant modifications are required to lower the system's natural frequency, the pump structure's stresses and deflections shall also be reviewed. Analysis reports shall conclude acceptable operation at the analyzed operating speeds. The design critical frequency shall be at least 20% above or below the operating range of the pump. Manufacturer shall provide documentation of the analysis ensuring that the specified requirements have been met, and that documentation should be signed and stamped by the professionally licensed engineer who performed the analysis work. When measured in the direction of maximum amplitude on the pump and motor bearing housings, shall not exceed limits given in the latest ANSI/HI nomograph for the applicable pump type. MOTOR Pump motors shall be a vertical hollow shaft, premium efficiency, inverter duty, electric motor, and shall be sized as noted in Table 33 11 34-1. They shall have a non-reverse ratchet, P-base, squirrel cage induction design. Motor shall have Class B or Class F insulation with temperature rise as specified by NEMA standards for class of insulation used and shall have a 1.15 service factor. The pump motor will be operating in an ambient temperature range of 50 – 110 degrees Fahrenheit. Pump motors shall be provided with a vibration switch. Switch rating 120 VAC, 2 amps minimum. Pump motors shall have over temperature protection, which shall consist of a minimum of six RTD’s embedded in the motor windings and two RTD’s at the two bearings. Wiring to an external junction box shall be provided. RTD’s shall be 100– ohm platinum three wire elements. Thrust bearing shall be chosen to handle the continuous down-thrust as specified by the pump manufacturer with an AFMBA L-10 bearing life of 12,320 hours and an L-50 of 61,600 hours. Provisions shall be made for momentary up-thrust equal to 30% of rated down-thrust. DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 9 The motor shall be suitable for across-the-line starting, soft start, and shall be capable of variable frequency drive starting. The motor rating shall be such that at design it will not be loaded beyond nameplate rating and at no place on the pump curve shall the loading exceed the service factor. The motor temperature shall be rated no higher than the allowable operating temperature of the motor thrust and radial bearings and in no case shall it exceed the temperature rating of the insulation class used to wind the motor. The motor primary thrust bearing shall incorporate a grounding ring to prevent damage from VFD harmonics and/or stray electrical currents. Grounding rings shall be stainless split-type. Ground rings shall be connected to the electrical ground system for the facility. Ground ring manufacturer shall be Aegis SGR (for up to 500 HP motors) and Aegis PRO (for motors over 500 HP) or approved equal. For motors over 100 HP insulated upper bearings shall be provided. The insulating bearing material shall be alumina oxide or ceramic. Insulated bearing manufacturer shall be SKF, NTN Corporation, GMN Bearing USA, or approved equal. The junction box shall be oversized to accommodate the wiring connection. APPURTENANCES Well Monitoring Tube CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install two (1 ¼-inch) diameter well monitoring tubes in each well consisting of Schedule 80 PVC pipe. The tubes shall be furnished in sections not over 20 feet in length and shall be joined with flush threaded couplings. The PVC tube shall be joined and banded to the pump column with stainless steel bands at maximum of 10 feet. A minimum of two 1/4 -inch diameter vent holes for every 10 feet of length shall be provided throughout the entire length of the monitoring tube. The depth of the monitoring tube shall be as indicated in the Contract Drawings. The bottom end shall be capped. Well Vent The well vent shall consist of brass 1-inch diameter pipe through the concrete well head extended up to 18 inches above the bottom plate of the pump discharge head with a 180 degree bend made of two steel ells. The outlet end of the vent pipe shall be covered with No. 14 stainless steel wire mesh securely fastened by a stainless steel band. The lower end of the vent pipe shall be threaded into the well surface plate and provide a water tight seal. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION The supplier of the well pump, motor and appurtenances shall have been in business for not less than 10 years. The primary function of the supplier shall be water well pumps and motors. This supplier shall have sole responsibility for all materials contained within this specification section DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 10 Install pump and motor at the location shown in the Contract Drawings and according with manufacturer's recommendations. Shop and field painting shall be in accordance with and as specified in Section 09900. All pumps, complete with drive system, in place at the jobsite, shall not exceed acceptable field vibration limits given in the latest revisions of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. All pumps shall be free of static unbalance; shall be free of dynamic unbalance up to the maximum speed of the pump and drive system; shall be free of torsional vibration from 10 percent below the minimum speed to 10 percent above the maximum speed of the pump and drive system; and shall be free of apparent unbalance caused by defective bearings, by close fittings parts which may rub on the rotating parts intermittently, or by loose discs or rotor parts, or unbalanced loads. The motor/discharge head assembly shall be shimmed with respect to the well casing flange to bring the motor/discharge assembly into optimum alignment with any variations that the pump column and line shaft may exhibit from being truly plumb. Such shims must be structurally sound and securely attached. The water tight seal between the discharge head and the well casing flange must be maintained. FIELD TESTS After installation, the pump shall be given an operating test to demonstrate freedom from mechanical defects, excessive noise, and vibration. The test shall include operating the pump continuously while throttling the discharge as needed. The operating test shall be performed for a minimum of one hour, or as directed by ENGINEER. Pumps with variable speed drives shall be tested at maximum speed, and at the average and minimum speeds listed under the specification for the pumps. A copy of actual test data shall be furnished to ENGINEER. Tests for acceptable vibration shall be made, at no additional cost to OWNER, in the field on each pump system, which in the opinion of ENGINEER, seem to have excessive vibration. All field tests shall be running tests with the pump pumping the product for which it is intended and each pump system shall be tested separately with no other pumps running. All testing shall be done in the presence of ENGINEER. Amplitude as used in this Specification, shall mean total peak-to-peak displacement. The required test for acceptable vibration will be the measurement of this peak-to-peak displacement and will be performed with an IRD Vibration Meter, Model 306; Bently-Nevada TK-8, or approved equal. DISINFECTING Source of Water The Contractor shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for disinfection of the pumping system. Testing Procedure Leakage and pressure testing must be completed prior to disinfection procedures. DEEP WELL PUMP AND MOTOR 06/2024 (OIL LUBRICATED) 178.24.200 PAGE 33 11 34 - 11 All water piping installed under this Contract shall be disinfected using an approved disinfection method in accordance with the "American Water Works Association Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains" (AWWA C 651) Pump and related piping installed under this Contract shall be disinfected using an approved disinfection method in accordance with the "American Water Works Association Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains" (AWWA C 651) and “American Water Works Association Standard for Disinfecting Wells” (AWWA C 654). Heavily chlorinated water shall not be discharged onto the ground. Upon completion of disinfection, Sodium Bisulfate (NaHSO3) shall be applied to the heavily chlorinated water to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine residual remaining. Water shall be neutralized to less than 1 ppm. After approval of disinfection, CONTRACTOR shall flush the new system until the chlorine residual is a maximum of 0.3 ppm. At the end of 24 hours, a bacteriological test will be performed by OWNER to ensure adequate disinfection. If the initial disinfection fails to provide satisfactory bacteriological results, or shows the presence of coliform, then the line shall be re- chlorinated, flushed, and retested until satisfactory results are obtained at the expense to the Contractor. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES 178.24.200 PAGE 33 12 00 - 1 SECTION 33 12 00 MECHANICAL APPURTENANCES PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all valves, and equipment, complete and operable in accordance with the Specifications. Where 2 or more valves or equipment of the same type and size are required, the valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall verify that flanges on pipe match the bolt hole pattern of the flanges on the mechanical appurtenances. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 45 00 Quality Control & Materials Testing Section 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Section 33 05 07.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (ASTM D 1785) REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of these Specifications to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) A 126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings A 216 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service B 584 Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) C 504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves, 3-inch through 72-inch C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service C512 Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service C 515 Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service C 518 Dual-Disc Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service 06/2024 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES 178.24.200 PAGE 33 12 00 - 2 C 550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) B 16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings B 16.34 Valves – Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit catalog cut sheets on all mechanical appurtenances including: fittings, valves, or other items shown on the Drawings referencing each item by mark number. Information shall indicate manufacturer specification compliance, Cv factor, pressure rating, and dimensional data. PART 2 PRODUCTS GATE VALVES Gate valves shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C-509 or C-515. Valves shall be of the resilient-seat type with non-rising stem (NRS), opening to the left, and provided with a 2-inch square operating nut for buried valves or hand wheel for valves located in structures. Buried valves shall be of flange or mechanical joint design to match pipe joint system. Valves, valve-operating units, stem extensions and other accessories shall be installed by CONTRACTOR where shown, or where required in the opinion of ENGINEER, to provide for convenience in operation. Where buried valves are indicated, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install valve boxes to 3-inches above grade in unimproved areas or at grade with concrete collar in improved areas. All valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. The valve shall have a two part thermosetting or fusion bonded epoxy protective coating (10 mil minimum inside and out) system that is non-toxic and imparts no taste to water. The epoxy shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C550 and be ANSI/NSF 61 certified. The flanges of valves may be raised or plain faced. Flanges of valves shall be faced and drilled to 125-lb American Standard template. Provide ASME Class 250 flanges for valves located on the high pressure discharge side piping. All valves shall be furnished with pressure classes equal to or better than the pressure class of the pipe with which the valves are to be used. Unless otherwise specified, each valve body shall be tested under a test pressure equal to twice its design water-working pressure. Valves shall be manufactured by Mueller Co., Clow Valve Co., American Flow Control, Kennedy Valve Co., American AVK Company (high pressure), or approved equal. 06/2024 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES 178.24.200 PAGE 33 12 00 - 3 BUTTERFLY VALVES Butterfly valves shall be double eccentric type, AWWA C504 Standard Class 150B, NSF 61 certified and have a Flange by Flange, Flange by Mechanical Joint, Mechanical Joint, or wafer body style, as indicated on the drawings, rated for 250 psi working pressure. The valves shall have a heavy duty ductile iron body with flanges fully faced and drilled per ANSI B16.1 Class 150B. Shells shall be tested at a minimum of 400 psi. Maximum flow velocity shall be less than 16 fps for cold water service. The valve shall have a hand wheel operator, 2-inch Standard AWWA nut operator, or traveling nut actuators rated at 450 ft. lbs. torque, and integral disc position indicators, or connected to an electric motor operator as noted on the Drawings. The valve shall have a polyamide cured epoxy or fusion bonded epoxy protective coating (10 mil minimum inside and out) system that is non-toxic and imparts no taste to water. The epoxy shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C550 and be ANSI/NSF 61 certified. The valve shall be manufactured by Av-Tek, or approved equal. BALL VALVES Valves shall be rated for the working pressure of the system. Stainless Steel Ball Valves shall be full port opening stainless steel and have adjustable stem packing gland. Body and ball shall be stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A351. Seats shall be reinforced PTFE and packing stem shall be PTFE. The handle shall be Type 304 stainless steel with vinyl insulator. The valves shall conform to MSS-SP-100 and be Apollo 76F-100, NIBCO T-585-S6-R-66-LL, Watts Series S-FBV- 1, or approved equal. Bronze Ball Valves shall be full port opening bronze body, hard chrome plated brass ball and have adjustable stem packing gland. Seat and seals shall be PTFE. Handle shall be heavy, duty, zinc-plated steel with vinyl insulator. They shall be Watts Series B6080, NIBCO T585-70, Apollo 70-100 Series, or approved equal. PVC Ball Valves shall be full port opening with all wetted materials composed of Schedule 80 PVC. Valve shall have true union ends or flanged ends to mate with ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanges. PVC ball valves shall be NIBCO Chemtrol Series, Spears Mfg. Co. TU-2-2025, or approved equal. PVC Ball valves are not allowed to be connected to any pump discharge piping. SERVICE SADDLES Shall consist of a 2-piece bronze body and strap, meeting applicable sections of AWWA C800. Outlet shall be tapped with AWWA I.P. thread (F.I.P.T.). Outlet shall be o ring sealed. Saddles shall be ANSI/NSF 61 certified. Shall be Mueller H-13000 Series, Romac Style 202B, or approved equal. VALVE BOXES AND LIDS 06/2024 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES 178.24.200 PAGE 33 12 00 - 4 All buried valves shall be installed complete with 6-inch diameter slide type, two-piece cast iron valve box. Manufacturer be Tyler 562 Series, or approved equal. The valve box lid shall be designated “WATER” unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings. Concrete Collars shall be 10" thick x 2'- 6" in diameter centered on the valve box. They shall have two circumscribing #4 bars, one at three inches from the outside edge and a second bar nine inches from the outside edge each centered in the concrete. Concrete shall be 3000 psi. PRESSURE GAUGES Pressure gauges shall be provided where shown on the Contract Drawings. Gauges shall meet the requirements of ASME B40.1 Grade 2A and be industrial type with stainless steel movement, liquid filled, and stainless steel, Polypropylene, or Phenolic case. Gauges shall have a rear blowout disc or panel. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, pressure gauges shall have a 4-1/2-inch dial with white face and black lettering, a ½-inch threaded connection, and shut-off valve. Measuring element shall be a stainless steel Bourdon Tube. Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable units, with an accuracy of ± 0.5 percent to 150 percent of the working pressure. Gauges shall be manufactured be Ashcroft Model 1279 Duragauge, 1900 Series SOLFRUNT by Ametek (U.S. Gauge), Process Gauge by Marsh Bellofram, or approved equal. Pressure gauges that connect to lines other than potable water shall have gauge guards to prevent corrosion and clogging. Gauge guards shall have a durable flexible diaphragm which serves as a protective barrier between the process fluid and instrument. The diaphragm shall be either elastomer or Teflon and rated for the pressure of the gauge. Pressure gauges for chemical service lines shall be 2-1/2-inch diameter with integral diaphragm seal. These gauges shall be manufactured by Plast-o-matic, or approved equal. RUBBER FLAPPER SWING CHECK VALVES Rubber flapper swing check valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA C508. The valve shall be provided with flanges in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125. The valve body shall be full flow equal to the nominal pipe diameter at all points through the valve. The seating surface shall be on a 45-degree angle to minimize disc travel. The valve shall be provided with a disc closure accelerator. The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. The disc shall be precision molded Buna-N (NBR) ASTM D2000-BG. The disc accelerator shall be stainless steel. The check valve shall be Series 100SR by APCO (DeZURIK), Series 7200 Surgebuster by Val-Matic, or approved equal HOSE BIBBS and SAMPLING TAPS Hose bibbs shall be as-manufactured by Watts, or approved equal, and shall include an integral vacuum breaker or built-in backflow protection devices and cast iron wheel handle. Sampling Taps shall be smooth nose type. Valves shall be stainless steel. 06/2024 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES 178.24.200 PAGE 33 12 00 - 5 COMBINATION AIR VALVES Combination Air valves shall be single body, double orifice valves conforming to the requirements of AWWA C 512. Valve float shall be stainless steel. Valves shall provide dynamic sealing at 1.5 psi. Valves shall have an insect screen with downward pointing outlets. Valves shall have surge protection discs. Valves shall be the size indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall be Bermad C70-SP, or approved equal. FLOW METER See Section 40 91 23 – Miscellaneous Properties Measurement Devices. PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS See Section 40 91 23 – Miscellaneous Properties Measurement Devices. ROSSUM SAND FILTER The Rossum Sand Filter, as manufactured by Roscoe Moss Company, shall be provided and installed as shown on the Drawings. The Rossum Sand Filter shall be a complete set including, but not limited to, O-ring gaskets, Pyrex centrifuge tube, Dole flow control valve, retaining nuts, nipples, 1/4-inch gate valve, and 3/8-inch angle valve. Provide the following spare parts for the Rossum Sand Filter: Pyrex Centrifuge Tube (#2804) Tube Cleaning Brush (#2808) All O-Ring Gaskets (#2802, #2803, and #2806) Tube Retaining Nut (#2807) PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Valves, valve-operating units, stem extensions and other accessories shall be installed by CONTRACTOR where shown, or where required in the opinion of ENGINEER, to provide for convenience in operation. Where buried valves are indicated, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install valve boxes at grade with concrete collars. All valves and boxes shall be new and recently manufactured. Install mechanical appurtenances as indicated on the plans and in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION 178.24.200 33 13 00- 1 SECTION 33 13 00 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers testing and disinfection in order to remove bacteriological contamination of the pipeline. Disinfection is only required if the pipeline is used for potable water. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining permits for discharging excess testing water and dechlorination of such water, if required. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Work specified in other Sections includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal procedures 2. Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Fittings 3. Section 33 05 07 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (AWWA C900 and C905) 4. Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200, Modified) 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. 1. AWWA C-651 - Disinfecting Water Mains 2. Utah Public Drinking Water Regulations 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Furnish a written testing plan and schedule, including water source and methods for conveyance to the project, sequence, control, and disposal. Include the name of the certified bacteriological testing laboratory. C. Disinfection Report: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Name of person collecting samples. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in treated water in parts per million (ppm) for each outlet tested. 6. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 7. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. 06/2024 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION 178.24.200 33 13 00- 2 PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A. All test equipment, temporary valves, bulkheads, and other water control equipment, shall be as determined by CONTRACTOR. No materials shall be used which damage the project pipelines for future conveyance of potable water. B. Disinfecting materials shall consist of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution, or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets. C. Dechlorination agents may be sodium bisulfate, sodium sulfite, or sodium thiosulfate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Source of Water 1. CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water for testing and disinfection of the water line system. All testing water used in the pipeline shall be potable water from a State approved drinking water system. 2. All pressure pipelines shall be tested. 3. Disposal of flushing water and water containing chlorine shall be by methods acceptable to the State of Utah, Division of Water Quality. 3.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES PROCEDURE A. Prior to hydrostatic testing, pipelines 24-inches diameter and larger shall be swept free of debris and visually inspected that all debris has been removed prior to filling. B. Prior to hydrostatic testing, pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. CONTRACTOR may test pipelines in sections. Sections to be tested shall be defined by isolation valves in the pipeline. Where such valves are not present, CONTRACTOR shall install temporary bulkheads or plugs for the purpose of testing. Sections that do not have isolation valves shall be tested in approximate one-mile segments. Sections that have a zero leakage allowance may be tested as a unit. No section of the pipeline shall be tested until field-placed concrete or mortar has attained an age of 14 Days. The test shall be made by closing valves when available or by placing bulkheads and filling the line slowly with water (maximum filling velocity shall not exceed 0.25 foot per second, calculation based on the full area of the pipe). CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ascertaining that test bulkheads are suitably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure without damage to or movement of the adjacent pipe. Unharnessed sleeve-type couplings, expansion joints, or other sliding joints shall be restrained or suitably anchored prior to the test to avoid movement and damage to piping and equipment. Remove or protect any pipeline-mounted devices that may be damaged by the test pressure. CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient temporary tappings in the pipelines to allow for trapped air to exit or for water to be drained. After completion of the tests, such taps shall be permanently plugged. Care shall be taken that air relief valves are open during filling. 06/2024 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION 178.24.200 33 13 00- 3 C. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at which the air can be released through the release valves at a reasonable velocity. The air within the pipeline shall be allowed to escape completely. The differential pressure across the orifices in the air release valves shall not be allowed to exceed 5 psi at any time during filling. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar lining, as applicable, to absorb water and to allow the escape of air from air pockets. During this period, bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to ENGINEER shall be taken. Additional water shall be added to the pipeline to replace any water absorbed by the cement mortar lining. D. The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding 125% of the design operating pressure on the pipeline segment for a period of 2 hours. Visible leaks that appear during testing shall be repaired. Add water to restore the test pressure if the pressure decreases 5 psi below test pressure during the test period. E. Pipe with welded joints shall have no leakage. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall again test the pipeline, repeating as necessary until the pipeline passes. F. Exposed piping and valves shall show no visible leaks and no pressure loss during the test. G. Blowoff isolation gate valves and plug valves (throttling valves) shall be operated and tested during a simulated blow down operation to demonstrate functionality of the valves to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. Isolation valves (gate valves) shall not be used for throttling. 3.3 DISINFECTING OF PIPELINES PROCEDURE A. Leakage and pressure testing must be completed prior to disinfection procedures. B. All water and solution piping installed under this Contract shall be disinfected using an approved disinfection method in accordance with the "American Water Works Association Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains" (AWWA C651). C. CONTRACTOR may use one of the three chlorination methods – tablet, continuous feed, and slug, as outlined in AWWA C651 that is acceptable to OWNER. Care must be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution in the line being disinfected from flowing back into the line supplying the water. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as defined in AWWA C651. Taps may be at manways and air valves to help facilitate the spacing requirement. E. Heavily chlorinated water shall not be discharged onto the ground. Upon completion of disinfection, Sodium Bisulfate (NaHSO4), or other approved dechlorination agent, shall be applied to the heavily chlorinated water to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine residual remaining. Water shall be neutralized to less than 1 ppm total chlorine residual. 06/2024 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION 178.24.200 33 13 00- 4 F. After approval of disinfection, CONTRACTOR shall flush the new system until the chlorine residual is a maximum of 0.3 ppm. G. After final flushing and before the new water main is connected to the distribution system, two consecutive sets of acceptable samples, taken at least 24 hours apart, shall be collected from the pipeline being tested. Sampling and testing will be completed by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall collect at least one set of samples from every 1,200 feet of pipeline, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch. All samples shall be tested for bacteriological (chemical and physical) quality in accordance with “Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater” and shall show the absence of coliform organisms. If the initial disinfection fails to provide satisfactory bacteriological results, or shows the presence of coliform, then the line shall be re-chlorinated, flushed, and retested until satisfactory results are obtained at the expense of CONTRACTOR. 3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before installation. Thorough flushing shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until discolored water is eliminated. B. Final Fill: After a successful pressure and disinfection tests, the pipeline(s) shall be filled with fresh potable water and shall remain filled. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 DRAINAGE SYSTEM 178.24.200 PAGE 33 14 13 - 1 SECTION 33 14 13 DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section covers the work to furnish excavate, install, backfill and complete the Well House subdrainage system (ring drain), consisting of the drainage pipe, washed rock, geosynthetics, pipe and pipe fittings as necessary to complete installation of drainage pipe at the locations and grades shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls 3. Section 31 05 19 - Geosynthetics 4. Section 31 23 15 - Excavation, and Backfilling for Buried Pipelines 5. Section 31 23 23 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures 1.3 REFERENCES A. The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO 1. AASHTO M 294 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 12 to 36-in. Diameter. C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM C76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe 2. ASTM C150 Portland Cement 3. ASTM C361 Reinforced Concrete Low Head Pressure Pipe 4. ASTM C443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets 5. ASTM D422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils 6. ASTM D1248 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics, Molding & Extrusion Materials. 7. ASTM D2321 Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. 1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. There shall be no separate measurement and payment for this section. Full compensation for the drainage system shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which the drainage system relates. 06/2024 DRAINAGE SYSTEM 178.24.200 PAGE 33 14 13 - 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. The following shall be submitted: 1. Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to applicable pipe specifications, before pipe is installed. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris. Plastic materials adversely impacted by ultraviolet light shall be protected from exposure to the direct sunlight over extended periods. B. Handling: Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to insure delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe and other materials shall be carried to the trench, not dragged. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFILL FOR RING DRAIN SYSTEM A. Pipe backfill shall consist of 3/4" washed rock, complying with the requirements of Subsection 2.5 - Washed Rock of Section 31 23 23 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures. B. Backfill placed above the designated height for the washed rock shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 23 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures 2.2 PIPE FOR RING DRAIN A. Pipe shall consist of perforated corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and shall be smooth interior perforated corrugated polyethylene pipe ADS N-12 by Advanced Drainage System, Inc, or approved equal. Pipe and fittings shall be made of polyethylene compounds which meet or exceed the requirements of Type III, Category 4 or 5, Grade P33 or P34, Class C per ASTM D 1248 with the applicable requirements defined in ASTM D-1248. Corrugated polyethylene pipe fittings shall be manufactured of ADS materials (or approved equal) in conformance with AASHTO M-294. All pipe fittings joining pipe of varying pipe size shall be eccentric in shape. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Non-woven geotextile fabric shall meet the requirements of Section 31 05 19 - Geosynthetics 06/2024 DRAINAGE SYSTEM 178.24.200 PAGE 33 14 13 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as determined by ENGINEER, is unexpectedly encountered in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material, and compacted as provided in these specifications. When removal of unstable material is due to the fault or neglect of CONTRACTOR in his performance of shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to OWNER. 3.2 SAFETY A. Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with applicable State safety requirements and the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction (29 CFR1926). 3.3 GEOSYNTHETICS A. Non-woven geotextile fabric shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 015 19 - Geosynthetics. 3.4 TRENCH PREPARATION A. Each trench shall be excavated so that the pipe can be laid to the alignment and grade as required. The trench wall shall be so braced that the workmen may work safely and efficiently. All trenches shall be drained so the pipe laying may take place in dewatered conditions. B. The trench bottom shall be given a final trim using a string line, laser, or another method approved by ENGINEER for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the ground along the extreme bottom of the pipe. 3.5 REMOVAL OF WATER A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at all times ample means and devices with which to remove promptly and to properly dispose of all water entering the trench excavation. B. Water shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property or without being a menace to public health and convenience. No water shall be drained into work built or under construction without prior consent of the Engineer. C. Dewatering shall be accomplished by well points, sumping, or any other acceptable method which will insure a dewatered trench. Any dewatering method shall be subject to the approval of ENGINEER. 3.6 RING DRAIN PIPELINE TRENCH BACKFILL A. Pipeline trenches shall be backfilled, as designated on the plans, with 3/4" washed rock. The washed rock shall be enveloped with a non-woven geotextile fabric placed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and Section 31 05 19 - Geosynthetics. 06/2024 DRAINAGE SYSTEM 178.24.200 PAGE 33 14 13 - 4 B. After the pipe has been installed and approved and the initial portion of backfill has been placed as specified above, backfilling of the remainder of the excavation or trench shall be in accordance with Sections 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines and Section 31 23 23 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures. 3.7 DRAINAGE PIPE PLACEMENT A. Pipes shall be carefully examined before being placed, and defective or damaged materials shall not be used. Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under no circumstances shall pipe be placed in water or when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as necessary. All materials in place shall be inspected before backfilling, and those materials damaged during placement shall be removed and replaced. The bottom of the pipe shall be in contact with the bedding of the pipe throughout its length. B. Placement of the pipe shall be with the separate sections joined firmly on a bed shaped to line and grade and shall follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3.8 DRAINAGE PIPE JOINTS A. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 1. Transverse field joints shall be of such design that the successive connection of pipe sections will form a continuous line free of appreciable irregularities in the flow line. The ends of the pipe shall be cut squarely and cleanly so as not to adversely affect joining. Pipe sections shall be joined with split couplings, corrugated to engage the pipe corrugations, and shall engage a minimum of 4 corrugations, 2 on each side of the pipe joint. Coupling bands shall meet the requirements of the manufacturer. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.13 - 1 SECTION 40 05 13.13 STEEL PROCESS PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all steel process piping and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system. B. This Section includes schedule 40 and 80 steel process pipe in accordance with ASTM A53 and ASTM A106 with welded, flanged, grooved, or threaded joints. Fabricated steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C200 – Steel Water Pipe, 6-inch and Larger, is included in Section 33 92 10 – Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200, modified). 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines 3. Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200, modified) 4. Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances 5. Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection 1.3 REFERENCES A. Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) 1. ASME B 16.1 Gray Iron Flanges and Fittings, Classes 25, 125, and 250 2. ASME B 16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 3. ASME B 16.4 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250 4. ASME B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 5. ASME B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Butt Welded Fittings 6. ASME B 16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded 7. ASME B 16.12 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings 8. ASME B 31.1 Power Piping C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 2. ASTM A 106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High- Temperature Service D. AMERICA WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code 06/2024 STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.13 - 2 E. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 1. AWWA C 207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services 2. AWWA C 606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints 3. AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test results and the date each test was completed. C. Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, supports and appurtenances showing compliance with this Section including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints and material lists. D. Submit gasket material data including manufacturer’s catalog indicating that the proposed product is suitable for each fluid of service application. E. Submit welders’ qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPE A. Galvanized and black steel process pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Grade B, and shall be Schedule 40 or 80 as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Unless noted otherwise, galvanized steel pipe shall not be cement mortar lined. 2.2 PIPE JOINTS A. Black steel pipe joints shall be screwed ends with NPT threads, welded, or flanged. Screwed joints shall be up with Teflon tape. Welded joints may have butt-weld or socket weld fittings or flanges. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide grooved ends for rigid or flexible mechanical couplings or plain ends for sleeve-type couplings. B. Galvanized steel pipe shall have screwed ends with NPT threads. Screwed joints shall be up with Teflon tape. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide grooved ends for rigid or flexible mechanical couplings or plain ends for sleeve-type couplings. C. Flanged joints shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 or AWWA C207 flanges for the pressure class required for the project conditions or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing the appropriate flanges required to connect steel pipe to equipment and other appurtenances. CONTRACTOR shall replace flanges that do not match the mating equipment or appurtenance at no additional cost to OWNER. Gaskets shall be ANSI 150 lb. full face, 1/8-inch thick Neoprene for water or wastewater service. Gasket material for chemicals shall be suitable for the chemical service. 06/2024 STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.13 - 3 2.3 FITTINGS A. Threaded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.3 or ASME B 16.4 for pressure pipe. Threaded fittings for gravity pipe systems shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.12. B. Welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.11 or ASME B 16.9. C. Flanged fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.1 or ASME B 16.5. D. Grooved fittings shall conform to AWWA C 606. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. For buried pipelines, excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines. B. Above ground steel process piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. C. Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in accordance with Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature changes. D. Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. Low points shall be provided with a drain valve. 3.2 PIPE PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly 3.3 PIPE JOINTS A. Pipe threads shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies or molded. Joints shall be made with Teflon tape. B. Welded joints shall conform to the requirements of this Section and the recommendations of ASME B 31.1. Welding shall be done by skilled and qualified welders. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests. 06/2024 STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.13 - 4 C. Grooved couplings shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall conform to AWWA C 606. 3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINE A. Completed steel process piping systems shall be inspected for proper supports, anchorage, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coatings. Any damage shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed prior to placing pipeline into service. C. Source of Water 1. CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for disinfection and/or pressure testing of the pipeline. D. Testing Procedure 1. Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required on the Drawings, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the tolerances listed on the Drawings. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices 2. Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, or other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories that would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines shall be plugged or capped as appropriate during the testing procedures. 3. Leaks shall be repaired, and the piping shall be re-tested until no leaks are found. 4. ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so that ENGINEER may be present during the test. 3.5 DISINFECTING A. Disinfection shall be in accordance AWWA C 651 and the requirements of Section 33 13 00 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.19 - 1 SECTION 40 05 13.19 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all stainless steel process piping and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2. Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances 1.3 REFERENCES A. Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) 1. ASME B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. ASME B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Butt Welded Fittings 3. ASME B 16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded 4. ASME B 31.1 Power Piping C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavy Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes 2. ASTM A 403 Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping and Fittings 3. ASTM A 409 Standard Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-Temperature Service 4. ASTM A 778 Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products D. AMERICA WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code E. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 1. AWWA C 606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints 2. AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains 06/2024 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.19 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test results and the date each test was completed. C. Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, supports and appurtenances showing compliance with this Section including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints and material lists. D. Submit gasket material data including manufacturer’s catalog indicating that the proposed product is suitable for each fluid of service application. E. Submit welders’ qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Stainless steel process pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM A 312, Type 304, seamless, Schedule 40S or 80S as shown on the Contract Drawings, with screwed fittings for sizes up to and including 3-inches and welded fittings for sizes 3-inches and larger. Flange fittings may be used for pipe diameters 2-inches and larger. 2.2 PIPE JOINTS A. Stainless steel pipe 3-inches and smaller shall have screwed ends with NPT threads. Screwed joints shall be up with Teflon tape. Stainless steel pipe 3-inches and larger shall have welded joints or flanges. Flanges shall have stainless steel nuts and bolts the same material type as the pipe. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide grooved ends for rigid or flexible mechanical couplings. Pipe grooving is only allow for Schedule 40S or 80S pipe. For plain end stainless steel pipe use sleeve-type couplings where noted on the Contract Drawings. B. Flanged joints shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 for the pressure class required for the project conditions or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing the appropriate flanges required to connect stainless steel process pipe to equipment and other appurtenances. The CONTRACTOR shall replace flanges that do not match the mating equipment or appurtenance at no additional cost to the OWNER. Gaskets shall be ANSI 150 lb. full face, 1/8-inch thick Neoprene for water or wastewater service. Gasket material for chemicals shall be suitable for the chemical service. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Threaded fittings shall be forged stainless steel fittings in accordance with ASME B 16.11. B. Socket welded fittings shall be forged stainless steel fittings in accordance with ASME B 16.11. 06/2024 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.19 - 3 C. Butt-welded fittings shall be wrought stainless steel fittings in accordance with ASTM A 403 and ASME B 16.9. D. Flanged fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.5. E. Grooved fittings shall be wrought stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 403 and ASME B 16.9 and to AWWA C 606. Gasket material shall be suitable for the intended service. F. Fittings shall be in accordance with the pressure class shown on the Contract Drawings or have the same pressure rating as the pipe. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Stainless steel process piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. B. Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in accordance with Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature changes. C. Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. Low points shall be provided with a drain valve. 3.2 PIPE PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly 3.3 PIPE JOINTS A. Pipe threads shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies or molded. Joints shall be made with Teflon tape. B. Welded joints shall conform to the requirements of this Section and the recommendations of ASME B 31.1. Welding shall be done by skilled and qualified welders. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests. Field welds shall be kept to a minimum by using couplings or shop fabrication as much as possible. Weld residue, oxide, and heat stain shall be removed shall be removed by stainless steel wire brushes followed by cleaning with an agent, followed by complete removal of the agent. Cleaning agent shall be BlueOne Pickling Paste 130 by Avesta 06/2024 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING 178.24.200 40 05 13.19 - 4 Finishing Chemicals, STAR Gel by Krystal Surface Solution, or approved equal. Passivation must following the cleaning process using FinishOne Passivator 630 by Avesta Finishing Chemicals, STAR Pass 1 by Krystal Surface Solution, or approved equal. Following the manufacturer’s instruction for the cleaning/pickling and passivation process. C. Grooved couplings shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall conform to AWWA C 606. 3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINE A. Completed stainless steel process piping systems shall be inspected for proper supports, anchorage, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coatings. Any damage shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed prior to placing pipeline into service. C. Source of Water 1. CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies for disinfection and/or pressure testing of the pipeline. D. Testing Procedure 1. Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required on the Contract Drawings, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the tolerances listed on the Contract Drawings. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices 2. Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, or other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories that would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines shall be plugged or capped as appropriate during the testing procedures. 3. Leaks shall be repaired, and the piping shall be re-tested until no leaks are found. 4. ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so that the ENGINEER may be present during the test. 3.5 DISINFECTING A. Disinfection shall be in accordance AWWA C 651 and the requirements of Section 33 13 00 - Pipeline Disinfection. - END OF SECTION - 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 1 SECTION 40 15 10 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. This section includes the process control strategies for this Contr act. Together with the process input/output schedule, the equipment specifications (including control strategies for local equipment control panels), and the Drawings, the process control strategies describe the required operation, monitoring, and control of the facilit ies included in this Contract. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, and services necessary to implement all functions described herein. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing functioning systems as described herein. The functional descriptions contain requirements for furnishing and installing labor and materials that may not appear elsewhere in the contract documents. 1.2 GENERAL DESIGN INFORMATION A. Indicator lights on all MCCs, control panels, starter enclosures, interfaces, etc. shall conform to the following color convention: Condition Color Running/Open Green Auto White Ready / Stopped / Off / Closed Red Fail Red Alarm Red Generic Status Green, Blue or White B. Running status shall be provided from auxiliary contacts provided with the motor starter. Auto status shall be defined as HOA or OA switch in Auto position. Ready status shall be defined as in remote or auto mode with all interlocks satisfied (no failure conditions present). Stopped and Off status shall be defined as all interlocks satisfied (no failure conditions present), except for no remote or auto mode. Failed status shall be defined as motor overload and/or any other shutdown mode such as over torque, over temperature, low oil pressure, high vibration, etc. C. A discrepancy failure shall be indicated through the control system for any drive, motor, instrument, etc. that should be running or providing a reading but for which the PLC is not receiving a run status signal or valid reading. An example is a motor which is commanded to run by the control system but is not subsequently detected as running. An adjustable time delay shall be provided for each motor to allow time for the motor to start and satisfy all interlocks. D. Manual start/stop, open/close, speed/position adjustment, etc., from the Operator work stations shall be provided for all equipment controlled by the control system. 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 2 E. Where devices such as temperature, moisture, and/or vibration sensors, over - or under-pressure protection, space heaters, etc. are provided with process equipment and their associated motors under the various sections of Division 11, the Contractor shall provided all required interconnecting wiring between those devices and their associated MCCs, motor starters, VFDs, local control panels, etc. F. Where setpoints, operating limits, and other control settings are provided by the process control strategies, these settings shall be initial settings only and shall be used for assistance in the initial startup of the plant. All such settings shall be fully adjustable, and based on actual operating conditions, the Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments to provide smooth, stable operation. G. The control system shall be capable of receiving inputs of initial run -times for existing and proposed equipment. Initial run -time shall not automatically assumed to be zero. H. All PLC control strategies shall return to a normal control mode upon restoration of power. I. All setpoint control shall be by PID control algorithms. Where only proportional control is specified, tuning constants shall be used to reduce the integral and derivative functions to zero. All PLC -controlled variable speed equipment shall be provided with individual speed control PID modules in the PLC which shall be cascaded with the overall setpoint PID modules as required. All setpoints, sequence timers, sequence orders, dead bands, PID tuning parameters, PLC delay timers, variable speed operating range limits, and similar control constants shall be accessible and alterable from the Operator work stations. J. All setpoints, alarms, etc. based upon an analog input signal or field variable shall be provided with time delays and dead bands to prevent nuisance tripping of controls and alarms. K. Elapsed run time shall be determined through an auxiliary contract on the starter which is an input to the PLC. 1. Elapsed run time shall be displayed at the SCADA level for each and every motor controlled through the PLC system. 2. Individual elapsed run time accumulation may be reset by the operator after entering a password if the proper security level is associated with said password. 3. Elapsed run time shall be displayed as 99,999.9 hours after which the elapsed run time registers shall recycle to 0.0 hours. 4. Provisions shall be made to allow the operator to enter a start value for runtime accumulation. 5. Elapsed run time shall be accumulated and stored in PLC registers and not in the SCADA system. L. PID control algorithms. 1. PID control algorithms shall have operator selectable slew rates for setpoints that will allow the setpoint to slowly ramp to its final value in order to minimize system disturbance. a. Individual setpoint slew rates shall be set at a local HMI if 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 3 available as well as through the SCADA system. 2. Each PID control algorithm shall have a face plate associated with the individual PID control algorithm that shall be displayed at its associated HMI and at the SCADA terminal. Said face plate shall have the following functions: a. Display Output, CV. b. Display Setpoint, SP. c. Display Process Variable, PV. d. Allow for operator selection of Automatic or Manual control of Output. e. Under manual control of output allow the Operator to enter the desired output value. f. Allow for input of the three PID tuning parameters. M. Programmable settling and proving timers shall be provided in all control sequence s for starting and stopping of pumps, in order to let the process settle down before proceeding with any additional control functions. 1. These timers shall be imbedded in the PLC logic, tuned in the field, and listed separately as part of the software submittal and O & M manual. N. Status indication: 1. The associated pilot light, HMI display, and SCADA display for each valve and pump shall indicate valve or slide gate position if available by constantly illuminating the corresponding status indication and report this condition to the SCADA system. 2. As previously described a fault condition shall flash the associated status indicator and alarm within the SCADA system. 3. When a valve is in transition, not fully closed and not fully opened, then the valve open and valve closed status indicator shall: a. For HMI and graphic displays state that the valve is in transition. b. For pilot lights shall alternately flash on and off the valve fully opened and fully closed pilot lights. O. When setpoints or actions are identified to occur on more than one HMI, or both the HMIs and SCADA, the last action or setpoint shall override the current condition, unless otherwise noted. P. Control software and/or hardware shall be so configured and designed as to monitor for loss of analog signal (signal <4 mA), analog signal too large (signal > 20 mA), or rate of signal change too fast (individual rate parameter for each analog input signal to be imbedded in software), when any of these conditions are detected the control system shall alarm this condition, and close the appropriate valve and or stop the appropriate motor in order to prevent the process from running away. Q. The manual control mode shall be completely manual and under the operator 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 4 control, there shall be no programmed interlocks requiring completion of a previous step before operating a device, unless specifically identified in the individual loop descriptions as occurring in the manual mode. R. Number of starts shall be accumulated for each motor. 1. The number of starts for the current day shall be moved into a register and held as the previous day’s number of starts at 0:01 hours each day. 2. The number of starts for the current day shall be entered into the historical data base time and date stamped at 0:01 hours each day. 3. The current day number of starts shall be reset at 0:01 hours each day. S. Alarm/Fault Indication/Acknowledgement 1. Furnish an alarm acknowledgement pushbutton at each VCP, HMI, or LCP that shall signal the PLC that an alarm or fail condition has been acknowledged. This device shall only affect the alarms that are present on the panel where the device is located. 2. In general any fault condition shall flash the appropriate pilot light and/or graphic at a rate of on for 0.5 seconds and then off for 0.5 seconds. 3. The individual alarm acknowledgement pushbutton or action shall function as follows: a. Shall change the flashing alarm indication to continuously ON if the alarm or fail condition persists after the acknowledgement button or action has been depressed. b. Shall turn OFF the alarm indication if the alarm or fail condition has been corrected and the alarming system has returned to normal. 4. An alarm beacon and horn shall be located as needed. a. The alarm silence pushbutton or HMI command shall silence the horn but continue to show the visual alarm. 5. All alarm and fail conditions shall flash their respective pilot lights, indicators, HMI, or SCADA graphics, until the condition is acknowledged by the operator. a. Once the operator acknowledges the alarm or fail condition the pilot light, indicator, HMI, or SCADA graphic shall remain ON in a steady condition. b. Once the alarm has been cleared and the operator again acknowledges the alarm or fail condition the pilot light, indicator, HMI, or SCADA graphic shall turn OFF. 6. All valves, pumps, motors, and other process equipment shall have fail alarms displayed and reported at the HMI and SCADA level. T. Tank and vessel levels. 1. All tank and vessels levels shall be displayed both in feet (XX.XX) and gallons, 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 5 whether or not specifically identified in the P & IDs or Loop descriptions. 2. All identified tanks and/or vessels that have a level measurement shall include, whether or not identified, the following minimum functions that shall be displayed on the associated HMI and SCADA System. a. Numerical readout of process material level in the tank. b. Setpoint for high level and high level alarm c. Setpoint for low level and low level alarm. d. Setpoints for high level and low level shall be entered as a level or volume as directed by the ENGINEER. U. Power failure. 1. The control system upon sensing a power failure shall store, within, the PLC memory the current accumulation of all time records and flow totals and as necessary, the status of all devices, i.e. ON or OFF , to allow a return to normal operating condition. V. PLC System Status 1. There shall be a minimum of one screen that shall include the status of all PLCs in the system and the status of the PLC communications LAN. 2. The PLC shall monitor communications status with equipment including with heartbeat status and alarm on communications failure. W. Analog device calibration override. 1. Provide a SCADA screen for each and every analog input that allows the Operator to access said analog input to: a. Disable the analog input in the PLC control system. b. Enter a value for the analog input from the SCADA system to the PLC. c. Hold the last analog input value while the actual analog input is disabled. 2. Provide a SCADA screen for each and every analog output that allows the Operator to access said analog input to: a. Force an output value entered from the SCADA system to the PLC. b. Hold the last analog output value while the programmed output is disabled. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL DESCRIPTION The drinking water system for the purposes of this project consists of a well pump that draws water from a well and directly feeds the drinking water system or irrigation system. The water 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 6 when starting is pumped to waste (i.e. storm drain). There is a gas chlorination system that introduces chlorine gas to a boosted stream of water and correctly doses the right amount of chlorine into the egress line. Under normal operation, the well pump controls to a desired flow rate setpoint. The control system shall permit the manual operation of the well pump and valves and all necessary auxiliaries to pump water to either the drinking water or irrigation water system, all without the requirement of the PLC. The PLC will have more sophisticated I/O and algorithms available for advanced monitoring, controls, and alarms, but the well must run independently without the need of the PLC using manual controls on the control panel, and manual operation/monitoring of valves, equipment, etc. This control description does not cover all requirements from the City for standard HMI screens, operator interface and overrides, which data to display on the HMI, etc. Refer to City for standards. AUTOMATED WELL STARTUP SEQUENCE The waste valve is held waiting in the open position. The Well startup sequence begins when the control switch is set to Auto and tank level is low. The PLC sends a Run request. The lube solenoid is hard-wired with a time delay. When the lube time is complete, the run command is sent to the VFD. The lube solenoid remains powered and lubes during well operation. The PLC can lube prior to a run request and before the lube time delay begins. The waste valve is hard-wired with a time delay. When the waste time is complete, the waste valve is hardwired to close and the system valve is hardwired to open at the same time. The PLC can override the waste close and prevent it from closing if the turbidity is high. Provide a maximum override timer with operator adjustable timer setpoint on the HMI. Provide an operator adjustable turbidity setpoint. Provide an operator settable turbidity override ON/OFF switch. High tank level will end the fill cycle and stop the pump. The lube solenoid is hard-wired to open and stop oil lube from dripping. The waste valve is hardwired to return to the open position and the system valve is hardwired to close. The valves shall be set with their opening and closing speeds coordinated to provide a smooth transition to system delivery and prevent surges. All setpoints and timers used in the PLC for control shall be adjustable by the operator via the HMI interface. MANUAL WELL STARTUP SEQUENCE The HOA switch is turned to HAND position. The RUN request is sent. The well shutdowns are hardwired. Transitioning from HAND to Auto has a hardwired timer that keeps the pump running for a few seconds so that neither the lube cycle nor the pump to waste cycle need to recommence, nor does the motor need to start again. WELL SHUTDOWNS The Well Pump will shut down and/or not allow startup for any of the following conditions: 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 7 Hardwired: • High discharge pressure as detected by the high discharge pressure switch, or the discharge pressure transmitter reading a high signal. The discharge pressure transmitter alarm will have a time delay adjustable in the system. The high discharge pressure switch will either be selected by hardware to be properly delayed and debounced for momentary high pressures during startup, or if it does not have the capability, then the controller will provide the appropriate debounce delay. This condition will lock in the shutdown and require a reset to resume operation of the pump. An alarm will register for a High pressure. • Low well level will shut down the pump. This condition will lock in the shutdown and require a reset to resume operation of the pump. An alarm will register for a Low well level. • High motor temperature will shut down the pump. This condition will lock in the shutdown and require a reset to resume operation of the pump. An alarm will register for a High temperature. • VFD Failure will shut down the pump. This condition will lock in the shutdown and require a reset to resume operation of the pump. • The operator places the control hand switch in the OFF position or E-STOP is depressed. This switch will electrically drop the run command to the VFD. The E- STOP will kill power to all signals. • The HMI will have the capability to cause an Emergency Stop or a stop command. PLC PERMISSIVES: • The PLC will not permit a run command except if the waste valve is sense in the open position and the system valve in the closed position. Once running, the permissive is no longer required and the pump will continue to run even after the valves change position. PLC SHUTDOWNS: • Low water flow as measured by the well pump discharge flowmeter will shut down the pump. • Failure of the valves to be in the correct position for the current cycle (flushing or normal) will on a time delay prevent startup or cause a shutdown of the pump. This condition will lock out the permissive and/or lock in the shutdown and require a reset to resume operation of the pump. • The PLC will detect that the hand switch is not in AUTO and drop the run command in the controller. • Pump room temperature above 104 degrees F will alarm and shutdown the VFD. Deadband to 96 degrees F. Operator adjustable on HMI. WELL SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE A normal stop will slow the VFD Via the PLC and then completely stop. It will not be permitted to slow down more abruptly than the rate set in the VFD configuration. An operator stop will involve the operator depressing the Stop button. The VFD slow down rate will be used. A Hard shutdown stop or E-Stop, the run command to the VFD will drop which will cut power to the pump which will stop on its own with mechanical ratchetin g. All valves will remain in their current position. WELL COOLDOWN SEQUENCE The Well pump shall not be permitted to restart until 10 minutes have gone by following a shutdown, with a maximum number of starts being limited to 4 per hour. 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 8 CHLORINE SYSTEM Safety: A Chlorine Gas detector is installed in the Chlorine room. The PLC will monitor the chlorine levels and alarm on high levels. On high -high levels, the PLC will also alarm, and a corresponding switch within the detector will hardwire into a gas alarm panel that will turn on the vent fan, and illuminate two gas beacons. The hardwired gas alarm latches in the gas alarm panel. Power OK is sent to the PLC so that the PLC can alarm if the gas alarm panel circuit loses power. Fail safe so loss of power or open circuit in the input alarms the PLC. Gas Detector Fault produces an alarm in the PLC. The Chlorine room vent fan will start when the lights of the room are turned on (via switch ), or the fan switch is turned on, or when the room temperature exceeds 80 deg F. Dosing: The chlorine system has a manual regulator that is set to deliver the right amount of gas into the flowing water stream as delivered by the booster pump. The booster pump is commanded ON when the water is being pumped, and it is not in a flush cycle. The booster pump will be OFF during flush cycles, and any time the waste valve is sensed not closed (it does not need to be open, just not closed). The solenoid valve feeding the booster pump is kept closed for the initial 2 minutes of operation to allow for grit to clean out before sending it to the turbidity meter and booster pump. During this time the booster pump is commanded OFF. Operators can disable the chlorination via the booster pump through its circuit breaker, and by manual valves. The Chlorine analyzer alarms on High or Low chlorine levels. ADDITIONAL I/O ALARMS AND CONTROLS Master Reset: The VFD will lock in its alarms and fault conditions, and the PLC will lock in shutdown conditions. A single Master Reset pushbutton will clear all VFD alarms and fault conditions, and indicate to the PLC to reset its shutdown conditions. PLC I/O, Control, and Alarms: DO Start Pump: Request to run the pump is sent. This should not be sent unless all PLC conditions are satisfied. DO Lube CMD: Request to open Oil Lube. Lube on start request in code, and Start Pump DO. Timer adjustable on HMI. Send command also 1 minute after run status comes in. DI VFD In Auto: When in AUTO, PLC Performs all the control decisions with the information it has. VFD still handles key hardwired safety lockouts, but communicates lockouts with the PLC. This should continue to be used in the PLC as well to shutdown, and latch the shutdowns. When not in Auto, PLC should drop the Start Pump Command and any Waste valve commands , no speed reference should be sent (4mA). 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 9 DI VFD Mode: Indicator and trigger for HMI Graphics. Selection between VFD operation and soft starter operation. DI Pump Running: Indicator and trigger for HMI graphics. Alarm if run command and no run status after delay while in AUTO. DI Hi Press: Alarm and locked shutdown AUTO or not. DI Low Well Level: Alarm and locked shutdown AUTO or not. DI High Pump Temp: Alarm and locked shutdown AUTO or not. DI VFD Fault: Alarm and locked shutdown AUTO or not. DI E-STOP Engaged: Alarm and locked shutdown AUTO or not. Also all outputs go to safe state AUTO or not. DI Waste Valve Open Status: Indicator, and trigger for HMI Graphics. Command open prior to a start. Do not send start until open, but once started it is not a shutdown. Alarm if command open and open status not received within timer while in AUTO. No mismatch alarm during flush cycle DI Waste Valve Closed Status: Indicator, and trigger for HMI Graphics. Alarm if command close and close status not received within timer. No mismatch alarm during flush cycle. Alarm if not closed during normal operation mode while in AUTO. DI System Valve Open Status: Indicator, and trigger for HMI Graphics. Command closed prior to a start. Do not send start until closed, but once started it is not a shutdown. Alarm if command open and open status not received within timer while in AUTO. No mismatch alarm during flush cycle DI System Valve Closed Status: Indicator, and trigger for HMI Graphics. Alarm if command close and close status not received within timer. No mismatch alarm during flush cycle. Alarm if closed during normal operation mode while in AUTO. DI PLC Reset DI: Master Reset button input from control panel. Locked -out shutdowns release. This does not reset the PLC or counters or timers or totalizers. AO Pump Speed CMD: PID controller during flush cycle controls to flush cycle flow setpoint. Separate PID controller during normal cycle controls to discharge pressure. Start ramp per HMI-accessible max start ramp rate. Stop ramp per HMI -accessible max stop ramp rate. AI Pump Speed REF: Indicator and data for HMI. Alarm on mismatch with delay while in AUTO. DI PLC Power Fail: Relay drops power when PLC Cabinet loses primary power. Secondary power (UPS) continues. Alarm AUTO or not. AI Well Level: Indicator and data for control panel. Alarm on low Well Level. Alarm and shutdown on Low-Low Level. Coordinate Low vs LowLow alarms with Level shutdown switch settings of Level Controller. PLC Low and Low-Low should occur prior to switch. 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 10 AI Tank Level: Indicator and data for control panel. Alarm on high tank Level. DI Pump Rm Flood: Alarm AUTO or not. DI CL2 Rm Flood: Alarm AUTO or not. AI Discharge Pressure: Indicator and data for HMI. Alarm on High pressure after timer. Locked shutdown on HiHi Press after timer. Coordinate shutdown with high pressure switch. Should shutdown prior to switch. During flush cycle while in AUTO, used to control waste valve position to control discharge pressure to be just below system pressure. During normal operation while in AUTO, used to control VFD speed to pressure setpoint. AI Well Flow Rate: Indicator and data for HMI. Historize. Totalize based off of communications with flow meter. Separate totalizers when running to system from when running to waste. Not Closed is trigger for waste totalizer. DO Water Feed Solenoid: Command to feed water to the chlorination system and to the turbidity meter. See Chlorination System for chlorination booster pump run strategy. Valve must be open for chlorination and turbidity analysis. DO Waste Close Inhibit: Holds waste valve open after waste timer completes when turbidity is high. See waste cycle description in AUTOMATED WELL STARTUP SEQUENCE. DO Heater 1 Force Off: Will turn off heater during a motor start. DO Heater 2 Force Off: Will turn off heater during a motor start. AI Turbidity Analyzer: Information and data to HMI. Alarm on Hi Turbidity. Alarm on Hi Conductivity. In AUTO, Flush cycle completes when turbidity is below HMI -accessible min setpoint. Flush cycle recommences when turbidity rises above HMI -accessible max setpoint. See flush cycle description in AUTOMATED WELL STARTUP SEQUENCE. DI Booster Pump Run Status: Information and data to HMI. Alarm on command/status mismatch AUTO or not. DO Booster Pump Run Command: See CHLORINE SYSTEM Dosing strategy for booster run philosophy. Alarm on command/status mismatch AUTO or not. AI CL2 Tank Weight: Information and data to HMI. Alarm on low tank weight. AI CL2 Tank Weight: (tank 2) Information and data to HMI. Alarm on low tank weight. AI Well Pressure: Information and data to HMI. Used during flush cycle to control waste valve pressure to just below this value. AI Pump Room Temperature: Information and data to HMI. Alarm on high/low temperature. High > 40 deg C (104 deg F). Low < 5 deg C (40 deg F). AI CL2 Room Temperature: Information and data to HMI. Alarm on high/low temperature. High > 40 deg C (104 deg F). Low < 5 deg C (40 deg F). DI Intrusion Alarm: Alarm on intrusion. 06/2024 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 15 10 - 11 AI CL2 Gas Detector: Information and data to HMI. Alarm on high CL2 Gas. Alarm on high - high CL2 Gas. Coordinate with switch on gas detector. Both alarms should occur prior to switch causing beacons and vent fan response. See also CHLORINE SYSTM Safety strategy. DI CL2 Panel Power Ok: Alarm when not OK. DI CL2 Gas Alarm: Alarm when initiated. Lock alarm. Display on HMI. DI Gas Detector Fail: Alarm when initiated. Lock Alarm. Display trouble on HMI. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 LEVEL DETECTOR 178.24.200 40 24 10-1 SECTION 40 24 10 LEVEL DETECTOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install, and place into satisfactory operation the Radar level sensor and transmitter systems, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 10 00-Process Control and Information Systems B. Section 40 20 00-Instruments, General PART 1 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LEVEL DETECTOR/WITH REMOTE DISPLAY/TRANSMITTERS A. The level detector shall be of the non -contact microprocessor based type for the continuous measurement of liquid levels. B. The unit shall be a two piece transmitter/display meter and transducer with interconnecting cables. C. The transmitter shall store the level profile in the computer memory and moment by moment, analyze the profile to determine the actual liquid level. D. All program data shall be safeguarded internally in non -volatile EEPROM memory. E. The transducer shall be encapsulated and shall be capable of: 1. Accuracy of ± 0.25% of range. 2. Range 0.8 to 26.2 feet or the maximum depth of the measured material whichever is greater. 3. Provide for flange mounting, or provide wall mounted mounting bracket as detailed on the drawings. 4. With integral temperature compensation or without temperature factors playing into the level measurements. 5. The unit shall utilize a narrow beam transducer which is rated Class 1 Division 1, explosion proof. The unit shall be provided with factory fabricated lead cable integral to sensor unit and shall extend to the meter unit within the electrical room. F. The control transmitter shall be in a NEMA 6P enclosure with an integral from panel mounted meter indicating in scaled engineering units. 1. The unit shall provide a 4 -20 mA analog output signal directly proportional to level, driven from the PLC and its associated power supplies. 2. The unit shall be capable of displaying by software selection: a. Distance to liquid surface from transmitter. 3. The unit shall contain four relays for use as programmable alarm or hard-wired control points. 4. Power requirements shall be 24VDC (fed from a UPS via a power supply.) 06/2024 LEVEL DETECTOR 178.24.200 40 24 10-2 5. 4-20 mA output into 750 Ohms at 24 VDC. 6. Selectable damping 1 to 10 m/min. 7. 4 button HMI, wall mounted controller allowing for programming from the panel face, including blanking distances and obstruction blanking. G. The programming unit shall be incorporated into the body of the instrument. H. Operating temperature range -40º to 60° C. I. Mount transducer with non -metallic mounting only. J. Three wire extended range. K. As manufactured by: 1. Siemens Hydroranger 500 with LR100 series radar. PART 2 - EXECUTION EXECUTION 3.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to section 40 20 00. B. Transducers shall be provided with flange mounting options. Mount to flanged support rigidly attached to wall or concrete square and plumb to building. Sensor shall be mounted to avoid all signal interferences. END OF SECTION 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 91 23 - 1 SECTION 40 91 23 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This section covers the Work necessary to install a ready to use and tested process and analysis system. CONTRACTOR shall provide all components required for a complete and functional system. RELATED WORK Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures REFERENCES Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C 207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm) AWWA C 751 Magnetic Inductive Flowmeters NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit catalog cuts on all process equipment including: switches, meters, sensors, or other items shown on Contract Drawings referencing each item by mark number. Information shall indicate manufacturer specification compliance and dimensional data. CONTRACTOR shall supply operation and maintenance manuals for all process equipment. WARRANTY Manufacturer shall provide to OWNER written guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year. 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 91 23 - 2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Each system shall be factory calibrated and certified prior to delivery. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT There shall be no separate measurement and payment for any systems. Full compensation for the system shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which it relates. QUALITY ASSURANCE Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the design and manufacturing of this type of equipment. The manufacturer shall assume responsibility for, and guarantee performance of equipment furnished. However, this shall not be construed as relieving CONTRACTOR from responsibility for the proper installation and functionality of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL Each process measurement system shall typically consist of a sensor and analyzer/transmitter. Where shown on the Contract Drawings, the analyzer/transmitter may be utilized for multiple sensors. When an analyzer/transmitter is used for multiple sensors, it shall be capable of displaying simultaneously each process measurement. Each analyzer/transmitter shall be equipped with a means to transmit process measurement data to the plant SCADA system. For hardwired signals, unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings, provide the following: a. 4-20 mA output signals for each process measurement (for up to 500 Ohm loads). b. Two programmable SPDT relay outputs, rated at 5A up to 230 VAC, for each process measurement. Where shown on the Contract Drawings, provide the following digital communications to the plant SCADA system: a. HART Protocol b. PROFIBUS c. MODBUS Each analyzer/transmitter shall be powered by 115VAC (+/- 10%) at 60 Hz unless shown on Contract Drawings as being powered by 24 VDC (+/- 15%). Each analyzer/transmitter shall retain its programmable settings in non-volatile memory. Battery powered instruments, analyzer, or transmitters will not be accepted. Each sensor and corresponding analyzer/transmitter shall be supplied as a complete and operable system. This includes all cabling, mounting hardware and fasteners. 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 91 23 - 3 When installed outdoors, the analyzer/transmitter shall be protected from the sun such that direct sunlight will not shine on the display. All analyzers/transmitters shall be waterproof and made from corrosion resistant materials. All sensors to be immersed in liquids shall be rated for permanent submersion and shall be corrosion resistant. MAGNETIC FLOW METERS Magnetic flow meters shall be the low the low frequency induction type which produces a DC pulsed signal directly proportional to and linear with the flow rate. Liners shall be polyurethane. Flow meters shall be rated at 250 psi. Standard output shall be an analog 4-20 mA signal with a local indication from a liquid crystal display (LCD) reading in gallons per minute flow. The meter shall also have a totalizer (with pulsed output), and non-full pipe detection. Meters shall have a minimum of six self-cleaning electrodes. CONTRACTOR shall field verify length of cable for connection. Flanged connections shall be constructed of Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel with pressure ratings to match the connecting pipe. Liner shall be polyurethane or PTFE and electrodes stainless steel suitable for potable water service. Liners and electrodes for service other than potable water shall be constructed of materials conforming to the manufacturer’s recommendation for the intended service. Meter housing shall be rated for NEMA 6 for submersible operation. Meters shall include grounding rings. The transmitter shall have six digit LCD displays for flow rate, percent of span, and totalization; be capable of measuring flow in both directions; automatic range change; capability to convert DC pulse signal from the tube to a standardized 4 to 20 mA DC signal into a minimum of 700 ohms; self-diagnostics and automatic data checking, and a scaleable frequency output, 0 to 100 Hz. The flow measuring system shall conform to the following: Time constant: 0.5 to 1000 seconds; galvanic or optic isolation Accuracy: 0.50 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent full scale velocities over 3 feet per second. Repeatability: 0.25 percent of full scale Power consumption: 30 watts or less Power requirements: 120 VAC, plus or minus 10 percent, unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings. Magnetic flow meters shall be Proline Promag W400 by Endress+Hauser zero diameter, or approved equal. 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 91 23 - 4 PRESSURE SWITCH A high pressure cutoff switch shall be installed as shown on Contract Drawings, and shall be as specified in the Electrical Drawings. The switch setting shall be adjustable as specified on the drawings. The switch shall be rated for the pressure of the system where it is installed with a safety factor of 1.5. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER The pressure transmitter shall be an electronic pressure transducer tailored to the installation as shown on the drawings and suitable for the planned application. The system shall include a pressure transducer with integral diaphragm seal. The pressure transmitter shall operate on 24 VDC, and shall provide a 4-20 mA DC signal to the RTU panel. The loop signal shall measure the water pressure and have a 4-20 mA signal output. The pressure transmitter shall have a LCD display showing the pressure in “psi”. The pressure transmitter shall be coded “DW” for NSF drinking water certification. Pressure transmitters shall be Rosemount Series 3051, or approved equal. TURBIDIMETER 1. The turbidimeter shall be a low-range model with an accuracy of +/- 2% of reading from 0-40 NTU. The turbidimeter shall be HG Scientific MTOL+ Online Process Turbidimeter; no approved equal. 2. The turbidimeter shall include appurtenances needed for a complete and operable system, voltage shall be 120 VAC, output 4-20 mA isolated current output with maximum load of 550 ohms. Case shall be polycarbonate NEMA 4X with a large backlit display. 3. Accessories to be included include calibration kit, desiccant refill, and power cord. CONDUCTIVITY ANALYZER 1. The conductivity analyzer shall be a low-range model with an accuracy of +/- 2% of reading from 0-40 NTU. The turbidimeter shall be HG Scientific MTOL+ Online Process Turbidimeter; no approved equal. 2. The turbidimeter shall include appurtenances needed for a complete and operable system, voltage shall be 120 VAC, output 4-20 mA isolated current output with maximum load of 550 ohms. Case shall be polycarbonate NEMA 4X with a large backlit display. 3. Accessories to be included include calibration kit, desiccant refill, and power cord. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION All equipment shall be mounted and installed as per manufacturer recommendations. Coordinate final location with ENGINEER. FLOW METER FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Each instrument shall be tested before commissioning and ENGINEER shall witness the interface capability in the PLC control system and associated registers. Each instrument shall provide direct programming capability through the PLC 06/2024 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES 178.24.200 PAGE 40 91 23 - 5 Each instrument shall provide direct control of totalizer reset functions through the PLC Each instrument shall be supported with a device profile permitting direct integration in the PLC ENGINEER shall witness all instrument verifications in the field. Manufacturers Field Services shall be provided for start-up and commissioning by a Factory field service representative or a manufacturer’s authorized service provider (ASP). Manufacturer representative shall verify installation of all installed flow tubes and transmitters. Manufacturer representative shall notify ENGINEER in writing of any problems or discrepancies and proposed solutions. Manufacturer representative shall perform field verification at the time of installation for long-term analysis of device linearity, repeatability and electronics health. A comparative report shall be generated for each meter tested. Manufacturer representative shall generate a configuration report for each meter. TESTING After installation of the equipment is complete, operating tests shall be carried out to assure that the equipment operates properly. All piping shall be tested hydrostatically and for leaks. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 1 SECTION 40 92 57 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install electric motor actuators and appurtenances for butterfly valves, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The valve manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design (valve stem diameter, threading, key and keyway adaptation, and other dimensional information), assembly, testing, and installation of actuators on the valves; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance of the valves and actuators with the Contract Documents. Where two or more valve actuators of the same type or size are required, the actuators shall be produced by the same manufacturer. RELATED WORK Related work specified in other sections: Section 01 33 00 Submittals REFERENCES The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. American Water Works Association (AWWA) AWWA C 542 Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates SUBMITTALS Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals. Shop drawing information for actuators, floor stands, and extension stems shall be submitted together with the valve submittals as a complete package. Submit information on electric motor actuator including cut sheets, technical brochures, electrical diagrams, control schematics, and operation and installation manuals. Submit calculations showing dynamic seating and unseating torques versus output torque of the actuator. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Electric motor actuators shall not be measured or paid as a separate item but shall be included as part of the item to which it relates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 2 GENERAL All electric motor actuators shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 542. Actuators shall contain motor, gearing, manual over-ride, limit switches, torque switches, selector switch, drive coupling, integral reversing motor controls, control voltage transformer, indicator lights, handwheel, lubricants, heating elements, wiring, terminals, position feedback transmitter, and mechanical dial position indicator. In order to maintain the integrity of the enclosure, setting of the torque levels, position limits and configuration of the indication contacts, etc. shall be carried out without removal of any actuator covers over an Infra-Red or wireless interface. The electric motor actuator shall mount directly to the butterfly valve. Position and limit switches, position transmitters, controls, indicating lights, devices, and selector switches shall be coordinated with the input/output requirements of the control system as indicated in the Drawings and specified herein. ACTUATOR SIZING The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified maximum pressure and flow within specified time shown in Table 40 92 57 -1 below. One actuator size shall be available covering output speeds from 18 to 200 rpm for a given torque range to avoid over-sizing and unnecessary weight load on the valve stem, flange, and yoke. An increase of actuator size caused by higher actuator output speed is not acceptable to avoid weight over-sizing actuators. Actuators must be selected to provide sufficient torque required for safe valve operation. Actuator output torque must be available at 90% of nominal voltage. ENVIRONMENT Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from 25°F to 140°F, up to 100% relative humidity. ENCLOSURE Actuators shall be o-ring sealed, watertight, NEMA 4. The motor and all other internal electrical elements of the actuator shall be protected from ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is removed for site cabling, the terminal compartment having the same ingress protection rating as the actuator with the terminal cover removed. The enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be plated stainless steel. The use of un- plated stainless steel or steel fasteners is not permitted. MOTOR The motor shall be specifically designed for the valve actuator service. The motor will be of the induction type with Class F insulation and protected by means of thermal switches imbedded in the motor windings. Motor enclosure will be total enclosed, non-ventilated. 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 3 Motors shall be capable of operating on the voltage shown on the drawings. Electrical and mechanical disconnection of the motor should be possible without draining the lubricant from the actuator gearcase. Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows: Stall – the motor shall be de-energized within 8 seconds in the event of a stall when attempting to unseat a jammed valve Over Temperature – thermostat will cause tripping of the motor, auto-reset on cooling Single phasing – lost phase protection for 3 phase motors Direction – phase rotation correction for 3 phase motors GEARING The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in an oil-filled or grease lubricated gearcase suitable for operation at any angle. All drive gearing and components must be of metal construction and incorporate a lost-motion hammerblow feature. For rising spindle valves the output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem, and incorporate thrust bearings of the ball or roller type at the base of the actuator. The design shall be such as to permit opening the gearcase for inspection or disassembly without releasing the stem thrust or taking the valve out of service. For 90 degree operating type of valves drive gearing shall be self-locking to prevent the valve back-driving the actuator. HAND OPERATION A handwheel shall be provided for emergency operation, engaged when the motor is declutched by a lever or similar means, the drive being restored to electrical operation automatically by starting the motor. The handwheel or selection lever shall not move on restoration of motor drive. Provision shall be made for the hand/auto selection lever to be locked in both hand and auto positions. It should be possible to select hand operation while the actuator is running or start the actuator motor while the hand/auto selection lever is locked in hand without damage to the drive train. Clockwise operation of the handwheel shall give closing movement of the valve unless otherwise noted. For linear type valves the actuator handwheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive and should be such as to permit valve operation in a reasonable time with a manual force not exceeding 90 lbs through stroke and 180 lbs for seating/unseating of the valve. DRIVE INTERFACE The actuator shall be furnished with a drive bushing easily detachable for machining to suite the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. The drive bushing shall be positioned in a detachable base of the actuator. Thrust bearings shall be sealed for life and the base shall be capable of withstanding five times the rated thrust of the actuator. LOCAL CONTROLS The actuator shall incorporate local controls for Open, Close and Stop, and a Local/Stop/Remote mode selector switch lockable in any one of the following three 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 4 positions: Local control only, stop (no electric operation), remote control plus local stop only. It shall be possible to select maintained or non-maintained local control. The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of valve travel can be reversed without the necessity of stopping the actuator. The local controls and display shall be rotatable through increments of 90 degrees to suit valve and actuator orientation. TORQUE AND LIMITS Torque and turns limitation to be adjustable as follows: Position Setting Range – multi-turn: 2.5 to 8,000 turns, with resolution to 7.5 degrees of actuator output. Position Setting Range – direct drive part turn actuators: 90° ±10°, with resolution to 0.1 degree of actuator output. Torque Setting: 40% to 100% rated torque Position Measurement: Absolute position measurement should be incorporated within the actuator. The technology must be capable of reliably measuring position even in the case of a single fault. The design must be simple with the minimum amount of moving parts. Measurement of torque shall be from direct measurement of force at the output of the actuator. Methods of determining torque-using data derived from the motor such as motor speed, current, flux, etc. are not acceptable. A means for automatic “torque switch bypass” to inhibit torque off during valve unseating and “latching” to prevent torque switch hammer under maintained or repeated control signals shall be provided. The electrical circuit diagram of the actuator should not vary with valve type remaining identical regardless of whether the valve is to open or close on torque or position limit. REMOTE VALVE POSITION AND STATUS INDICATION Four contacts shall be provided which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve. Provision shall be made for the selection of a normally closed or open contact form. Contacts shall maintain and update position indication during handwheel operation when all external power to the actuator is isolated. The contacts shall be rated for 5mA to 5A, 120V AC, 30V DC. As an alternative to providing valve position indication any of the four above contacts shall be selectable to signal one of the following: Valve opening, closing or moving Thermostat tripped, lost phase Motor tripped on torque in mid travel, motor stalled Remote selected Actuator being operated by handwheel Actuator fault 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 5 Provision shall be made in the design for an additional four contacts having the same functionality. A configurable monitor relay shall be provided as standard, which can be used to indicate either Availability of Fault. The relay should be spring return type with a Normally Open/ Normally Closed contact pre-wired to the terminal bung. The Monitor (Availability of Fault) relay, being energized from the control transformer will de-energize under any one or more of the following conditions: Available Mode Fault Mode Loss of main or customer 24V DC power supply Loss of main or customer 24V DC power supply Actuator control selected to local or stop Motor thermostat tripped Motor thermostat tripped Actuator internal fault Actuator internal fault Provision shall be made in the design for the addition of a contactless transmitter to give a 4-20mA analog signal corresponding to valve travel and/or torque for remote indication when required. The transmitter will auto range to the set limits. LOCAL POSITION INDICATION The actuator display shall include a dedicated numeric/symbol digital position indicator displaying valve position from fully open to fully close in 0.1% increments. Valve closed and open positions shall be indicated by symbols showing valve position in relation to the pipework to ensure that valve status is clearly interpreted. With main power connected, the display shall be backlit to enhance contrast at all ambient light levels and shall be legible from a distance of at least 10 feet. Red, green, and yellow LEDs corresponding to open, closed, and intermediate valve positions shall be included on the actuator display when power is switched on. The yellow LED should also be fully programmable for on/off, blinker, and fault indication. The digital display shall be maintained and updated during handwheel operation when main power to the actuator is isolated. The actuator display shall include a fully configurable dot-matrix display element with a minimum pixel resolution of 168 x 132 to display operation, alarm, configuration, and graphical data logger information. Provision shall be made to upload a different language without removal of any covers or using specialized tools not provided as standard with the actuator. Data logger graphical displays should as a minimum be able to display log and trend graphs on the local LCD for the following: Torque versus Position Number of starts per hour Dwell time Average temperature 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 6 The main display shall be capable of indicating 4 different home-screens of the following configuration: Position and status Position and torque (analog) Position and torque (digital) Position and demand (positioning) Provision shall be made for the addition of an optional environment cover to protect the display for high levels of UV radiation or abrasive materials. The local controls and display shall be rotatable through increments of 90 degrees to suit valve and actuator orientation. INTEGRAL STARTER AND TRANSFORMER The reversing starter, control transformer and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator, suitably housed to prevent breathing and condensation. The starter shall be suitable for 60 starts per hour and of rating appropriate to motor size. The controls supply transformer shall be fed from two of the incoming three phases and incorporate overload protection. It shall have the necessary tapping and be adequately rated to provide power for the following functions: Energizing of the contactor coils 24V DC or 110V AC output for remote controls (maximum 5W/VA) Supply for all the internal electrical circuits REMOTE CONTROL FACILITIES The necessary control, wiring, and terminals shall be provided integral to the actuator enclosure. Open and close external interlocks shall be made available to inhibit local and remote valve opening/closing control. It shall be possible to configure the interlocks to be active in remote control only. Remote control signals fed from an internal 24V DC (or 110V AC) supply and/or from an external supply between 20V and 60 V DC or 40V and 120 V AC, to be suitable for any one or more of the following methods of control: Open, Close, and Stop Control Open and Close maintained or “push to run” (inching) control Overriding Emergency Shut-down to close (or open) valve from a normally closed or open contact. Two-wire control, energize to close (or open), de-energize to open (or close) Additionally provision shall be made for a separate ‘drive enable’ input to prevent any unwanted electrical operation. It shall be possible to reverse valve travel without the necessity of stopping the actuator. The motor starter shall be protected from excessive current surges during rapid travel reversal. The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to 2 kV. 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 7 Provision shall be made for operation by distributed control system utilizing the following network systems: Profibus Modbus Foundation Fieldbus HART MONITORING FACILITIES Facilities shall be provided for monitoring actuator operation and availability as follows: Actuator text display indication of the following status/alarms: Closed limit, open limit, moving open, moving closed, stopped Torque trip closing, torque trip opening, stalled ESD active, interlock drive Thermostat trip, phase lost, 24V supply lost, local control failure Configuration error, Position sensor failure, torque sensor failure Battery low, power loss inhibit Integral data logger to record and store the following operational data: Opening last/average torque against position Closing last/average torque against position Total open/close operations Maximum recorded opening and closing torque values Event recorder logging operational conditions (valve, control, and actuator) The data logger shall record relevant time and date information for stored data. Data logger data shall be accessed via non-intrusive wireless communication and data displayed on the local LCD. Sufficient standard intrinsically safe tools shall be provided for downloading data logger and actuator configuration files from the actuators and subsequent uploading to a PC. The actuator manufacturer shall supply PC software to enable data logger files to be viewed and analyzed. WIRING AND TERMINATION Internal wiring shall be tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. The terminals shall be embedded in a terminal block of high tracking resistance compound. The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal and shall be provided with a minimum of 3 threaded cable entries with provision for an additional 5 extra conduit entries. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between components are not acceptable. A durable terminal identification card showing a plan of terminals shall be provided attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating: Serial number External voltage values 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 8 Wiring diagram number Terminal layout The code card shall be suitable for the CONTRACTOR to inscribe cable core identification alongside terminal numbers. COMMISSIONING KIT Each actuator shall be supplied with a start-up kit comprising installation instruction manual, electrical wiring diagram, and cover seals to make good any site losses during commissioning period. In addition, sufficient actuator commissioning tools shall be supplied to enable actuator set-up and adjustment during valve/actuator testing and site installation commissioning. PERFORMANCE AND TEST CERTIFICATE Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied with additional cost to the OWNER. The test equipment should simulate a typical valve load, and the following parameters should be recorded: Current at maximum torque setting Torque at maximum torque setting Flash test voltage Actuator output speed or operating time In addition, the test certificate should record details of specification such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic and second stage gearing if provided, drive closing direction, wiring diagram number. Table 40 92 57 – 1 Actuator Schedule Valve ID Location Service Valve Type Max Pressure/Max Flowrate Motor Type Open/Close Speed (seconds) V-1 Well House Pump to Waste Butterfly 25 psi/ 1,500 gpm AC Reversing 120/120 V-2 Well House Pump to System Butterfly 25 psi/ 1,500 gpm AC Reversing 120/120 MANUFACTURER, OR APPROVED EQUAL: Limitorque AUMA Actuators SQ Rotork IQTM PART 3 EXECUTION 06/2024 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS 178.24.200 PAGE 40 92 57 - 9 INSTALLATION Electric motor valve actuators shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Actuators shall be located to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance without obstructing walkways. SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER Field Adjustments: Field representatives of valves with electric motor actuators shall adjust actuator controls and limit switches in the field for the required function. Inspection, Start-up, and Field Adjustment: The manufacturer shall furnish an authorized representative who shall visit the site and witness the following: Installation of the equipment – not less than 2 hours Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment – not less the 2 hours Start-up and field testing for proper installation – not less than 2 hours Instruction of OWNER’s Personnel: The authorized representative shall visit the site for not less than 4 hours to instruct the OWNER’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment including step by step troubleshooting procedures with necessary test equipment. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 06/2024 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 46 31 11 - 1 SECTION 46 31 11 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This Section covers the work necessary to install a ready to use and tested variable flow rate chlorination system. CONTRACTOR shall supply and install all equipment defined herein, and shall provide all other components required for a complete and functional system. All equipment for the chlorination system shall be Wallace and Tiernan, or approved equal. RELATED WORK Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to: Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances REFERENCES AND STANDARDS Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract: AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless B 88 Seamless Copper Water Tube D 1784 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds D 1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 D 1998 Standard Specifications for Upright Storage Tanks D 2466 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings, Schedule 40 D 2564 Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings F 411 Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) C 800 Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings C 900 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. (100mm) Through 12 In. (300 mm), for Waster Distribution. C 901 Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, ½ In. (13 mm)Through 3 In. (76 mm), for Water Service. 06/2024 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 46 31 11 - 2 CHLORINE INSTITUTE (CI) CI-01 The Chlorine Manual CI Pamphlet 6 - Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO) INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC) INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC) SUBMITTALS Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit cut sheets for all equipment, piping, fittings, etc. Shop drawing showing proposed layout with dimensions of the proposed chlorination system piping and equipment. Submit sizing calculations for ejector and injection quill. Submit shop drawing for cylinder storage rack construction. Submit operation and maintenance manuals for all chlorination equipment. WARRANTY Manufacturer shall provide to OWNER written guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year for all equipment utilized. DELIVERY AND STORAGE All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. PART 2 PRODUCTS GAS CHLORINATOR SYSTEM CONTRACTOR shall install a vacuum operated solution feed and automatic flow proportioning, chlorination system. All required equipment shall be furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR. The system will utilize 150 lb. cylinders. Equipment shall be Evoqua / Wallace & Tiernan S10K Sonic Chlorinator or approved equal. Automatic switchover chlorinators shall be vacuum operated solution feed and shall automatically switch the chlorine supply from an empty cylinder to a full cylinder. The system shall have automatic reset and shall not permit return to the initial source until the second source is empty. The chlorinator shall have a maximum capacity of 30 pounds of chlorine feed per day and shall have a gas flow meter capable of 30 pounds of chlorine feed per day. 06/2024 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 46 31 11 - 3 The system shall consist of the following: Two (2) vacuum regulators with automatic switchover module and 5-inch rotameter, one (1) gas flow rotameter with a rate valve, one (1) gas flow proportioning valve with controller, one (1) ejector/diffuser assemblies, one (1) dual chlorine scale, and one (1) loss of vacuum switch. Other equipment required include: 1. One (1) chlorine booster pump with all appurtenant valves, piping, tubing and vents. 2. Standard equipment furnished with the chlorinator including spare parts, lead gaskets, clamps, multi-purpose wrench and adapters. The equipment and piping layout indicated on the Contract Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. The alignment of piping and the arrangement of equipment may be varied with approval from ENGINEER from that indicated on the Contract Drawings to suit the equipment furnished, without additional cost to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER complete detailed drawings of the proposed installation, following the manufacturer's recommendations, in adequate time for proper sleeving and conduit work involved with the building structure. CONTRACTOR shall furnish chlorine needed for testing and adjustment of the equipment. VACUUM SWITCH Remote mounted loss of vacuum switch shall be W&T model W3T99114. EJECTOR ASSEMBLY The back-pressure from the discharge line is 7 psi. Ejectors shall be 30 ppd type rated for 50 psi working pressure. The ejector shall be manufactured from high impact plastic. The ejector shall be Wallace & Tiernan 3/4-inch fixed throat anti-siphon injector model 99D, or approved equal. CYLINDER SCALES Scales shall be capable of holding 150 lbs cylinders. Platforms shall be corrosion resistant and have a low profile. Each platform shall include an electronic stainless steel load cell with an output of a 4-20 mA signal. Provide with wall mounted chaining bracket. Scales shall be Force Flow Model DR150-2 or approved equal. Electronic Scale Indicator shall be capable of monitoring two scales. The Indicator shall be Solo G2 or approved equal. The indicator shall include 2 relays. INJECTION QUILL Injection quill shall be a retractable, spring-loaded ball check valve type. Process connection size shall be 3/4-inch with 1/2-inch inlet connection and 3/8-inch solution tube. Valve material shall be stainless steel and solution tube shall be Stainless Steel 316. Insertion length shall be 4-inches with standard tip. Check valve seals shall be Viton. Injection quill shall EB-145 w/ SAF-T-SEAL by Saf-T-Flo, or approved equal. 06/2024 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 46 31 11 - 4 CHLORINE BOOSTER PUMP CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the chlorine booster pump as shown on the Contract Drawings. Pump shall be equipped with a minimum 3/4 HP, 208-230/460 V, three phase, 60 hertz, 3600 rpm, TEFC motor with a 1.15 service factor. The pump shall be rated to 100 psi and have a design flow of 2 gpm at a TDH of 100 feet. Pump base, head, flanges, and all parts shall be stainless steel fitted construction, furnished with case wearing ring and mechanical seal, and shall be NSF 61 certified. The pump shall be as manufactured by Model CR 1s-4 by Grundfos, or approved equal. WATER SUPPLY LINE CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the water supply line as shown on the Contract Drawings including all valves, PVC pipe, stainless steel pipe, HDPE pipe, tubing, ball corp stops, couplings, and any other accessories necessary to have a complete and ready to use system. PVC pipe shall be Schedule 80 or 120 as noted. PVC BALL VALVES PVC ball valves for the chlorination solution piping shall be Spears Industrial Grade Sealed Unit with PTFE ball seats, EPDM O-rings, and high impact handle. Valves shall be full port rated for water to 235 psi. PIPING, PRESSURE HOSE, AND TUBING Piping, pressure hose, and tubing shall be suitable to handle the pressure and chlorine solution carried as recommended by the manufacturer. Piping and fittings shall be PVC and stainless steel as noted on the Contract Drawings. PVC pipe shall be Schedule 80. Stainless steel pipe shall be 316 standard wall with stainless steel fittings as noted on the Contract Drawings. The pressure hose shall be NSF 61 certified, reinforced with 316 stainless steel ends, and be rated for a minimum of 500 psi. CHLORINE CYLINDER RACKS AND SAFETY CABINETS Chlorine Cylinder Racks shall be powder coated. Units shall meet or exceed the requirements for UFC, NFPA, CGA, and OSHA, as well as Seismic Zone 4 requirements. Chlorine cylinder racks shall be Justrite Model 35288 (2 cylinder storage) or approved equal. SAFETY EQUIPMENT No Safety Equipment required. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION SIGNS CONTRACTOR shall furnish hazardous material identification signs on the exterior of all doors leading into the Chlorine Room: NFPA 704 Diamond Placard: 06/2024 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 46 31 11 - 5 a. Health Hazard (Blue): 4 b. Fire Hazard (Red): 0 c. Reactive Hazard (Yellow): 0 d. Specific Hazard (White): OX For outdoor applications, signs shall be a. Sign Dimension: 10” x 14” b. Manufacturer: Northern Safety and Industrial, or approved equal. c. Material: 0.118” thick outer aluminum with a solid thermoplastic Dura-AlumaLite as manufactured by Northern Safety and Industrial, or approved equal. d. Model: “Danger Chlorine” model #231- 29843 CONTRACTOR shall furnish hazardous material identification signs inside the Chlorine Room: For indoor applications, signs shall be: a. Sign Dimension: 10” x 14” b. Manufacturer: Northern Safety and Industrial, or approved equal. c. Material: 0.060” thick polycarbonate material with overlaminate Dura-Plastic as manufactured by Northern Safety and Industrial, or approved equal. d. Model: “Keep All Cylinders Chained” model #231-30333 “Notice – Empty Cylinders” model #231-29870 “Notice – Full Cylinders” model #231-29871 VENTS Tubing vents shall extend to the outside of structures and be turned down and be equipped with a #14 mesh non-corrodible screen. Intake vents shall be motor operated and have #14 mesh screens. MULTI-POINT TOXIC GAS DETECTION SYSTEM A multi-point gas detector shall be supplied for monitoring the concentration of Chlorine in the Pump Room and Chlorine Room. The system shall consist of a NEMA 4X alarm module and two remote mounted gas sensor/transmitter for chlorine gas. Each sensor/transmitter shall provide the gas measurement function for the system. The sensor/transmitters shall consist of a stable electrochemical gas sensor that shall generate a signal linearly proportional to gas concentration. The entire assembly shall be coated to minimize RFI interference. Each sensor/transmitter shall be supplied with an electrochemical gas generator closely coupled to the sensor which shall automatically generate a small concentration of gas every 24 hours to verify sensor operation. During the verification test, alarm relays shall be inhibited. A battery backup module shall be supplied to provide standby power to the gas detector. The battery backup module shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure and shall be suitable for operating the detector for at least 4 hours. Two programmable alarm set points shall be provided for warning personnel of differing levels of leakage. Gas leak alarms shall be indicated by flashing LED indicators on the alarm receiver and activation of the SCADA system. The concentration of the gas shall 06/2024 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 46 31 11 - 6 be displayed directly in PPM units. Three alarm relays shall be provided for external alarming functions. Each alarm relay shall be independently assignable to either the low or the high alarm set point, and shall be provided on each receiver to indicate the loss of signal from the sensor/transmitter, or to alarm the loss of sensitivity of the gas sensor. Each receiver shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA output signal proportional to gas concentration, and shall also contain remote reset input terminals to allow alarm acknowledge from a remote location. The gas detection system shall be Wallace & Tiernan Acutec 35 Gas Detection System, ATI Series A14, or approved equal. System shall include a flashing beacon light with outside wall mounted bracket, to warn operator from entering room. Light shall be Edwards Signaling & Security System Series 50 or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION All equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers’ directions. Weight of valves, hoses and equipment must not be carried by the fittings themselves. Proper support for all equipment shall be provided. Chlorination injection points shall have anti-siphon valves and diffuser piping as required mounted horizontally. Vents shall extend to the outside of structure and be turned down and be equipped with a non-corrodible screen. The chlorine detector sensor shall be mounted not higher than 2 feet 6 inches above the lowest floor elevation and at least 4 feet away from the exhaust fans. The chlorine equipment appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with CI-01 and CI Pamphlet 6 so as to provide a complete and integrated system in accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer. The Chlorine ejector shall be placed on the piping so as to protect it from damage and installed per manufacturer’s instruction. START-UP AND TESTING CONTRACTOR and Equipment Supplier (ES) shall verify that structures, equipment, pumps and motors are compatible for an efficient system. CONTRACTOR and ES shall make equipment adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition. CONTRACTOR and ES shall test the chlorination feed systems for proper operation in the presence of OWNER and ENGINEER. The ES shall furnish all testing equipment and devices required. 06/2024 GAS CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 178.24.200 PAGE 46 31 11 - 7 If chlorination feed systems fail to meet any of the specified performance requirements, CONTRACTOR and/or ES shall modify and/or replace defective equipment until it meets specified requirements. All piping shall be tested hydrostatically for leaks. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted. - END OF SECTION - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PART 5 APPENDIX THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PART 6 DRAWINGS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK